Product Manual LA110

OPERATION MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND
LA-110
Advanced Integrated Access Device
Version 3.5
The Access Company

LA-110
Advanced Integrated Access Device
Version 3.5
Installation and Operation Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD").
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RAD Data Communications.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the LA-110 and
any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under
international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.
The LA-110 product name is owned by RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is
granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by
you with respect to such trademark. The RAD name, logo, logotype, and the terms EtherAccess,
TDMoIP and TDMoIP Driven, and the product names Optimux and IPmux, are registered
trademarks of RAD Data Communications Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective holders.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the
LA-110. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute,
license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the LA-110, based
on or derived in any way from the LA-110. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the
termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the LA-110 package and shall continue until
terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof.
Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the LA-110 and all copies and
portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.
International Headquarters North America Headquarters

RAD Data Communications Ltd. RAD Data Communications Inc.
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street 900 Corporate Drive

Tel Aviv 69719, Israel Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel: 972-3-6458181 Tel: (201) 5291100, Toll free: 1-800-4447234
Fax: 972-3-6498250, 6474436 Fax: (201) 5295777
E-mail: market@rad.com E-mail: market@rad.com
19992011 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 144-200-07/11

Limited Warranty
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the LA-110 to be delivered hereunder shall
be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of
twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by
reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect,
RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement
part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at
the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party
shall pay one-way shipping costs.
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has
been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or
modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless
such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for
consequential damages.
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not
limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the
manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the LA-110, and in no event shall
RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the LA-110.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes
relating to LA-110 and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in
connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the LA-110 are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind. RAD
disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD
shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates
during the warranty period under this Agreement.
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any
claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the LA-110 shall not
exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the LA-110. In no event shall RAD be liable for
any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if RAD
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Israel.
Product Disposal
To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste
equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is
required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal
waste at the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the units use,
customers should provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form
of environmentally conscientious disposal.
General Safety Instructions
The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of
telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the
manual.
Safety Symbols
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates potential
safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service
personnel.
Warning
Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the
product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.
Protective ground: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building
protective ground bus.
Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label with the
laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical
transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.
Warning Please observe the following precautions:
Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact
and is connected to the transmitter.
Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look
straight at the laser beam.
The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.
Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!
In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are
alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant
transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that
comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of
this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment,
maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs
should be performed by either the operator or the user.
Handling Energized Products
General Safety Practices

Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages
may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF
position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually
not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist.
Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove
jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.
Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use.
Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective ground
terminal. If a ground lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective
ground at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment
should be mounted only in grounded racks and cabinets.
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect
telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are
disconnected before disconnecting the ground.
Some products may have panels secured by thumbscrews with a slotted head. These panels may
cover hazardous circuits or parts, such as power supplies. These thumbscrews should therefore
always be tightened securely with a screwdriver after both initial installation and subsequent
access to the panels.
Connecting AC Mains
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation
should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A
for USA and Canada).
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power
switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be
readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or
emergency switch is installed in the building installation.
In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles
simultaneously.
Connecting DC Power
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference
to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.
Due to the high current capability of DC power systems, care should be taken when connecting
the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.
Make sure that the DC power supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the
installation complies with the local codes.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A (20A for USA and Canada). The circuit breaker in the building installation
should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A (40A
for USA and Canada).
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Locate
the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF
position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the
corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit
breaker back to the ON position.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated
in the building installation.
If the DC power supply is floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.
Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables

Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.
The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port
differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.
Ports Safety Status
V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, X.21, SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage:
10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1, Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually
E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.
ISDN, Analog voice E&M
xDSL (without feeding voltage), TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:
Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1 Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the
limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from
telecommunications networks are possible.
FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber) TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are not possible. These
ports are not permitted to be directly connected to
external telephone and data lines.
FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:
(with feeding voltage), U-Interface Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
ISDN limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are possible.
Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance
of a qualified safety engineer.
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables.
Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both
ends. The grounding and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk,
there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment
and the mating connectors.
Caution To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line
cords.
Attention Pour rduire les risques sincendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de
tlcommunications 26 AWG ou de section suprieure.
Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In
such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of
major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the
equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity
against disturbances.
A good ground connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to
remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an
external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the ground bus using braided wire as short as
possible.
The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially
for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be
installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.
Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time
configuration.
The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines
is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal
conversion loss (LCL).
Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary
protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building
installation.
The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).
However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with
plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines.
Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching ground or wear an ESD preventive
wrist strap.
FCC-15 User Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Canadian Emission Requirements

This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulation.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel
brouilleur du Canada.
Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

Warning This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.
Avertissement Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement rsidentiel, cet
appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radiolectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut tre
demand lutilisateur de prendre les mesures appropries.
Achtung Das vorliegende Gert fllt unter die Funkstrgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohngebieten

knnen beim Betrieb dieses Gertes Rundfunkstrrungen auftreten, fr deren
Behebung der Benutzer verantwortlich ist.
Mise au rebut du produit
Franais
Afin de faciliter la rutilisation, le recyclage ainsi que d'autres formes de

rcupration d'quipement mis au rebut dans le cadre de la protection de
l'environnement, il est demand au propritaire de ce produit RAD de ne pas
mettre ce dernier au rebut en tant que dchet municipal non tri, une fois
que le produit est arriv en fin de cycle de vie. Le client devrait proposer des
solutions de rutilisation, de recyclage ou toute autre forme de mise au rebut
de cette unit dans un esprit de protection de l'environnement, lorsqu'il aura
fini de l'utiliser.
Instructions gnrales de scurit

Les instructions suivantes servent de guide gnral d'installation et d'opration scurises des
produits de tlcommunications. Des instructions supplmentaires sont ventuellement
indiques dans le manuel.
Symboles de scurit
Ce symbole peut apparaitre sur l'quipement ou dans le texte. Il indique des risques
potentiels de scurit pour l'oprateur ou le personnel de service, quant
l'opration du produit ou sa maintenance.
Avertissement
Danger de choc lectrique ! Evitez tout contact avec la surface marque tant que le
produit est sous tension ou connect des lignes externes de tlcommunications.
Mise la terre de protection : la cosse ou la borne marque devrait tre connecte

la prise de terre de protection du btiment.
Certains produits peuvent tre quips d'une diode laser. Dans de tels cas, une
Franais
tiquette indiquant la classe laser ainsi que d'autres avertissements, le cas chant,
sera jointe prs du transmetteur optique. Le symbole d'avertissement laser peut
aussi tre joint.
Avertissement
Veuillez observer les prcautions suivantes :
Avant la mise en marche de l'quipement, assurez-vous que le cble de fibre
optique est intact et qu'il est connect au transmetteur.
Ne tentez pas d'ajuster le courant de la commande laser.
N'utilisez pas des cbles ou connecteurs de fibre optique casss ou sans
terminaison et n'observez pas directement un rayon laser.
L'usage de priphriques optiques avec l'quipement augmentera le risque pour
les yeux.
L'usage de contrles, ajustages ou procdures autres que celles spcifies ici
pourrait rsulter en une dangereuse exposition aux radiations.
ATTENTION : Le rayon laser peut tre invisible !
Les utilisateurs pourront, dans certains cas, insrer leurs propres metteurs-rcepteurs Laser SFP
dans le produit. Les utilisateurs sont avertis que RAD ne pourra pas tre tenue responsable de
tout dommage pouvant rsulter de l'utilisation d'metteurs-rcepteurs non conformes. Plus
particulirement, les utilisateurs sont avertis de n'utiliser que des produits approuvs par
l'agence et conformes la rglementation locale de scurit laser pour les produits laser de
classe 1.
Respectez toujours les prcautions standards de scurit durant l'installation, l'opration et la
maintenance de ce produit. Seul le personnel de service qualifi et autoris devrait effectuer
l'ajustage, la maintenance ou les rparations de ce produit. Aucune opration d'installation,
d'ajustage, de maintenance ou de rparation ne devrait tre effectue par l'oprateur ou
l'utilisateur.
Manipuler des produits sous tension
Rgles gnrales de scurit

Ne pas toucher ou altrer l'alimentation en courant lorsque le cble d'alimentation est branch.
Des tensions de lignes peuvent tre prsentes dans certains produits, mme lorsque le
commutateur (s'il est install) est en position OFF ou si le fusible est rompu. Pour les produits
aliments par CC, les niveaux de tension ne sont gnralement pas dangereux mais des risques
de courant peuvent toujours exister.
Avant de travailler sur un quipement connect aux lignes de tension ou de tlcommunications,
retirez vos bijoux ou tout autre objet mtallique pouvant venir en contact avec les pices sous
tension.
Sauf s'il en est autrement indiqu, tous les produits sont destins tre mis la terre durant
l'usage normal. La mise la terre est fournie par la connexion de la fiche principale une prise
murale quipe d'une borne protectrice de mise la terre. Si une cosse de mise la terre est
fournie avec le produit, elle devrait tre connecte tout moment une mise la terre de
protection par un conducteur de diamtre 18 AWG ou plus. L'quipement mont en chssis ne
devrait tre mont que sur des chssis et dans des armoires mises la terre.
Branchez toujours la mise la terre en premier et dbranchez-la en dernier. Ne branchez pas des
cbles de tlcommunications un quipement qui n'est pas mis la terre. Assurez-vous que
tous les autres cbles sont dbranchs avant de dconnecter la mise la terre.
Connexion au courant du secteur
Franais
Assurez-vous que l'installation lectrique est conforme la rglementation locale.

Branchez toujours la fiche de secteur une prise murale quipe d'une borne protectrice de mise
la terre.
La capacit maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A (20A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du
btiment devrait avoir une capacit leve de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de
court-circuit dpassant 35A (40A aux Etats-Unis et Canada).
Branchez toujours le cble d'alimentation en premier l'quipement puis la prise murale. Si un
commutateur est fourni avec l'quipement, fixez-le en position OFF. Si le cble d'alimentation ne
peut pas tre facilement dbranch en cas d'urgence, assurez-vous qu'un coupe-circuit ou un
disjoncteur d'urgence facilement accessible est install dans l'installation du btiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait dconnecter simultanment les deux ples si le systme de distribution de
courant est de type IT.
Connexion d'alimentation CC
Sauf s'il en est autrement spcifi dans le manuel, l'entre CC de l'quipement est flottante par
rapport la mise la terre. Tout ple doit tre mis la terre en externe.
A cause de la capacit de courant des systmes alimentation CC, des prcautions devraient
tre prises lors de la connexion de l'alimentation CC pour viter des courts-circuits et des risques
d'incendie.
Assurez-vous que l'alimentation CC est isole de toute source de courant CA (secteur) et que
l'installation est conforme la rglementation locale.
La capacit maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A (20A aux Etats-Unis et Canada). Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du
btiment devrait avoir une capacit leve de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de
court-circuit dpassant 35A (40A aux Etats-Unis et Canada).
Avant la connexion des cbles d'alimentation en courant CC, assurez-vous que le circuit CC n'est
pas sous tension. Localisez le coupe-circuit dans le tableau desservant l'quipement et fixez-le
en position OFF. Lors de la connexion de cbles d'alimentation CC, connectez d'abord le
conducteur de mise la terre la borne correspondante, puis le ple positif et en dernier, le
ple ngatif. Remettez le coupe-circuit en position ON.
Un disjoncteur facilement accessible, adapt et approuv devrait tre intgr l'installation du
btiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait dconnecter simultanment les deux ples si l'alimentation en courant CC
est flottante.
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Manufacturer's Address: 24 Raoul Wallenberg St.
Tel Aviv 69719
Israel
Declares that the product:
Product Name: LA-110
Conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):
EMC EN 55022:2006 + Information technology equipment Radio disturbance

A1:2007 characteristics Limits and methods of measurement.
EN 55024:1998 + Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics
A1:2001, A2:2003 Limits and methods of measurement.
EN 61000-3-2:2006 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2: Limits -
Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input
current 16A per phase)
EN 61000-3-3:2008 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3: Limits -
Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker
in public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment with
rated current 16A per phase and not subject to conditional
connection.
Safety EN 60950-1:2006 + Information technology equipment Safety Part 1:
A11:2009 General requirements.
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and the R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC for wired equipment. The
product was tested in a typical configuration.
Tel Aviv, 14 June 2011
Nathaniel Shomroni
Approvals Coordinator
European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Str. 28-30, 85521 Ottobrunn-Riemerling, Germany
Glossary
Address A coded representation of the origin or destination of data.
Analog A continuous wave or signal (such as human voice).
AWG The American Wire Gauge System, which specifies wire width.
Balanced A transmission line in which voltages on the two conductors are

equal in magnitude, but opposite in polarity, with respect to
ground.
Bus A transmission path or channel. A bus is typically an electrical

connection with one or more conductors, where all attached
devices receive all transmissions at the same time.
Carrier A continuous signal at a fixed frequency that is capable of being

modulated with a second (information carrying) signal.
Channel A path for electrical transmission between two or more points.

Also called a link, line, circuit or facility.
Data Information represented in digital form, including voice, text,

facsimile and video.
Digital The binary (1 or 0) output of a computer or terminal. In data

communications, an alternating, non-continuous (pulsating) signal.
DSL (Digital Subscriber A family of technologies for bringing broadband information (data
Line) and voice) to residential and business customers over the copper
wires of a local telephone network. DSL technology provides
extended range digital data transmission. Data rates (download
and upload speeds) vary according to the distance from the
central office, DSL technology, line conditions, and the service
level implemented. Common DSL technologies include ADSL, VDSL,
SHDSL, and G.SHDSL.bis.
E3 The European standard for high speed digital transmission,

operating at 34 Mbps.
Flow Control A congestion control mechanism that results in an ATM system

implementing flow control.
FXO (Foreign Exchange A voice interface, emulating a PBX extension, as it appears to the
Office) CO (Central Office) for connecting a PBX extension to a
multiplexer.
FXS (Foreign Exchange A voice interface, emulating the extension interface of a PBX (or
Subscriber) subscriber interface of a CO) for connecting a regular telephone
set to a multiplexer.
Interface A shared boundary, defined by common physical interconnection

characteristics, signal characteristics, and meanings of exchanged
signals.
Laser A device that transmits an extremely narrow and coherent beam
of electromagnetic energy in the visible light spectrum. Used as a
light source for fiber optic transmission (generally more expensive,
shorter lived, single mode only, for greater distances than LED).
Multiplexer At one end of a communications link, a device that combines

several lower speed transmission channels into a single high speed
channel. A multiplexer at the other end reverses the process.
Sometimes called a mux. See Bit Interleaving/Multiplexing.
Network (1) An interconnected group of nodes. (2) A series of points,

nodes, or stations connected by communications channels; the
collection of equipment through which connections are made
between data stations.
Port The physical interface to a computer or multiplexer, for connection

of terminals and modems.
Single Mode Describing an optical wave-guide or fiber that is designed to

propagate light of only a single wavelength (typically 5-10 microns
in diameter).
T1 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mbps used in

North America. Typically channelized into 24 DS0s, each capable of
carrying a single voice conversation or data stream. Uses two pairs
of twisted pair wires.
Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 1-1
Purpose .................................................................................................................. 1-1
WAN Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 1-1
Local Interfaces ...................................................................................................... 1-2
Versions ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Pseudowire (PW) Functionality ................................................................................ 1-6
Management .......................................................................................................... 1-7
Alarm Collection ...................................................................................................... 1-8
Diagnostics and Statistics ....................................................................................... 1-9
1.2 Typical Applications .................................................................................................. 1-10
LAN Services ......................................................................................................... 1-11
Leased Line Services over ATM .............................................................................. 1-12
Frame Relay Support over ATM.............................................................................. 1-15
VoDSL over LES ..................................................................................................... 1-16
Mutiservice over IMA ............................................................................................. 1-18
1.3 Physical Description ................................................................................................. 1-19
1.4 Functional Description.............................................................................................. 1-21
Network Interface Subsystem ............................................................................... 1-22
ATM Processor ...................................................................................................... 1-25
LAN Interface........................................................................................................ 1-26
Ethernet Payload Processor................................................................................... 1-26
Data Port Interface ............................................................................................... 1-32
Data Port Payload Processor ................................................................................. 1-33
FXS User Ports ...................................................................................................... 1-35
ISDN User Port ...................................................................................................... 1-35
E1 User Port ......................................................................................................... 1-36
T1 User Port ......................................................................................................... 1-39
Data over E1/T1 .................................................................................................... 1-39
DSP Option ........................................................................................................... 1-40
Timing .................................................................................................................. 1-40
Management Subsystem ....................................................................................... 1-42
Statistics Collection............................................................................................... 1-45
Test and Diagnostics Capabilities .......................................................................... 1-46
Alarms .................................................................................................................. 1-46
1.5 Technical Specifications............................................................................................ 1-47
ATM Features........................................................................................................ 1-47
Network Interfaces ............................................................................................... 1-47
User Interfaces ..................................................................................................... 1-49
General................................................................................................................. 1-52
Chapter 2. Installation and Setup

2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 2-1
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 2-2
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ..................................................... 2-2
2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites .......................................................................... 2-3
Physical Requirements ............................................................................................ 2-3
Power Requirements ............................................................................................... 2-3
Uplink and User Connections ................................................................................... 2-4
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 i

Table of Contents Installation and Operation Manual
Management Connections ....................................................................................... 2-5

Front and Rear Panel Clearance ............................................................................... 2-5
Ambient Requirements ........................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Package Contents ...................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Unpacking LA-110 ...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5 LA-110 Enclosures ..................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6 Connecting the Interface Cables ................................................................................. 2-8
Connecting Uplink ................................................................................................... 2-8
Connecting User Interfaces ..................................................................................... 2-8
Connecting a Terminal ............................................................................................ 2-9
Connecting LA-110 to Management Station or Telnet Host.................................... 2-10
2.7 Connecting the Power .............................................................................................. 2-10
Connecting the Internal Power Supply ................................................................... 2-10
Connecting the External Power Supply................................................................... 2-11
Chapter 3. Operation
3.1 Turning LA-110 On ..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Front Panel Indicators ................................................................................................ 3-1
WAN Interface Status Indications ............................................................................ 3-2
LAN Interface Status Indications.............................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Configuration Alternatives .......................................................................................... 3-3
Configuring LA-110 via Terminal .............................................................................. 3-3
Configuring LA-110 via Web Browsers ..................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Using Plug & Play ..................................................................................................... 3-10
Purpose ................................................................................................................ 3-10
When Plug & Play can be Used .............................................................................. 3-10
How Plug & Play is Started .................................................................................... 3-11
Preparations ......................................................................................................... 3-11
Procedure for Plug & Play ..................................................................................... 3-11
3.5 General Configuration Procedure .............................................................................. 3-11
3.6 Menu Structure ........................................................................................................ 3-13
3.7 Turning LA-110 Off .................................................................................................. 3-23
Chapter 4. Configuration
4.1 Configuration Sequence ............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Configuring LA-110 for Management .......................................................................... 4-2
Defining Logistic Information .................................................................................. 4-2
Configuring LA-110 Communities ............................................................................ 4-2
Adding a Network Management Station (NMS) ........................................................ 4-3
Masking Individual Alarms ....................................................................................... 4-5
Configuring the LA-110 Inband Management Parameters......................................... 4-6
Configuring the Management VCC Parameters ......................................................... 4-7
Configuring the Inband Management ILMI Address ................................................. 4-12
Configuring the LA-110 Host ................................................................................. 4-13
Configuring the Supervisory Port Interface ............................................................ 4-14
Configuring the Management Session Password .................................................... 4-16
4.3 Configuring System Parameters ................................................................................ 4-18
Configuring General System Parameters ................................................................ 4-18
Configuring the System Clock ................................................................................ 4-29
4.4 Configuring LA-110 at the Physical Layer .................................................................. 4-31
Configuring The Network Interface at the Physical Layer........................................ 4-31
Configuring the User Interface at the Physical Layer .............................................. 4-41
ii LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Configuring the Synchronous Data Port at the Physical Layer................................. 4-46

Configuring the LAN Interface at the Physical Layer ............................................... 4-49
4.5 Configuring LA-110 at the Logical Layer ................................................................... 4-50
Configuring ATM Interface at the Logical Layer ...................................................... 4-50
Configuring the IMA Interface................................................................................ 4-53
Configuring the User Interface at the Logical Layer ................................................ 4-57
Configuring the PSTN Parameters .......................................................................... 4-79
Configuring the Serial Data Interface at the Logical Layer ...................................... 4-85
Configuring the LAN Port at the Logical Layer ........................................................ 4-96
Configuring MPLS Parameters .............................................................................. 4-133
4.6 Configuring Multiservice over PSN Application ......................................................... 4-137
Configuring General Parameters .......................................................................... 4-137
Creating PW Connections .................................................................................... 4-138
4.7 Additional Tasks ..................................................................................................... 4-146
Displaying LA-110 Inventory................................................................................ 4-146
Setting the Date and Time .................................................................................. 4-148
Transferring Software and Configuration Files ..................................................... 4-149
Loading the Factory-Default Parameters ............................................................. 4-149
Rebooting LA-110............................................................................................... 4-149
Chapter 5. Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications

5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 5-1
Performing Common Tasks ...................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Providing TDM and Frame Relay Services over ATM ..................................................... 5-3
Selecting the System Clock...................................................................................... 5-3
Configuring the Network Interface .......................................................................... 5-3
Selecting the Adaptation Layer ............................................................................... 5-3
Configuring E1 Interface at the Physical Level .......................................................... 5-4
Configuring Bundle for TDM Service ......................................................................... 5-4
Configuring Bundle for Frame Relay Service ............................................................. 5-6
5.3 Transferring Synchronous Data (AAL1) over ATM ........................................................ 5-8
Selecting the System Clock...................................................................................... 5-8
Configuring the Network Interface .......................................................................... 5-9
Selecting the Adaptation Layer ............................................................................... 5-9
Configuring Data Port at the Physical Level.............................................................. 5-9
Adding the ATM Connection for AAL1 Service ........................................................ 5-10
5.4 Transferring Full E1 over AAL1 .................................................................................. 5-10
Selecting the System Clock.................................................................................... 5-11
Configuring the Network Interface ........................................................................ 5-11
Selecting the Adaptation Layer ............................................................................. 5-11
Configuring E1 Port at the Physical Level ............................................................... 5-12
Adding the ATM Connection for Unframed E1 Service ............................................ 5-12
5.5 Transferring PRI over AAL2 LES .............................................................................. 5-13
Selecting the Adaptation Layer and Application Identifier ...................................... 5-13
Configuring PRI at the Logical Level ....................................................................... 5-14
5.6 Transferring E1 UNI over SHDSL................................................................................ 5-15
Configuring E1 Port for Transparent UNI Application .............................................. 5-16
5.7 Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Bridging Mode)................................................. 5-16
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 iii


Configuring the QoS.............................................................................................. 5-17
Configuring the Bridge Parameters ........................................................................ 5-19
5.8 Providing Connection to an IP Network over ATM (Routing Mode) ............................. 5-21
Configuring the IP Interfaces ................................................................................. 5-22
Configuring the Default Gateway........................................................................... 5-23
Configuring the DHCP Server ................................................................................. 5-23
Configuring the Firewall ........................................................................................ 5-24
5.9 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over SHDSL IMA Link ..................................... 5-27
Configuring IMA Interface ...................................................................................... 5-27
Configuring E1 Port ............................................................................................... 5-29
Configuring Data Port ........................................................................................... 5-29
5.10 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over Packet Switched Network ...................... 5-29
Configuration Procedure Summary ........................................................................ 5-29
Selecting the Operation Mode ............................................................................... 5-30
Configuring the Host ............................................................................................. 5-31
Configuring E1 Service .......................................................................................... 5-31
Configuring Data Port ........................................................................................... 5-32
Configuring Bridge Interfaces ................................................................................ 5-34
Configuring MPLS Parameters ................................................................................ 5-35
Creating Pseudowire Connections ......................................................................... 5-36
Chapter 6. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

6.1 Monitoring the LA-110 Performance ........................................................................... 6-1
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the System Layer ........................................ 6-1
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the Physical Layer ....................................... 6-4
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the Logical Layer ....................................... 6-18
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the Application Layer ................................ 6-47
6.2 Diagnostic Tests....................................................................................................... 6-50
Running Physical Loopbacks .................................................................................. 6-50
Running OAM Loopbacks ....................................................................................... 6-55
Running an IMA Loopback ..................................................................................... 6-55
Running a Ping Test .............................................................................................. 6-56
6.3 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 6-57
Troubleshooting Using LA-110 Indications ............................................................. 6-57
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by ISDN Ports ............................... 6-59
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by FXS Ports ................................. 6-59
Troubleshooting Data and E1/T1 Ports .................................................................. 6-59
Troubleshooting LAN Services ............................................................................... 6-60
6.4 Frequently Asked Questions ..................................................................................... 6-60
6.5 Technical Support .................................................................................................... 6-62
Appendix A. Pinouts
Appendix B. Alarm Messages
Appendix C. Transferring Software and Configuration Files
iv LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Table of Contents
Appendix D. Database Initialization

Appendix E. Operating Environment
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 v

vi LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
Purpose
LA-110 is an advanced ATM Integrated Access Device (IAD) that provides voice,
data and LAN services over ATM or packet-switched networks for small and
medium-sized businesses.
The services supported by LA-110 include:
High-quality leased lines for analog voice or data
ISDN BRI or PRI access
High-speed data (serial and Frame Relay)
Ethernet with MAC bridge and IP router for LAN-to-LAN or Internet access.
This wide range of services provides maximum flexibility for service integration,
ease of use and scalability. Moreover, LA-110 uses cost-effective xDSL lines for
connection to the ATM or PSN network, offering long range over widely available
twisted wire pairs.
LA-110 is a compact unit in a stylized plastic case with low power consumption
that can easily fit on any desktop, however it can also be installed in standard
equipment racks.
WAN Interfaces
Physical Interfaces
LA-110 has one WAN (uplink) port, used to connect to the ATM network (this
port is often referred to as an uplink port). The WAN port can be ordered with
one of the following interfaces:
2-wire or 4-wire SHDSL interface in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.991.2
ADSL interface in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 (Annex A). The
interface can be configured to use either echo canceling or frequency division
multiplex (FDM). In addition, the ADSL interface can be configured to support
signal formats defined in additional standards and particular
implementations, for example, ANSI T1.413, etc.
E1 interface
IMA over 4 SHDSL.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Overview 1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction Installation and Operation Manual
ATM Network Interface

The ATM network interface provides an ATM user-network interface (UNI) per
ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1). The interface
supports the following ATM adaptation layers:
AAL1 used for transparent transport of serial data streams, and for circuit
emulation services (CES)
AAL2 used to provide ATM Forum Loop Emulation Services (LES), which
support PSTN and ISDN BRI and PRI access
AAL5 used for packet traffic (Frame Relay, Ethernet, IP).
The network port supports a wide range of ATM service categories (Classes of
Service CoS in ITU-T terminology): CBR, VBR, UBR and UBR+. LA-110 supports
per-connection user-configurable traffic shaping and traffic contract enforcing,
for improved QoS and efficient utilization of the ATM uplink bandwidth.
Local Interfaces
LA-110 be equipped with up to three local ports (see also the Versions section
below):
LAN port
Data port (ordering option)
User port (ordering option).
The types and main characteristics of the local interfaces available for these
LA-110 ports are described below.
LAN Port
The LAN port has an Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface. The port operating rate
(10 or 100 Mbps) and operating mode (half or full duplex) can be determined by
autonegotiation or by manual configuration. Automatic MDIX allows using straight
or crossed cables for the LAN connection. Flow control is performed according to
IEEE 802.3x.
Note
The automatic MDIX is supported by the LA-110 units with the data and E1
interfaces, if the autonegotiation is enabled on the LAN port.
The user can configure the LAN port to serve either as a MAC bridge or IP router:
MAC Bridge. The MAC bridge can be configured with up to eight WAN ports
(each using its own PVC). It can provide access-only functionality (between
LAN and WAN), or full bridge functionality (LAN access and switching among
the WAN ports). The MAC bridge accepts static MAC addresses.
In the MAC bridge mode, LA-110 can be configured to transfer PPP over
Ethernet (PPPoE) traffic.
VLAN Handling. LA-110 bridge operation supports VLAN-unaware and
VLAN-aware modes. One bridge port is configured on the Ethernet side and
up to eight ports on the ATM side. LA-110 supports up to eight VCs that can
be assigned to the bridge ports (up to 3 VCs per bridge port in order to
1-2 Overview LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
handle priority-tagged frames). Depending on the LA-110 position in the

network, the bridge can be configured to permit or prohibit VC to VC traffic.
In the VLAN-unaware mode, LA-110 forwards packets according to their
MAC address only. VLAN tags are ignored and remain intact when passing
from the bridge.
In the VLAN-aware mode, the LA-110 bridge learns, floods and forwards
packets according to the MAC and VID values. The packets can be
forwarded only to the bridge ports that are members of the packets VID
or were appended to it during the ingress process.
IP Router. The IP router supports static routing and user-selectable routing
protocols (RIP1 and/or RIP2). The user can configure 1 or 2 IP ports on the
LAN side (sharing the physical LAN port), and up to eight WAN ports (each
using its own PVC). The user can also configure a separate host IP port for
router management, for example for RIP updates.
The routing can also be performed according to the user-defined routing
maps. When enabled, the Policy Based Routing (PBR) provides a more flexible
mechanism for routing packets, complementing the existing methods
provided by routing protocols. The routing can be performed according to the
source and destination IPs, protocol type, frame length, etc.
In addition to routing functions, the IP router can also provide
user-configurable DHCP relay or server services, and various types of address
translation services (NAT/NAPT and PAT).
In the IP router mode, the LA-110 can be configured to use encapsulation per
RFC2684 (which replaces RFC1483), or transfer the traffic using PPP over ATM
(PPPoA). The user can select the PPP transport method (VC multiplexing or
LLC encapsulation) per RFC2364. For PPP traffic, LA-110 supports PAP and
CHAP client authentication.
DNS Relay
LA-110 can be activated as a DNS relay. The hosts on the Local LAN initiate
DNS requests to the LA-110, and then LA-110 forwards the DNS requests
toward the DNS server (the address of the DNS server is given by the PPP
mechanism). The reply from the DNS server is forwarded to the host by
LA-110.
Firewall
In order to provide a security environment to the network, LA-110 has a built-in
firewall that tracks and controls the flow of the communication.
QoS
LA-110 can be configured to classify outgoing WAN traffic into three traffic
classes (queues). The user employs traffic classification to define what data is
delivered and what data is dropped if the LAN traffic exceeds the uplink capacity.
Classification is performed according 802.1p, IP precedence, ToS or DSCP. Once
the traffic classes are defined, they can be mapped using the ATM CoS or WFQ
mechanism.

Optional Data Port

The data port is a synchronous serial port with DCE interface. The interface type
is X.21 or V.35. The port can be configured to operate at rates of n64 kbps in
the range of 64 to 2048 kbps.
The service type is user-configurable:
Transparent transmission of serial data stream
Frame Relay service for connection to Frame Relay equipment. Up to
eight DLCIs are supported. The user can select between service interworking
per FRF.8 and network interworking per FRF.5.
Pseudowire mode for leased line emulation over IP, ATM or xDSL.
Optional User Port

The optional user port can be ordered with one of the following configurations:
Voice Interfaces. These interfaces support voice-over-DSL (VoDSL)
applications. You can order one of the following voice interfaces:
Four analog voice/fax ports with FXS interfaces (POTS service). Each FXS
interface provides feed current, on-hook/off-hook detection and ringing
to the users phone set. The FXS ports include near-end echo canceling.
Four ISDN S0 BRI ports for connection to users ISDN terminals (service).
Each port carries two payload (B) channels, for a total of 8 payload
channels. The interface type, NT or TE, is selectable. NT interfaces provide
phantom feed to users terminals.
Voice is transmitted using toll-quality 64 kbps PCM modulation per ITU-T Rec.
G.711, with user-selected companding law (A-law or -law). To reduce the
uplink bandwidth needed for voice transmission, voice compression using
32 kbps ADPCM encoding per ITU-T Rec. G.726 can be ordered.
In addition to PCM/ADPCM conversion, the ADPCM digital signal processor also
performs echo canceling for ISDN channels; if ADPCM is not used, echo
canceling for ISDN channels can be separately ordered.
The voice channels enable full-service access to PSTN or private networks via
voice gateways supporting the ATM Forum Loop Emulation Services (LES)
standard. AF-VMOA-0145.000. LA-110 also supports the Emulated Loop
Control Protocol (ELCP), which enables the voice gateway to remotely
configure the voice channels operational profile.
For compatibility with national implementations, the PSTN signaling
characteristics are user-selectable.
E1 (2048 kbps) port. LA-110 can be equipped with one E1 port complying
with ITU-T Rec. G.703. Each port has two interfaces, 120 balanced and 75
unbalanced.
The operating mode of this port can be configured for a wide range of
applications. The supported modes depend on the user-selected AAL:
AAL1: G732N or G732S framed service, with or without support for CRC-4
in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.706. When G732S framing is used, the
E1 port supports channel-associated signaling (CAS). CAS enables

connection to digital PBXs and other TDM equipment (multiplexers, digital

cross-connect (DXC) switches, etc.).
When using the framed mode, the E1 signal is transported using the ATM
Circuit Emulation Service (CES) Version 2.0, AF-VTOA-0078.000. The
LA-110 supports two CES modes:
Structured CES mode: LA-110 handles the incoming signal as
independent user-defined bundles of N 64 kbps channels that can
be independently routed over different VC connections
Unstructured CES mode: LA-110 handles the incoming signal as a
single bit stream transported over a single VC connection.
For optimum utilization of available uplink bandwidth, dynamic bandwidth
CES (DB-CES) is also supported. When using DB-CES, the LA-110 uses the
voice channel activity information carried by CAS to request uplink
bandwidth when the channel is active (off-hook) and release the
bandwidth when the channel is idle (on-hook).
When the optional ADPCM voice compression and echo canceller option is
installed, the user can select for each individual timeslots the modulation
type (PCM or ADPCM) and the use of echo canceling.
With AAL1, the E1 port can also be configured for unframed (transparent)
service. In this mode, the 2.048 Mbps signal received by the LA-110 E1
port is transparently transferred on a bit-by-bit basis.
AAL2: when AAL2 is selected, LA-110 uses LES for voice support, with or
without ELCP. The user can select from a range of application identifiers,
which determine the supported signaling methods:
CAS signaling (always without ELCP)
PSTN signaling (providing V5.2 functionality) for voice channels, with
or without ELCP
Digital Signaling System 1 (DSS1) for ISDN BRI and PRI, with or without
ELCP.
The voice service characteristics are similar to those described above for
FXS and ISDN ports.
When the ELCP protocol is enabled, the voice gateway can control the
profile in use (however, some functions depend on whether the optional
ADPCM voice compression and/or echo canceller option is installed). The
profile determines the modulation type (PCM or ADPCM), as well as the
utilization of the individual timeslots. Moreover, with ELCP, the voice
gateway can automatically download the required voice and ISDN channel
configuration without requiring manual configuration activities (a feature
referred to as plug-&-play channel configuration).
With AAL2, the E1 port can also be configured for remote access ISDN
PRI, using DSS1 with ELCP support. The user can specify the active
timeslots on the PRI trunk.
In addition, LA-110 accepts E1 UNI data stream and transmits it
transparently over SHDSL line.

T1 (1544 kbps) port. LA-110 c can be equipped with one T1 user port
complying with the applicable sections of AT&T TR-62411, ANSI T1.403, ITU
Rec. G.703, G.704, and G.706. The port interface uses the B8ZS line code for
zero suppression. The user can select the framing mode (D4 (SF) or ESF);
both modes support CAS.
The port has a balanced 100 interface. The port function (DSU or CSU) is
user-selectable. The services available for the T1 user port are identical to
those available for E1 user port (see above).
Versions
The local interfaces that can be ordered for each of the three ports described
above depend on the uplink (network) interface type. Table 1-1 lists the LA-110
versions in accordance with the interfaces that can be ordered for each type of
network interface.
Table 1-1. LA-110 Versions
Local Port Network Interface
SHDSL ADSL E1 IMA
LAN port Supported Supported Supported Supported

Data port Supported Supported Not supported Supported
User port:
Voice ports (FXS or Supported Supported Not supported Not supported
ISDN)
E1/T1 port Supported Not supported Supported Supported
Pseudowire (PW) Functionality

LA-110 transports TDM, ATM, HDLC and Frame Relay data transparently over
packet-switched networks (PSNs). Payload encapsulation is performed using
SAToP, CESoPSN, TDMoIP, ATMoPSN, HDLCoPSN or FRoPSN methods.
TDM Emulation over PSN

TDM data is transferred over the PSN, using one of the following encapsulation
methods:
TDMoIP
CESoPSN
SAToP.
TDM data is packetized using the configured number of payload bytes per packet.
Clock recovery is based on NTR.
TDMoIP
TDMoIP (TDM over IP) payload encapsulation is implemented according to draft-
ietf-pwe3-tdmoip-05.txt. It uses AAL1 format for constant rate/static allocation
of timeslots or AAL2 format for dynamic timeslot allocation. The TDMoIP packet

size is a multiple of 48 bytes. TDMoIP encapsulation can be used with framed or

unframed TDM service.
CESoPSN
CESoPSN (Circuit Emulation Sevice over PSN) is a structure-aware format for
framed E1 services with or without CAS. It converts structured E1/T1 data flows
into IP, MPLS or Ethernet packets and vice versa with static assignment of
timeslots inside a bundle according to ITU-T Y.1413 and IETF PWE3 CESoPSN
draft. The CESoPSN packet size is a multiple of TDM frame size.
SAToP
SAToP (Structure Agnostic over Packet) encapsulation method is used to convert
unframed E1/T1 data flows into IP, MPLS or Ethernet packets and vice versa
according to ITU-T Y.1413, MEF 8, MFA 8.0.0 and IETF RFC 4553. It provides
flexible packet size configuration and low end-to-end delay.
ATM Emulation over PSN

An ATM VP connection is tunneled into a unique ATM PW and carried over a
packet-switched network. The ATMoPSN solution based on IETF draft-ietf-pwe3-
atm-encap-06.
X.25\FR Service Emulation over PSN

The HDLCoPSN is implemented in LA-110 according to the IETF PWE3 HDLC and
TDMoIP drafts: draft-ietf-pwe3-hdlc-ppp-encap-mpls-09.txt (excluding clause 5.3
- PPP) and draft-ietf-pwe3-tdmoip-05.txt, respectively. The HDLC uses bit stuffing
to ensure the bits stream continuity. The HDLC frames include the 16-bit FCS for
the frame validity check. Frame Relay emulation can be aware of the DLCI (as in
FRF.5\FRF.8) or it can be DLCI unaware and be performed according to the HDLC
packets.
Management
Management Functions
The LA-110 has a local management subsystem that controls the operation of all
of its circuits. The subsystem supports various management interfaces, including
inband and out-of-band (SNMP) management, Telnet, and local management via
an ASCII terminal or a Web browser. RADview management software is also
available to support large networks.
The local management subsystem can communicate through the following ports:
Dedicated serial RS-232 port, intended for direct connection to a simple ASCII
terminal (or a PC running any terminal emulation utility). The port provides
access to the entire available configuration, diagnostics, performance and
alarm monitoring functions. All the necessary software is stored in LA-110;
no data is stored in the terminal. The management is performed via a
command-line or menu-driven interface.
Inband management via the ATM uplink, using SNMP or Telnet. Telnet has the
same capabilities and uses the same procedures as the terminal. The LA-110

SNMP agent supports all the standard MIBs for E1, xDSL, Frame Relay, CES
and DB-CES as well as the private RAD MIBs.
Out of band management via the LAN port using SNMP and Telnet. This
option is supported when the LAN port is configured to use the IP router.
The operation of the LA-110 management subsystem and of its other circuits is
determined by software stored in the flash memory. The software can be
updated from a remote central location, using TFTP or from a terminal directly
connected to the LA-110 serial control port.
Automatic Configuration Options (Plug & Play)

The LA-110 is designed to enable automatic configuration from a remote
location, without requiring the intervention of an operator (plug & play
functionality).
Plug & play means that after the LA-110 is installed and connected to its
operating environment, the unit needs only to be powered up. The LA-110
supports two automatic configuration methods:
Fully automatic configuration using DHCP in conjunction with TFTP. To use
this method, the using organization must configure a DHCP server, located at
an appropriate location within the operators network management center.
When LA-110 is powered up, it automatically starts operating as a DHCP
client and broadcasts a DHCP server discovery message.
When the dedicated DHCP server answers, it provides the IP address to be
configured as the LA-110 inband management address and information
needed to retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. LA-110 then uses
the parameters received from the DHCP server to retrieve its configuration
file using TFTP, and starts using the downloaded configuration.
Alternative mechanism based on automatic learning of its inband
management IP address. This mechanism is active as long as the default
parameter values are in effect. LA-110 then learns its inband management IP
address from the destination IP address carried in the first IP packet received
through the default inband management VCC. This is sufficient for Telnet
access.
Moreover, if the first packet is an SNMP packet, LA-110 also adds the source IP
address as a manager. After learning these parameters, the plug-&-play
functionality is disabled, and the LA-110 is subject to the regular management
and configuration rules. TFTP can then be used to download a configuration file.
Note
Whenever necessary, the plug-&-play functionality can be enabled again by
restoring the factory-default parameters.
The automatic configuration method used by LA-110 upon power-up is

determined by its factory-default parameters, specified at ordering time.
Alarm Collection
The LA-110 management subsystem monitors on-line critical functions. The
subsystem generates time-stamped alarm messages that cover all the system
events. The time stamp is provided by an internal real-time clock. The alarm

messages can be read on-line by means of the local supervisory terminal or a

Telnet host, and are automatically sent as traps to selected management stations.
The alarms log file can also be sent to a remote host using TFTP.
Diagnostics and Statistics

LA-110 offers comprehensive diagnostics and statistics for all its ports and
network layers. It supports the following diagnostics and statistics functions:
Collection of application layer performance statistics
ATM layer performance statistics and control (OAM support). The end-to-end
and segment QoS is evaluated using F5 OAM cells, including AIS, RDI, LB, CC
and activation cells.
Physical layer diagnostics: loopback tests and performance statistics.
The collected data enables the system administrator to monitor the transmission
performance, and thus the quality of service provided to users, for statistical
purposes, and can also be used to identify transmission problems.
In addition, the LA-110 supports the ICMP ping function for IP connectivity
testing.

1.2 Typical Applications

Figure 1-1 shows a network using several LA-110 in typical applications that
illustrate its versatility.
Figure 1-1. Typical Application
The uplink (WAN) side of each LA-110 is connected to the ATM network via a
DSLAM, using SHDSL or ADSL. The range over SHDSL or ADSL, when using a single
twisted pair, can be up to several kilometers.
In the applications shown in Figure 1-1, LA-110 units serve several phones (POTS
or ISDN terminals), digital PBX and various types of data equipment.
The voice traffic received through the FXS (POTS) and ISDN user ports is carried
over AAL2. The use of AAL2 allows dynamic use of bandwidth, and also enables
multiple voice circuits to be carried simultaneously over a single VC using ELCP.
The voice traffic is terminated at a voice gateway, which provides the connection
to the PSTN through V5.2 trunks.
The E1 port can be used as a voice port over AAL2. In addition, the port can also
be used as a fractional E1 port over AAL1. In this case, the port supports voice
and data traffic, with selectable service characteristics that meet the
requirements of a wide range of applications.
The data traffic supported by the Ethernet LAN port, or by the data port (either
serial synchronous data or Frame Relay traffic) is carried on AAL5, with the ATM
service category (UBR, UBR+, VBR or CBR) being selected in accordance with the
application requirements. Data traffic transported through the ATM network is
terminated at the Broadband Access Server (BAS). The BAS converts the ATM
data streams into IP packets for Internet access.
1-10 Typical Applications LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Additional details on the wide range of services supported by the LA-110 and its
various capabilities are given below.
LAN Services
The LA-110 LAN port supports autonegotiation, for automatic adaptation to the
operating mode of the Ethernet LAN to which it is connected.
The LAN port can be configured to operate either as a MAC bridge, or as an IP
router.
The MAC bridge provides Layer 2 connectivity with transparent VLAN support
for the users equipment. PPPoE traffic can also be transparently transferred.
The IP router provides Layer 3 connectivity. Routing can be based on the
RIP1, RIP2 or both; static routes can also be defined. For flexibility, two LAN
ports can be defined over the physical LAN port of the LA-110, with their IP
addresses in different subnets.
Note
When the LAN port is configured as bridge, an inband management IP address
must be defined.
When the LAN port is configured as IP router, the LA-110 management
subsystem also uses the IP addresses of the ports for out-of-band access.
Both the MAC bridge and the IP router can be configured to support multiple WAN
connections (up to eight) for routing to different destinations. Each connection is
defined over a separate PVC. The user can configure for each PVC the ATM
connection parameters, and therefore can control the uplink bandwidth that may
be used for each destination.
Figure 1-2 shows a basic application using the LA-110 LAN services to provide
Internet access to the users equipment connected to its LAN port. The LA-110
data and user ports may also be used together with the LAN port, however for
clarity in Figure 1-2 only the utilization of the LAN port is shown.
An important advantage of LA-110 is that it can provide all the additional services
normally available on standalone IP routers:
DHCP services. The LA-110 can be configured in accordance with the users
application requirements either as a DHCP relay or server:
In the DHCP relay mode, the LA-110 relays DHCP requests from the LAN
port to a specified DHCP server on the WAN, which provides the actual
configuration parameters.
Network Address Translation/Network Address/Port Translation (NAT/NAPT)
services. NAT/NAPT enables the user to assign private IP addresses to the
stations connected to the LAN, and temporarily assign a global IP address
when any station needs access to the outside world. This enables
converting a large number of private IP addresses to a smaller number of
global IP addresses, or even to a single IP address.
Port Address Translation (PAT). PAT complements NAT/NAPT by allowing
outside access to certain stations on the LAN, although they are assigned
private addresses.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Typical Applications 1-11

Support for PPP traffic, including PAP and CHAP client authentication and
selection of the transport method (VC multiplexing or LLC encapsulation per
RFC2364).
Subnet Mask Negotiation

The carrier can supply LA-110 units at customer premises with IP interfaces,
without pre-configuring an IP address.
Figure 1-2. Basic IP Router Application
Leased Line Services over ATM

The LA-110 can be used as an ATM CSU/DSU to provide leased line services over
ATM networks, using SHDSL over the existing twisted pair infrastructure for
connection to a DSLAM.
LA-110 can be ordered with both E1 and serial data ports, and the LA-110 can
provide leased line services for both ports as long as the total required
bandwidth does not exceed the uplink bandwidth.
Note
The data port can also be used for Frame Relay services instead of leased line
services, as explained in the Frame Relay Support over ATM section below.
Figure 1-3 shows a leased line application using the LA-110. In this application,
the LA-110 enables interconnecting routers with serial interfaces (for example,
X.21 or V.35) to the WAN, over the ATM connection. In addition, Figure 1-3
shows the LA-110 used to provide a fractional E1 link for interconnecting two
digital PBXs with E1 trunks.
Figure 1-3. Providing Leased Line Services
Handling of Data Port Traffic

When configured for data stream applications, the data port transmits the serial
data stream transparently through the ATM connection at the CBR service
category. Therefore, the AAL1 stream mode supports any Layer 2 protocol.

The data traffic is transported using AAL1 encapsulation and a cell structure
similar to that specified in the ATMF CES Interoperability Specification. The user
can select between the structured and unstructured cell structures (for the 64
kbps rate, the selection is between structured service with, or without pointer).
The supported data rates are N 64 kbps, in the range of 64 to 2048 kbps.
Only a single ATM connection (PVC) can be defined for the data port. Figure 1-4
shows the use of the LA-110 data port in a typical AAL1 stream application.
Figure 1-4. Typical AAL1 Stream Application
Handling of E1 Port Traffic

For leased line applications, the traffic received at the E1 port is always
encapsulated using AAL1 at the CBR service category. When using AAL1, the user
can select the framing mode: G732N, G732S or unframed.
The other characteristics can be adapted to the specific application requirements:
Unframed mode: enables transparent (bit-by-bit) transmission of a
2048 kbps ITU-T Rec. G.703 signal, irrespective of its framing structure and
contents (voice, data, video, and any proprietary framing).
This service is similar to the transparent AAL1 stream mode supported for the
data port, and it also uses a cell structure similar to that specified in the
ATMF CES Interoperability Specification. The user can select between the
structured and unstructured cell structures. When using the unframed mode,
only a single ATM connection (PVC) can be defined for the E1 port.
There are applications that need using the unframed mode even when the
users signal has a standard frame format. The unframed mode is necessary
when timeslot 0 of a standard frame format (G732N, G732S, etc.) must be
transferred transparently, end-to-end, through the ATM network. This
permits free use of the national bits, Sa4 to Sa8, end-to-end monitoring of the
alarm status and end-to-end monitoring transmission performance using the
CRC-4 function.
Note
RAD proprietary management protocol, as implemented in Megaplex, DXC and
other RAD TDM equipment, can use the national bits for inband management.
Framed modes (G732N, G732S ). In the framed modes, timeslot 0 is always

terminated at the E1 interface; for G732S framing, timeslot 16 is also
terminated.
When using a framed mode, the user must define timeslot utilization. The
utilization is defined by configuring timeslot bundles. A bundle can include
any number of timeslots (that is, its rate is n64 kbps), however any
particular timeslot may be included in only one bundle. The allowed number
of timeslots, n, depends on the framing mode:

G732S framing: 1 to 30 timeslots. Timeslot 16 cannot be included in a

bundle, because it carries the channel-associated signaling (CAS)
information. This is the framing mode usually selected for connection to
the digital E1 trunk of a PBX. Figure 1-5 shows the LA-110 used to
provide fractional E1 services for connecting the digital trunk of the PBX
at one site, for example, at the headquarters, to other digital PBXs
located at other sites (branch offices).
G732N framing: 1 to 31 timeslots.
Figure 1-5. Fractional E1 Application
The ATM connection (PVC) and the associated parameters of each bundle can
be independently configured. The user can also select the connection type
for each bundle:
CES. The E1 N 64 kbps structured mode is used. For this connection
type, the user can enable or disable the transmission of signaling
information (CAS available when G732S framing is used). Signaling is
usually ignored when the bundle timeslots carry data, but is necessary for
voice channels, for example, in the application shown in Figure 1-5.
The payload carried by timeslots is transparently transferred, even when
the LA-110 includes the voice compression (ADPCM) option: ADPCM and
echo canceling can be used only when using AAL2 (LES). Therefore, DTMF,
fax and modem signals always pass transparently.
DB-CES: dynamic bandwidth utilization for 64 kbps timeslot trunking using
CES. The DB-CES uses the E1 N 64 kbps structured mode, together with
a method for dynamic bandwidth utilization, which is based on the
detection of voice channel activity.
This connection type uses the signaling information (CAS) to determine
whether a channel is in use or not, and therefore requires the G732S
framing mode. Bandwidth is therefore allocated on the uplink only for
active channels: any bandwidth not actually needed becomes available to
the other LA-110 ports. This capability may also be used in the
application shown in Figure 1-5.
Transparent mode: the bundle is transferred using the unstructured
mode. This is suitable for fractional E1 service: the timeslots included in
the bundle carry a N 64 kbps serial data stream, and this stream is
transparently transferred over the ATM network.

Frame Relay Support over ATM

The LA-110 data port can be configured to support Frame Relay services. The
user can select the Frame Relay management protocol in accordance with the LA-
110 operating environment: ITU-T Rec. Q.933, LMI or ANSI T1.617, and the
protocol version (user side, network side or both).
The Frame Relay mode is supported over AAL5.
In the Frame Relay mode, the LA-110 data port can be used to interconnect
legacy Frame Relay equipment, for example, routers, over the ATM network, or
connect between Frame Relay and ATM terminals.
LA-110 supports up to eight DLCIs. In addition, the user can select the Frame
Relay interworking mode: service interworking per FRF.8 or network interworking
per FRF.5.
Network Interworking Mode

The network interworking mode, defined in FRF.5, is used to interconnect Frame
Relay equipment through an ATM network. A basic application is shown in
Figure 1-6.
In the network interworking mode, the ATM connection (PVC) can be used to
carry either a single Frame Relay logical connection (a mode called one-to-one
connection) or multiplex several logical connections (up to eight) on the same
PVC. In the latter mode (called many-to-one connection), the ATM connection
parameters defined by the user apply to all the DLCIs multiplexed on the same
PVC.
The user can configure the way the Frame Relay traffic control parameters are
converted to the cell loss priority indicator used on the ATM connection.
Figure 1-6. Basic Frame Relay Application Network Interworking Mode
Service Interworking Mode

The service interworking mode, defined in FRF.8, is used to interconnect an
equipment unit with Frame Relay interface to an equipment unit with ATM
interface. A basic application is shown in Figure 1-7. The user can define the
desired ATM connection parameters in accordance with the application
requirements.
To enable interworking between Frame Relay and ATM equipment, it is necessary
to define the conversion parameters:
Protocol handling method: header encapsulation or translation between
RFC2427 (RFC1490) on the Frame Relay side to RFC2684 (RFC1483) on the
ATM side, and the CRC mode on the Frame Relay side (CRC-16 or CRC-32)
Conversion between Frame Relay traffic control parameters and the cell loss
priority indicator used on the ATM connection.

Figure 1-7. Basic Frame Relay Application Service Interworking Mode
VoDSL over LES

The Loop Emulation Service (LES) using AAL2 is used to provide voiceband
services over bandwidth-constrained ATM connections, for example, connections
using DSL systems (this type of service is referred to as voice over DSL, or
VoDSL). LA-110 supports LES for each of the three user port types that may be
installed: FXS, ISDN or E1.
LES enables establishing connections between an end user to a destination
reached through a PSTN, and therefore requires transferring signaling information
from the end users equipment (phone, ISDN terminal, PBX, etc.) to a dedicated
equipment unit, called voice gateway, located at a central office or local
exchange.
Figure 1-8 shows the LA-110 used in VoDSL applications over LES. The voice
traffic received through the FXS or ISDN user ports is carried over the ATM
network on one PVC and is terminated at a voice gateway, which provides the
connection to the PSTN through V5.2 trunks.
Note
In addition to the voice traffic, LA-110 can also support data traffic, for example,
LAN traffic, carried on AAL5 with the ATM service category (UBR, UBR+, VBR or
CBR) selected in accordance with the application requirements.
Figure 1-8. VoDSL Application Using LES over AAL2
In addition to LES, LA-110 also supports the Emulated Loop Control Protocol
(ELCP). ELCP enables the voice gateway to perform channel activation and user
port control functions.

With ELCP, the E1 user port can also be configured to support ISDN PRI remote
access. This mode provides 30 payload timeslots, and an additional timeslot is
needed for the D channel.
When the number of timeslots needed for users traffic is smaller, the user can
configure the E1 port for fractional E1 utilization. In this case, the user specifies
the timeslots in use. This releases more uplink bandwidth for the other LA-110
ports.
Figure 1-9 shows an application using LES to transport traffic received by the E1
port.
Figure 1-9. Using LES over AAL2 for Voice Traffic Carried by the LA-110 E1 Port
To ensure compatibility, the voice gateway and the VoDSL end users equipment
can be preconfigured for the most common application environments, by
specifying an application identifier. The application identifiers supported by the
LA-110 are as follows:
LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for PRI and BRI (with ELCP)
LES using DSS1 for remote access PRI (PRI only, with ELCP).
With LES, an ATM connection can carry multiple types of traffic, for example,
multiple analog voice channels and ISDN BRI channels, each with its associated
signaling information, over the same PVC. When ELCP is not used, it is necessary
to use CAS signaling; with ELCP, it is necessary to use CCS signaling.
Note
DTMF signaling is transparently transferred, as any analog signal.
The discrimination among the different channels carried over the same PVC is
made by assigning a channel identifier (CID). The lowest channels (up to 15) are
reserved for the protocol traffic; the other channels can be assigned CIDs in the
range of 16 to 223.
LES, together with the ELCP protocol, supports features that increase bandwidth
utilization and enhance versatility:
Idle call suppression enables setting up a connection when a channel
becomes active, and releasing the uplink bandwidth when a call is no longer
active.
Silence detection and removal. This feature detects the short intervals of
silence occurring during an active call. The beginning and end of the intervals
are marked by special codes, and bandwidth is released for other users. At
the receiving end, a comfort noise generator fills the silence intervals with an
adequate level of background noise.

Control over the voice encoding method, using predefined profiles in

accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.366.1 and I.366.2. The supported profiles are 7
to 12; LA-110 without the ADPCM option supports only profile 9. The profiles
actually control three parameters:
The supported voice encoding methods
The use of silence detection
The number of payload bytes in an AAL2 cell.
Control over echo cancellation. When a channel uses an echo canceller, the
canceller is temporarily disabled when the voice gateway detects fax or
modem signals in that channel.
Transport of wideband data: when using ADPCM, the voice gateway will
switch a channel to PCM while the channel carries a wideband modem signal,
and then return to the regular profile.
Another advantage of LES is plug-&-play configuration of voice channels, which
enables starting service immediately, without requiring manual configuration. The
LA-110 supports plug-&-play as follows:
When using LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP), the
default CID allocation is in accordance with ATMF standard. The default
allocation is described in Table 1-2: if the voice gateway uses the same
assignment, voice service can start as soon as the ATM connection is
established.
When using an application identifier supporting ELCP, all the connections are
assigned CID = 0, and the voice gateway assigns the actual CID when a voice
path must be connected (the voice gateway used CID = 8 for this purpose).
Table 1-2. Default (Plug & Play) CID Assignment
Channel Type CID Assignment key Range of Assigned CID
FXS (POTS) 15 + FXS port number 16 to 19
ISDN D Channel 127 + ISDN BRI port number 128 to 131
ISDN B Channel 1 158 + (2 ISDN BRI port number) 160 to 166
ISDN B Channel 2 159 + (2 ISDN BRI port number) 161 to 167
Mutiservice over IMA

Figure 1-10 illustrates a point-to-point application of two LA-110 units,
transferring E1/T and serial data over IMA (4 SHDSL) links.

Figure 1-10. Transferring E1/T1 and Data Traffic over IMA
1.3 Physical Description

LA-110 is a compact unit, intended for installation on desktops or shelves.
Figure 1-11 shows a general view of the LA-110.
The unit height is 1U (1.75 in). An optional rack-mount adapter kit, RM-33,
enables installing LA-110 in a 19-inch rack.
Figure 1-11. LA-110 3D View
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Physical Description 1-19

The LA-110 front panel includes only indicators that indicate its operating status.
All the connections are made to connectors located on the rear panel. LA-110
has two different enclosures, depending on the user interface type:
Data and E1 user interfaces: internal power supply and 9-pin D-type female
control terminal port
FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI user interfaces: external power supply and RJ-45
control terminal port.
The rear panel includes the following connectors:
Network port provides the uplink connection (SHDSL, ADSL, E1 or IMA).
LAN port provides the 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN interface.
DCE port for connection to users data or Frame Relay equipment. Supports
X.21 or V.35 interfaces.
User port(s) includes the FXS, ISDN or E1 interface, in accordance with
order.
CONTROL connector for connection to a local terminal.
POWER connector for connection to the power source. LA-110 with FXS,
ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces use AC power supply unit, which converts the AC
mains voltage to the regulated voltages needed by LA-110. The AC power
supply unit supplies +3.3V, +5V and -48V, and has a 6-pin power connector.
Figure 1-12 shows a typical power supply unit.
Figure 1-12. Typical LA-110 AC Power Supply Unit
1-20 Physical Description LA-110 Ver. 3.5

1.4 Functional Description

The LA-110 functional block diagram is shown in Figure 1-13.
LA-110
Ethernet
LAN Payload
LAN Port
Interface Processor
Data Port Payload

Data Port Processor
Interface
User
E1/T1
E1/T1 Port
Interface
Network
Interface
or ATM
Processor (SHDSL,
ISDN Interface ADSL, E1
Channel 1 or IMA)
Channel 2
Quad "S" ISDN
Channel 3 Interface
Channel 4 Internal PCM Bus Timeslot

Assigner
Feed
or DSP
- Echo Canceller
FXS Interface - ADPCM Converter
Channel 1
Channel 2 Quad FXS PCM
Channel 3 Interface Codec
Channel 4
Ringer Feed
Control
CONTROL Management
Port Port Timing Subsystem
Subsystem
Interface
Power
Power
Supply
Figure 1-13. LA-110 Functional Block Diagram
LA-110 includes the following main subsystems:

Network interface
ATM processor
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Functional Description 1-21

LAN interface
Ethernet payload processor
Data port interface
Data port payload processor
User interface (FXS, ISDN, E1 or T1)
DSP
Timeslot assigner
Timing subsystem
Management subsystem
Power supply.
Network Interface Subsystem

The LA-110 network port can be ordered with one of the following interfaces:
2-wire SHDSL interface
2/4-wire SHDSL interface
ADSL interface
E1 interface
IMA over 4 SHDSL.
For a description of the main SHDSL, ADSL and E1 characteristics, refer to
Appendix E.
SHDSL Network Interfaces

The 2/4-wire SHDSL interface complies with ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 and ETSI TS
101524-1 and uses TC-PAM line coding. The user can select various physical layer
parameters for best match to the specific characteristics of the equipment
connected to the other end of the link.
The operating mode of the LA-110 network interface is normally STU-R (SHDSL
terminal unit remote), which is the mode suitable for use at the CPE side. In
this mode, LA-110 synchronizes to the clock provided by the equipment
connected to the other end of the SHDSL link, usually a DSLAM.
However, for maintenance purposes, the network interface can also be
configured as STU-C (SHDSL terminal unit CO side). The SHDSL port can be
configured to carry data rates of 192 to 2304 kbps over 2-wire, or 384 (each pair
is 192 kbps) to 4608 (each pair is 2304) over 4-wire; the corresponding line rates
are 8 kbps higher, because of the SHDSL overhead. The line rates for 2-wire are:
200, 392, 520, 776, 1032, 1160, 1544, 2056 and 2312 kbps. Using a lower line
rate increases the range, as shown in Table 1-3. When you configure for 4-wire,
the rate you select will be applied to each pair, i.e. if you select 200 kbps for 4-
wire, each pair will be 200 kbps, giving a total of 400 kbps.
For 4 2-wire IMA interface data rates represent the value of a single pair.
Typical ranges of the IMA interface are also relevant for data rates above 2304
1-22 Functional Description LA-110 Ver. 3.5

kbps. To obtain a typical range for a data rate between 23049216 kbps, divide
the data rate by four and then consult Table 1-3.

The actual data rate can be automatically selected during the link setup process,
and can be adapted during operation to cope with changing transmission
conditions. For example, increased interference may decrease the rate, however
the link returns to the highest possible rate as soon as the conditions return to
normal.
Table 1-3. Typical Ranges for SHDSL Network Interface
Data Rate 4 2-wire

2-wire 4-wire
IMA
[kbps] [km] [mi] [km] [mi] [km] [mi]
384512 5.5 3.4 6.3 3.9 5.2 3.2
576832 5.0 3.1 5.4 3.3 4.9 3.0
8961152 4.5 2.7 5.1 3.1 4.6 2.8
12161344 4.2 2.6 5.1 3.1 4.5 2.7
14081856 3.9 2.4 4.5 2.7 4.0 2.4
19202176 3.5 2.1 4.5 2.7 3.7 2.2
2304 3.3 2.0 4.5 2.7 3.5 2.1
24323072 3.9 2.4
32004624 3.3 2.0
ADSL Interface
The ADSL interface complies with ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A and ETSI ETR328, and
uses DMT line coding. The user can select between echo canceling and frequency
division multiplex (FDM), and can also select various physical layer parameters for
best match to the specific characteristics of the equipment connected to the
other end of the link. In addition, the ADSL interface can be configured to
support signal formats defined in additional standards, for example, ANSI T1.413,
and several widely used particular implementations.
The operating mode of the LA-110 network interface is ATU-R (ADSL terminal
unit remote), which is the mode suitable for use at the CPE side. In this mode,
the LA-110 synchronizes to the clock provided by the equipment connected to
the other end of the ADSL link, usually a DSLAM.
The data rates are up to 8 Mbps in the downstream direction and up to 1 Mbps in
the upstream direction.
E1 Interface
The E1 interface complies with ITU-T Rec. G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823
requirements. The jitter performance complies with ITU-T Rec. G.823. The E1
network interface uses G732N or G732S framing, with or without CRC-4. The
maximum payload rate of the E1 uplink is 1664 kbps. The E1 network port
supports balanced (120) and unbalanced (75) interfaces.
The E1 network interface operating in the following timing modes: Loopback,
Derived from User, Internal.

IMA over 4 SHDSL Interface

LA-110 combines advanced inverse multiplexing capabilities together with SHDSL
technology to provide a high bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately
the sum of the SHDSL link rates.
The IMA network interface supports PAM 16 line coding and operates in
accordance with the ITU-T G.991.2 and ETSI TS 101 524-1 requirements. The IMA
operation complies with the ATM Forum 1.0 and 1.1 (AF-PHY-0086.000 and AF-
PHY-0086.001) requirements.
Data rate of the IMA link equals combined data rate of its four 2-wire links: from
192 kbps (when the IMA group has only one link) to 9216 kbps for four links
operating at maximum rate. The typical operation ranges is similar to those of the
2-wire interface, described in Table 1-3.
ATM Processor
Note For a description of the ATM environment, refer to Appendix E.
Payload Processing
The ATM processor provides an ATM user-network interface (UNI) in accordance
with the ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1).
The processor can receive data from the following sources:
Ethernet payload processor
Data port
User port (through a PCM bus and timeslot assigner)
Management subsystem.
The ATM processor performs segmentation and reassembly (SAR) for each of the
data streams received through the various user ports and formats the flow
associated with each ATM connection in accordance with the applicable AAL cell
structure.
The various type of AAL are used as follows:
AAL1 for transparent transport of data received from the data port, and
from the E1 user port when providing circuit emulation services (that is, when
operating in the CES, DB-CES and transparent modes).
AAL2 for transport of voice traffic using LES. Voice traffic may be received
from the user ports (FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI access, and PSTN access).
AAL5 used for packet traffic: Frame Relay traffic received from the data
port, LAN traffic, and management traffic.
For each flow, the ATM processor performs the shaping and policing (traffic
contract enforcing) needed to provide the various ATM service categories (Classes
of Service CoS in ITU-T terminology): CBR, VBR, UBR and UBR+, in accordance
with the traffic contract parameters defined by the user per connection (PVC).

Each ATM service category has its own queue, which is then processed by the
function. The shaper multiplexes the various flows into a single ATM trunk for
transmission through the network to the ATM network.
Jitter Buffer
The ATM network introduces a delay that consists of two components:
Cell transfer delay (CTD): this component represents the average transport time
within the ATM network, and therefore it is assumed to be constant for each VC.
Cell delay variation (CDV): this is a varying component that represents the
jitter, or variation in the delay experienced by any cell.
The reassembly process on the receive side of the ATM network needs a buffer in
which the reassembled cell stream is stored before it is transmitted out the user
interface. The size of the buffer should be large enough to accommodate the
largest CDV present on a VC to prevent underflow and overflow, yet not so large
as to induce excessive overall delay.
LA-110 jitter buffer size can be configured in the range of 0 to 20 msec. This
parameter is global (i.e., all the VCs use the same buffer).
Support for Operations, Administration and Maintenance

(OAM)
The ATM processor also provides the OAM support functions in accordance with
ITU-T Rec. I.610; for example, it performs continuity checks, generates alarm
indications, sends loopback requests and activates loopbacks in accordance with
the received OAM cells, etc.
The ATM processor can also collect performance monitoring data for the ATM layer.
LAN Interface
LA-110 includes a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN port. The interface supports
autonegotiation. The user can configure the advertised data rate (10 or 100
Mbps) and operating mode (half duplex or full duplex). Alternatively,
autonegotiation can be disabled and the rate and operating mode be directly
specified.
Note
The LAN port of the LA-110 units with date and E1 interfaces supports automatic
MDIX.
Ethernet Payload Processor

The LAN port traffic can be processed either by a MAC bridge or by an IP router.
Their characteristics are described below.
The additional services supported by the IP router (DHCP, NAT/NAPT and PAT) are
also described.

Bridge Characteristics
LA-110 can be configured to serve as an Ethernet MAC bridge with VLAN support
between its LAN port and the network. The bridge can be configured with up to
eight WAN ports (each using its own PVC).
Bridge functionality is selectable:
Access only: forwarding between LAN and WAN ports
Full bridge functionality: LAN access and switching among the WAN ports.
The bridge operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI model, and
therefore it is completely transparent to higher-level protocols such as TCP/IP,
DECnet, XNS, ISO, and to operating systems such as Unix or Windows.
The bridge operates as a media access (MAC) layer remote bridge with
self-learning capabilities. It learns and automatically recognizes the addresses of
the nodes attached to the local LAN (the LAN directly attached to the LA-110
Ethernet interface), and uses this information to filter the LAN traffic before
sending it through one of the WAN ports. In addition, the user can define static
MAC addresses (up to 32). The user can configure the aging time of learned
addresses; static addresses are stored until deleted by the user.
The bridge supports up to 2048 hosts on the local LAN.
For compatibility with other equipment, the format of the bridge frames can be
configured (with or without CRC, in accordance with RFC 1483).
The user can also enable support for the Point-to-Point protocol over Ethernet
(PPPoE) to allow the local nodes to connect to the Internet through LA-110 and
enjoy most of the benefits of a direct connection.
The internal bridge can contain up to nine ports (one on the LAN side and up to
eight on the WAN side). The bridge operates in the VLAN-aware and
VLAN-unaware modes.
VLAN-Aware Operation
This section describes the frame forwarding process in the VLAN-aware mode.
Accept Filter. When the frame is received by one of the bridge ports, it passes
from the accept filter. If the incoming port is configured to accept only VLAN-
tagged, all untagged or priority-tagged frames are discarded at this stage. If the
accept filter is configured to accept all, all frames (tagged and untagged) are
accepted.
VLAN Association. The VLAN association mechanism assigns PVID (port VID) to
any untagged or priority-tagged frame before forwarding it to the ingress filter.
Ingress Filter. The ingress filter (if enabled) discards any frame whose VID is not a
member of the VLAN that is assigned to the port.
Learning. If the frame is admitted, it is handled by the learning process which
learns the source MAC, VID and incoming port triplet.
Forwarding. Forwarding decisions are taken according to the learning table, along
with the user-configurable static entries and aging information. The frames can
be dropped, forwarded to specific port or flooded to a group of ports.

Egress Filter. The egress filter discards any frame whose VID (as determined by
the ingress process) is not associated with the outgoing port.
Egress Stripping. At the egress stripping stage it is decided whether to remove
the VLAN tag according to the outgoing port and VID combination. This means
that priority-tagged frames are not transmitted out of a VLAN-aware bridge;
outgoing frames are either untagged or VLAN-tagged.
Frame Transmission. Once a frame passes the egress stripping stage, it ready to
be transmitted outside. After the outbound bridge is determined, the original
priority tag is analyzed. If the frame does not have a priority tag, it is handled as
if it has zero priority. Then the frame is transmitted on outbound bridge port VC
that handles this priority. If no VC is assigned to this priority, the frame is
dropped.
VLAN-Unaware Operation
The VLAN-unaware process is similar to the VLAN-aware mode with the VID values
ignored. Upon reception, the frames are handled by the learning and forwarding
processes. All decisions are taken according to MAC addresses only (VLAN tags
are ignored).
IP Router Characteristics
LA-110 can be configured to serve as an IP router between the LAN port and the
network. When using the IP router, LA-110 also supports TFTP.
The number of router ports is configurable:
One or two LAN ports. The two ports, both defined on the physical LAN port,
must be configured in different subnets.
One to eight WAN ports, each using its own PVC.
Optional host port for router management, for example for RIP updates.
The IP router can be configured to use only static routing (where the user can
define up to 32 entries), or static routing together with user-selected routing
protocols: RIP I, RIP II, or both RIP I and RIP II. The IP router supports the Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) and the ICMP ping function for checking IP connectivity.
When using a routing protocol, the IP router can record in its routing table up to
80 dynamically learned networks or IP hosts. The user can configure the aging
time of learned routes; static routes are stored until deleted by the user.
A default gateway can be defined on either a LAN or WAN port: for a LAN
interface, a next hop IP address is needed (no next hop IP address is needed for
a WAN interface because it is an unnumbered interface).
In the IP router mode, LA-110 can be configured to use encapsulation per
RFC2684 (which replaces RFC1483), or transfer the traffic using PPP over ATM
(PPPoA).
The user can select the PPP transport method in accordance with RFC2364:
VC multiplexing
LLC encapsulation.
For PPP traffic, the LA-110 supports PAP and CHAP client authentication.

IPCP Subnet Mask support allows Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) to connect
to a Broadband Access Server (BAS) and obtain an IP address and subnet range
that the CPE can use to populate the DHCP server database. The IP address is
also used to configure an IP interface over the LAN port. The IP Address is
dynamically allocated by the DHCP Server, using the DHCP Pool that was allocated
over the PPP connection.
In order to connect one of the LANs to Subnet Mask Negotiation, its IP address
should be 0.0.0.0. When the IP Address is allocated from the PPP, the 0.0.0.0 IP
Address is replaced in the database by the allocated IP address.
Only one Subnet Mask Negotiation on WAN interface can be enabled at the same
time in order to avoid allocating the LAN IP address according to several WAN
interfaces (a one-on-one connection).
The linked LAN interface can be deleted only after disabling the Subnet Mask
Negotiation on the PPP connection.
DNS Relay
This implementation uses a translation table containing the address of the host
requesting, the identification of the original DNS request message and the new
identification with which the request will be sent to DNS server. Whenever
LA-110 receives a DNS request from one of its hosts, it sends the same request
to the DNS server with the IP address on its LAN interface as source address. The
DNS server will then reply to LA-110, which will send the reply to the requesting
host.
If a DNS server does not answer, the hosts request will timeout.
DNS Relay can also be used with a single NAT.
Firewall
The user can set a firewall on each one of the router interfaces (WAN, LAN). A
firewall contains the following information:
Interface the interface to which the firewall is attached
Direction inbound or outbound.
If the user configures inbound direction, the firewall will block frames entering
this interface. A blocked frame will not proceed into the router.
If the user configures outbound direction, the firewall will block frames
transmitted from this interface. Frames will arrive to the firewall after being
routed to this interface.

Inbound Direction
Public Private
Network Network
Firewall Router
Outound Direction
Public Private
Network Network
Router Firewall
Figure 1-14. Firewall

The user can add and delete rules per firewall (per interface). Every firewall can
contain up to 20 rules.
When adding a rule, the user should specify the following information:
High end of destination IP range
Low end of destination IP range
High end of source IP range
Low end of source IP range
IP number
High end of destination port range
Low end of destination port range
High end of source port range
Low end of source port range
ICMP Type.
The basic rule of the firewall is: What is not explicitly allowed is denied.
The user can create a log file containing information about packets that the
firewall discard, thus helping to track attempts to break the security.
DHCP Services
The user can select whether to enable DHCP services on the LA-110 IP router.
Two types of services can be provided:
DHCP relay: in this mode, the IP router relays DHCP requests to a predefined
DHCP server. The user can specify the maximum number of hops that a DHCP
request can traverse before being discarded.
DHCP server: in this mode, the IP router itself serves as the DHCP server,
which provides, in response to DHCP requests an IP address, an IP subnet
mask, a default gateway, and the IP addresses of two DNS servers (primary
and secondary). The user can define up to 10 different DHCP address pools.

For each pool, the user specifies the IP address range, the default gateway,
the primary and secondary DNS servers, and the lease time.
At any time, the IP router can provide only one of the services listed above.
NAT/NAPT Services
The LA-110 IP router can also provide network address translation (NAT) and
network address/port translations (NAPT), simultaneously for multiple hosts and
multiple sessions per host.
The total number of NAT and NAPT translations is 20. Each translation can be
defined to apply to either a LAN or WAN port:
When the address translation is defined on a LAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the LAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
WAN side.
When the address translation is defined on a WAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the WAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
LAN side.
Four types of translations can be defined:
Dynamic (temporary) translation of a group of virtual IP addresses to a
smaller group of real IP addresses, in accordance with the usage
requirements received from the hosts using virtual IP addresses. This type is
similar to the basic traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
Static (permanent) translation of a specific virtual IP address to a specific real
IP address. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
Transparent translation (no translation at all): the real and virtual IP
addresses are identical. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in
RFC2663.
Dynamic utilization of a single IP address in accordance with usage
requirements received from the virtual IP addresses, using transport
identifiers (port numbers) for multiplexing. This type is similar to NAPT, a
form of traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
All the translations, except for the transparent translation, hide the virtual
addresses from the outside world (outside is determined by the type of
interface, as explained above).
PAT Services
PAT is a static translation that specifies a unique mapping between a
[real IP address; port; protocol] and a [virtual IP address; port]. Its purpose is to
enable access from the real IP side to a host using a virtual IP address that is
included in an existing dynamic NAPT definition.
Therefore, a PAT translation can be defined only if a matching dynamic NAPT
translation exists (matching means that a SINGLE PAT entry has the same real IP
and virtual entries). The total number of PAT translation definitions is 10.
To help the user make valid definitions, the LA-110 supports predefined options
for the most common services: the available selections are Telnet (port 23), Web
(port 80), FTP (port 20 or 21), SNMP (port 161), TFTP (port 69), DNS (port 53),

SMTP (port 25), and POP3 (port 110). The protocol is TCP, except for Web and
DNS, for which it is possible to select either TCP or UDP. In addition, a user-
selected range of port numbers with either TCP or UDP protocol can also be
defined.
QoS
LA-110 can be configured to classify outgoing WAN traffic into three traffic
classes (queues). The user employs traffic classification to define what data is
delivered and what data is dropped if the LAN traffic exceeds the uplink capacity.
Classification is performed according to:
802.1p (according to VLAN ID)
IP precedence (bits 02 of the ToS byte)
ToS (according to IP ToS field)
DSCP (according to the Differentiated Services Codepoint, as specified in
RFC 2474).
Once the traffic classes are defined, they can be mapped, using the ATM CoS
(Figure 1-15) or WFQ (Figure 1-16) mechanism.
Traffic Class 1
VC 1
Bridge Traffic Class 2

Bridge/Router VC 2
Port
Traffic Class 3
VC 3
Figure 1-15. ATM QoS Mapping
Traffic Class 1
WFQ 1
Bridge Traffic Class 2

Bridge/Router WFQ 2 VC
Port
Traffic Class 3
WFQ 3
Figure 1-16. WFQ Mapping
Data Port Interface

The LA-110 data port is a synchronous serial port with DCE interface.
The port interface supports X.21 and V.35 interfaces, terminating in a 34-pin
female (V.35) or a 15-pin D-type female (X.21) connectors.
The port can be configured to operate at rates of N 64 kbps in the range of 64
to 2048 kbps.
The data port uses DCE timing, that is, it provides transmit and receive clock
signals to the equipment connected to the data port. The clock polarity can be

selected in accordance with the specific requirements of the equipment

connected to the data port:
Normal polarity: clock falling edge occurs in the middle of the bit interval
Inverted polarity: clock rising edge occurs in the middle of the bit interval.
Data Port Payload Processor

The data payload processor processes the data port traffic, for transmission
through the ATM processor, in accordance with the application mode selected by
the user:
AAL1 stream
Frame Relay.
AAL1 Stream Mode

In this application, the data stream at the selected data rate (n64 kbps) is
transferred transparently. Therefore, the AAL1 stream mode supports any Layer 2
protocol and only one connection can be defined on the port.
The user can however select two options related to the flow control signals
included in the data port interface:
Ignore the DCD and RTS signals: in this case, the data path to the far end is
always open.
Obey the DCD and RTS signals: in this case, the data path to the far end
opens only when the RTS signal received from the local terminal is asserted
(the local terminal indicates that it has data to send), or the far end sends
data (DCD output in the local data port is then asserted).
The data traffic is transported at the CBR service category, using AAL1
encapsulation and a cell structure similar to that specified in the ATMF CES
Interoperability Specification. The user can select between the structured and
unstructured cell structures (for the 64 kbps rate, the selection is between
structured service with, or without pointer).
Frame Relay Mode

Note
For a description of the Frame Relay environment, refer to Appendix E.
When the LA-110 data port is configured to support Frame Relay services, the
traffic is carried over AAL5, at the ATM service category selected by the user. The
user can define the desired ATM connection parameters in accordance with the
application requirements.
The number of supported DLCIs (Data Link Connection Identifiers) is eight, and
the allowed range is 16 through 991.
The user can configure the desired data rate (N 64 kbps in the range of 64 to
2048 kbps), and can also select the CRC polynomial used for error detection
(CRC-16 or CRC-32), in accordance with the requirements of the Frame Relay
equipment connected to the data port.

The user can select whether to use a Frame Relay management protocol. The
supported options include:
ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A: user side, network side or both
ANSI T1.617, Annex D: user side, network side or both
LMI: user side, network side or both
No Frame Relay management protocol.
The user can also enable CLLM.
In addition, the user can select the Frame Relay interworking mode: service
interworking per FRF.8 or network interworking per FRF.5.
The network interworking mode, defined in FRF.5, is used to interconnect
Frame Relay equipment through an ATM network. The user can configure the
way the Frame Relay traffic control parameters are converted to the cell loss
priority indicator used on the ATM connection, and back.
In the network interworking mode, the ATM connection (PVC) can be used in
two ways:
To carry either a single Frame Relay logical connection. This mode is
called one-to-one connection
To multiplex several logical connections (up to eight) on the same PVC. In
this mode, called many-to-one connection, the ATM connection
parameters defined by the user apply to all the DLCIs multiplexed on the
same PVC.
The service interworking mode, defined in FRF.8, is used to interconnect an
equipment unit with Frame Relay interface to an equipment unit with ATM
interface.
To enable interworking between Frame Relay and ATM equipment, it is
necessary to define the conversion parameters:
Protocol handling method: header encapsulation or translation between
RFC2427 (RFC1490) on the Frame Relay side to RFC2684 (RFC1483) on
the ATM side
Conversion between Frame Relay traffic control parameters and the cell
loss priority indicator used on the ATM connection. The user can select
the following parameters:
The processing of the FECN bit received from the Frame Relay
equipment
The method used to derive the cell loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent in
the ATM network cells, from the DE bit of Frame Relay frames (the
original DE bit is also mapped to the DE-FR-SSCS bit in the Frame
Relay service-specific convergence sublayer (SSCS).
Pseudowire Mode
In the pseudowire mode LA-110 performs CESoPSN tunneling according to the
IETF PWE3 CESoPSN draft for the leased-line emulation over IP, ATM or xDSL
services.

FXS User Ports

LA-110 can be ordered with four FXS independent analog voice interfaces, for direct
connection to subscribers POTS phone, fax or voiceband modem equipment.
Port Interface Characteristics

Each FXS port has a 2-wire interface with nominal impedance of 600. Each port
provides power feed and ringing to the subscribers equipment.
The nominal feed voltage is -48V
The ring voltage is 60 VRMS. The maximum ringer load is 3 Ren. The standard
ring frequency is 25 Hz, however other frequencies in the range of 15 to
50 Hz are available upon specific order.
The subscribers signaling detection is based on DC loop closure in accordance
with EIA RS-464 loop start protocol.
Voice Port Signal Processing

The input and output audio levels of each channel can be independently selected,
for best performance. The signals are then encoded by a PCM codec, using
64 kbps PCM encoding per ITU-T Rec. G.711. The codec quality enables
transparent transfer of DTMF signaling, Group III fax signals and voice band
modems.
The user can select the companding law:
A-law for use in countries using the E1 standard
-law for use in countries using the T1 standard.
Each channel includes a near-end echo canceller. The echo canceller can be
disabled when processing fax or modem signals.
The connection between the FXS ports subsystem and the ATM processor is made
through a PCM bus, and a timeslot assigner that provides routing flexibility. The bus
also transfers the channel-associated signaling information. For compatibility with
national implementations, the PSTN signaling characteristics are user-selectable.
The transport of analog voice requires LES over AAL2, which allows several voice
connections to share the same VC. The ELCP protocol can also be used.
ISDN User Port

LA-110 can be ordered with four independent ISDN BRI S0 interfaces complying
with ETSI 300012 and ITU-T Rec. I.430. The port characteristics are compatible
with many types of ISDN switches, including NTT, 5ESS, DMS-100 and NI1.
Port Interface Characteristics

Each S port supports two 64-kbps B channels, which carry payload data, and
one 16 kbps D channel, which carries signaling information.
Each port supports full duplex transmission of the 2B+D channels over
unconditioned 4-wire telephone loops (two twisted pairs). The nominal line

impedance is 100. The line data rate is 192 kbps, and the line coding is
pseudoternary.
LA-110 can be ordered configured to the following operating modes:
NT: The network termination (NT) mode enables direct connection of ISDN
terminal equipment to the S ports.
Each ISDN S NT interface provides current feed to the users terminal
equipment. The nominal feed voltage is -48 VDC.
TE: The TE (terminal equipment) mode enables the connection of the S ports
to network termination (NT) units. This is the mode that should be used when
the ports are connected to an ISDN switch.
ISDN Port Signal Processing

The total number of ISDN payload (B) channels is 8; the signaling information
carried by the D channels is multiplexed into a single 64 kbps D channel.
The connection between the ISDN ports subsystem and the ATM processor is
made through a PCM bus, and a timeslot assigner that provides routing flexibility.
The ISDN ports require use of LES over AAL2, which allows several connections to
share the same VC. The ELCP protocol can also be used. The signaling information
carried by the multiplexed 64 kbps D channel is transported transparently to the
voice gateway.
E1 User Port
LA-110 can be ordered with one user E1 port.
E1 Port Characteristics
The E1 port interface complies with ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706 and G.732
(see Appendix E for details). The jitter performance complies with ITU-T Rec. G.823.
The port has two interfaces:
120 balanced, for use over 120 twisted pairs
75 unbalanced, for use over coaxial cables.
The unit includes one RJ-45 balanced connector. The unbalanced interface is
provided via an RJ-45-to-BNC adapter cable.
To adapt the interface characteristics to the operating conditions, the user can
select the maximum line attenuation that can be compensated for by the port
interface while still meeting the BER objectives:
Maximum line attenuation of 43 dB: this attenuation corresponds to that
required of LTU interfaces. This value should be selected only for the
balanced interface.
Maximum line attenuation of 12 dB: this attenuation corresponds to that
required of DSU interfaces. This value should be selected whenever the line
attenuation does not exceed 12 dB, because it may provide better
performance on noisy lines than the 43 dB setting.
The port interface supports the following framing modes:

G732S: 16 frames per multiframe, with support for channel-associated

signaling (CAS). This mode provides 30 payload timeslots. The user can select
the CAS sampling interval in the range of 0.1 to 2.0 sec.
G732N: 2 frames per multiframe, without support for CAS. This mode
provides 31 payload timeslots.
Unframed mode (supported only when LA-110 is configured to use AAL1).
ISDN PRI remote access mode (supported only when LA-110 is configured to
use AAL2).
For the G732S and G732N framing modes, the user can select additional
parameters, in accordance with the specific application requirements:
Enable/disable the use of the CRC-4 function per ITU-T Rec. G.706. This
function enables monitoring the E1 line transmission performance.
Select the idle code inserted in empty timeslots.
Select a frame synchronization algorithm faster than that specified in the
standard.
E1 Port Signal Processing

The data stream provided by the E1 interface is sent over the PCM bus and is
connected to the ATM processor through the timeslot assigner. The timeslot
assigner provides the timeslot switching flexibility needed to meet the application
requirements:
When using the G732S or G732N framing mode over AAL1, the timeslots
carried by the E1 port are divided into timeslot bundles. Each bundle can
contain any desired number of timeslots (channels), but any timeslot may be
included in a single bundle. The selection of the timeslots in each bundle is
performed by the timeslot assigner.
Each of the bundles defined by the user can be transported over a separate
ATM connection (PVC) using the structured CES mode. In the CES mode, the
user can select the number of payload bytes inserted in each cell, to reduce
the cell filling latency. The user can also select whether to transfer the
signaling associated with these timeslots (needed when the timeslots carry
voice channels) or not (when the timeslots carry data channels or fractional
E1 service).
Another alternative available over AAL1 is the use of Dynamic Bandwidth
Allocation Circuit Emulation Service (DB-CES). In this mode, the LA-110
recognizes the activity of voice channels in accordance with their CAS (ABCD)
signaling bits, and either frees or allocates uplink bandwidth accordingly.
Therefore, DB-CES can only be used when the interface uses the G732S
framing mode. The user can freely select the ABCD bit sequence used to
identify an idle channel in accordance with the particular application. For
convenience, the user can also select one of several predefined sequences
corresponding to widely used applications:
E&M interface and PLAR (private line automatic ringdown) applications
FXO or FXS interfaces with loop start signaling
FXO or FXS interfaces with ground start signaling

R2 signaling protocol (a type of channel-associated signaling protocol for

E1 trunks that enables the setting up, metering and disconnection of
phone calls using decadic pulse dialing). This signaling protocol may be
needed when the users phones do not use DTMF signaling.
The third alternative available over AAL1 is transparent transport of the
bundles, without CAS.
When using AAL2, the LA-110 uses LES for voice support, with or without
ELCP. The user can select from a range of application identifiers, which
determine the supported signaling methods:
CAS signaling (always without ELCP). The user can customize the signaling
characteristics in accordance with national applications.
PSTN signaling (providing V5.2 functionality) for voice channels, with or
without ELCP.
Digital Signaling System 1 (DSS1) for ISDN BRI and PRI, with or without
ELCP.
ISDN PRI remote access with ELCP. For this application, the framing (the
contents of timeslot 0) and the interpretation of the signaling
information (transferred in a separate timeslot (timeslot 16) using the
common channel signaling (CCS) protocol in accordance with DSS1) are
automatically adapted to ISDN PRI standards.
The user can freely select the active timeslots carried by the E1 port
interface (same as for fractional service, except that timeslot 16 is always
included). The other timeslots are then ignored. This frees the uplink
bandwidth that may otherwise be reserved for unused timeslots.
With ELCP, the user can also specify national variants (simply by selecting the
country name), and several other global parameters:
The default voice encoding profile. The available profiles are 7 to 12 in
accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.366.1 and I.366.2; LA-110 without the
ADPCM option supports only profile 9. However, the actually used profile
is selected by the voice gateway.
ISDN activation mode: this is always non-permanent, to enable the voice
gateway to control channel utilization.

E1 UNI
LA-110 performs transparent transfer of the ATM-based E1 UNI services over
SHDSL infrastructure at the rate of 1984 kbps. The E1 UNI interface provides the
following:
No limit on number of VCs and VPs
No CBR per VC
Loopback and OAM support.
Figure 1-17 illustrates mapping of E1 UNI into SHDSL.
VC1
VC2
VC3
VC4
E1 UNI SHDSL
Figure 1-17. Mapping E1 UNI into SHDSL
T1 User Port
The T1 user interface operates at 1.544 Mbps and complies with the applicable
sections of AT&T TR-62411, ANSI T1.403, ITU Rec. G.703, G.704, and G.706. The
port interface uses the B8ZS line code for zero suppression.
The port has a balanced 100 interface. The port function (DSU or CSU) is
user-selectable, and the user can select the maximum attenuation that can be
compensated: 30 or 36 dB.
The user can select the framing mode (D4 (SF) or ESF); both modes support CAS
and the total number of timeslots that can be used for payload is 24. The user
can also select additional parameters, for example, the idle code inserted in
empty timeslots and a faster frame synchronization algorithm.
Data over E1/T1
Frame Relay
E1 and T1 user interfaces accept traffic with voice and Frame Relay services
carried by different timeslots within one bundled data stream. The user can
connect the relevant voice and data timeslots to the E1 or T1 timeslots, assign
them to the bundles and forward the bundles to the ATM uplink. E1 or T1
timeslots carrying Frame Relay services use the same routing path as the data
port traffic. This is why, configuring E1 or T1 to transfer Frame Relay traffic
disables the LA-110 data port.

Pseudowire
Pseudowire traffic can also be transferred over separate E1 or T1 timeslots. Each
pseudowire connection occupies two available ATM connections. Up to four
pseudowire connections can be created (the maximum number of regular
connections is eight).
DSP Option
To reduce the uplink bandwidth needed for voice transmission, a DSP option is
available. The DSP performs voice compression using 32 kbps ADPCM encoding
per ITU-T Rec. G.726. Three options can be ordered:
Voice compression for 4 channels, for LA-110 with FXS interfaces.
Voice compression for 8 channels, for LA-110 with ISDN interfaces.
Voice compression for 30 channels, for LA-110 with E1 interfaces.
In addition to PCM/ADPCM conversion, the digital signal processor can also
perform echo canceling for ISDN channels or for E1 voice channels.
The DSP operates on the data flowing over the PCM bus, which connects the user
port to the timeslot assigner. The user can specify the timeslots to be processed:
For the ISDN interface, echo canceling is simultaneously enabled/disabled for
all the B channels.
For E1 port, the user can specify the individual timeslots to be processed by
the echo canceller.
Note
Timeslots processed by ADPCM or echo canceller are no longer transparent,
therefore neither function may be enabled for timeslots carrying data.
Even when ADPCM is not used, echo canceling for ISDN channels can be
separately ordered.
Timing
LA-110 includes a timing subsystem that supplies all the clock signals needed by
its internal circuits. The LA-110 port and system timing modes are described
below.
Port Timing Modes

The timing modes used by the various ports are as follows:
LAN Port. The timing signals needed by the LAN port are derived from the
LA-110 system clock. The LAN port carries frame traffic, and therefore it is
essentially an asynchronous port.
Data Port. The data port is a synchronous port, and its timing mode is DCE,
that is, the port supplies transmit and receive clock signals (derived from the
system clock) to the equipment connected to this port.
FXS Ports. The FXS ports operate synchronously at the rate determined by
the LA-110 system clock.

ISDN Ports. The ISDN ports operate synchronously:

The transmit path of the ISDN ports uses the LA-110 system clock
The receive path of the ISDN ports uses the clock signal recovered from
the receive signal.
Since in most applications the ISDN ports are used in the NT mode, the users
equipment locks its timing to the incoming line signal provided by the LA-110
ISDN port. Therefore, the receive clock signal is locked to the transmit clock
signal.
E1 Port. The E1 port operates synchronously:
The transmit path uses the LA-110 system clock
The receive path uses the clock signal recovered from the receive signal.
This signal may be selected as reference source for the LA-110 system
clock.
Network Port. The network port operates synchronously. The timing mode for
an LA-110 installed on the CPE side (that is, a unit operating in the STU-R or
ATU-R mode) is as follows:
The transmit path uses the LA-110 system clock
The network port also processes the incoming signal to retrieve the
network timing reference (NTR) signal, a 8 kHz clock signal derived from
the SHDSL or ADSL signal received from the CO side equipment.
When the LA-110 network port is configured as a CO-side unit (that is,
STU-C) determines the timing of the unit at the CPE side. In this mode, it
can also be configured to provide the NTR timing information.
System Timing Mode

LA-110 supports flexible timing modes to enable hierarchical timing distribution in
the network. The LA-110 system timing can be locked to the following sources:
NTR: when the DSLAM to which the LA-110 unit is connected can supply an
NTR clock, LA-110 can extract the NTR clock and use it as its timing
reference. This is the recommended mode, because it locks the LA-110 timing
to the timing reference of the DSLAM, which is usually highly accurate.
Clock signal recovered from the E1 port receive signal (provided the LA-110
unit is equipped with an E1 port). This mode locks the LA-110 timing to the
timing reference of the far end E1 equipment, which is usually accurate.
Adaptive timing: clock locked to the average arrival rate of the ATM cells
carrying voice channels. This mode can be used to improve voice transmission
quality by decreasing the probability of buffer underflow/overflow events for
voice traffic, by ensuring that the internal PCM bus clock rate is locked to the
average rate of voice packets
Internal oscillator. This option should be used only when the LA-110 network
port is configured as the CO-side unit.

Management Subsystem
LA-110 has a local management subsystem that controls the operation of all of
its circuits. The subsystem supports various management interfaces, including
inband and out-of-band (SNMP) management, Telnet, Web browser and local
management via an ASCII terminal. RADview management software is also
available to support large networks.
The local management subsystem can communicate through the following ports:
Dedicated serial port, intended for direct connection to an ASCII terminal,
provides access to all the available configuration, diagnostics, performance
and alarm monitoring functions. The terminal management can be performed
via a command-line or menu-driven interface.
The serial port has an asynchronous RS-232 DCE interface. The serial port
rate can be set to any standard rate in the range of 300 to 115,200 bps.
Automatic detection of the incoming data rate is also supported. The user
can configure LA-110 to automatically send any alarms detected during its
operation through this port.
Inband management via the ATM uplink, using SNMP. The user can define up
to 10 network management stations to receive traps in accordance with
users criteria, however the number of management stations is not limited.
In addition to SNMP, Telnet is also supported. Telnet has the same
capabilities and uses the same procedures as the terminal.
Note
Telnet and local terminal sessions cannot be simultaneously active.
The inband management traffic uses AAL5, and is encapsulated in accordance

with RFC1483 for IP routed traffic over ATM. To avoid uplink overloading by
inband management traffic, the total management data rate is limited to
32 kbps.
The management traffic can be configured on a dedicated inband
management VCC (this is always necessary when the LAN port is configured
to use the MAC bridge); if the LAN port is configured to use the IP router, the
management traffic can use the IP router PVCs.
Out-of-band management via the LAN port using SNMP and Telnet, supports
unlimited number of managers. This option is supported when the LAN port is
configured to use the IP router.
Web-Based Configuration
The LA-110 Web-based configuration enables a quick, comfortable control of the
device. The Web user interface enables user configuration via an HTTP client. The
default address can later be changed by the user.
The LA-110 Web management utility supports the following Web browsers:
nternet Explorer 6.0 and up, running on Windows
Netscape Communicator 7.0 and up, running on Windows, HPOV or Linux
Firefox 1.0.4 and up, running on Windows
Mozilla 1.4.3 and up, running on Linux.

Two-Level Authentication
LA-110 supports two-level password protection:
User Level. The first level of access which requires a name and password, and
enables the user to view all settings, display the contents of registers etc.
and make listings and/or printouts of the settings, including statistics.
Superuser. The second level which enables the user to change parameters
related to the WAN settings of LA-110 and its voice parameters (at AAL2
level). In addition, superusers perform administration of the user names and
passwords for the first and second authority levels.
The operation of the LA-110 management subsystem and of its other circuits is
determined by software stored in the flash memory. The software can be
updated using one of the following options:
Updating from a remote central location, using TFTP. This provides the
network operator with the tools needed for effective distribution of software
updates and upgrades, and addition of new services as they become
available.
When a ConfiguRAD session is in progress, the LA-110 software can be
updated from a management station using HTTP.
Local downloading from a terminal directly connected to the LA-110 serial
control port, using the XMODEM protocol.
Note
TFTP and HTTP file transfers can also be used to upload and download the LA-
110 configuration database, and transfer the alarm and firewall logs for remote
analysis and archiving.
RADIUS Authentication
The RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) is a client/server
security protocol. Security information is stored in a central location, known as
the RADIUS server. RADIUS clients such as LA-110 communicate with the RADIUS
server to authenticate users. When the RADIUS client is enabled, login via Telnet
and ConfiguRAD is allowed only with the user name and password stored at the
RADIUS server.

Automatic Configuration Options (Plug & Play)

LA-110 is designed to enable automatic configuration from a remote location,
without requiring the intervention of an operator (plug & play functionality).
Plug & play means that after the LA-110 is installed and connected to its
operating environment, the unit needs only to be powered up. It then
automatically receives its management IP address, and all the configuration
procedures can be performed from the remote location.
LA-110 supports two automatic configuration methods:
Fully automatic configuration using DHCP in conjunction with TFTP. This
operates as follows:
When LA-110 is powered up, it automatically starts operating as a DHCP
client, and broadcasts a DHCP server discovery message via the default
management VCC of the uplink.
The DHCP server, located at an appropriate location within the operators
network management center, returns the following information:
The IP address to be configured as the LA-110 inband management
address.
The IP address of the TFTP server designated as source of LA-110
configuration database files.
The name of the configuration database file to be retrieved from the
prescribed TFTP server.
LA-110 then uses the parameters received from the DHCP server to
retrieve its configuration file, and starts using it. LA-110 adds one field to
its DataBase: FileName. The first time LA-110 receives file name, it is
saved, so that the next time it can compare. If it is the same file it is not
necessary to download this configuration again. The IP address that was
found will be used as the management IP.
An alternative mechanism based on automatic learning of its inband
management IP address. This mechanism is active as long as the default
parameter values are in effect: LA-110 then learns its inband management IP
address from the destination IP address carried in the first IP packet received
through the default inband management VCC. This is sufficient for Telnet
access.
Moreover, if the first packet is an SNMP packet, LA-110 also adds the source
IP address as a manager.
After learning these parameters, the plug-&-play functionality is disabled, and
LA-110 is subject to the regular management and configuration rules. TFTP
can then be used to download a configuration file.
Note
Whenever necessary, the plug-&-play functionality can be enabled again by
restoring the factory-default parameters.
The automatic configuration method used by LA-110 upon power-up is

determined by its factory-default parameters, specified at ordering time.

Statistics Collection
LA-110 collects performance monitoring statistics at the physical and ATM layers
for the network interface, and for each user-side port. It is also possible to
display statistics data for individual connections (AAL1, AAL5).
The data port statistics are collected over 15-minute intervals, for up to 24 hours.
The data collected for the last 24 hours is stored for display by management
functions. LA-110 also stores the statistics collected for the last six days with 24-
hour resolution.
ATM Layer
In addition to the general traffic performance monitoring statistics, LA-110 also
monitors the different ATM layers: physical, ATM layer and adaptation layer
performance and collects specific performance data for Operation, Administration
and Maintenance (OAM) traffic in accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.610:
At the port level, LA-110 collects general OAM performance data (total
number of transmitted and received OAM cells):
Loopbacks (LB) tests
Continuity check (CC)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
RDI (Remote Defect Indication) in an ATM network.
At the connection level, the LA-110 collects detailed OAM performance data.
LA-110 also can send OAM loopback requests on a specific connection and
collect loopback request and response data (both successful and failed).
E1 or T1 Ports
The statistics collected by LA-110 for the physical layer of the E1 or T1 ports are
derived from the received line signal and CRC-4, respectively CRC-6, data. The
collected parameters include code violations, local errored seconds, local severely
errored seconds, local seconds with severe framing error events, local seconds
with AIS reception, local unavailable seconds, and remote unavailable seconds.
Data Port
The statistics collected for the data port are as follows:
When using the Frame Relay mode, LA-110 collects data on the total number
of received and transmitted frames, the number of frames received and
transmitted with the congestion indicator set, and the number of frames
received and discarded.
When using the AAL1 Stream mode, LA-110 collects traffic data.
Ethernet Port
The statistics collected for the Ethernet port include the total number of received
and transmitted frames, and the number of frames received, but discarded.

Test and Diagnostics Capabilities

LA-110 has comprehensive diagnostics capabilities that include the following
types of user-controlled loopbacks:
Remote network loopback
Local data port loopback
Remote data port loopback
Local user port loopback
Remote user port loopback
Remote remote data port loopback.
Initiation of OAM loopback requests to test a VCC
Ping for IP connectivity checks.
Alarms
LA-110 stores alarms detected during its operation in a buffer that can hold up
to 200 alarms. During regular operation, the terminal shows if there are any
alarms in the alarm buffer thus notifying the local operator that alarm conditions
have been detected. The local operator can then review the contents of the
alarm buffer on the terminal, and can delete old alarms.
For on-line monitoring, the user can enable automatic sending of alarms to the
supervision terminal, Telnet hosts, and management stations (for SNMP
management purposes, LA-110 automatically converts some alarms to traps). The
user can select the types of traps to be sent to each network management
station.

1.5 Technical Specifications
ATM Features
ATM Interface UNI per ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1) for
PVCs only
AAL Support AAL1 Supports CES and DB-CES
AAL2 Supports LES and ELCP
AAL5 Supports LES and ELCP
ATM QoS Traffic Shaping Per VC
ATM Service Categories CBR Constant Bit Rate
VBR Variable Bit Rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate with minimum

desired cell rate
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
F5 OAM Cells As per ITU-T Rec. I.610
VPI Range 0 through 31
VCI Range 0 through 255
Number of VCs 8
Clock Sources Recovered from received xDSL interface (NTR)
Recovered from received E1 interface
Adaptive clock
Internal
Network Interfaces
SHDSL Interface 2-wire or 2/4-wire SHDSL per ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, Annex A, B
Line Code TC-PAM
Range See Table 1-3
Connector RJ-45
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Technical Specifications 1-47

Data Rates N 64 kbps (N 3), 200 to 2312 kbps
Handshake Protocol ITU-T Rec. G994.1
EOC Support Mandatory
ADSL Interface Per ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 Annex A, with user-selectable mode (echo canceling
and frequency division multiplex) and frequency bins
Line Code Full DMT
Connector RJ-45
Data Rates Up to 8 Mbps downstream, 1 Mbps upstream
E1 Interface Payload Rate N 64 kbps (N = 126)
Compliance ITU-T Rec. G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823
Framing G732N or G732S, with or without CRC-4
Line Rate 2.048 Mbps 32 ppm
Line Code HDB3
Line Interface 120, balanced

75, unbalanced
Receive Input Level 0 to -43 dB or 0 to -12 dB, in accordance with

user configuration
Transmit Output Level Balanced: 3V 10%

Unbalanced: 2.37V 10%
Jitter ITU-T Rec. G.823
Connectors Balanced: RJ-45

Unbalanced: two BNC (via adapter cable)
IMA Links in Group Up to 4
Line Rate 8009280 kbps
Symmetry Modes Symmetrical Configuration and Operation

Symmetrical Configuration and Asymmetrical
Operation
Asymmetrical Configuration and Operation
ATM Forum ATM Forum 1.0 (AF-PHY-0086.000)

Specifications
ATM Forum 1.1 (AF-PHY-0086.001)
1-48 Technical Specifications LA-110 Ver. 3.5

User Interfaces
Serial Data Port Data Rate N 64 kbps in the range of 64 to 2048 kbps
Data Link Protocol Frame Relay using AAL5

Transparent (AAL1 stream) using AAL1
Frame Relay Network interworking per FRF.5

Interworking Functions
Service interworking per FRF.8
Frame Relay Up to 8 DLCIs

Connections
Timing DCE
Type X.21 15-pin D-type female connector

V.35 via 34-pin VAPL female connector
LAN Port Interface 10/100BaseT Ethernet

Note: MDIX is supported by LA-110 with data and
E1 ports.
Connector RJ-45
Functionality Ethernet MAC bridge with or without VLAN support

IP router
Flow Control According to IEEE 802.3x
Maximum Frame Size 1600 bytes
IP Router Mode Routing Static, RIP I, RIP II, RIP I and RIP II, PBR
Number of Ports 1 or 2 LAN ports

(User-Configurable)
1 to 8 WAN ports
Host port (optional)
DHCP Services DHCP relay

DHCP server with up to 10 user-configurable
address pools
NAT Services Dynamic translation

Static translation
Transparent translation
Single NAT
PAT Services Port Address Translation

PPPoA Support Per RFC2364
Bridge Mode Number of Ports 1 LAN port

(User-Configurable)
1 to 8 WAN ports
ISDN BRI S0 Ports Number and Type Four S ports
Compliance ETS 300012, ITU-T Rec. I.430, compatible with

NTT, 5ESS, DMS-100 and NI1 switches
Bit Rate 192 kbps
Line Coding Pseudo-ternary
Port Mode NT with phantom feed

TE
Line Impedance 100
Connector RJ-45
Analog FXS Voice Number of Ports 4

Ports
Interface FXS interface for direct connection to a 2-wire

telephone, RS-464 loop start
Nominal Impedance 600
Return Loss (ERL) Better than 20 dB
Encoding 64 kbps PCM per ITU-T Rec. G.711 and AT&T PUB-
43801, -Law or A-Law
32 kbps ADPCM per ITU-T Rec. G.726 (ordering
option)
Frequency Response 0.5 dB: 300 to 3000 Hz

(Ref: 1020 Hz) 1.1 dB: 250 to 3400 Hz
Signal/Total Distortion 0 to -30 dBm0: better than 33 dB

(ITU-T Rec. G.712, +3 to -45 dBm0: better than 22 dB
G.713 Method 2)
Idle Channel Noise Better than -70 dBm0 (+20 dBrnc)
Transformer Isolation 1500 VRMS
Echo Cancellation In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.168, tail end,

(ordering option) maximum 4 msec
Connector RJ-11

E1 Port Compliance ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823
Framing Unframed
Framed: G732N with or without CRC-4
G732S with or without CRC-4
ISDN PRI
Line Code HDB3, AMI
Line Impedance 120, balanced or 75, unbalanced
Transmit Level Balanced, 3V 10%

Unbalanced, 2.37V 10%
Receive Level 0 to -43 dB or 0 to -12 dB, user-selectable
Connectors Balanced: RJ-45

Unbalanced: Two BNC (via adapter cable)
T1 Port Compliance AT&T TR-62411, ANSI T1.403, ITU-T Rec. G.703,

G.704, G.706
Line Code B8ZS
Line Impedance 100, balanced
Receive Input Level 0 to -36 dB with normal sensitivity

0 to -30 dB with low sensitivity
Transmit Output Level
CSU Emulation 3V 10%, software-adjustable attenuation of

-7.5, -15, or -22.5 dB
DSU Emulation 3V 10%, software-adjustable for ranges of

0 through 655 feet
Framing ESF or SF, user-selectable
Connector RJ-45

Management Management Inband: SNMP, Telnet, Web

Interfaces
Out-of-band: LAN port, serial RS-232 CONTROL
port
Remote management via uplink or user ports
Serial Port Terminal ASCII terminal
Interface Asynchronous RS-232 DCE
Baud Rate 300 bps to 115.2 kbps, and automatic detection
Connector 9-pin D-type female (LA-110 with data and E1 ports)

RJ-45 (LA-110 with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports)
General
Physical Height 44 mm (1.7 in)
Width 237 mm (9.3 in) or 217 mm (8.5 in)
Depth 170 mm (6.6 in)
Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lb)
Power Internal Power Supply AC: 100240 VAC

DC: -48 VDC (-40/-60 VDC)
External Power Supply 100 to 230 VAC (10%), 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption Internal power supply: 7W or 11W (units with

IMA WAN interface) max
External power supply: 9W max
Environment Temperature 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)
Humidity Up to 90%, non-condensing

Chapter 2
Installation and Setup
2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides installation instructions for LA-110.
The chapter presents the following information:
Safety precautions for installation personnel and users
Site requirements
General description of equipment enclosures, the available interface options,
and the LA-110 panels
Mechanical and electrical installation instructions for LA-110.
After installing the system, it is necessary to configure it in accordance with the
specific user's requirements. Two configuration methods are supported:
Manual preliminary system configuration, performed by means of a
supervision terminal directly connected to LA-110 (procedures for using the
terminal are given in Chapter 3). The software necessary for using the
terminal is stored in LA-110.
Note
If the LA-110 software is not yet loaded or must be updated, refer to Appendix C
for detailed software installation instructions.
Automatic configuration, using the plug & play capability. This capability
enables a remote management system or Telnet host to assign a
management IP address to LA-110 through the ATM uplink, and then
configure the unit through the uplink.
LA-110 also supports the downloading of a complete set of configuration
parameters by transferring a configuration file using TFTP.
After the preliminary configuration and during routine operations, LA-110 can
also be managed by means of Telnet hosts or SNMP-based network management
stations, e.g., RADview. Refer to the User's Manual of the network management
station for operating instructions; Telnet hosts use the supervision terminal
procedures.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Introduction 2-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup Installation and Operation Manual
Safety Precautions
No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed by

either the operator or the user; such activities may be performed only by skilled
service personnel who are aware of the hazards involved.
Warning Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and
maintenance of this product.
For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault
condition, e.g., a lightning stroke or contact with high-voltage power lines, occurs
on the cables connected to the equipment, the LA-110 unit must be properly
grounded at any time. Any interruption of the protective (grounding) connection
Grounding inside or outside the equipment, or the disconnection of the protective ground
terminal can make this equipment dangerous. Intentional interruption is
prohibited.
Dangerous voltages may be present on the cables connected to LA-110.

Never connect cables to an LA-110 unit if it is not properly installed and
grounded.
Warning
Disconnect all the cables connected to the connectors of the LA-110 before
disconnecting the LA-110 power cable.
Before switching on this equipment and before connecting any other cable, the
protective ground terminal of LA-110 must be connected to a protective ground.
The grounding connection is made through the power cables. Therefore:
1. The DC power cable of the external AC power supply unit must be connected
to the LA-110 POWER connector.
2. One end of the AC power cable connected to the AC power supply unit, and
the plug at other end must always be inserted in a socket (outlet) with a
protective ground contact.
3. The protective action must not be negated by use of an extension cord
(power cable) without a protective conductor (grounding).
Whenever LA-110 units are installed in a rack, make sure that the rack is properly
grounded and connected to a reliable, low-resistance grounding system.
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

An electrostatic discharge occurs between two objects when an object carrying
static electrical charges touches, or is brought near enough, the other object. Static
electrical charges appear as result of friction between surfaces of insulating
materials, separation of two such surfaces and may also be induced by electrical
fields.
Routine activities such as walking across an insulating floor, friction between
garment parts, friction between objects, etc. can easily build charges up to levels
that may cause damage, especially when humidity is low.
2-2 Introduction LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Whenever feasible, during installation works use standard ESD protection wrist
straps to discharge electrostatic charges. It is also recommended to use garments
and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistance,
yet are not insulators.
It is also important to make sure that other equipment, in particular customers
data equipment connected to the LA-110 data port, is properly grounded
(connected to the protective, or safety, ground) before attempting to connect it
to LA-110.
2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites
Physical Requirements
The LA-110 device is intended for installation on desktop, 19 racks and walls. All
the connections are made at the rear panel. A hardware kit (RM-33-2) for
mounting one or two LA-110 units into a 19 rack is available from RAD. Drilling
template for wall installation is provided at the end of the manual.
Power Requirements
Internal Power Supply

AC-powered LA-110 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 ft) of an
easily-accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the voltage in
accordance with LA-110 nominal supply voltage.
DC-powered LA-110 units require a -48 VDC power source, which must be
adequately isolated from the main supply.
External Power Supply

LA-110 is powered from AC mains, through an external AC power supply unit that
supplies the regulated DC voltages needed by the LA-110 internal circuits. The
external AC power supply unit connects to the AC source through a 1.5m (5 feet)
cable, terminated in a standard IEC three-pronged plug, and connects to LA-110
through an integral DC cable terminated in a multipin connector.
LA-110 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 feet) of an easily accessible
grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the required AC supply voltage, in the
range of 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The current version of LA-110 is supplied
with an AC power supply unit that supplies +3.3V, +5V and -48 VDC (these ratings
are listed on the AC power supply unit). These units are easily identified by the
type of power connector: 6-pin connector.
Note
The lower negative voltage of the previous versions results in a lower maximum
range for FXS voice and ISDN S interfaces. This is relevant only when such
interfaces are installed in LA-110.
However, it is not allowed (nor is it possible) to connect an LA-110 unit with one
type of connector to an AC power supply unit with the other type of connector.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-3

Uplink and User Connections

This section presents general requirements regarding the connections to the
various LA-110 interfaces.
Note
Your unit cannot include all the interfaces listed below.
If you need specific information regarding pin allocations in the LA-110 interface
connectors and wiring data for adapter cables, refer to Appendix A.
Uplink Connections
SHDSL or ADSL Interface

LA-110 may be ordered with an SHDSL 2-wire or 4-wire uplink interface. The
interface is terminated in the following connectors:
Single RJ-45 for the regular ADSL or SHDSL interface
Two RJ-45s, each serving four SHDSL interfaces for IMA (4 2-wire SHDSL)
interface.
Each of the interfaces listed above is intended for operation over twisted pairs
meeting the requirements of the corresponding standards (typically, this means
24 AWG (0.5 mm) or 26 AWG (0.4 mm) unloaded twisted pairs).
E1 Interface
The E1 uplink interface can be connected to the unbalanced coaxial cables via the
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable.
The interface is protected against surges in accordance with ITU-T Rec. K.21.
User E1 and T1 Connections

The LA-110 user E1 port has two interfaces:
120 balanced interface for operation over two twisted pairs, terminated in
an RJ-45 eight-pin connector
75 unbalanced interface for operation over coaxial cables, provided via
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable.
LA-110 user T1 port has a 100 balanced interface for operation over two
twisted pairs, terminated in an RJ-45 eight-pin connector.
The LA-110 E1 and T1 interfaces must not be directly connected to unprotected
public telecommunication networks. The connection to such networks must be
made through a network termination unit that provides separation between the
interface conductors and the telecommunication network conductors in
accordance with the applicable local regulations.
User Synchronous Data Port Connections

The LA-110 synchronous data port supports the following DCE interfaces:
V.35, via 34-pin female connector
X.21, via 15-pin, D-type connector.
2-4 Site Requirements and Prerequisites LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LAN Port Connections

The LAN port has a 10/100BaseTX Ethernet interface terminated in an RJ-45
connector, for connection to LANs operating on UTP media.
The LAN connector of the LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports is wired
as a station port, for connection through a straight (point-to-point) cable to an
Ethernet hub port.
The LAN connector of the LA-110 units with data and E1 user ports supports
automatic MDIX, correcting connection polarity errors. This allows using straight
or crossed cables for the LAN connection.
ISDN Port Connections

LA-110 can be ordered with four ISDN S interfaces. Each interface is terminated
in an RJ-45 connector, and requires two twisted pairs meeting the requirements
of the applicable standards (typically, this means 24 AWG (0.5 mm) or 26 AWG
(0.4 mm) unloaded twisted pairs).
The connections of the ISDN S ports depend on the interface type, TE or NT:
NT interface: intended for connection to users equipment having ISDN S TE
ports, for example, to ports of users ISDN terminals. The connection is made
by a straight cable (wired point-to-point). When using the NT interface, each
port provides current feed to the users equipment.
TE interface: intended for connection to users equipment having ISDN S NT
ports, for example, to ports of an ISDN switch. The connection is made by a
cross cable (see Appendix A). When using the TE interface, the ports do not
require external feed current, neither do they close a DC current loop.
Management Connections
The out-of-band management port of LA-110 has a serial RS-232 asynchronous
DCE interface terminated in a 9-pin D-type connector, designated CONTROL.
Front and Rear Panel Clearance

Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operator access. Allow at
least 10 cm (4 inches) clearance at the rear of the unit for interface cable
connections. However, during installation, replacement and cable connections a
larger clearance; at least 90 cm (36 inches) is needed.
Ambient Requirements
The ambient operating temperature of LA-110 is 0 to 50C (32 F to 122 F), at a
relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing. LA-110 is cooled by free air
convection.
2.3 Package Contents

The LA-110 package includes the following items:
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Package Contents 2-5

LA-110 unit
AC power supply unit (for LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces)
AC power cord
AC/DC adapter plug (for LA-110 units with data and E1 interfaces)
RM-33-2 kit for rack installation (if ordered)
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable for unbalanced E1 uplink or user interface.
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT cable for ASCII terminal connection (for LA-110 units with
FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces).
2.4 Unpacking LA-110

1. Unpack the equipment.
2. Take out the LA-110 carefully and place it securely on a clean and flat
surface.
3. Inspect the product for damage.
4. Report any damage found immediately.
2.5 LA-110 Enclosures

This section presents a physical description of the various versions of LA-110
units.
All the connections are made to connectors located on the rear panel. LA-110
has two different enclosures, depending on the user interface type:
Data and E1 user interfaces: built-in power supply and 9-pin D-type female
control terminal port
FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI user interfaces: external power supply and RJ-45
control terminal port.
2-6 LA-110 Enclosures LA-110 Ver. 3.5

V.35
E1 3 6 4 5
CONTROL
DCE
SHDSL
DCE
SHDSL Network, E1 User and V.35 Data Ports
SHDSL Network and Four ISDN Ports
3 4
CONTROL E1
X.21
DCE
DCE
1 SHDSL 2
IMA Network, E1 User and X.21 Data Ports
MAIN SUB V.35

E1 E1
CONTROL
DCE
DCE
E1 Network, E1 User and V.35 Data Ports
Figure 2-1. Typical LA-110 Rear Panes
Table 2-1. LA-110 Rear Panel Components
Item Function
POWER connector Power connector

DCE connector 34-pin (V.35) or 15-pin D-type (X.21) female connector for connection to the
user synchronous data port
ETH or LAN connector RJ-45 connector for connection to the LAN port, which has a 10/100BaseTX
station interface
SHDSL or ADSL connector RJ-45 connector for connection to the uplink interface. The interface type is
marked above the connector, and the functions of the pins in this connector are
marked under the connector
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 LA-110 Enclosures 2-7

Item Function
CONTROL connector 9-pin, D-type, female connector for connecting LA-110 with data and E1
interfaces to supervisory terminal port, which has an RS-232 DCE interface
RJ-45 connector for connecting LA-110 with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces
to supervisory terminal port, which has an RS-232 DCE interface
ISDN connector 1, 2, 3, 4 Four RJ-45 connectors for connection to the LA-110 user ISDN ports
FXS connector 1, 2, 3, 4 Four RJ-11 connectors for connection to the LA-110 user analog FXS ports
E1/T1 connector RJ-45 E1 or T1 connector. The uplink interface is designated as MAIN, the user
unterface is designated as USER.
2.6 Connecting the Interface Cables

Before starting, refer to the site installation plan and identify the cables intended
for connection to this LA-110 unit.
Connecting Uplink
See general information on uplink connections in the Uplink and User
Connections subsection of this chapter.
The connection to the uplink port is made to the RJ-45 connector marked ADSL,
SHDSL or E1/T1 MAIN, in accordance with the interface type installed in LA-110.
Connecting User Interfaces

See general information on connections in the Uplink and User Connections
subsection of this chapter. Ignore sections covering connections to ports not
included on your LA-110 unit.
Connecting Cables to E1 User Port

The E1 or T1 user port terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 balanced connector.
Unbalanced E1 interface is provided via CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable.
To connect the balanced E1 or T1 interface:

Connect the E1 line to the RJ-45 connector designated E1/T1.
To connect the unbalanced E1 interface:

1. Connect the RJ-45 connector of the adapter cable to the RJ-45 port
designated E1.
2. Connect the receive cable to the red coaxial connector of the adapter cable.
3. Connect the transmit cable to the green coaxial connector of the adapter
cable
2-8 Connecting the Interface Cables LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Connecting Cable to LAN Port

The connection to the LAN port is made to the RJ-45 connector designated LAN.
Automatic MDIX function of the LA-110 units with data and E1 ports allows using
straight and cross cables for LAN connection.
For the LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports use one of the following
connection methods:
Use a standard (station) cable wired point-to-point for direct connection to
an Ethernet hub port.
Use a cross cable for connection to another station port, e.g., to a PC with
Ethernet NIC.
Connecting Cable to User Synchronous Data Port

The user data port has a 34-pin or 15-pin D-type female connector, designated
DCE.
To connect the user data port:

Connect the users equipment using appropriate cables.
Note
To avoid ESD at the user data port:
It is recommended that the DTE device (to be connected to the LA-110 data
port) be connected to the protective earth (safety ground).
Verify that the LA-110 main power plug is disconnected from the wall socket.
Connect the serial data cable to LA-110.
Connect the power cable to LA-110.
Connecting Cables to ISDN S Ports

ISDN S ports have RJ-45 8-pin connectors. Each ISDN S module has four
ports, identified by their number, 1 to 4.
To connect the ISDN S ports:

Connect the users equipment using the prescribed cables. See ISDN Port
Connections for cabling guidelines.
Connecting a Terminal
When using a supervision terminal (including a PC running a terminal emulation
program), connect it to the DB-9 connector, designated DCE CONTROL, by means
of a straight cable (for LA-110 units with data and E1 interfaces).
For the LA-110 with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces, connect the CONTROL port
to the RJ-45 connector, designated CONTROL, by means of the
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT cable.
Caution Terminal cables must have a frame ground connection. Use ungrounded cables
when connecting a supervisory terminal to a DC-powered unit with floating
ground. Using improper terminal cable may result in damage to the supervisory
terminal port.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables 2-9

Connecting LA-110 to Management Station or Telnet Host

The link to network management stations using SNMP, and/or to Telnet hosts can
be provided in two ways:
Inband, through the ATM uplink. This connection is automatically available
when the uplink cable is connected, provided IP connectivity to the
management station or Telnet host is available through the uplink port.
Through the LAN interface, provided IP connectivity to the management
station or Telnet host is available through the LAN this port is connected to
(for example, when the management station or Telnet host is attached to the
LAN).
This completes the installation of the LA-110 unit. Refer to Chapter 3 for turn-on
and preliminary configuration instructions.
2.7 Connecting the Power
Connecting the Internal Power Supply

LA-110 with the data and E1 interfaces accepts either 110240 VAC or
-48/-60 VDC power through the same power inlet.
Before connecting or disconnecting any communication cable, the unit must be

earthed by connecting its power cord to a power outlet with an earth terminal,
and by connecting the earth terminal on the panel (if provided) to a protective
Warning earth.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
instrument) or disconnecting of the protective earth terminal can make this unit
dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Connecting AC Power
AC power is supplied to LA-110 through a standard 3-prong socket.
AC power should be supplied via a 1.5m (5 ft) standard power cable terminated
by a standard 3-prong socket. A cable is provided with the unit.
To connect AC power:
1. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the LA-110 rear panel.
2. Connect the power cable to the mains outlet.
The unit turns on automatically upon connection to the mains.
Connecting DC Power
A special IEC 60320 adapter for the -48 VDC (-40/-60 VDC) power connection is
supplied with the unit.
2-10 Connecting the Power LA-110 Ver. 3.5

To connect DC power:
Refer to the DC power supply connection supplement for instructions how to
wire the DC adapters, and to the Handling Energized Products section.
Connecting the External Power Supply

LA-110 with the FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces receive power from an external
power supply (see Figure 2-2). Any interruption of the protective (grounding)
conductor (inside or outside the device) or disconnecting the protective earth
terminal can make the device dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Before switching this LA-110 unit on and before connecting any other cable,
LA-110 protective earth terminals must be connected to protective ground. This
connection is made through the DC and AC power cables and the AC power
Warning
supply unit. The AC power cord plug should only be inserted in an outlet provided
with a protective ground (earth) contact. The protective action must not be
negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a protective
conductor (grounding).
Dangerous voltages may be present on the cables connected to LA-110:
Never connect cables to an LA-110 unit if it is not properly installed and
grounded. This means that its power cable must be inserted in an outlet
provided with a protective ground (earth) contact before connecting any user
or network (uplink) cable to LA-110.
Disconnect all the cables connected to the connectors of the LA-110 before
disconnecting the LA-110 power cable.
Caution LA-110 does not have a power on/off switch, and therefore it will start operating
as soon as power is applied. It is recommended to use an external power on/off
switch to control the connection of power to the LA-110. For example, the circuit
breaker used to protect the supply line to the LA-110 may also serve as the
on/off switch.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Connecting the Power 2-11

To connect the external power supply:

1. Push the 6-pin connector (see Figure 2-2) of the cable, on the output of the
external power supply unit (P/S-AC/5/3.3/-48) that RAD supplies, into POWER
on the back panel of LA-110, until it snaps into place.
2. Connect the 3-pronged input plug of the external power supply unit to a
2m (6.6 ft) standard power cable, and then to the mains outlet.
Figure 2-2. External Power Supply Unit
First, connect the external power supply to LA-110, and only then connect the
Warning external power supply to the mains. Not following this procedure can cause a
unit malfunction.
2-12 Connecting the Power LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Chapter 3
Operation
This chapter provides general operating instructions and preliminary configuration
instructions for LA-110 units. For a complete description of LA-110 management
menus, refer to Chapter 4.
3.1 Turning LA-110 On

To turn on LA-110:
Connect the power cord to the mains.
The PWR indicator lights up and remains lit as long as LA-110 receives power.
LA-110 requires no operator attention once installed, with the exception of
occasional monitoring of front panel indicators. Intervention is only required
when LA-110 must be configured to its operational requirements, or diagnostic
tests are performed.
3.2 Front Panel Indicators

Figure 3-1 shows the LA-110 front panel. The front panel includes LED indicators.
Table 3-1 explains the functions of the front panel LEDs.
LA-110
PWR
WAN
LAN
TST
E1
I
Figure 3-1. LA-110 Front Panel (E1 User Interface and X.21 Data Port)
Table 3-1. LA-110 Front Panel Indicators
Indicator Function
PWR (green) ON LA-110 is powered up

TST (yellow) ON Loopback is active
I (yellow) ON I-signal is active.
Note: The I LED is available only for the units with X.21 data port.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Front Panel Indicators 3-1

Chapter 3 Operation Installation and Operation Manual
Note If the connection type of the AAL1 data stream is not set to Structured (Signal
Transport), the I LED is constantly ON, because the I-signal is constantly active. In
the Structured (Signal Transport) connection type the I-signal follows the state of
the C-signal of the remote unit, changing the I LED indication accordingly. See the
Connection (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial > Connection) and Serial
(Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial) menus for detailed description of the
control signal transfer mechanism.
Table 3-1. LA-110 Front Panel Indicators (Cont.)
Indicator Function
WAN (red/green) ON (green) Uplink (WAN side) is synchronized and is ready for normal
operation
ON (red) Uplink is not synchronized
Blinks (green/red) Uplink synchronization process is in progress.
E1 (red/green) ON (green) E1 interface is synchronized
ON (red) Loss of synchronization is detected on E1 interface
Note: The E1 LED is available only for the units with E1 user interface.
LAN (green) ON Transmit and/or receive activity is detected on the LAN port
WAN Interface Status Indications

If the connection to the ATM network has not yet been established, the WAN
indicator lights steadily in red.
If the equipment at the other end of the uplink is operational and the uplink is
physically connected, the WAN indicator should display the following indications:
When the uplink synchronization process starts, the WAN indicator starts
flashing (alternating between red and green).
After uplink synchronization process is completed, the WAN indicator lights
steadily in green.
If you intend to use plug-&-play automatic configuration, make sure the WAN
indicator lights steadily in green.
LAN Interface Status Indications

If the LA-110 LAN port is not yet connected to an active LAN, the LAN indicator is
off.
After the connection is made and the autonegotiation process is successfully
completed, the LAN indicator flashes at the rate of the traffic, in accordance with
the traffic flow through the LA-110 LAN interface.
3-2 Front Panel Indicators LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation
3.3 Configuration Alternatives

LA-110 can be managed using various ports and applications:
Local out-of-band management via an ASCII terminal connected to the RS-
232 port. Usually, preliminary configuration of the system parameters is
performed via ASCII terminal. Once the LA-110 host IP parameters are set, it
is possible to access it via Telnet, ConfiguRAD or RADview-EMS/IAD for further
configuration.
Remote out-of-band management via the LAN port
Remote inband management via the ATM uplink. Remote management is
performed using Telnet, Web browser or RADview-EMS (RADs SNMP-based
element management system).
The following functions are supported by the LA-110 management software:
Viewing system information
Modifying configuration and mode of operation, including setting system
default values and resetting the unit
Monitoring LA-110 performance
Initiating connectivity tests
Uploading and downloading software and configuration files.
Configuring LA-110 via Terminal

LA-110 includes a V.24/RS-232 asynchronous DCE port, designated CONTROL and
terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. The control port continuously
monitors the incoming data stream and immediately responds to any input string
received through this port.
The LA-110 control port can be configured to communicate at the following
rates: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.
To start a terminal control session:

1. Make sure all LA-110 cables and connectors are properly connected.
2. Connect LA-110 to a PC equipped with an ASCII terminal emulation application
(for example, Windows Hyper Terminal or Procomm).
3. Turn on the control terminal PC and set its port parameters to 115,200 baud,
8 bits/character, 1 stop bit, no parity.
4. Set the terminal emulator to ANSI VT100 emulation (for optimal view of
system menus).
5. When the initialization and self-test are over, a user name and password
entry fields are displayed.
Login
To prevent unauthorized modification of the operating parameters, LA-110
supports two access levels, which determine the functions the users can perform
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuration Alternatives 3-3

using supervisory terminals, Telnet hosts and Web browsers. The access level is
determined by the user name, and the protection against unauthorized access is
conferred by passwords.
The access levels supported by LA-110 are described in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. LA-110 Access Levels
Access Level Default User Default Functions Accessible at this Level

Name Password
Administrator superuser 1234 All the functions
Monitor user 1234user Only functions that do not affect equipment

configuration and service
Note
Pay attention to case: the user names and passwords are case-sensitive.
After the login LA-110 requires that you change the default password (forced
login).
To login:
1. Type the default user name, superuser or user, and press <Enter>.
2. Type the default password:
1234 for the superuser mode
1234user for the user mode.
LA-110 requests you to change the default password.
3. Select Change Password.
The Change Password menu is displayed (see Figure 3-2).
4. From the Change Password menu, perform the following:
1. Select Password and enter a new password. Pay attention to case.
2. Select Confirm Password and type the new password a second time for
confirmation.
3. Type S to save the password.
LA-110 displays the following message: New password was
successfully changed.
5. Press <Esc> to proceed to the Main menu.
3-4 Configuration Alternatives LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110
Configuration>System
1. Authorization level > (Superuser)
2. Username ... (superuser)
3. Password ... ()
4. Confirm Password ... ()
>
User must change password on first login

ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; @-debug
Figure 3-2. Change Password Menu
Choosing Options
How to use the terminal to perform a desired activity:

To select a menu item, type the corresponding line number and then press
<Enter>. This will either
display a submenu or a parameter selection screen
or
let you type the (free text) parameter value in the same row
or
toggle the current value of the corresponding parameter (relevant to
ENABLE/DISABLE or ON/OFF selections).
The type of response to be expected after selecting a menu item is indicated
as follows:
> Selecting that item will display a submenu or a parameter

selection screen.
... Selecting that item will let you type the desired value in the
same line.
Nothing When neither symbol is displayed, selecting that item will toggle
the current selection, now shown in brackets (for example, this
will change ENABLE to DISABLE or vice versa).
When a menu does not fit on one screen (because it includes many lines), it
is displayed on two consecutive pages. In this case, you will see (N) after
the last line on the first page and (P) after the last line on the second page:
While on the first page, press N to display the second page
While on the second page, press P to return to the first page.
When a configuration screen is organized as a table, a special set of keys is
used for navigation within the table (such screens always have a ? (help)
option that displays these keys). The following keys may be used for
navigation within tables:

L move to the left R move to the right

^D scroll down ^U scroll up
In addition, the following shortcuts are also available:

Tab select the next cell that may be changed
M switch to the menu mode
G followed by <row number>,<col number> select a specific cell. For
example, type G2,5 to select the fifth cell in the second row.
The current value of a parameter is listed within parentheses ( ). To change a
parameter value on a parameter selection screen:
Type the line number corresponding to the desired value, and then press
<Enter>
To enter a value which requires free text entry, type in the desired string
and then press <Enter>. Use backspace to erase the current string.
Note that whenever applicable, the allowed range of values of a
parameter is listed within square brackets [ ].
The entry is checked after pressing <Enter>, and it is accepted only if it is
valid:
If you make an error, for example, if you press a key not active on the
current screen or select an invalid parameter value, an ERROR indicator
appears in the right-hand corner. This indicator disappears as soon as
you make a correct operation.
If you select a parameter value incompatible with the current operating
state or other parameters, you will see a message that explains the error.
When done with the current screen, press <Esc> to return to the previous
screen, or type ! to return directly to the main menu.
Ending a Terminal Configuration Session
To end the current terminal session:

Type &.
After a session is ended, it is necessary to enter again a valid user name and
password to start a new session.
Configuring LA-110 via Web Browsers
Web Browser Requirements

The following Web browsers can be used to access the LA-110 supervision utility
from any location that enables access to the LA-110 using Internet protocols.
Internet Explorer 6.0, running on Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows
XP
Netscape Communicator 7.1, running on Windows NT or Unix.

However, before using Web access, it is necessary to perform a preliminary

configuration of LA-110.
When using a Web browser, pay attention to the following points:
Enable scripts
Configure the firewall that is probably installed on your PC to allow access to
the destination IP address
Disable pop-up blocking software (such as Google Popup Blocker); you may
also have to configure your spyware/adware protection program to accept
traffic from/to the destination IP address
Browsers store the last viewed pages in a special cache. To prevent
configuration errors, it is absolutely necessary to flush the browsers cache
whenever you return to the same screen.
General Web Browsers Operating Procedures
To manage LA-110 via Web browser:

1. Open the Web browser.
2. Enter the IP address of LA-110 in the address field of the browser in the
following format: http://IP address (IP address stands for the actual LA-110
IP address).
3. After entering the address, press <Enter> to command the browser to
connect.
4. After the opening window is displayed, click LOGIN.
5. Perform log-in.
You will see the main menu.
6. Use standard browser operating procedures to perform the desired activities.

Figure 3-3. Web Browser Access, Typical Opening Window
Figure 3-4. Web Browser Access, Typical Log-in Window

Figure 3-5. Web Browser Access, Typical Main Menu Window
Navigating ConfiguRAD Menus

ConfiguRAD is a Web-based remote access terminal management software. It
provides a user-friendly interface for configuring, collecting statistics and
performing diagnostic tests on the LA-110 units.
To choose an option:
1. Click a link in the ConfiguRAD screen to display the next menu.
2. Once the target screen is displayed, select a value from the drop-down box or
enter it in a text box.
Some of the LA-110 menus have a 'Save' option. When choosing options from
these menus, you must confirm your choice by selecting 'Save', otherwise your
entry will be ignored.
At the left-hand bottom corner ConfiguRAD provides some auxiliary management
tools:
Status shows the number of users currently managing LA-110
Trace opens an additional pane for system messages, progress indicators
(ping, software and configuration file downloads) and alarms. It is
recommended to keep the trace pane open all the time.
Refresh All refreshes all ConfiguRAD display elements.

Logging Out
To end the current session:

In the Main menu, click Logout.
Note
LA-110 allows only one management session to be active at a time. If the
Web-based management session was not ended properly (for example, by closing
the Web browser window), you have to wait five minutes before attempting the
next log-in. If you try to log in during the five-minute security timeout, LA-110
does not allow to proceed to the Main menu, displaying Too Many Users
message. Likewise, the Web-based management session cannot be initiated, if a
terminal or Telnet session is still in progress.
3.4 Using Plug & Play
Purpose
The purpose of the plug & play function is to enable fully automatic configuration
of a newly installed LA-110 unit from a remote location, inband, through the
same uplink that is used to connect LA-110 to the ATM network.
Plug & play is actually achieved by performing the following sequence of
operations:
1. Automatic assignment of inband management IP address to LA-110.
2. Use of inband management to perform manual configuration of parameters
(using a Telnet host, or an SNMP-based network management station) and/or
download a complete configuration database (using TFTP) that contains all
the parameters needed by the specific LA-110 to provide the subscribed
services to the users equipment connected to its ports, in accordance with
the terms of the service contract.
Note
LA-110 software can also be updated using TFTP for downloading.
When Plug & Play can be Used

The plug & play function is active whenever the LA-110 uses the factory-default
parameters. The specific parameter values necessary for plug & play are as
follows:
Inband management VCC: 0.32 and enabled
Inband management IP address: 0.0.0.0.
You can restore the factory-default parameters at any time, by selecting Factory
Default in the Configuration > System menu.
Note
If you cannot communicate with LA-110, restore the factory-default parameters
via Boot Manager, using the procedure of Appendix D.
3-10 Using Plug & Play LA-110 Ver. 3.5

How Plug & Play is Started

When the default parameter values are loaded, LA-110 learns its new inband
management IP address from the destination IP address carried in the first IP
packet received through the default inband management VCC (the address is
usually set via the ATM Address menu, Configuration > System > Management >
Inband Management > ATM Address). This is sufficient for Telnet access.
Moreover, if the first packet is an SNMP packet, LA-110 also adds the source IP
address as a manager.
After learning these parameters, the plug & play functionality is disabled, and
LA-110 is subject to the regular management and configuration rules.
Note
Whenever necessary, the plug & play functionality can be enabled again by
restoring the factory-default parameters by selecting Reset from the
Configuration > System menu.
Preparations
The plug & play function is immediately available after the uplink is synchronized
(this is indicated by the WAN indicator lighting steadily in green).
Procedure for Plug & Play

To use Plug & Play:
1. Use the plug & play function to assign an IP address to the inband
management port of the LA-110 unit without the intervention of a local
operator. For example, send via Telnet a command through the inband
management VCC (or the RADview station may try to contact the LA-110 via
SNMP).
2. Use the procedure described in Appendix C to download a configuration file
using TFTP. At this stage, the downloading can also be made through the
LA-110 LAN port.
The new configuration takes effect after LA-110 reboots (this occurs
automatically after successful downloading).
3.5 General Configuration Procedure

LA-110 configuration procedures are performed in the following order:
1. Define the general parameters
2. Define the system parameters
3. Configure the physical parameters of each port
4. Configure the port connections.
5. Configure other parameters and characteristics.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 General Configuration Procedure 3-11

Table 3-3 presents the steps needed to perform a general configuration

procedure. Note that the actual steps needed for your particular installation may
be different from the list appearing in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. General LA-110 Configuration Procedure
Step Action Using ...
1. Reset the database to the default Configuration > System > Factory Default
parameters
2. Define control port characteristics Configuration > System > Control Port
3. Set LA-110 system time and date Configuration > System > Date & Time
4. Define LA-110 system characteristics Configuration > System > General Parameters
5. Define the parameters of the various physical

interfaces:
ATM Configuration > Physical Layer > ATM
Network port Configuration > Physical Layer > SHDSL/ADSL/E1
LAN port Configuration > Physical Layer > LAN
DATA port Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial
User port(s) Configuration > Physical Layer > E1/T1/ISDN/FXS
6. Define LA-110 reference clock source Configuration > System > Clock
7. Configure IMA group (in necessary) Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA
8. Assign timeslots to bundles Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle
9. Define E1 or T1 application mode (TDM over Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle
ATM, Frame Relay or Pseudo Wire)
10. Define connections:
User Configuration > Logical Layer > User
Data Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial
11. Define bridging data Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Bridge
Parameters
12. Define routing data Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Router
Parameters
13. Configure bridge or router interfaces Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration
14. Define management ATM address and Configuration > System > Management > Inband
management VCC Management > ATM Address
15. Define SNMP community Configuration > System > Management > SNMP >
Community
16. Define management stations Configuration > System > Management > SNMP >
Manager List
3-12 General Configuration Procedure LA-110 Ver. 3.5

3.6 Menu Structure

Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7, Figure 3-8, Figure 3-9, Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12, Figure 3-
13, Figure 3-14, Figure 3-15, Figure 3-17, Figure 3-18, Figure 3-19, Figure 3-20,
Figure 3-21, Figure 3-22, Figure 3-23 and Figure 3-24 below illustrate the LA-110
management utility.
Main Menu Inventory

Inventory System Parameters
Configuration Physical Configuration
Monitoring
Diagnostics
S/W & File Transfer
Figure 3-6. Main Menu and Inventory
General Parameters
Coding Law
Jitter Buffer [1-20]
OAM Type
Configuration System OAM Fail Indication
General Parameters Adaptation Layer
System
Clock Pseudo Wire Mode
Physical Layer
Management LES Default VPI
Logical Layer
Control Port LES Default VCI
Applications
Date & Time Application Identifier
Factory Default Call Termination Mode
Reboot QoS Classification
Debug mode Mapping Mechanism
Nationality
Port 1 in Interface
Port 2 in Interface
Port 3 in Interface FXS or ISDN User Interface
Port 4 in Interface
CAS Signaling
SSCS Parameters
CPS Parameters
AAL2 Shaping Mode CAS Signaling
ISDN Activation Mode Normal
Ringing
Clock On Hook
System Clock Off Hook
NTR Reversed Polarity
Control Port SSCS Parameters

Encoding Selection
Baud Encoding Profile
Data DSP Gains
Parity
Terminal Terminal Change Password
Change Password Authorization Level
Date & Time Pop Alarm User Name
Log off Time [1-99] Current Password
Date
Password
Time
Confirm Password
Max Number of Login
Failure
Figure 3-7. Configuration > System Menu (General Parameters, Clock, Control Port, Date & Time)
Note The following parameters are available only if the adaptation layer is set to AAL2:
LES Default VP, LES Default VPI, LES Default VCI, Application Identifier, Nationality,
AAL2 Shaping Mode, SSCS Parameters, CPS Parameters, ISDN Activation Mode.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Menu Structure 3-13

Community
Management Device Information Read Community
Device Information Description Read Write Community
SMNP Name Trap Community
Inband Management ILMI Community
Host SNMP
Community Manager List
Manager List Index
IP Address
Inband Management Mask All
ATM Address General Traps Mask
ILMI Address Alarm Traps Mask
Manual Alarm Traps Mask
Host
IP Address
ATM Address
IP Mask IP Address
Default Gateway DHCP Client
Management VCC
Encapsulation Management VCC
VPI
Management Access VCI
ILMI Address
VPI Status
VCI Continuity Check
Status LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Service Category
PCR
Figure 3-8. Configuration > System (Management)
Physical Layer ATM

ATM Cell Scrambling
SHDSL (ADSL, E1) Idle Cell (CLP)
FXS (E1, T1 or ISDN)
LAN SHDSL
Serial Mode
Power Backoff
Standard
Line Probe Enable
Snext Margin
Current Margin
Asym Psd
Min Rate
Max Rate
ADSL
Framing Type
Trellis Code
Transmission Mode
Standard Compliance
Maximum Bits per Bin
Tx Frequency Bin - Start
Tx Frequency Bin - End
Rx Frequency Bin - Start
Rx Frequency Bin - End
Tx Power Attenuation
Pilot Tone Request
E1
Scramble
Idle Cell CLP
Shaping Mode
Traffic Shaping
Framing
Line Code
Receiver Sensitivity
Synchronization
Idle Code
CRC-4
Figure 3-9. Configuration > Physical Layer (Network Interface)
3-14 Menu Structure LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Physical Layer E1
Framing
ATM Line Code
SHDSL (ADSL, E1) Receiver Sensitivity
FXS (E1, T1 or ISDN) Synchronization
Serial Idle Code
LAN CRC-4
Signaling Sample Time
T1
Framing
Line Code
Receiver Sensitivity
Line Build-Out
Synchronization
Idle Code
Signaling Sample Time
Phantom
FXS Port 1 in Interface
Tx Gains Port 2 in Interface
Rx Gains Port 3 in Interface
Port 4 in Interface
ISDN
Phantom Echo Cancelation
Echo Cancellation Port 1 in Interface, B1
Port 1 in Interface, B2
Serial Port 2 in Interface, B1
Interface Type Port 2 in Interface, B2
Baud Port 3 in Interface, B1
Inverted Clock Port 3 in Interface, B2
Control Signal Port 4 in Interface, B1
Port 4 in Interface, B2
LAN
Auto Negotiation
Max Capability Advertised
Default Type
Pause Mode
Device MAC Address
Figure 3-10. Configuration > Physical Layer (Use, Serial, LAN Interfaces)

IMA Group
Status
Min number of Tx Links
Min number of Rx Links
Group Id
Group symmetry
Tx frame length
Max differntial delay
Blocking
IMA version
Common Tx clock source
ATM IMA IMA Group

Shaping Mode IMA Group IMA Link
IMA IMA Link Group number
Link direction
Logical Layer Link blocking
ATM
User Bundle
Serial Bundle Number
LAN Ts Table
E1 or T1 Application
Bundle
TDM over ATM TDM over ATM, FR or
FR Pseudo Wire Mode
Pseudo Wire Mode Connection Connection Connection
Bundle (TDM over ATM) (Frame Relay) (Pseudo Wire)
Port Parameters (FR only)
Connection Type Connection Number Source IP
Connection
VPI DLCI Dest IP
VCI VPI Frames Per Packet
Rx Bytes per Cell VCI VPI
Tx Bytes per Cell Or Interworking Or VCI
Continuity Check Mode LB Operation
LB Operation FR-SSCS-DLCI LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Threshold DE->CLP LB Fail Indication
LB Fail Indication CLP->DE Service Category
Active DE<->CLP PCR
Pointer Continuity Check Active
Signaling LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Service Category
PCR
Active
Figure 3-11. Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM and E1
Note IMA configuration (Logical Layer > ATM > IMA) is available only for the units with
IMA WAN interface.
Logical Layer ISDN

ATM Port Index
ISDN VPI
Serial VCI
LAN Continuity Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
CID D-Channel
CID B1-Channel
CID B2-Channel
Figure 3-12. Configuration > Logical Layer > ISDN

Logical Layer FXS Connection

ATM Port Number in the Interface
FXS VPI (r/o in AAL2)
Serial VCI (r/o in AAL2)
LAN Continuity Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Status
PSTN Duration
Collision Priority Index
Meter Pulse Frequency Type
Off-hook Minimum Time (ms) Signal
On-hook Minimum Time (ms) Duration
Register Recall Minimum Time (ms) Status
Duration Duration Elements Summary
Rate
Attenuation Rate
Pulse Duration Rate Type (Enable Metering IE)
Cadence Ring Pulses per Hour
Digit Status
Rate Elements Summary
Attenuation
Attenuation Type (Attenuation IE)
Tx Value (in decibels)
Rx Value (in decibels)
Status
Attenuation Elements Summary
Pulse Duration
Index
Pulse Duration Type
Pulse Type
On Period (ms)
Off Perion (ms)
Status
Pulse Duration Elements Summary
Cadence Ring Status List

Cadence Ring Cadence Ring Type 1
Types Status List Cadence Ring Type 2
Cadence Type Index Cadence Ring Type 3
Cadence Ring Periods List Cadence Ring Type 4
Number of Periods Cadence Ring Type 5
Applicable in this Type Cadence Ring Type 6
Active Cadence Ring Cadence Ring Type 7
Elements Summary Cadence Ring Type 8
Cadence Ring Type 9
Digit Cadence Ring Type 10
On Period - min
On Period - max Periods List
Off Period - min Period # 1 - On Period
Off Period - max Period # 1 - Off Period
Inter Digit Time Period # 2 - On Period
Period # 2 - Off Period
Period # 3 - On Period
Figure 3-13. Configuration > Logical Layer > FXS

Logical Layer Serial Application

ATM Application Port Application
FXS Connection Protocol (FR only)
Serial CLIM (FR only)
LAN
Connection Connection Connection
(AAL1 Stream) (Frame Relay) (Pseudo Wire)
Connection Number Source IP
VPI [0 - 31]
DLCI Dest IP
VCI [0 - 255]
VPI Frames Per Packet
Rx Byte per Cell
Or VCI Or VPI
Tx Byte per Cell
Interworking VCI
Continuity Check
Mode LB Operation
LB Operation
FR-SSCS-DLCI LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Threshold
DE->CLP LB Fail Indication
LB Fail Indication
CLP->DE Service Category
Connection Type
DE<->CLP PCR
Active
Continuity Check Active
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Service Category
PCR
Active
Figure 3-14. Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial
Logical Layer LAN IF Configuration IF Configuration IF Configuration

ATM Port Application (LAN) (Host) (WAN)
FXS IF Configuration Attached IP IF Attached IP IF Attached IP IF
Serial Router Parameters IP Address
Or IP Address Or IP Address
LAN Mask Mask
Aging Time RIP
Time out Encapsulation
RIP VPI
DHCP Relay VCI
Cont. Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Ethernet Pause Trigger
Service category
PCR[79 - 10868]
Active
Figure 3-15. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (Router, Interface Configuration)

Logical Layer LAN Router Parameters DHCP Pools

ATM Port Application DHCP Server Pool Number
FXS IF Configuration DHCP Pools Lowest IP
Serial Router Parameters DNS Relay Highest IP
LAN RADIUS Client Mask
RADIUS Client Default Gateway
Parameters Primary DNS
Static Routing Secondary DNS
Routing Table Lease Time
Default Gateway TFTP Server IP
NAT Configuration File Name
PAT Allocation Table
Firewall
Route Map RADIUS Client
Parameters
Server IP
Shared Secret
Number of retries
Timeout
Authentication Port
Static Routing
Index
Net IP
Mask
Metrica
Interface
Next Hop
Default Gateway
Interface
Active
Next Hop
NAT
Index
NAT Type
Interface
Real IP
Real Mask
Virtual IP
Virtual Mask
PAT
Index
Real IP
Virtual IP
Protocol
Port
Min Port
Max Port
Firewall Rules
IP Interface Index
Direction Source IP-Low
FTP-Option Source IP-High
Printing Dest IP-Low
Name Dest IP-High
Rules IP Protocol
Source Port-Low
Source Port-High
Dest Port-Low
Dest Port-High
Route Map Match & Set Pairs

1. IP Interface 1. Index
2. Match & Set Pairs 2. Match All
3. Source IP
4. Source Mask
5. Dest IP
6. Dest Mask
7. IP Protocol
8. Min Frame Length
9. Max Frame Length
10. Forwarding Interface
11. Discard Frame
Figure 3-16. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (Router, Router Parameters)

Logical Layer LAN IF Configuration

ATM Port Application Interface Number
FXS IF Configuration VPI
Serial Bridge Parameters VCI
LAN Cont. Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Ethernet Pause Trigger
Service Category
PCR
Active
Bridge Parameters Bridge Port

Bridge Mode Bridge Port
Aging Time PVID/Stacking VIDI
PPoE Accept Frame Type
Bridge Port Ingress Filtering
VLAN Mode Egress Tag Handling
VLAN Member (VLAN-Aware only) Ingress Tag Handling
Static MAC Address Bind
All MAC Addresses
VLAN Member
Index
Bridge Port
VID
Static MAC Address

Number of Static MAC Address
Static MAC Address
Bridge Port
VLAN ID
Figure 3-17. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (VLAN-Aware Bridge)
Configuration
System
Physical Layer Applications MPLS Label Range
Logical Layer MPLS Label Range Static Range - Ingress label
Applications Multi Service over PSN Tunnel LSP Static Range - Ingress label
Static Range - Egress label
Tunnel LSP Ingress Tunnel
Ingress Tunnel Index
Egress Tunnel Name
Interface
No. Of Tunnel Labels
Administrative Status
1st Label (Outer)
Egress Tunnel
Index
Name
Interface
No. Of Tunnel Labels
Administrative Status
1st Label (Outer)
Figure 3-18. Configuration > Applications > MPLS

Configuration
System
Physical Layer Applications Multi Service over PSN Quick Setup
Logical Layer MPLS Quick Setup PW Number
Applications Multi Service over PSN General PW Name
PW PW Type
PSN Type
Peer Address
In PW Label
Out PW Label
Ingress Tunnel Index
Egress Tunnel Index
EXP Bits
VLAN Tag
VLAN ID
VLAN Priority
Max. Cells Concatenation
Timeout Mode
Attachment Circuit
General Label Range

Timeout Static Range - Ingress label
Label Range Static Range - Ingress label
PW Static Range - Egress label
PW Number
PW Name
General Parameters
PSN Parameters
Service Parameters
Figure 3-19. Configuration > Applications > Multiservice over PSN
Network
Current
Monitoring System Interval
System Alarm Log
Physical Layer Clear Alarm Log User E1
Logical Layer Firewall Log Current
Clear Firewall Log Interval
Clear PM
LAN
Physical Layer Current
Network Interval
ISDN/FXS/E1/T1
LAN Data FR or AAL1
Serial Current
Interval
Figure 3-20. Monitoring > System and Physical Layer

Network
Current
Interval
Monitoring Logical Layer ATM IMA
System ATM Network Link Statistics
Physical Layer User IMA Link Status
Logical Layer LAN OAM Group Statistics
Serial Dedicated Management VCC Group Status User E1
OAM Port Index in the Interface
User E1 Table
User
Loopback Status
LAN
Serial
Dedicated Management LAN
Total Index
Status Interface Table
Dedicated Loopback Status
Management VCC
Current Data FR or AAL1
Index on the Interface
Data (FR) Table
Loopback Status
Dedicated
Management VCC
Current
Interval
Loopback Status
Total
Current
Interval
Figure 3-21. Monitoring > Logical Layer (ATM)
Monitoring Logical Layer

System ATM User E1
Physical Layer User User E1 Table
Logical Layer LAN LAN
Serial
IP IP Interface
IP Interface Index
Interface Table
Data Fr
Index on the Interface
AAL5 Statistics
FR Statistics
Figure 3-22. Monitoring > Logical Layer (User, LAN, Serial)
Diagnostics Ping
Ping IP Address
Loop Number of echo request to send
Loopback Timeout
Send Ping
Loop
None
Remote Network
Remote Data
Local Data
Local User
Remote User
Remote Remote Data
Loopback
Port
Send Loopback
Figure 3-23. Diagnostics

S/W & File Transfer File Transfer via TFTP

Command
File Transfer via TFTP
Server IP
File Transfer via HTTP
Retry Timeout
Number of Retries
File Name
File Transfer via HTTP Download using HTTP
Download Command
Upload File
Upload Using HTTP

Command
Figure 3-24. S/W & File Transfer
Note File Transfer via HTTP is available for the ConfiguRAD management session only.
3.7 Turning LA-110 Off

To power off the unit:
Remove the power cord from the power source.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Turning LA-110 Off 3-23

3-24 Turning LA-110 Off LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Chapter 4
Configuration
This chapter illustrates the LA-110 configuration screens and explains their
parameters. The LA-110 management software menu tree is shown in Chapter 3.
4.1 Configuration Sequence

The recommended configuration procedure for LA-110 includes the following stages:
1. Defining system parameters (LA-110 IP and terminal settings in order to allow
access to the unit via Telnet or ConfiguRAD)
2. Configuring network and user interfaces at the physical layer
3. Configuring network and user interfaces at the logical layer.
All configuration screens of the LA-110 management software are accessed via
the Main menu (see Figure 4-1). The Main menu includes the following options:
Inventory displays information on the functional blocks of the unit
Configuration defines parameters for the LA-110 system, physical and
logical layers.
Monitoring monitors system performance
Diagnostics initiates diagnostic tests
S/W & File Transfer manages software and configuration file transfers.
LA-110
Main Menu
1. Inventory >
2. Configuration >
3. Monitoring >
4. Diagnostics >
5. S/W & File Transfer >
>
Figure 4-1. Main Menu
The following sections in this chapter explain the parameters in each of the menu
options.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuration Sequence 4-1

Chapter 4 Configuration Installation and Operation Manual
4.2 Configuring LA-110 for Management

The LA-110 management software allows you to:
Enter logistic information for LA-110 (assigning a name and adding its
description)
Define SNMP parameters (communities and network managers)
Configure inband management parameters (ATM and ILMI addresses for the
inband management channel).
Defining Logistic Information

The LA-110 management software allows you to assign a name to the unit and
add its description.
To enter device information:

1. From the System menu, select Management.
The Management menu is displayed.
2. From the Management menu, select Device Information.
The Device Information menu is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Device Information
1. Description >
2. Name ... (LA-110)
>
Figure 4-2. Device Information Menu
1. From the Device Information menu, select Name and enter a desired name
for the LA-110 unit (up to 36 alphanumeric characters).
2. From the Device Information menu, select Description.
3. Add up to four descriptive information entries for LA-110.
Configuring LA-110 Communities

For establishing a proper management link, you must specify the SNMP trap,
read, write and ILMI communities.
To configure SNMP communities:

1. From the SNMP menu (Configuration > System > Management > SNMP) menu,
select Community.
The Community menu is displayed.
4-2 Configuring LA-110 for Management LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuration
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>SNMP>Community
1. Read Community (rad)

2. Read Write Community (rad)
3. Trap Community (rad)
4. ILMI Community (ILMI)
>
Figure 4-3. SNMP Community Menu
2. From the Community menu select:

Read Community to enter the name of a community with read-only
authorization.
Read Write Community to enter the name of a community with read and
write authorization.
Trap Community to enter the name of a community to which
LA-110 sends traps.
ILMI Community to enter the name of ILMI community.
Adding a Network Management Station (NMS)

NMS configuration defines the IP address of a new network management station
(NMS), and the enterprise-specific traps that will be sent to the new network
management station.
The maximum number of network management stations is 10. If this number is
exceeded, you must delete an existing station.
Each NMS is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1 to 10.
When you allow sending general and alarm traps to a network manager, you can
mask or unmask each trap (general or interface-specific). See Masking Individual
Alarms below
To add a network management station:

1. From the SNMP menu (Configuration > System > Management > SNMP),
select Manager List.
The Manager List is displayed.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuring LA-110 for Management 4-3

LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>SNMP>Manager List
1. Index [1 10] (1)

2. IP Address (0.0.0.0)
3. Mask All (Unmask)
4. General traps mask >
5. Alarm traps mask > (Manual)
6. Manual Alarm traps mask >
>
d, D - Delete
Figure 4-4. Manager List
2. From the Manager List menu, select Index.

3. To display information on a specific NMS, type its index number and then
press <Enter>.
4. Select IP Address from the Manager List menu and enter the IP address.
Table 4-1. NMS Parameters
Parameter Function Values
IP Address Define the IP address of the new NMS Enter the desired IP address, in the
dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Mask All Define whether to mask or unmask UNMASK The SNMP agent of LA-110
general and alarm traps sends general and alarm
traps to this NMS
MASK The SNMP agent of LA-110
does not send general and
alarm traps to this NMS
Default: UNMASK
Alarm Traps Select whether to send alarm traps to NONE MASKED The SNMP agent of
this NMS when an alarm condition occurs LA-110 sends all alarm
traps to this NMS
ALL MASKED The SNMP agent of
LA-110 does not send
alarm traps to this
NMS
MANUAL The SNMP agent of
LA-110 sends only
alarm traps, which
were unmasked by the
user to this NMS
Default: MANUAL

Masking Individual Alarms

To mask individual general traps:
1. From the Manager List menu, select Mask All and set it to Unmask.
Two additional lines (General Traps Mask and Alarm Traps Mask) appear in
the Manager List menu.
2. Select General Traps Mask.
The General Traps Mask menu is displayed (see Figure 4-5).
3. From the General Traps Mask menu, select a trap, which you intend to mask
or unmask.
The parameter value toggles between Mask and Unmask.
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>SNMP>Manager List>General Traps Mask
1. Cold Start (Unmask)

2. Agent Status Changed (Unmask)
3. TFTP Status Changed (Unmask)
4. Authentication Failure (Unmask)
5. Link Up/Down (Unmask)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; @-debug 1 user(s)
Figure 4-5. General Traps Mask Menu
To mask individual interface-specific alarm traps:

1. From the Manager List menu, select Mask All and set it to Unmask.
Two additional lines (General Traps Mask and Alarm Traps Mask) appear in
the Manager List menu.
2. Select Alarm Traps Mask and set it to Manual.
An additional line (Manual Alarm Traps Mask) appears in the Manager List
menu.
3. Select Manual Alarm Traps Mask.
The Manual Alarm Traps Mask menu is displayed.

4. From the Manual Alarm Traps Mask menu, select the alarm group to which the
alarm you intend to mask/unmask belongs:
System
ATM
SHDSL
Serial
E1.
5. From the appropriate alarm group menu, select a trap which you intend to
mask or unmask (see Table 4-2).
The parameter value toggles between Mask and Unmask.
Table 4-2. Interface-Specific Alarm Traps
Group Alarms
System Jitter Buffer Underrun, Jitter Buffer Overrun, No Buffer to Network, Sync on Low Rate,
DB Checksum Error, Parameter Change During Upgrade, Alarm Buffer Overflow, Alarm
Buffer Clear
ATM Bandwidth Exceeds Allocation, Loss of Cell Delination (LCD)

VC: Continuity Loss, AIS Reception, RDI Reception, OAM Loopback Failure
SHDSL Driver Mismatch, EOC Loopback Towards Network
Serial Local Loop, Remote Loop
E1 AIS, BPV Error, CRC4 Error, Frame Slip, Local Multiframe Alarm, Remote Multiframe
Alarm, Local Sync Loss, Remote Sync Loss, AIS Sync Loss, User Side Remote Loop,
Network Remote Loop, User Side Local Loop, Signal Loss
Excessive: Bipolar Violations, CRC4 Error, Error Ratio, Frame Slip, Local Multiframe
Alarm, Remote Multiframe Alarm, Local Sync Loss, Remote Sync Loss
Note
By default most of the interface-specific alarms are unmasked. LA-110 is
delivered with the following alarms masked: BPV Error, CRC4 Error, Frame Slip,
Local Multiframe Alarm, Remote Multiframe Alarm, Local Sync Loss, Remote Sync
Loss.
Configuring the LA-110 Inband Management Parameters

This configuration defines the VPI.VCI and IP address to be used to communicate
with the management agent of LA-110 through the ATM uplink port, and control
the state of this connection (enabled or disabled).
This connection can be used to manage LA-110 using the SNMP and Telnet
protocols.
In addition, you should use the SNMP network management stations that will
receive traps from LA-110.

To define the inband management parameters:

1. From the Management menu, select Inband Management.
The Inband Management menu is displayed.
2. From the Inband Management menu, select ATM Address.
The ATM Address menu is displayed (see Figure 4-6).
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Inband Management>ATM Address
1. IP Address (0.0.0.0)
2. DHCP Client (Disable)
3. Management VCC >
>
Figure 4-6. ATM Address Menu
3. From the ATM Address menu, define the inband management channel
parameters according to Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. ATM Address Parameters
IP Address Specifies the IP address used to access the Enter the desired IP address, in the
LA-110 SNMP agent through the ATM uplink dotted-quad format.
Leaving the default address (0.0.0.0)
enables plug-&-play: LA-110
automatically adopts the IP address
contained in the destination IP address
field of the first IP packet received
through this ATM connection.
Default: 0.0.0.0
DHCP Client Controls the use of automatic configuration ENABLE The use of automatic
(plug & play) using DHCP in conjunction with configuration (plug & play) using DHCP
TFTP is enabled.
DISABLE The use of automatic
configuration (plug & play) using DHCP
is disabled.
Default: DISABLE
Management VCC See Table 4-4
Configuring the Management VCC Parameters

To configure the management VCC:
From the ATM Address menu, select Management VCC.
The Management VCC menu is displayed (see Figure 4-7).

LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Inband Management>ATM Address>Management VCC
1. VPI [0 31] ...(0)

2. VCI [0 255] ...(127)
3. Status (Not Active)
4. Cont. Check > (off-two way)
5. LB Operation (On)
6. LB Fail Threshold[1 - 16] ...(1)
7. LB Fail Indication ...(Off)
8. Service category > (UBR)
9. PCR [79 10868] ...(80)
>
Figure 4-7. Management VCC Menu
Table 4-4. Management VCC Parameters
VPI Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be 0 to 31

used by the new connection Default: 0
VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to 0 to 255

be used by the new connection. Default: 0
Notes:
The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM
connection; therefore you cannot specify
a VPI.VCI pair already used by another
connection, even if that connection is
defined on another LA-110 port.
The VPI.VCI 0.0 is reserved. Your
configuration will be rejected if you leave
the default values unchanged, or the
selected values are already in use.
Status Displays the corresponding port (on-hook or Active/Not Active

off-hook)
Cont. Check Specifies the method to be used for the new The available selections are described in
bridge interface to perform continuity checks Table 4-5.
on the ATM network interface Default: OFF TWO-WAY
LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic loopbacks ON Periodic loopback activation is

on the current interface connection. These enabled.
loopbacks are initiated every 5 seconds. OFF Periodic loopback activation is
LA-110 keeps statistics for the Round-Trip disabled.
Delay (RTD) measurements and generates
Default: OFF
alarms upon loopback failures, according to
the user-selectable threshold. Note: Periodic loopbacks can be
activated together with continuity
checks.

Service category Specifies the ATM service category to be used UBR Unspecified bit rate service,
to handle the traffic transferred through this intended for non-real-time
new bridge interface (see Table 4-6) applications which do not
require tightly constrained delay
and delay variation, e.g., data
communications applications
such as file transfer or e-mail.
VBR Variable bit rate service,
intended for applications that
require constraints on the
maximum cell transfer delay and
delay variation, such as video or
voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service,
intended for real-time
applications that require
constant bandwidth and tightly
constrained delay and delay
variation, for example,
synchronous data streams.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it
enables the user to specify a
minimum guaranteed cell rate.
Default: UBR
PCR Specifies the peak cell rate, when the E1 user The allowed range depends on the
interface is configured to E1 UNI mode network interface type:
79 to 5452 cells per second (2-wire)
The maximum actual value depends on
the network port synchronization rate.
Default: 5452 (2-wire) or 10868 (4-
wire)

Table 4-5. Continuity Check Options
Option Description
OFF TWO-WAY The continuity check function is disabled, i.e., LA-110 will not transmit, nor expect to
receive, CC cells from the ATM network through the corresponding connection
ON-SOURCE When there is no payload traffic for transmission on this connection, LA-110 will
transmit CC cells toward the ATM network. This enables the remote equipment to
monitor the continuity of the transmit path from the LA-110 to the network, on the new
connection.
ON-SINK LA-110 expects to receive CC cells from the ATM network. If there is no payload traffic,
and no CC cells were received during the last three seconds, LA-110 will declare a
loss-of-continuity fault, and start transmitting RDI cells on the VCC used by this
connection. This enables LA-110 to monitor the continuity of the receive-from-ATM
network path.
ON TWO-WAY During periods without payload traffic, LA-110 transmits and expects to receive CC cells
from the ATM network. The response in case the connection does not carry payload
traffic, and no CC cells are received, is described above.
Table 4-6 presents the traffic contract parameters for the various ATM service
categories.
Table 4-6. ATM Service Categories
ATM Service
Category
UBR PCR Specifies the peak cell rate The allowed range for ADSL and SHDSL uplink
interfaces is the following:
The maximum actual value depends on the
network port synchronization rate.
Default: 79
UBR+ MDCR Specifies the minimum 10 to 5453 cells per second

guaranteed cell rate Default: 200
PCR See explanation of PCR for UBR

above
VBR MBS Specifies the maximum burst size 1 to 999 cells

to be accepted Default: 10
SCR Specifies the sustained cell rate 79 to 5452 cells per second (2-wire)
Default: 79
PCR See explanation of PCR for UBR

above
CBR PCR Specifies the peak cell rate. The allowed range for ADSL and SHDSL uplink
The peak cell rate must be equal interfaces is 10 to 5453 cells per second. The

ATM Service
Category
to the rate needed to support the maximum actual value depends on the
nominal data rate of the network port synchronization rate.
connection using CBR. See the Default: 10
Considerations for Selection of
Traffic Contract Parameters
section below for details on the
conversion of data rate to the
equivalent cell rate.
Note
If for the VBR ATM service category the selected sustained cell rate exceeds the
maximum allowed value, LA-110 aborts interface addition and displays the
following warning: There is not enough free bandwidth to add this Interface. Use
DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE commands to free bandwidth. The interface was NOT
added.
Likewise, no interface is added if the selected peak cell rate for the CBR ATM
service category exceeds the maximum allowed value.
Considerations for Selection of Traffic Contract Parameters

During the selection of parameters for a new connection, you must make two
decisions:
Select the ATM service category, in accordance with the category whose
description best matches the requirements of the application using the new
connection. The available selections are described in Table 4-6.
Select values for the parameters that control traffic handling (called traffic
contract parameters) for the selected ATM service category, for example,
PCR, and where applicable, SCR, MBS or MDCR.
The traffic contract parameters are given as cells per second. Instructions given
below describe how to relate the ATM traffic capacity, in cells per second, to the
configured and available bandwidth:
1. Determine the ATM payload carrying capacity (bandwidth) of the LA-110
uplink. This value is the lower of the following two values:
Configured rate
Actual rate, which is determined by the link synchronization rate.
In general, the maximum ATM payload carrying capacity (bandwidth) of the
LA-110 uplink depends on the interface type: for ADSL and 2-wire SHDSL,
this is 2312 kbps less 8 kHz of overhead, that is, 2304 kbps. For 4-wire
SHDSL 4608 kbps.
2. Convert the cell rate to the equivalent data rate, using the following
procedure:
An ATM cell includes 53 bytes or 424 bits.
Therefore, at the maximum payload rate supported by an ADSL or 2-wire
SHDSL uplink (2312 kbps), the maximum ATM cell rate (taking into
account the nominal data rate and the ATM cell size of 53 bytes, or

424 bits) is limited to 5453 cells per second. For 4-wire SHDSL 10868
cells per second.
In a basic ATM cell, a minimum of 5 bytes is inserted before every
48 payload bytes to carry the ATM cell header. Therefore, the payload
carrying capacity must be reduced by the ratio of payload bytes to total
number of bytes per cell, which is constant (53).
For example, the maximum payload data rate at a 2312 kbps line rate is
approximately 48/53 2312 = 2094 kbps. If the actual link
synchronization rate is lower, the rate is proportionally lower.
Note
More complex cell structures may have lower payload carrying capacity, for
example, 47 or 46 bytes. Padding bytes may also be intentionally inserted to
reduce the assembly delay, and this may further decrease the net payload rate.
The values to be assigned to the traffic contract parameters must be selected so as

to meet the requirements of the application that will use the new connection, while
also considering the bandwidth requirements for all the connections serving other
ports.
The reason for this is that all the connections share the same transmission link,
that is, LA-110 uplink. Correct allocation of bandwidth is therefore critical to
ensure good quality of service for all the users. The following approach is
recommended:
1. Start by reserving bandwidth to all the AAL1 and AAL2 applications, and to
any AAL5 applications that need CBR. For LA-110, the applications that need
CBR are those using the user port(s), that is, the E1, FXS or ISDN ports as
installed on your unit.
2. Assign bandwidth to applications needing VBR, in accordance with the
expected traffic statistics.
3. Any other applications may use only UBR+ or UBR.
As long as the average data rate of all the connections does not exceed the
available uplink bandwidth, few cells are lost. Note however that cells may be
intentionally discarded to meet the traffic contract parameters; they may also be
lost in the ATM network as a result of congestion.
The combined actions described above are called traffic shaping. An important
characteristic of the LA-110 is its advanced traffic shaping capabilities.
Configuring the Inband Management ILMI Address

To configure the LA-110 ILMI address:
1. From the Management menu, select Inband Management.
The Inband Management menu is displayed.
2. From the Inband Management menu, select ILMI Address.

LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Inband Management>ILMI Address
1. VPI [ 0- 31] ...(0)

2. VCI [0 255] ...(16)
3. Status ...(Enable)
>
Figure 4-8. ILMI Address Menu
Table 4-7. ILMI Address Parameters
VPI ILMI connection VPI 031
VCI ILMI connection VCI 0255
Status Enables or disables ILMI management Enable, Disable

Default: Enable
Configuring the LA-110 Host

When the LA-110 LAN interface is operating in the bridge mode, it is necessary to
configure host parameters in order to establish a proper IP connection with the
unit.
To configure the LA-110 host:

From the Host menu (Configuration > System > Management > Host),
perform the following:
Select IP Address to define the host IP address
Select IP Mask to define the host IP mask
Select Default Gateway to set the default gateway IP address.
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Host
1. IP Address ... (0.0.0.0)

2. IP Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Default Gateway ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Encapsulation >
5. Management Access > (BOTH)
>
Figure 4-9. Host Menu

Configuring the Host Encapsulation

LA-110 management software allows you to create a dedicated management
VLAN in order to separate management traffic from the user data. In addition, it
is possible to restrict the management traffic to the WAN or LAN ports or allow
inband management via any of the LA-110 ports.
To configure the host encapsulation:

1. From the Host menu (Configuration > System > Management > Host), select
Encapsulation.
The Encapsulation menu is displayed (see Figure 4-10).
2. From the Encapsulation menu, do the following:
Select Host Tagging, and choose Tagged or Untagged to consider or
ignore the VLAN tagging of the management traffic coming from the
management station.
If the host tagging is enabled, select Host VLAN ID to enter the ID of the
host VLAN (14094).
If the host tagging is enabled, select Host VLAN priority to specify priority
of the host VLAN (07).
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Host>Encapsulation
1. Host Tagging (Tagged)

2. Host VLAN ID [1 - 4094] ... (300)
3. Host VLAN Priority [0 - 7] ... (7)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit 1 Mngr/s
Figure 4-10. Encapsulation Menu
Configuring the Management Access

It is possible to restrict the management traffic to the WAN or LAN ports or allow
inband management via any of the LA-110 ports.
To configure the management access:

From the Management Access menu (Configuration > System > Management >
Host > Management Access), select one of the following:
Both LA-110 can be accessed via its network or LAN port
WAN LA-110 can be accessed via the network port only
LAN LA-110 can be accessed via the LAN port only.
Configuring the Supervisory Port Interface

Defines the LA-110 control port parameters.

To define the LA-110 control port parameters:

From the Control Port menu (Configuration > System > Control Port),
configure the terminal port parameters as described in Table 4-8.
LA-110
Configuration>System>Control Port
1. Baud > (Auto)

2. Data (8)
3. Parity > (None)
4. Terminal >
>
Configures devices Control Port
Figure 4-11. Control Port Menu
Table 4-8. Control Port Parameters
Baud Select the supervisory port data rate. AUTO, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
If AUTO is selected, LA-110 automatically 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.
identifies the supervisory port data rate. To Default: AUTO
enable positive identification, the
transmission must start with three
consecutive carriage returns
Data Select the number of data bits in the word 7 and 8 data bits.
format Default: 8
Parity Control the use of parity ODD Odd

parity
EVEN Even
parity
NONE Parity
disabled
Default: NONE
Terminal See Table 4-9
Table 4-9. Terminal Parameters
Change Password Defines a new password See Configuring the Management

Session Password
Log-off-time Idle disconnect time. The session will 1 to 99 minutes

automatically be disconnected after the Default: 10
specified number of minutes if no input data
is received by LA-110 supervisory port

Pop Alarm Enable/disable the automatic display of YES The terminal automatically displays
alarms on the terminal any new alarm, or change in the
state of an alarm.
NO The automatic display feature is
disabled.
Default: NO
Configuring the Management Session Password

Defines and/or change the various passwords to be used to control access to the
LA-110 management facility. Configuring the management session password
prevents unauthorized modification of the operating parameters. To prevent
unauthorized modification of the operating parameters, LA-110 supports two
access levels
Superuser can perform all the activities supported by the LA-110
management facility.
User can only access the status and performance monitoring activities, but
cannot perform traffic-affecting activities (for example, in the user access
mode it is not possible to modify the LA-110 configuration and operating
mode).
The password can include up to 20 characters and/or numbers. Its evaluation is
case-sensitive, therefore pay attention to the case used for each character.
To define a new password:

1. From the Terminal menu (Configuration > System > Control Port > Terminal),
select Change Password.
The Change Password menu is displayed (see Figure 4-12).
2. From the Change Password menu, perform the following:
a. Select Authorization Level, and specify the users access rights (superuser
or user).
b. Select Username, and enter a name for a new user.
c. Select Current Password, and enter your current superuser password.
d. Select Password, and assign a password to a new user name.
e. Select Confirm Password and re-enter the new user password to confirm
it.
f. Select Max Number of Login Failure and define a maximum number of
wrong password entries (three or five) after which LA-110 disables login
for 15 minutes.

LA-110
Configuration>System>Control Port>Terminal>Change Password
1. Authorization Level > (Superuser)

2. Username ...(superuser)
3. Current Password ()
4. Password ()
5. Confirm Password ()
6. Max number of login failure > (3 Illegal passwords)
>
Figure 4-12. Change Password Menu

4.3 Configuring System Parameters

The LA-110 management software allows you to perform the following:
Defining general system parameters (coding law, jitter buffer, OAM,
adaptation layer, etc.)
Selecting the system clock source
Resetting LA-110 to the default values
Performing overall reset of LA-110
Initiating a debugging utility reserved for internal use by RAD Data
Communications.
Configuring General System Parameters

Via the General Parameters menu you can select the global LA-110 system
parameters. Changes in the global system parameters, for example, coding law,
AAL or application identifier (when using AAL2) can take effect only after LA-110
is restarted. Therefore, when such changes are made, you will be notified that
LA-110 will be restarted, and then requested to confirm.
When LA-110 is intended for multiservice over PSN applications, it is necessary to
define the pseudowire (PW) transport layer: ATM or Ethernet.
To change the general system parameters:

1. From the Main menu, select Configuration.
The Configuration menu is displayed.
2. From the Configuration menu, select System.
The System menu is displayed.
3. From the System menu, select General Parameters.
The General Parameters menu is displayed (see Figure 4-13).
4-18 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110
Configuration>System>General Parameters
1. Coding law (A Law)

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
3. OAM Type (Segment)
4. OAM Fail Indication (Enable)
5. Operation Mode > (Multi service over ATM)
6. Adaptation Layer > (AAL1)
7. Call Termination Mode (Data)
8. QoS Classification > (None)
9. Mapping Mechanism (ATM CoS)
>
Configures device's general parameters
Figure 4-13. General Parameters (Multiservice over ATM AAL1)
Multiservice over ATM

When LA-110 is intended for multiservice over ATM applications, it is necessary to
select its adaptation layer: AAL1 or AAL2.
Configuring General Parameters for Multiservice over ATM AAL1

Mode
Table 4-10 explains general parameters for AAL1.
Table 4-10. General Parameters for Multiservice over ATM AAL1 Mode
Coding Law Specifies the companding law to be used for A law A law in accordance with ITU-T
encoding the voice channels. Rec. G.711. This companding law is used
Changing the companding law will cause the for E1 trunks, and therefore is
LA-110 to restart recommended when the LA-110 is
equipped with an E1 interface.
U law law in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. G.711. This companding law is used
for T1 trunks.
Default: A law
Jitter Buffer Selects the jitter buffer size. 1 to 20 msec

The jitter buffer enables the LA-110 to Default: 10
tolerate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV)
occurring as the cells pass through the ATM
network
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuring System Parameters 4-19

OAM Type Defines OAM type for F5 continuity check End-to-end LA-110 serves as an
cells. end-point, terminating end-to-end F5
OAM flows.
Segment LA-110 serves as an
end-segment point, terminating segment
F5 OAM flows and passes transparently
end-to-end F5 OAM cells.
Default: Segment
OAM Fail Indication Controls whether the AIS and RDI cells are Enable The AIS and RDI cells are sent
sent from LA-110 or not. from LA-110.
Disable The AIS and RDI cells are not
sent from LA-110.
Default: Enable
Operation Mode Selects whether LA-110 operates in the ATM Multiservice over ATM LA-110 operates
or pseudowire mode. in the ATM mode
Multiservice over PSN LA-110 operates
in the pseudowire mode
Adaptation Layer Selects the AAL used by the user port (E1, Select AAL1.
T1, FXS or ISDN) for the uplink connection. Default: AAL1
Changing the AAL causes LA-110 to restart,
and in addition will delete all the currently
defined ATM connections.
Call Termination Defines method used by LA-110 for FXS call Signaling Call is terminated, when
Mode termination LA-110 detects On-hook signal.
Data Call is terminated, when
LA-110 detects that the DSLAM stopped
transmitting additional data, such as call
duration etc., to the FXS subscriber.
Default: Data
QoS Classification Selects the traffic prioritization mode. None No traffic prioritization is
QoS classification is available only when the performed
LAN port of LA-110 is configured to the 802.1P Priority is determined
bridge mode. according to VLAN ID
IP Precedence Priority is determined
according to IP precedence bits
TOS Priority is determined according to
IP ToS field
DSCP Priority is determined according
to DSCP frame DSCP field (the
Differentiated Services Codepoint, as
specified in RFC 2474)
Default: None

Mapping Mechanism Selects the traffic classes mapping ATM CoS Traffic classes are mapped
mechanism. according to the ATM Classes of Service
QoS classification is available only when the WFQ Traffic classes are mapped
LAN port of LA-110 is configured to the according to the Weighted Fair Queues
bridge mode. Default: ATM CoS
Configuring General Parameters for Multiservice over ATM AAL2

Mode
The General Parameters menu for AAL2 is illustrated in Figure 4-14 and
Figure 4-15.
LA-110
CPS parameters > (Single CPS, No overlap)

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
5. Operation Mode > (Multi service over ATM)
7. LES default VPI[0 31] (1)
8. LES default VCI[0 255] (32)
9. Application Identifier > (DSS1 & PRI (PRI only, with ELCP))
..(N)
>
Figure 4-14. General Parameters (Multiservice over ATM AAL2, Page 1)

LA-110
..(P)

2. Voice bandwidth[0 - 2312] ...(0)
3. SSCS parameters >
4. AAL2 shaping mode (CBR)
>
s,S - Save
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Adaptation Layer was changed successfully
Figure 4-15. General Parameters (Multiservice over ATM AAL2, Page 2)
Table 4-11 explains general parameters for AAL2.
Table 4-11. General Parameters for Multiservice over ATM AAL2 Mode
Coding Law See Table 4-10.
Jitter Buffer See Table 4-10.
OAM Type See Table 4-10
OAM Fail Indication See Table 4-10.
Adaptation Layer See Table 4-10 Select AAL2.

Default: AAL1
LES default VPI Selects the default VPI used by connections 0 to 31

established using Loop Emulation Service Default: 1
(LES).
Unless other values are specifically selected
by the user, all the connections are created
with the default VPI. This characteristic
enables plug & play configuration.

LES default VCI Selects the default VCI used by connections 0 to 255
established using Loop Emulation Service Default: 32
(LES).
Unless other values are specifically selected
by the user, all the connections are created
with the default VCI. This characteristic
enables plug & play configuration.
Application Selects the application identifier for the voice The following application identifiers can
Identifier applications (including support for fax and be selected:
voiceband modem). CAS & DSS1 (without ELCP)
The application identifiers are described in PSTN & DSS1 (without ELCP)
ATMF AF-VMOA-0145.000. For your
PSTN & DSS1 (with ELCP)
convenience, the abbreviations indicating the
signaling methods included in the application PSTN, PRI and BRI (with ELCP)
identifier name are explained below: DSS1 & PRI (PRI only, with ELCP): can
CAS Uses channel-associated signaling, be selected only for LA-110 with E1
used with FXS user interfaces for providing user interface.
POTS (plain old telephone service), and with Default: DSS1 & PRI (PRI only, with ELCP)
E1 user interfaces when the framing mode is
G.732S.
PSTN Uses common channel signaling for
access to the PSTN (public switched
telephone network) using gateways with V5
interfaces. For E1 interfaces, CCS is
supported with G.732N framing.
DSS1 Uses Digital Subscriber Signaling
Scheme No. 1 for ISDN BRI access
Nationality Selects a national PSTN protocol When using the CAS & DSS1 (without
implementation. ELCP) application identifier, the only
The selected implementation determines the selection is UK. This selection cannot be
default PSTN signaling characteristics. changed.
When using the other application
identifiers, the following predefined
national implementations are available:
FRANCE, ITALY, BELGIUM, GERMANY,
ENGLAND, SPAIN and PORTUGAL. In
addition, you can also select OTHER.
Default: OTHER
QoS Classification See Table 4-10 for details.
Mapping Mechanism See Table 4-10 for details.

Port map Used to select the state of the user ports. For each of the 4 user ports, the
The port map is displayed only when LA-110 following selections are available:
is equipped with FXS or ISDN S ports. Active Enables traffic flow through the
The type of user interface is displayed before corresponding port.
the map itself. Not active Blocks traffic flow through
If you deactivate a port, all its connections the corresponding port.
are deleted. Default: Active
Voice bandwidth Bandwidth reserved for the voice traffic (PRI 02312 kbps
or FXS) Default: 0
CAS signaling The CAS Signaling table is displayed only

when LA-110 is equipped with FXS or E1
ports, and the selected application identifier
is CAS & DSS1 (without ELCP). See Table 4-
12.
SSCS parameters See Table 4-13
AAL2 Shaping mode Selects the AAL2 shaping mode CBR Shaping for CBR service
VBR3 Shaping for VBR3 service.
Default: CBR
ISDN Activation Controls the Layer 1 ISDN port activation PERMANENT The ISDN ports are always
Mode mode activated.
NON PERMANENT The ISDN ports are
activated only when it is necessary to
connect to the users equipment.
Default: NON PERMANENT
Table 4-12. CAS Parameters
CAS Signaling Table used to select the signaling information

sent and accepted for the user ports.
The signaling information is specified by
indicating the combination of A, B, C, D
signaling bits corresponding to the following
signaling states:
Normal the default (idle port) state. In Default: 0101

general, this state should be indicated by the
same combination used for the on-hook
state.
Ringing indicates that ringing must be Default: 0000

connected to the corresponding port.
On-Hook indicates that the corresponding Default: 0101

port is on-hook.

Off-Hook indicates that the corresponding Default: 1111

port is off-hook.
Reversed Polarity indicates that the polarity Default: 0100

of the feed voltage supplied by the
corresponding port must be inverted.
After selecting the prescribed

combinations, select the Status of the
corresponding signaling state:
ACTIVE Enables traffic flow through
the corresponding port.
NOT ACTIVE Blocks traffic flow through
the corresponding port.
Default: NOT ACTIVE for Reversed
Polarity.
ACTIVE for all the other
Table 4-13. SSCS Parameters
LES Connection Selects amount of bandwidth for LES Set according to the service type
Bandwidth connection. Amount of bandwidth depends
on the encoding profile, number of timeslots
reserved for voice, fax and D-channel.
The following formulas can be used in order
to calculate required bandwidth:
LES bandwidth = (X + 64 + 64) 53/44
(encoding profile 10, with compression)
LES bandwidth = (X + 64 ) 53/44
(encoding profile 9, with compression)
where X is voice bandwidth
(No of voice timeslots - 1) 32 for profile 10
(No of voice timeslots - 1) 64 for profile 9
64 bandwidth for one fax channel
64 bandwidth for one D-channel
53/44 ATM overhead
Note: Additional bandwidth should be added
for ELCP traffic.

Encoding Profile Selects the default profile for the LA-110. The numbers of the supported profiles
The numbers of the profiles are consistent and the concise description listed below:
with Annex A of ATMF AF-VMOA-0145.000, 7: PCM 64, ADPCM 32, 44 octet
which is based on the definitions given in ITU- packets, and silence.
T Rec. I.366.2 and I.366.1.
8: PCM 64, 44 octet packets, and
The only profile supported by an LA-110 silence.
without support for ADPCM is profile 9.
Therefore, for such LA-110 versions, the 9: PCM 64, 44 octet packets, without
encoding profile cannot be changed. silence.
For your convenience, the abbreviations 10: PCM 64, ADPCM 32,44 octet
indicating the main profile characteristics are packets, without silence.
explained below (see Annex A of ATMF
11: PCM 64, ADPCM 32,40 octet
AF-VMOA-0145.000 for complete
packets, without silence.
specifications):
PCM-64: the profile supports 64 kbps PCM 12: PCM 64, ADPCM 32,40 octet
encoding in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.711 packets, with silence.
(the companding law is selected by the Default: 10
Coding Law field).
ADPCM-32: the profile supports 32 kbps
ADPCM encoding in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. G.726 (the companding law is selected
by the Coding Law field).
## Octet Packets: the ## indicates the
number of payload octets per AAL2 cell
supported by the corresponding profile.
With/without silence: indicates whether the
profile supports or not silence suppression.
CPS Parameters Displays the structure of CPS (Common Part This field always displays SINGLE CPS, NO
Sublayer) PDUs (Protocol Data Units) OVERLAP
supported by LA-110E, in accordance with
ITU-T Rec. I.363.2
DSP Gains Controls volume gain of the LA-110 DSP to 0 6, 12

overcome voice quality deterioration caused Default: 5
by a possible mismatch in the voice
compression standards of LA-110 and a voice
gateway.
Multiservice over PSN

For the multiservice over PSN applications it is necessary to configure the general
parameters.

LA-110
1. Jitter Buffer (10)

4. Operation Mode > (Multi service over PSN)
5. PW Transport Layer > (ATM)
>
Figure 4-16. General Parameters (Multiservice over PSN)
Table 4-14 explains general parameters for multiservice over PSN mode.
Table 4-14. General Parameters for Multiservice over PSN Mode
Jitter Buffer Selects the jitter buffer size. 1 to 60 msec

The jitter buffer enables the LA-110 to Default: 10
tolerate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV)
occurring as the cells pass through the ATM
network
OAM Type Defines OAM type for F5 continuity check End-to-end LA-110 serves as an
cells. end-point, terminating end-to-end F5
OAM flows.
Segment LA-110 serves as an
end-segment point, terminating segment
F5 OAM flows and passes transparently
end-to-end F5 OAM cells.
Default: Segment
OAM Fail Indication Controls whether the AIS and RDI cells are Enable The AIS and RDI cells are sent
sent from LA-110 or not. from LA-110.
Disable The AIS and RDI cells are not
sent from LA-110.
Default: Enable
Operation Mode Selects whether LA-110 operates in the ATM Multiservice over PSN LA-110 operates
or pseudowire mode. in the pseudowire mode

PW Transport Layer Selects transport layer for PW connections, ATM Pseudowire connections are
when LA-110 operates in the multiservice transported over ATM via uplink interface
over PSN mode ETH Pseudowire connections are
transported over Ethernet via LAN port
interface
QoS Classification Selects the traffic prioritization mode. None No traffic prioritization is
QoS classification is available only when the performed
LAN port of LA-110 is configured to the 802.1P Priority is determined
bridge mode. according to VLAN ID
IP Precedence Priority is determined
according to IP precedence bits
TOS Priority is determined according to
IP ToS field
DSCP Priority is determined according
to DSCP frame DSCP field (the
Differentiated Services Codepoint, as
specified in RFC 2474)
Default: None
Mapping Mechanism Selects the traffic classes mapping ATM CoS Traffic classes are mapped
mechanism. according to the ATM Classes of Service
QoS classification is available only when the WFQ Traffic classes are mapped
LAN port of LA-110 is configured to the according to the Weighted Fair Queues
bridge mode. Default: ATM CoS

Configuring the System Clock

Defines the LA-110 system clock reference source by defining the LA-110 system
timing.
To define the system clock:

1. From the Main menu, select Configuration.
The Configuration menu is displayed.
The System menu is displayed.
3. From the System menu, select Clock.
The Clock menu is displayed (see Figure 4-17).
LA-110
Configuration>System>Clock
1. System Clock > (Derived from the main link)

2. NTR (Enable)
>
Configures device's clock source
Figure 4-17. System Clock Source
4. From the Clock menu, select System Clock.

5. From the System Clock menu, select the desired system clock parameter. The
available selections are as follows:
INTERNAL: LA-110 timing is determined by its internal clock oscillator.
This option should be used only when the LA-110 network port is
configured as CO side unit.
DERIVED FROM THE MAIN LINK (default): LA-110 timing is locked to the
clock signal recovered from the uplink receive signal. This is the
recommended mode, because it locks the LA-110 timing to the timing
reference of the ATM network (as received from the DSLAM to which it is
connected). The ATM network clock is usually highly accurate.
DERIVED FROM THE USER E1: LA-110 timing is locked to the clock signal
recovered from the E1 port receive signal (provided the LA-110 unit is
equipped with an E1 port). This mode locks the LA-110 timing to the
timing reference of the far end E1 equipment, which is usually accurate.
ADAPTIVE CLOCK: LA-110 timing is locked to the average arrival rate of
the ATM cells carrying voice channels. This mode can be used to improve
voice transmission quality by decreasing the probability of buffer
underflow/overflow events for voice traffic, by ensuring that the internal
PCM bus clock rate is locked to the average rate of voice packets.

6. Select a system clock and you are notified that the change will cause LA-110
to restart, and required to confirm.
When the DERIVED FROM THE MAIN LINK option is selected, LA-110 can
extract the NTR clock usually provided by the DSLAM and use it as its timing
reference.
Once the system clock is selected, go back to the Clock menu to control the
use of the NTR:
To control the use of the NTR clock:

1. From the System menu, select Clock.
The Clock menu is displayed (see Figure 4-17).
2. From the Clock menu, select NTR.
NTR ENABLED LA-110 locks its timing to the NTR clock extracted from
the uplink receive signal.
NTR DISABLED LA-110 locks its timing to the clock signal recovered
from the uplink receive signal.
Note
For the LA-110 units with the E1 UNI user interface the following clock modes are
available: Internal, Derived from the User E1 and Derived from the Main Link (NTR
Enabled). Selecting Adaptive or Main Link (NTR Disabled) timing mode
automatically configures LA-110 to the Internal clock.
E1 Network Interface
For the LA-110 units with the E1 network port the clocking source for the
network and E1 user interfaces is defined in pairs:
Table 4-15. Clock Configuration for the E1 Network Port
Network User
LBT Derived from Network Default

Derived from User LBT
Internal Internal

4.4 Configuring LA-110 at the Physical Layer

Configures the physical layer characteristics of the LA-110 network user port(s).
This is necessary to define the operating conditions of the ports. The parameters
defined depend on the type of network and user port(s) installed in the LA-110
unit (this depends on the ordered configuration):
Network port
ADSL
SHDSL
E1
User port(s)
4 analog voice ports with FXS interfaces
4 ISDN S BRI ports with NT or TE interfaces
One E1 port
One T1 port
LAN port
Data port.
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer
1. ATM >
2. SHDSL >
3. E1-User >
4. Serial >
5. LAN >
>
Configuration of physical objects
Figure 4-18. Physical Layer Menu
Configuring The Network Interface at the Physical Layer

The network interface configuration parameters include two sections:
ATM parameters
Physical layer parameters, which depend on the network interface installed
on: ADSL, SHDSL, or E1.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuring LA-110 at the Physical Layer 4-31

Configuring the ATM Interface at the Physical Layer
To define the parameters of the ATM parameters of the LA-110 network port:
1. From the Configuration menu, select Physical Layer.
The Physical Layer menu is displayed.
2. From the Physical Layer menu, select ATM.
The ATM menu is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>ATM
1. Cell scrambling (Enable)

2. Idle cell (CLP) (1 (ITU)
>
Figure 4-19. ATM Menu (Physical Layer)
Table 4-16. ATM Parameters (Physical Layer)
Cell scrambling Controls the use of scrambling DISABLE Scrambling disabled.

for the traffic sent to the ENABLE Scrambling enabled.
network Default: ENABLE
Idle Cell CLP Controls the cell loss priority 1 (ITU) The CLP of idle cells is set to 1 (in
(CLP) for idle cells sent to the accordance with ITU-T recommendations). In this
network case, idle cells may be discarded during periods
of congestion.
0 (ATM Forum) The CLP of idle cells is set to 0
(in accordance with ATM Forums standards.
Default: 1 (ITU)
Configuring the ADSL Interface
To configure the ADSL interface at the physical layer:

1. From the Physical Layer menu (Configuration > Physical Layer), select ADSL.
The ADSL menu is displayed (see Figure 4-20).
2. Refer to Table 4-17 to configure the physical parameters of the ADSL
interface.
4-32 Configuring LA-110 at the Physical Layer LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>ADSL
1. Framing Type >(TYPE 3)
2. Trellis Coding (TRELLIS CODING ENABLED)
3. Transmission Mode (Frequency division)
4. Standard Compliance >(G.DMT)
5. Maximum Bits per Bin [0 - 15] ...(15)
6. Tx Frequency Bin Start ...(6)
7. Tx Frequency Bin End ...(31)
8. Rx Frequency Bin Start ...(32)
9. Rx Frequency Bin End ...(255)
10. Tx Power attenuation ...(0 db)
11. Pilot tone request (PTR) (ENABLE)
>
Network port
Figure 4-20. ADSL Parameters
Table 4-17. ADSL Physical Layer Parameters
Framing Type Selects the ADSL framing mode in accordance TYPE 2 Reduced overhead framing
with ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 with separate fast and sync
byte in the fast and interleaved
latency buffer respectively
(requires 64 kbps framing
overhead).
TYPE 3 Reduced overhead framing
with merged fast and sync
byte, using either the fast or
the interleaved latency buffer
(requires only 32 kbps framing
overhead).
Default: TYPE 3
Trellis Coding Controls the use of trellis coding, a method Enable, Disable.
that improves ADSL line transmission Default: Enable
performance

Transmission Mode Selects the method used to enable full duplex Echo Cancellation This method permits
transmission over the line the frequency ranges of the
downstream and upstream
channels to partially overlap.
Frequency division multiplexing This
method is used when it is
necessary to separate (i.e.,
prevent the overlapping of) the
transmit and receive frequency
ranges.
Default: Frequency division multiplexing
Standard Selects the ADSL implementation version T1-413 ANSI T1.413

Compliance G.DMT ITU-T Rec. G.992.1
ALCATEL 1.4 Alcatel V1.4 proprietary
implementation
ALCATEL Alcatel proprietary
implementation
ADI Analog Devices Inc. proprietary
implementation
MULTIMODE Support for both ANSI
T1.413 and ITU-T Rec. G.992.1.
Default: G.DMT
Maximum Bits per Select the maximum number of data bits that 0 to 15
Bin may be modulated on each carrier Default: 15
Tx Frequency Bin Select the numbers of the start (lowest) and The allowed range for compliance with
Start and End end (highest) carriers that can be used for Annex A of ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 is 6 to
the transmit (uplink) direction 31; the allowed range for Annex B is 1
to 63.
The End number must be higher than
the Start number.
Default: Start: 6
End: 31

Rx Frequency Bin Select the numbers of the start (lowest) and The allowed range for compliance with
Start and End end (highest) carriers that can be used for Annex A of ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 is 32 to
the receive (downlink) direction 266; the allowed range for Annex B is 1
to 255.
The End number must be higher than
the Start number. In addition, when
using FDM, the transmit and receive
frequency ranges cannot overlap,
therefore when using FDM for Annex A,
the receive frequency range is 32 to
255.
Default: Start: 32
End: 255
Tx Power Selects the reduction in the transmit level, 0 to 12 dB

Attenuation relative to the nominal transmit level Default: 0
Pilot Tone Request Determines whether the LA-110 network Enable, Disable.
(PTR) interface can request the use of a pilot tone Default: Enable
during link set up
Configuring the SHDSL Interface
To configure the SHDSL interface at the physical layer:

1. From the Physical Layer menu (Configuration > Physical Layer), select SHDSL.
The SHDSL menu is displayed (see Figure 4-20).
2. Refer to Table 4-18 to configure the physical parameters of the SHDSL
interface.
Note
For devices with 4 2-wire SHDSL IMA interface, the physical layer parameters
are automatically applied to all available SHDSL links.

LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL
Physical Interface (4 Wire)
1. Mode (CPE)
2. Power backoff (Enable)
3. Standard (Annex B)
4. Line Probe Enable (Fixed Rate)
5. Asym Psd > (Rate Asym R1 Disable)
6. Min Rate [200 2312] ...(200)
7. Max Rate [200 2312] ...(2312)
>
Network port
Figure 4-21. SHDSL Parameters (4-Wire Device)
Table 4-18. SHDSL Physical Layer Parameters
Mode Determines the operating mode of the SHDSL CPE LA-110 network interface operates
network interface as STU-R (SHDSL terminal unit
remote), which is the mode
suitable for use at the CPE side. In
this mode, the LA-110
synchronizes to the clock provided
by the equipment connected to the
other end of the SHDSL link,
usually a DSLAM.
CO LA-110 network interface operates
as STU-C (SHDSL terminal unit CO
side). This mode is intended for
use during maintenance.
Default: CPE
Physical Interface Selects the physical interface type only when 2W 2-wire SHDSL interface.
the unit Mode is configured to CO. 4W 4-wire SHDSL interface.
Note: When the unit is configured to CPE Default: 2W
Mode, the unit automatically detects whether
2 wires or 4 wires are connected to the WAN
connector; no configuration is needed for
this parameter.

Power Backoff Controls the use of transmit power backoff. ENABLE The use of power backoff is
Power backoff is used to reduce the enabled. In this case, the transmit power
interference caused by your signal to other may be reduced below the nominal value
equipment using pairs in the same cable, allowed by the standards.
without degrading the link transmission DISABLE The use of power backoff is
quality disabled. In this case, the nominal
transmit power is always used.
Default: ENABLE
Standard Selects the regional signal characteristics for ANNEX A Compliance with Annex A of
the LA-110 SHDSL modem ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, required for
compatibility in North American
networks.
ANNEX B Compliance with Annex B of
ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, required for
compatibility in European networks.
Default: ANNEX B
Line Probe Enable Controls the use of the line probe process ADAPTIVE RATE The LA-110 SHDSL
(referred to as a power measurement modem participates in the line probe
modulation session in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2) process, used to determine the highest
line rate that can be supported on the
uplink, and other parameters that affect
performance. For this selection, you
must specify different Min Rate and Max
Rate parameters.
FIXED RATE No line probing is
performed, because a fixed rate is
configured.
Default: FIXED RATE
Snext Margin Specifies the target margin for the When the FIXED RATE mode is selected,
signal-to-noise ratio measured relative to the this parameter is not available.
reference worst-case crosstalk noise When the ADAPTIVE RATE mode is
expected in accordance with ITU-T Rec. selected, the allowed range is as follows:
G.991.2. The specified value is used for rate To use the signal-to-noise ratio
negotiation during the line probe process, measured relative to crosstalk for
performed when ADAPTIVE RATE is selected. rate negotiation, select the desired
Alternatively, rate negotiation may be value, in the range of 10 to +10 dB.
performed in accordance with the Current Default: 0 dB
Margin value To disable the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to crosstalk and
use the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to the current
noise level, select DISABLE MARGIN.
In this case, make sure to select a
numerical value for the Current
Margin parameter
Default: DISABLE MARGIN

Current Margin Specifies the target margin for the When the FIXED RATE mode is selected,
signal-to-noise ratio measured relative to the this parameter is not available.
current noise level, that is, the noise level When the ADAPTIVE RATE mode is
measured during the line probe. The specified selected, the allowed range is as follows:
value is used for rate negotiation during the
To use the signal-to-noise ratio
line probe process, performed when
measured relative to current noise
ADAPTIVE RATE is selected.
level for rate negotiation, select the
Alternatively, rate negotiation may be desired value, in the range of 10 to
performed in accordance with the Current +10 dB.
Margin value Default: 1 db Margin SHDSL
To disable the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to current noise
level, select DISABLE MARGIN
In this case, make sure to select a
numerical value for the Snext Margin
parameter
Asym. Psd Controls the use of asymmetric power The values relevant when ANNEX A is
spectral density (PSD) specifications, for selected are as follows:
compatibility with special application RATE ASYM. R1 DISABLE No asymmetric
conditions. PSD is used.
The asymmetric PSD specifications are given RATE ASYM R1 ENABLE Asymmetric PSD
in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 for rates of 1536 and 1544 kbps.
RATE ASYM R2 ENABLE Asymmetric PSD
for rates of 768 and 776 kbps.
RATE ASYM R2 DISABLE No asymmetric
PSD is used.
The values relevant when ANNEX B is
selected are as follows:
RATE ASYM. R1 DISABLE No asymmetric
PSD is used.
RATE ASYM R1 ENABLE Asymmetric PSD
for rates of 2048 and 2304 kbps.
Default: RATE ASYM. R1 DISABLE
Min Rate Determines the minimum line rate that may 2002312 kbps (LA-110 with single
be selected during the rate negotiation SHDSL interface)
performed as part of the line probing 2002320 kbps (LA-110 with 4 2-wire
process. SHDSL IMA interface)
LA-110 automatically rounds a minimum line Default: 200 kbps
rate value entered by the user to the closest
number in the N 64 + 8 kbps series. For
example, the 635 kbps line rate is
automatically rounded to 648 kbps.

Max Rate Determines the maximum line rate that may 2002312 kbps (LA-110 with single
be selected during the rate negotiation SHDSL interface)
performed as part of the line probing 2002320 kbps (LA-110 with 4 2-wire
process. SHDSL IMA interface)
LA-110 automatically rounds a maximum line
Default:
rate value entered by the user to the closest
2312 kbps (LA-110 with single SHDSL
number in the N 64 + 8 kbps series. For
interface)
example, the 635 kbps line rate is
automatically rounded to 648 kbps. 2320 kbps (LA-110 with 4 2-wire
SHDSL IMA interface)
Note
The configured data rate of LA-110 may differ from configured data rate of
the opposite device, such as DSLAM. For example, when LA-110 is configured
to 2056 kbps (2056 kbps useful rate) and the DSLAM is configured to 2048
kbps (2048 kbps useful rate), they will synchronize at 2056 kbps (2048 useful
rate + 8 kbps for the EOC).
The maximum configurable line rate of the units with 4 2-wire SHDSL IMA
interface is 2320 kbps (36 64 kbps + 8 kbps + 8 kbps for the EOC). LA-110
adapts its data rate within the limits of configured minimum and maximum
rates in order to synchronize with the opposite device.
The CAC calculations are based on the configured useful data rate and not on
a synchronization rate, which is unknown at the time of configuration.
When displaying status information for the network interface via the General
Information menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Network > General
Information), the bit rate value is a synchronization rate (useful rate + 8 kbps
for the EOC).
Configuring the E1 Network Interface
To configure the E1 network interface at the physical layer:

1. From the Physical Layer menu (Configuration > Physical Layer), select E1.
The E1 menu is displayed (see Figure 4-22).
2. Refer to Table 4-19 to configure the physical parameters of the E1 network
interface.

LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1
1. Framing (NOT MULTI-FRAME (G723N))
2. Line-code (HDB3)
3. Receiver-sensitivity ...(43)
4. Synchronization > (FAST (1 SEC))
5. Idle-code ...(7E)
6. CRC-4 (Off)
>
Network port
Figure 4-22. E1 Network Parameters
Table 4-19. E1 Network Interface Physical Layer Parameters

Framing Determines the framing mode of the E1 port MULTI-FRAME (G732S) 256S
multiframe per ITU-T Rec. G.704
(16 frames per multiframe). Always
select this mode for CAS applications.
NOT MULTI-FRAME (G732N) 256N
(2 frames per multiframe).
Default: NOT MULTI-FRAME (G723N)
Line Code Displays the E1 line code The line code required by ITU-T Rec.
G.703 is HDB3.
Default: HDB3
Receiver Sensitivity Determines the maximum attenuation of the 43 dB Up to 43 dB relative to the
receive signal that can be compensated for nominal transmit level (0 dB).
by the E1 interface receive path, to obtain This is the value required for
the BER performance required by the LTU interfaces.
standards 12 dB Up to 12 dB relative to the
nominal transmit level (0 dB).
This is the value required for
DSU interfaces.
Default: 43 dB
Synchronization Used to change the frame synchronization CCITT In accordance with ITU-T Rec.
algorithm, to reduce the time required for G.706.
the E1 port to return to normal operation 62411 (10 SEC) Similar to the
after local loss of synchronization. requirements of AT&T TR-62411 (after
10 seconds).
FAST (1 SEC) After 1 second.
Default: FAST (1 SEC)

Idle Code Selects the code transmitted to fill idle 00 to FF (hexa).

(unused) timeslots in the frames transmitted Default: 7E
through this user port.
CRC-4 Controls the use of the CRC-4 function, which ON CRC-4 function enabled.
enables the collection of performance OFF CRC-4 function disabled.
diagnostic data. Default: OFF
Configuring the User Interface at the Physical Layer
Configuring the E1 User Interface at the Physical Layer

Defines the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 E1 user interface.
To define the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 E1 user interface:

2. From the Physical Layer menu, select E1-User.
The E1-User menu is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>E1-User
Connector Type > (Balanced)
1. Framing > (not multi-frame (G.732N))
2. Line Code (HDB3)
3. Receiver Sensitivity (43 DB)
4. Synchronization (FAST (1 sec))
5. Idle Code [0 ff] > (7E)
6. CRC-4 (On)
>
User port
Figure 4-23. User E1 Parameters (Physical Layer)

Table 4-20. User E1 Physical Layer Parameters

Framing Determines the framing mode of the E1 port MULTI-FRAME (G732S) 256S
(16 frames per multiframe). Always
select this mode for CAS applications.
NOT MULTI-FRAME (G732N) 256N
(2 frames per multiframe).
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) Unframed
operation: the user port handles the E1
signal as a bit stream. This option is
available only when AAL1 is configured
via the General Parameters menu
(Configuration > System > General
Parameters).
E1 UNI (Not Multi-frame) E1 UNI
transparent non-multiframe operation
E1 UNI (Multi-frame) E1 UNI
transparent multiframe operation
Default: NOT MULTI-FRAME (G723N)
Line Code Displays the E1 line code HDB3

AMI
Default: HDB3
Receiver Sensitivity Determines the maximum attenuation of the 43 dB Up to 43 dB relative to the

receive signal that can be compensated for nominal transmit level (0 dB).
by the E1 interface receive path, to obtain This is the value required for
the BER performance required by the LTU interfaces.
standards 12 dB Up to 12 dB relative to the
nominal transmit level (0 dB).
This is the value required for
DSU interfaces.
Default: 43 dB
Synchronization Used to change the frame synchronization CCITT In accordance with ITU-T Rec.
algorithm, to reduce the time required for G.706.
the E1 port to return to normal operation 62411 (10 SEC) Similar to the
after local loss of synchronization. requirements of AT&T TR-62411 (after
This field is not displayed when the 10 seconds).
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) mode is selected FAST (1 SEC) After 1 second.
Idle Code Selects the code transmitted to fill idle 00 to FF (hexa).
(unused) timeslots in the frames transmitted Default: 7E
through this user port.
This field is not displayed when the
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) mode is selected

CRC-4 Controls the use of the CRC-4 function, which ON CRC-4 function enabled.
enables the collection of performance OFF CRC-4 function disabled.
diagnostic data. Default: OFF
This field is not displayed when the
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) mode is selected
Signaling Sample Selects the sampling time for the 100 msec, 200 msec, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec,
Time channel-associated signaling information. 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec
This field is displayed when the MULTI-FRAME Default: 0.5 sec
(G732S) framing mode is selected
Configuring the T1 User Interface at the Physical Layer

Defines the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 T1 user interface.
To define the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 T1 user interface:

2. From the Physical Layer menu, select T1-User.
The T1-User menu is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>T1-User
1. Framing > (ESF)
2. Line Code (B8SZ)
4. Line-Build-Out (LBO) > (DSU : 0-133 feet)
7. Signaling Sample Time (0.5 sec)
>
User port
Figure 4-24. User T1 Parameters (Physical Layer)
Table 4-21. User T1 Physical Layer Parameters

Framing Determines the framing mode of the T1 port ESF 24 frames per multiframe)
SF 212 frames per multiframe
Default: ESF

Line Code Determines the T1 line code B7ZS

B8ZS
AMI
Default: B8ZS
Receiver Determines the T1 receiver sensitivity 36 dB
Sensitivity 30 dB
Default: 36 dB
Line-Build-Out Determines length of a cable in feet between the LA-110 DSU : 0-133 feet
(LBO) T1 port connector and the network access point (DSU DSU : 133266 feet
mode) or Tx gain level relative to T1 output transmit level DSU : 266399 feet
(CSU mode)
DSU : 399533 feet
DSU : 533655 feet
CSU : 0 dB
CSU : 7.5 dB
CSU : 15 dB
CSU : 22.5 dB
Default: DSU : 0-133 feet
Synchronization Used to change the frame synchronization algorithm, to 62411 (10 SEC) Similar to the
reduce the time required for the T1 port to return to requirements of AT&T TR-62411
normal operation after local loss of synchronization. (after 10 seconds).
FAST (1 SEC) After 1 second.
Idle Code Selects the code transmitted to fill idle (unused) 00 to FF (hexa).
timeslots in the frames transmitted through this user Default: 7E
port.
Signaling Sample Selects the sampling time for the channel-associated 100 msec, 200 msec, 0.5 sec, 1.0
Time signaling information. sec, 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec
Default: 0.5 sec

Configuring the ISDN Interface at the Physical Layer

Defines the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 ISDN interface.
To define the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 ISDN interface:

From the ISDN menu (Configuration > Physical Layer > ISDN), configure the
phantom power feeding and echo cancellation of each ISDN port.
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>ISDN
1. Phantom >
2. Echo Canceling >
>
User port
Figure 4-25. ISDN Parameters (Physical Layer)
Table 4-22. ISDN Physical Layer Parameters

Echo Canceling Controls the use of echo canceling for the ON The echo canceller is enabled.
corresponding B channel. OFF The echo canceller is disabled.
This field is displayed only when LA-110 is Default: ON
equipped with the optional echo canceller, or
supports voice compression (ADPCM).
Phantom Controls the supply of feed power to the ENABLE The port provides feed power
users ISDN termination device connected to to the users equipment.
the corresponding port. DISABLE The supply of feed power is
The appropriate selection depends on the disabled.
users ISDN termination device: always Default: ENABLE
disable this option if feed power is not
needed.
This field is displayed only for the LA-110
ISDN ports configured as NT interfaces.
Configuring the FXS Interface at the Physical Layer

Defines the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 FXS interface.
To define the physical layer parameters of the LA-110 FXS interface:

From the FXS menu (Configuration > Physical Layer > FXS), select Tx/Rx gains
values for the FXS ports.

LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>FXS
Coding law (A Law)

1. Gains Tx > ( 0 db)
2. Gains Rx > ( -10 db)
>
User port
Figure 4-26. FXS Parameters (Physical Layer)
Table 4-23. FXS Physical Layer Parameters

Coding Law Displays the companding law currently Default: A law

configured via the General Parameters menu
(Configuration > System > General
Parameters)
Gains Tx Selects the nominal input level of the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4 and 5 dBm
transmit path for each voice port. Default: 0 dBm
The selected value must match the input level
expected from the users equipment
connected to the corresponding port (the
input level is determined by the users
equipment output level, less the attenuation
caused by the interconnecting cables)
Gains Rx Determines the nominal output level of the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4 and 5 dBm
receive (Rx) paths for each voice port. Default: -4 dBm
The selected value must match the input level
expected by the users equipment connected
to the corresponding port
Configuring the Synchronous Data Port at the Physical Layer

Define the LA-110 data port physical layer characteristics.
To configure the serial synchronous data port at the physical layer:

1. From the Configuration Layer menu, select Physical Layer.
2. From the Physical Layer menu, select Serial.
The Serial menu is displayed.

LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>Serial
Physical interface > (X21)
1. Baud > (64 kBps)
2. Inverted Clock (Disable)
3. Control Signal (C = Obey , I = Obey Remote Signal)
>
Serial port
Figure 4-27. Serial Port Parameters (Physical Layer)
Table 4-24. Serial Port Physical Layer Parameters

Physical interface Selects the physical interface of the serial X21 X.21 physical interface
data port. V35 V.35 physical interface
Baud Specifies the nominal port data rate The available selections are the following
multiples of 64 kbps: 64, 128, 192, 256,
320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768,
832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216,
1280, 1344, 1408, 1472, 1536, 1600,
1664, 1728, 1792, 1856, 1920, 1984
and 2048 kbps.
Note: For the units with the E1 network
interface the maximum data port rate is
limited to 1664 kbps.
Default: 64 kbps
Inverted Clock Selects the relative clock polarity, for DISABLE Normal polarity: clock falling
compatibility with users equipment interface edge occurs in the middle of
characteristics the bit interval
ENABLE Inverted polarity: clock rising
edge occurs in the middle of
the bit interval.
Default: DISABLE


Control Signal Controls the use of the port handshaking C = Obey, I = Obey Remote Signal
signals, for compatibility with users C = Obey, I = On
equipment interface characteristics.
C = Obey, I = Off
C = Ignore, I = On
C = Ignore, I = Off
C = Ignore, I = Obey Remote Signal
C = Obey:
When the C-signal (RTS) is off and
Connection Type is not set to
Structured (Signal Transport), LA-110
transmits no user data or signaling to
the remote unit.
When the C-signal (RTS) is off and
Connection Type is set to Structured
(Signal Transport),
LA-110 transmits data and C-off
indication to the remote unit.
When the C-signal (RTS) is on and
Connection Type is not set to
Structured (Signal Transport), LA-110
transmits only user data to the
remote unit.
When the C-signal (RTS) is on and
Connection Type is set to Structured
(Signal Transport),
LA-110 transmits user data and C-on
indication to the remote unit.
C = Ignore:
LA-110 ignores the state of the
C-signal (RTS). Data transfer on the
LA-110-to-DTE link is always enabled.
I = Obey Remote Signal:
I-signal (DCD) always follows the
state of the C-signal (RTS) received
from the remote unit.
I = On:
I-signal (DCD) is always on.
I = Off:
I-signal (DCD) is always off. No data
is sent to the DTE connected to the
LA-110 data port.
Default: C = Obey, I = Obey Remote
Signal

Configuring the LAN Interface at the Physical Layer

The LA-110 LAN port has 10/100BaseT interface with autonegotiation support.
To define the parameters of the LA-110 LAN port:

2. From the Physical Layer menu, select LAN.
The LAN menu is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>LAN
Max Capability advertised > (100BASE_T - full duplex mode )
Device MAC Address (00-20-D2-21-B7-FA)
1. Auto Negotiation (Disable)
2. Default Type > (10BASE_T - half duplex mode )
3. Pause Mode > (Disable)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-28. LAN Port Parameters (Physical Layer)
Table 4-25. LAN Physical Layer Parameters

Auto Negotiation Controls the use of autonegotiation. ENABLE Autonegotiation is enabled.

Autonegotiation is used to automatically DISABLE Autonegotiation is disabled.
select the mode providing the highest Default: DISABLE
possible traffic handling capability, by
carrying out an automatic handshaking
procedure that coordinates the LAN port
operation with that of the other equipment
connected to the LAN port
Max Capability Specifies the highest traffic handling 10BASE _T half duplex mode: Half
Advertised capability to be advertised during the duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
autonegotiation. 10BASE _T full duplex mode: Full duplex
The operating mode selected as a result of operation at 10 Mbps.
autonegotiation cannot exceed the 100BASE _T half duplex mode: Half
advertised capability. duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
This parameter is relevant only if the 100BASE _T full duplex mode: Full
autonegotiation is enabled. duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
Default: 100BASE _T full duplex mode

Default Type Select a specific operating mode and data 10BASE _T half duplex mode: Half
rate. duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
The selected values determine the LAN port 10BASE _T full duplex mode: Full duplex
operating mode in the following operation at 10 Mbps.
circumstances: 100BASE _T half duplex mode: Half
When autonegotiation is disabled duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
When autonegotiation is enabled, but the 100BASE _T full duplex mode: Full
autonegotiation process cannot be carried duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
out, for example, because no operational Default: 10BASE _T half duplex mode
equipment is connected to the LAN port
Pause Mode Select the use of the Ethernet Pause frames Enable LA-110 uses Pause frames for
for the data flow control, as per IEEE 802.3x. the data flow control
When the pause mode is enabled, periodic Disable LA-110 does not use Pause
pause frames are sent to an Ethernet host frames for the data flow control
via the LAN port to stop transmitting if the
LA-110 LAN receive buffer is congested.
4.5 Configuring LA-110 at the Logical Layer

The LA-110 management software allows configuration of the logical layer
parameters for the following interfaces and services:
ATM
IMA
User (E1, T1, ISDN, FXS)
Serial
LAN
MPLS.
Configuring ATM Interface at the Logical Layer

To configure ATM interface at the logical layer:
From the Logical Layer menu (Configuration > Logical Layer), select ATM.
The ATM menu is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>ATM
1. Shaping mode > (HW Shaping, NCITS = 1)

2. IMA >
>
4-50 Configuring LA-110 at the Logical Layer LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Figure 4-29. ATM Menu (Logical Layer)
Table 4-26. ATM Parameters (Logical Layer)
Shaping Mode See Software and Hardware HW Shaping, NCITS = 1

Shaping Considerations below HW Shaping, NCITS = 2
SW Shaping
None
Default: HW Shaping, NCITS = 1
Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping mode, when the UBR
E1 user interface is configured
to E1 UNI mode
PCR Specifies the peak cell rate, when The allowed range depends on the network
the E1 user interface is interface type:
configured to E1 UNI mode 79 to 5452 cells per second (2-wire)
The maximum actual value depends on the network
port synchronization rate.
Default: 5452 (2-wire) or 10868 (4-wire)
IMA Relevant only for LA-110 units See Configuring the IMA Interface section below
equipped with the IMA WAN
interface
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuring LA-110 at the Logical Layer 4-51

Software and Hardware Shaping Considerations

LA-110 uses the following shaping modes:
SW shaping
HW shaping NCITS = 1
HW shaping NCITS = 2.
Software Shaping
In the SW shaping mode, cell scheduling is done by the LA-110 software. This
shaping mode was introduced in order to overcome the hardware limitations. The
current LA-110 units include a microprocessor with shaping module, capable of
performing cell-scheduling operations.
The SW shaping mode has the following limitations:
The LA-110 CPU performs cell scheduling at expense of the other tasks,
slowing the unit performance.
As the LA-110 software schedules cells into a transmission queue, it
introduces a 2.5 msec queue in order to optimize the scheduling process and
avoid the cell loss. This adds another 23 msec to the cell flow delay.
The software shaping mechanism does not support two (or more) CBR
connections hat use a large part of the ATM line bandwidth.
An advantage the SW shaping is that it can schedule cells for better utilization of
the full ATM bandwidth.
However, if an application requires high CPU usage (for example, 4-wire with high
data throughput) it is important to free as much CPU resources as possible. In
this case the software shaping is not recommended.
Hardware Shaping
The LA-110 microprocessor includes a shaping module, capable of performing
cell-scheduling operations. The hardware shaping method has the following
advantages over the software method:
Freeing up CPU resources, otherwise allocated to the software shaping
process. The CPU resources are necessary in high data throughput applications.
Solving the two CBR connection problem mentioned above.
The hardware shaping method has the following limitation:
When a high priority ATM connection is configured (CBR AAL1 connection)
that takes up almost all the ATM line capacity, low priority connections (UBR)
may be starved. This happens even if additional ATM bandwidth is available.
As a result UBR connections, such as SNMP, cannot be scheduled even if
enough bandwidth is available.
The HW scheduling module calculates scheduling for every cell. To prevent
potential issues regarding overloading the scheduling module, the NCITS (Number
of Cells Transmitted In Timeslot) configuration is used.

NCITS = 1. Scheduling calculations are performed for every cell. This increases
the potential of scheduling module overload in high cell throughput. This HW
shaping mode is recommended for most cases.
NCITS = 2. Scheduling calculations are performed for every two cells. This
reduces the potential of scheduling module overload in high cell throughput.
This mode introduces additional limitations:
The HW shaping module is limited to schedule only one cell from a single
connection on a scheduling round (at a time). As a result, when using
NCITS = 2, the maximal bandwidth allocated for a single connection can
be half the ATM line pace.
Granularity issue. There is no mechanism that monitors the order of the
cells that are scheduled at a scheduling round. This means that the cell
spacing can be controlled up to the range of the cells scheduled on a
round. If NCITS=2 is used, a cell that has to be scheduled, for example,
after every 5 cells, it may be scheduled after 4 cells only (or even 3 in
some cases). This usually decreases the CDVT.
Table 4-27. Recommendations for Shaping Mode Selection
Shaping Shaper Required Resources Expected Additional Limitations

Mode Mechanism CDVT
Performance
HW Shaping, Hardware Little (no CPU (SW) resources; High Generally recommended
NCITS = 1 some HW scheduling module
resources)
HW Shaping, Hardware Very little (no CPU (SW) Low Maximal SCR or PCR
NCITS = 2 resources; little HW limited to half the line
scheduling module resources) rate.
SW Shaping Software High (high CPU (SW) High Should be used on 2-wire
resources, no HW scheduling with high band CBR
module resources) connection , to enable
management band.
Configuring the IMA Interface

When LA-110 includes an IMA SHDSL WAN interface, it has to be configured as
follows:
1. Define and configure the IMA group
2. Relate SHDSL links to an IMA group.
To define and configure the IMA group:

1. Display the IMA Group menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA > IMA
Group), see Figure 4-30.
2. Refer to Table 4-28 for explanation of the IMA group configuration values.

Table 4-28. IMA Group Configuration
Group Number The IMA group number 14. Permanently set to 1.

Default: 1
Status Status of the IMA group Activated The IMA group is operational
Suspended The IMA group is deactivated
temporarily
Default: Activated
Min Number of Tx Minimum number of active transmit links 14

Links required for the IMA group to remain Default: 1
operational
Min Number of Rx Minimum number of active receive links 14

Links required for the IMA group to remain Default: 1
operational
Group ID Identification number of the IMA group 0255

written in the ICP cell. Both ends of the Default: 1
IMA virtual link can independently select
an IMA ID. There is no need to ensure a
unique IMA ID on each end.

Group Symmetry Group symmetry mode, which specifies Symm. Config & Opertaion IMA group is
the cell rate transfer mode over the IMA required to configure an IMA link in each direction
virtual link (symmetrical or of all the physical links that the IMA unit is
asymmetrical). configured to use.
IMA group is only allowed to transmit and receive
ATM layer cells over physical links over which the
IMA links are active in both directions.
Symm. Config & Asymm. Operation IMA group is
required to configure an IMA link in each direction
of all the physical links that the IMA unit is
configured to use.
IMA group is also allowed to transmit ATM layer
cells over the physical links on which the IMA link
is active only in transmit direction while the IMA
link in the receive direction is not active.
(The other way around is also true: IMA group is
allowed to receive ATM layer cells from physical
links on which the IMA link in the receive direction
is active while the IMA link in the transmit
direction is not active).
Asymm. Config & Operation IMA group is not
required to configure the IMA links in both
transmit and receive directions of all physical links
that the IMA unit is configured to use.
IMA group is also allowed to transmit ATM layer
cells over the physical links on which the IMA link
in the transmit direction is active while the IMA
link in the receive direction is not active (or
allowed to receive ATM layer cells from physical
links on which the IMA link in the receive direction
is active while the IMA link in the transmit
direction is not active).
Default: Symm. Config & Opertaion
Tx frame length The frame length to be used by the IMA 32, 64, 128, 256 cells
group in the transmit direction. Default: 128
Max Differential The maximum delay allowed between 25200 ms

Delay the reception of packets from adjacent Default: 25
SHDSL links on the receiving end. When
Note: If the WAN interface is configured to
this delay is exceeded, the data stream
0.51 Mbps, the available values are 25100.
cannot be reconstructed correctly.
Blocking Usability state of the IMA group Blocked The group is blocked, even though
sufficient links are active in both
directions
Unblocked The group is unblocked, data
transmission is allowed.
Default: Unblocked

IMA Version The supported ATM Forum IMA version 1.0, 1.1
Default: 1.1
Common Tx Clock Transmit clocking mode used by the IMA Link14 Tx clock is locked to the clock signal
Source group recovered from the Rx signal of the specified
SHDSL link
Group Clock (Automatic) Tx clock source is
selected automatically from one of the available
SHDSL links
Default: Group Clock (Automatic)
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>IMA Group
Group number[1 - 4] ... (1)
1. Status (Activated)
2. Min number of Tx Links[1 - 4] ... (1)
3. Min number of Rx Links[1 - 4] ... (1)
4. Group Id[0 - 255] ... (1)
5. Group symmetry > (Symm. Config & Opertaion)
6. Tx frame length > (128)
7. Max differential delay (ms)[25 -... (25)
8. Blocking (Unblocked)
9. IMA version > (1.1)
10. Common Tx clock source > (Group clock (Automatic))
>
Figure 4-30. IMA Group Menu
To configure the IMA links:

1. Display the IMA link menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA > IMA
Link).
2. Refer to Table 4-29 for explanation of the IMA group configuration values.

Table 4-29. IMA Link Configuration
IMA Number The IMA link to be configured 14.

Default: 1
Group Number Number of the IMA group, to which the 1 The link is assigned to the IMA group 1
current link is assigned Not In Group The link is not assigned to any IMA
group
Default: 1
Link Direction Direction, in which the current link is RX The current link is active in the receive
active direction only
TX The current link is active in the transmit
direction only
Both The current link is active in the receive and
transmit directions
Default: Both
Blocking Usability state of the link Blocked The link is blocked

Unblocked The link is unblocked
Default: Unblocked
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>IMA Link
1. IMA Link[1 - 4] ... (1)

2. Group number > (1)
3. Link direction > (Both)
4. Link blocking (Unblocked)
>
Figure 4-31. IMA Link Menu
Configuring the User Interface at the Logical Layer

The LA-110 management software allows you to configure the following user
interfaces supported by the device:
E1
T1
ISDN
FXS.

Configuring the E1 or T1 Interface at the Logical Layer

When configuring the E1 and T1 interfaces at the logical layer, it is necessary to
perform the following:
1. Create a bundle by adding timeslots, when the LA-110 E1 or T1 interface
operates on the framed mode.
No bundles are defined in unframed or E1 UNI modes. The data is transferred
as an unstructured data stream (unframed E1 or T1) or ATM stream (E1 UNI).
2. Select an application: TDM over ATM or Frame Relay.
3. Configure connection for data transfer.
Creating a Bundle
A bundle is a group of user-selected timeslots: this group is then handled as a
single entity with respect to transmission to the ATM network, that is, you must
define a separate connection for each bundle.
The bundle configuration parameters depend on the AAL type. For AAL2, they
also depend on the application identifier (both are selected via the General
Parameters menu):
When using AAL1 in any supported application mode (CES, DB-CES or
transparent):
Minimum number of timeslots in a bundle: 1
Maximum number of timeslots in a bundle when the E1 port uses G732N
framing: 31
Maximum number of timeslots in a bundle when the E1 port uses G732S
framing: 30 (in this framing mode, timeslot 16 cannot be included in any
bundle).
Maximum number of timeslots in a bundle for a framed T1 port is 24.
It is not possible to define bundles when the E1 port is in unframed or UNI
mode.
When using AAL2, bundles can be defined only when using CAS (the
corresponding application identifier is identified via the General
Parameters menu as CAS and DSS1 (without ELCP). With AAL2, a bundle
can have a single timeslot.
To create a bundle:
1. From a Bundle menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle), select
Bundle and choose a bundle number (131 for E1 and 124 for T1).
The TS Table parameter is displayed in the Bundle menu.

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>Bundle
1. Bundle number[1 - 31] ... (1)

2. Ts Table []>
>
User port
Figure 4-32. Bundle Menu
2. From the Bundle menu, select TS Table.

The Timeslot Table is displayed.
3. In the Timeslot Table select a timeslot by using the <Tab> key.
4. Select Yes for each timeslot to be added to the current bundle.
Note
For the LA-110 units with the E1 network interface maximum number of
timeslots assigned to all opened bundles cannot exceed 26.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>Bundle>Ts Table
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
No No No No No No No No No No No
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
No No No No No No No No No
1. No
2. Yes
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; @-debug; ?-help
Figure 4-33. Timeslot Table
5. Press <Esc> top return to the Bundle menu.

The Application parameter is displayed.

Selecting an Application
In the multiservice over ATM mode the user traffic can be sent over the ATM
network using one of the following applications:
TDM over ATM
Frame Relay.
To select a user traffic application:

1. From the Bundle menu, select Application and choose the desired application
mode for the current bundle: TDM over ATM or Frame Relay.
Note
Before choosing the Frame Relay mode, configure the serial data port
application to the Frame Relay mode via the Application menu (Configuration >
Logical Layer > Serial > Application).
Currently, it is possible to assign only one bundle for the Frame Relay traffic
received via the E1 or T1 port.
Creating a Frame Relay connection via the E1 or T1 port disables the serial
data port.
2. Press <Esc> to return to the User menu.

The relevant parameters for creating an ATM Connection for the selected
user traffic type appear in the User menu (Configuration > Logical Layer >
User).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User
1. Bundle >
2. TDM over ATM >
3. FR >
>
User port
Figure 4-34. User Menu with Application Mode Selected
Creating a TDM over ATM Connection (AAL1)

When using AAL1, the E1 port can be operated in three framing modes:
Unframed: this mode is used to transport the 2048 or 1544 kbps bit stream
received by the E1 or T1 port, transparently, over the ATM network.
Therefore, in this mode only a single connection can be set up for the E1 or
T1 port, and any attempt to add another connection is rejected with a No
more VCCs for new connections message.
G732S framing: this mode is used for applications using channel-associated
signaling. In this mode, each timeslot carries an independent voice channel,
and the signaling information of all the channels is multiplexed in timeslot 16

(see details in Appendix E). When using G732S framing, the connections are
actually defined for timeslot.
The configuration procedure depends on the connection type selected by the
user:
CES. In this mode, each timeslot bundle has its own ATM connection. The
payload is transported using the ATM Circuit Emulation Service (CES)
Version 2.0 defined in AF-VTOA-0078.000. The transmission is made in
the structured CES mode: in this mode, each bundle is transported as an
independent N 64 kbps stream (where n is the number of timeslots in
the bundle), together with its signaling information. However, the user
can also disable the transport of the signaling information of the bundle,
for example, when the bundle actually carries a data stream in a
fractional E1 application.
DB-CES. This mode is a variation of CES relevant for voice channels that
has been defined in ATMF specification AF-VTOA-0085.000. DB-CES
enables better utilization of available uplink bandwidth by using the voice
channel activity information carried by the four signaling bits (A, B, C, D)
of the individual timeslots in each bundle to request uplink bandwidth
when the channel carried by a timeslot is active (off-hook), and release
the bandwidth when the channel is idle (on-hook). The cell structure
depends on the framing mode selected by the user (E1, T1 using SF
framing or T1 using ESF framing).
Transparent. This mode uses the unstructured CES mode defined in ATMF
specification AF-VTOA-0078.000. In this mode, the LA-110 handles each
bundle as an N 64 kbps bit stream which is transparently transported
over an ATM connection.
G732N framing: this mode is used for applications that do not use
channel-associated signaling. However, the configuration options are similar
to those for the G732S framing.
To create a TDM over ATM connection:

1. From the User menu, select TDM over ATM.
The TDM over ATM menu is displayed.
2. From the TDM over ATM menu, select Connection.
The Connection menu is displayed.
3. From the Connection menu, define the ATM connection parameters for the
TDM over ATM traffic, referring to Table 4-30, Table 4-31 or Table 4-32,
depending on the connection type.

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>TDM over ATM>Connection
Signaling (Off)
1. Connection Type > (CES )
2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
4. Rx Bytes per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
5. Tx Bytes per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
6. Continuity Check > (on-two-way)
8. LB Fail Threshold[1 - 16] ... (1)
9. LB Fail Indication (Off)
... (N)
>
User port
Figure 4-35. Connection Menu (TDM over ATM Traffic, CES Mode), Page 1
LA-110
... (P)
10. Active (On)
11. Pointer (Disable)
12. Signaling (Off)
>
User port
Figure 4-36. Connection Menu (TDM over ATM Traffic, CES Mode), Page 2
Table 4-30. Connection Parameters (TDM over ATM Traffic, AAL1 CES Mode)
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select CES
Default: CES
used by the connection Default: 0

VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be 0 to 255

used by the connection. Default: 0
Notes:
connection, therefore you cannot specify a
VPI.VCI pair already used by another
configuration will be rejected if you leave the
default values unchanged, or the selected
values are already in use.
Rx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
expected in the cells received by the new Default: 47
connection.
Remaining bytes are assumed to be padding
bytes and therefore are discarded
Tx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
inserted in a cell before transmitting it. Default: 47
After the specified number of payload is
collected, the remaining bytes in the cell are
filled with padding and the cell is immediately
transmitted toward the network. This parameter
enables the user to reduce the delay caused by
cell filling in applications that cannot tolerate
long delays
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the new Default: off-two way
connection to perform continuity checks on the
ATM network interface. See Table 4-5.
Active Selects the initial state of the new connection. ON The new connection is active and
can carry traffic.
OFF The new connection cannot carry
traffic, but its configuration
parameters are stored in the LA-
110 database.
Default: ON
Pointer Enables or disables use of the structure pointer, ENABLE Structure pointer is enabled
indicating the start of a new AAL1 structure. This DISABLE Structure pointer is disabled
option is available only for the bundles with a Default: ENABLE
single timeslot. In the bundles, which contain
more than one timeslot, the pointer is always
enabled and is not displayed in the configuration
menu.

Pointer Parity Controls the use of parity for the AAL1 structure ON Use of parity enabled
pointer, when the pointer use is enabled. OFF Use of parity disabled, for
Parity is used to detect errors in the AAL1 cell compatibility with equipment that
pointer. does not support pointer parity
checking
Default: ON
Signaling Controls the transport of the signaling Yes Signaling information transported
information associated with the timeslots of the together with the timeslot payload.
selected bundle No Signaling information ignored.
Default: No
LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic loopbacks on ON Periodic loopback activation is

the current interface connection. These enabled.
LA-110 keeps statistics for the Round-Trip Delay disabled.
(RTD) measurements and generates alarms upon
Default: OFF
loopback failures, according to the
user-selectable threshold. Note: Periodic loopbacks can be activated
together with continuity checks.
LB Fail Threshold Selects the number of non-received loopback 116

responses which trigger alarm activation.
LB Fail Indication Controls alarm generation if the number of non- ON Alarm is generated.
received loopback responses exceeds threshold. OFF Alarm is not generated.
The alarm is OAM LOOPBACK FAILURE START.
Default: OFF
Table 4-31. Connection Parameters (TDM over ATM Traffic, AAL1 DB-CES Mode)
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select DB-CES
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30

Rx Bytes Per Cell See Table 4-30
Tx Bytes Per Cell See Table 4-30
Cont Check See Table 4-5
Active See Table 4-30
Idle Signaling Bits Specify the combinations of the signaling LA-110 is preconfigured with the following
bits (A and B) that are used to identify signaling bit combinations:
the idle channel state, separately for the
Tx Rx Application
transmit (Tx) and the receive (Rx)
direction 0x 0x E&M interface, PLAR
x1 0x FXO interface, loop start
0x x1 FXS interface, loop start
1x 01 FXO interface, ground start

01 1x FXS interface, ground start

10 10 R2 signaling protocol
If your application requires different

settings, select Other and refer to the
procedure described below.
Default: E&M/PLAR
Pointer Parity See Table 4-30
LB Operation See Table 4-30
LB Fail Threshold See Table 4-30
LB Fail Indication See Table 4-30
To select custom idle signaling bit values:

If you selected Other for the Rx, Tx Idle Signaling Bits parameter the custom idle
signaling configuration is available.
Select the desired value for each direction:
Signaling select the pair of bits that are recognized as idle state
Mask select the bit combination to be ignored when determining
whether the channel is idle or not.
Table 4-32. Connection Parameters (TDM over ATM Traffic AAL1 Transparent Mode)
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select TRANSPARENT
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30
Table 4-33. Connection Parameters (TDM over ATM Traffic AAL1 Unframed Mode)
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30

Connection Type Read-only UNSTRUCTURED Use of unstructured

service as defined in ATMF document
AF-VTOA-0078.000.
Pointer Parity When using the UNSTRUCTURED connection

type, this field displays N/A and cannot be
changed
Creating a TDM over ATM Connection (AAL2)

LA-110 supports LES over AAL2 as defined in ATMF AF-VTOA-0145.000, including
support for ELCP.
When configuring a connection for an E1 port over AAL2, it is necessary to select
the application identifier LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP).
Note that in this case, the E1 port framing mode must be configured to use the
G732S framing mode.
The connections are actually defined for timeslot bundles, however when using
AAL2 each bundle consists of a single timeslot.
When using AAL2, several bundles can share the same ATM connection: the
multiplexing is performed by means of the channel identifier (CID).
Table 4-34. Connection Parameters (TDM over ATM Traffic AAL2)
CID Channel identifier used by the LES protocol 1 to 255

Default: 0
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30

Table 4-34. Connection Parameters (TDM over ATM Traffic AAL2) (Cont.)
OnHook Indicates the combination of ABCD signaling bits 0000 to 1111

used for indicating the on-hook state of the Default: 0101
subscribers equipment for the corresponding
bundle
OffHook Indicates the combination of ABCD signaling bits 0000 to 1111
used for indicating the off-hook state of the Default: 1111
subscribers equipment for the corresponding
bundle
Mask Used to indicate the bits to be considered when 0 indicates that the corresponding
evaluating a combination of ABCD signaling bits bit position is to be ignored.
1 indicates that the corresponding
bit position is to be taken into
consideration.
0000 to 1111
Default: 1111
Creating a Frame Relay Connection

When creating an ATM connection for the Frame Relay traffic received via the E1
or T1 port, it is necessary to configure the port parameters (control protocol
type, the use of CLLM) and define the connection properties.
To configure the port parameters:

1. From the User menu, select FR.
The FR menu is displayed.
2. From the FR menu, select Port Parameters.
The Port Parameters menu is displayed.
3. From the Port Parameters menu, configure the following:
Protocol (Specifies the Frame Relay link control protocol to be used on
the data port. The protocol must match the protocol used by the
equipment connected to the user port.):
None No protocol
Q.933 network ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, network side
Q.933 user ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, user side
Q.933 both ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, both network and user side
T1.617 network ANSI T1.617, Annex D, network side
T1.617 user ANSI T1.617, Annex D, user side.T1.617 both ANSI
T1.617, Annex D, both network and user side
LMI network LMI specification, network side
LMI user LMI specification, user side
LMI both LMI specification, both network and user side.

CLLM (Controls the use of the CLLM (Consolidated Link Layer

Management) protocol. The selection must match the users equipment
configuration. This option is not displayed if the selected Protocol is one
of the LMI options):
Yes CLLM is used
No CLLM is not used.
To create a Frame Relay connection:

1. From the FR menu, select Connection.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>FR>Connection
1. Connection number [1 - 8] ... (1)

2. DLCI[16 - 991] ... (0)
3. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
4. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
5. Interworking (Service)
6. FECN (Convert)
7. Mode (Transparent)
8. DE<->CLP > (Convert)
... (N)
>
User port
Figure 4-37. Connection Menu (User Port Frame Relay Traffic), Page 1
LA-110
...P
3. PCR[79 - 10868] ... (10868)
4. Active (On)
>
User port
Figure 4-38. Connection Menu (User Port Frame Relay Traffic), Page 2

2. From the Connection menu, define the ATM connection parameters for the
Frame Relay traffic, referring to Table 4-35.
Table 4-35. Connection Parameters (User Port Frame Relay)
Connection Selects connection number 1 to 8

Default: 1
DLCI Specifies the Frame Relay users DLCI for which 16 to 991 (DLCIs 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024
the new connection will be used. are reserved)
Note: Since only one connection may be set up Default: 0
for each DLCI, do not specify a DLCI currently
used by another connection


Notes:
In general, the VPI.VCI pair uniquely
identifies an ATM connection, therefore you
cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used
by another connection, even if that
connection is defined on another LA-110
port. This also applies to a connection using
the SERVICE interworking mode.
However, when the connection uses the

NETWORK interworking mode, it is possible
to define a many-to-one connection by
entering the same VPI.VCI pair for more
than one network connection on the data
port. In this case, the traffic contract
parameters of the new connection are
automatically adopted from those defined
for the first connection using the same
VPI.VCI pair.
The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved. Your
the default values unchanged

Interworking Specifies the Frame Relay interworking SERVICE LA-110 operates in the service
function performed by the LA-110 interworking mode, as defined
in FRF.8. In this mode, LA-110
enables Frame Relay
equipment to communicate
with ATM equipment.
NETWORK LA-110 operates in the
network interworking mode
defined in FRF.5. In this mode,
LA-110 enables Frame Relay
with other Frame Relay
equipment over an ATM
network.
Default: Service
FECN Specifies the method used to convert the EFCI=0 Ignore the FECN bit received
forward explicit congestion notification (FECN) from the Frame Relay
information to the congestion indication (CI) equipment connected to the
bit, or the explicit forward congestion data port, and always set the
indication (EFCI) bit, to be inserted in the ATM EFCI bit to 0.
cells CONVERT In the receive path, the EFCI/CI
bit is derived from the received
FECN bit.
Default: CONVERT
Mode Specifies the protocol handling method TRANSLATION LA-110 converts the
encapsulation header from
the format required by
RFC2427, which replaces
RFC 1490 (Frame Relay) to
the format of RFC2684,
which replaces RFC1483
(ATM).
TRANSPARENT LA-110 transparently
transfers the encapsulation
header.
Default: TRANSPARENT
FR-SSCS-DLCI Specifies the value of the DLCI to be used at 16 to 991 (DLCIs 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024
the far end of the link, to complete the are reserved).
connection. This parameter is available when Default: Same as the users DLCI
the interworking is set to Network.

DE->CLP Specifies the method used to derive the cell CLP=0 The CLP bit is always set
loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent in the ATM to 0.
network cells, from the DE bit of Frame Relay CLP=1 The CLP bit is always set
frames to 1.
Note: The original DE bit is also mapped to the CONVERT The CLP bit is derived
DE-FR-SSCS bit in the Frame Relay service- from the DE bit received
specific convergence sublayer (SSCS) protocol from the Frame Relay
data units (PDUs) sent through the ATM equipment connected to
network. LA-110.
This parameter is available when the Default: CONVERT
interworking is set to Network.
CLP->DE Specifies the method used to derive the CONV-DE-ONLY Only the DE-FR-SSCS bit
discard eligibility (DE) bit sent to the frame received from the
relay equipment connected to LA-110E, using remote end in the
the CLP bit carried by the ATM cells, and the Frame Relay SSCS PDUs
DE-FR-SSCS bit received in Frame Relay SSCS determines the DE bit.
PDUs. CONV-DE & CLP The DE bit is derived
This parameter is available when the from both the CLP and
interworking is set to Network. the DE-FR-SSCS bits.
Default: CONV-DE & CLP
DE<->CLP Specifies the method used to derive the 0 Always set the CLP and DE bits to 0.
discard eligibility (DE) bit for the Frame Relay 1 Always set the CLP and DE bits to 1.
equipment, and the cell loss priority (CLP) bit CONVERT In the receive path, the DE bit
for the ATM network is derived from the CLP bit
received from the ATM network
(if one of the cells carries
CLP = 1, the DE will be set to
1). In the transmit path, the
CLP bit is derived from the DE
bit received from the Frame
Relay equipment
Default: CONVERT
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the new The available selections are listed in
connection to perform continuity checks on Table 4-5.
the ATM network interface Default: OFF TWO-WAY

Service Category Specifies the ATM service category to be used UBR Unspecified bit rate service,
interface applications which do not require
tightly constrained delay and delay
variation, e.g., data
communications applications such
as file transfer or e-mail.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it enables
the user to specify a minimum
desired cell rate.
VBR Variable bit rate service, intended
for applications that require
constraints on the maximum cell
transfer delay and delay variation,
such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended
for real-time applications that
require constant bandwidth and
variation, for example, synchronous
data streams.
Default: UBR
PCR Specifies the peak cell rate. The allowed range depends on the network
interface type:
can carry traffic.
parameters are stored in the LA-110
database.
Default: ON
Configuring the ISDN Interface at the Logical Layer

LA-110 supports LES over AAL2 as defined in ATMF AF-VTOA-0145.000, including
support for ELCP.
When configuring a connection for an ISDN port over AAL2, make sure to select
an application identifier that supports ISDN BRI interfaces via the General
Parameters menu (Configuration > System > General Parameters).
When using AAL2, several ports can share the same ATM connection: the
multiplexing is performed by means of the channel identifier (CID):

When using an application identifier which supports ELCP, LA-110 assigns

default CID values of 0; the actual CIDs are automatically configured by the
voice gateway as soon as an ATM connection over the selected PVC is
established.
For other application identifiers, you can define the desired CID. The default
CID allocation is given in Table 4-36.
Table 4-36. Default CID Assignment for ISDN Ports
ISDN Port CID for ISDN CID for ISDN CID for ISDN
B Channel 1 B Channel 2 D Channel
Port 1 128 160 161

Port 2 129 162 163
Port 3 130 164 165
Port 4 131 166 167
This default allocation is in accordance with the ATMF standard, and

therefore if the voice gateway uses the same assignment, ISDN service can
start as soon as the ATM connection is established.
To configure ISDN interface at the logical layer:

From the User interface (Configuration > Logical Layer > User), configure the
ISDN port connection parameters (see Table 4-37).
LA-110
1. Port Index[1 - 4] ... (1)

2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (32)
5. Active (On)
6. CID D -Channel[0 - 255] ... (128)
7. CID B1 - Channel[0 - 255] ... (160)
8. CID B2 - Channel[0 - 255] ... (161)
>
User port
Figure 4-39. Connection Menu (ISDN without ELCP)

Table 4-37. Connection Parameters (ISDN)
Port Index Specifies the ISDN port for which the new The allowed range is 1 to 4.
connection will be created.
Your selection actually creates three separate
connections, one for each of the three channels
(B1, B2 and D) carried by the selected port. Each
connection uses a different CID
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30
CID D Channel D channel identifier for the LES protocol. 0 to 255

This parameter is displayed only when using an Default: 0
application identifier without support for ELCP, for
example, CAS & DSS1 (without ELCP) or PSTN &
DSS1 (without ELCP)
CID B1 Channel Same as above for the B1 channel
CID B2 Channel Same as above for the B2 channel
Configuring the FXS Interface at the Logical Layer

When configuring the FXS interface at the logical layer, it is necessary to create
an ATM connection for the user traffic and define general PSTN parameters, if the
AAL2 is used.
Creating FXS over AAL1 Connection

When configuring a connection for an FXS port over AAL1, the configuration
procedure depends on the connection type selected by the user:
CES. In this mode, each FXS port has its own ATM connection. The payload is
transported using the ATM Circuit Emulation Service (CES) Version 2.0 defined
in AF-VTOA-0078.000. The transmission uses the structured CES mode: in this
mode, the port payload is transported as an independent 64 kbps stream
using the cell structure corresponding to the framing mode selected by the
user (E1, T1 using SF framing or T1 using ESF framing).
DB-CES. This mode is a variation of CES defined in ATMF specification
AF-VTOA-0085.000. DB-CES enables better utilization of available uplink
bandwidth by using the voice channel activity information carried by the
signaling bits of the port to request uplink bandwidth when the channel is
active (off-hook), and release the bandwidth when the channel is idle
(on-hook). The cell structure depends on the framing mode selected by the
user (E1, T1 using SF framing or T1 using ESF framing).
Transparent. This mode uses the unstructured CES mode defined in ATMF
specification AF-VTOA-0078.000. In this mode, the LA-110 handles the port
payload as a single 64 kbps bit stream which is transparently transported

over the ATM connection, without any assumptions regarding the framing.
Transparent mode is available for E1 framing only.
To create an FXS over AAL1 connection:

From the Connection menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User >
Connection), define the FXS connection parameters as explained in Table 4-
38 and Table 4-39.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>Connection
1. Port Index[1 - 4] ... (1)

2. Connection Type > (CES)
3. Framing Mode > (E1)
4. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
5. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
6. Rx Bytes per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
7. Tx Bytes per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
8. Continuity Check > (off-two-way)
... (N)
>
User port
Figure 4-40. Connection Menu (FXS Port, CES Mode), Page 1
LA-110
... (P)
2. Active (On)
3. Pointer (Disable)
>
User port
Figure 4-41. Connection Menu (FXS, CES Mode), Page 2
Table 4-38. Connection Parameters (FXS, AAL1 CES Mode)
Port Index in the Specifies the port for which the new 1 to 4
Interface connection will be created

Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection CES, DB-CES
Default: CES
Framing Mode Specifies the framing mode used for building For LA-110E, it is recommended to select
the cells carrying the new connection E1.
Default: E1
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30
Pointer Enables or disables use of the structure ENABLE Structure pointer is enabled
pointer, indicating the start of a new AAL1 DISABLE Structure pointer is disabled
structure. This option is available only for the
bundles with a single timeslot. In the bundles,
which contain more than one timeslot, the Default: ENABLE
pointer is always enabled and is not
displayed in the configuration menu.
Table 4-39. Connection Parameters (FXS, AAL1 DB-CES Mode)
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select DB-CES
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30


Table 4-39. Connection Parameters (FXS, AAL1 DB-CES Mode) (Cont.)
Idle Signaling Specify the combinations of A and B signaling Select the values described by FXS Loop
Bits bits that are used to identify the idle channel Start.
state, separately for the transmit (Tx) and If your application requires different
the receive (Rx) direction. settings, select Other
LA-110 is preconfigured with the standard
signaling bit combinations

To select custom idle signaling bit values:

If you selected Other for the Rx, Tx Idle Signaling Bits parameter the custom idle
signaling configuration is available.
Select the desired value for each direction:
Signaling select the pair of bits that are recognized as idle state
Mask select the bit combination to be ignored when determining
whether the channel is idle or not.
Creating FXS over AAL2 Connection

LA-110 supports LES over AAL2 as defined in ATMF AF-VMOA-0145.000, including
support for ELCP.
When configuring a connection for an FXS port over AAL2, make sure to select an
application identifier that supports POTS interfaces.
When using AAL2, several FXS ports can share the same ATM connection: the
multiplexing is performed by means of the channel identifier (CID):
When using an application identifier which supports ELCP, LA-110 assigns
default CID values of 0; the actual CIDs are automatically configured by the
voice gateway as soon as an ATM connection over the selected PVC is
established.
For other application identifiers, you can define the desired CID. The default
CID allocation is as follows:
FXS port 1: 16
FXS port 2: 17
FXS port 3: 18
FXS port 4: 19
This default allocation is in accordance with the ATMF standard, and
therefore if the voice gateway uses the same assignment, voice service can
start as soon as the ATM connection is established.

To create an FXS over AAL2 connection:

1. From the User menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User), select FXS
Connection.
The FXS Connection menu is displayed.
2. LA-110 is delivered with four pre-configured FXS over AAL2 connections
ready for immediate operation. In order to change connection settings (VPI,
VCI etc), it is necessary to delete the existing connection by entering d in the
FXS Connection menu.
3. Configure new FXS over AAL2 connections, referring to Table 4-40.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>FXS Connection
VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)

VCI[0 - 255] ... (32)
Continuity Check > (off-two way )
CID[0 - 255] ... (0)
1. Port Index[1 - 4] ... (1)

2. Active (On)
>
Figure 4-42. FXS AAL2 Connection Menu (Default Settings)
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>FXS Connection
CID[0 - 255] ... (0)
1. Port Index[1 - 4] ... (1)
2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
4. Continuity Check > (off-two way )
5. Active (On)
>
Figure 4-43. FXS AAL2 Connection Menu (FXS Connection on Port 1 has been Deleted, ELCP
Enabled)
Table 4-40. Connection Parameters (FXS, AAL2 Mode)
Port Index in the Specifies the port for which the new 1 to 4
Interface connection will be created Scroll using the F and B keys to display
the desired port

CID Channel identifier for the LES protocol. 0 to 255

This parameter is displayed only when using an Default: 0
application identifier without support for ELCP,
for example, CAS & DSS1 (without ELCP) or
PSTN & DSS1 (without ELCP) see the General
Parameters menu (Configuration > System >
General Parameters)
VPI See Table 4-30
VCI See Table 4-30
Configuring the PSTN Parameters

The LA-110 management software allows the user to define the FXS interface
signaling characteristics to be used for connection to the PSTN. These parameters
are needed to access local exchanges using V5 interfaces, and their utilization is
specified in ETSI 300 324-1.
Note ETSI 300 324-1 uses types to select parameter values. Default types are
automatically configured when a national protocol is selected, however the user
can also select the desired parameter values for each type.
The parameters enable adapting the signaling parameters of the FXS ports, which
are described below, to the national PSTN protocol.
The parameters that can be configured include:
General parameters:
Collision priority
Metering pulse frequency
Minimum recognized on-hook, off-hook and hook-flash times.
Customized values for the following types:
Ring cadences: up to 10 different cadence ring types. For each type, you
can define up to 10 ringing and silence periods.
Durations: up to 63 different duration types for the on-hook, off-hook
and hook-flash signals
Rates: up to 128 different rate types (in case of enabled metering).
Attenuations: up to 128 different attenuation types.
Pulse durations: up to 32 pulse duration types, each consisting of up to
5 different periods (ON periods and OFF periods).
Digit parameters for decadic dialing (ON period and OFF period).
The PSTN parameters are available only under the following conditions:

LA-110 includes FXS user ports.

LA-110 is configured to support connections to the PSTN. Connections to the
PSTN are supported only when LA-110 is configured to use AAL2 and the
application identifier supports PSTN, that is:
PSTN & DSS1 (with ELCP)
PSTN, PRI and BRI (with ELCP).
To configure the PSTN parameters:

1. From the User menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User), select PSTN.
The PSTN menu is displayed.
2. From the PSTN menu, configure the PSTN parameters (see Table 4-41,
Table 4-42, Table 4-43, Table 4-44, Table 4-45, Table 4-46, Table 4-47).
3. From the User menu, select PSTN Table to display the current PSTN
parameters.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>User>PSTN
1. Collision Priority (Originating)

2. Meter Pulse Frequency (12kHZ)
3. Off Hook min time (ms)[10 - 1000] ... (65)
4. On Hook min time (ms)[100 - 1000] ... (480)
5. Register Recall min time (ms)[60 - 975] ... (270)
6. Add Duration >
7. Add Rate Type >
8. Add Attenuation Type >
9. Configure Pulse Duration >
10. Configure Cadence Ring >
11. Configure Digit parameters >
>
Figure 4-44. PSTN Parameters
Table 4-41. PSTN Parameters (General Parameters)
Collision Priority Determines the side having priority in case of ORIGINATING the user connected to
colliding (simultaneous) call establish the local FXS LA-110 port has priority.
requests TERMINATING the far end side has
priority.
Default: ORIGINATING
Meter Pulse Determines the frequency of the metering 12 kHz, 16 kHz.

Frequency pulses generated by the FXS port Default: 12 kHz

Off Hook min time Specifies the minimum time the DC loop must 10 to 1000 msec
(ms) be closed, for this state to be recognized as Default: 65
an off-hook state
On Hook min time Specifies the minimum time the DC loop must 10 to 1000 msec
(ms) be open, for this state to be recognized as Default: 480
an on-hook state.
The value selected in this field must be
greater that the value selected in the
Register Recall min time (ms) field
Register Recall min Specifies the minimum time the DC loop must 60 to 975 msec
time (ms) be open, for this state to be recognized as a Default: 270
register recall (hook flash) request.
The register recall function is enabled only
when the value selected for this field is
shorter than the value selected for the On
Hook min time (ms) field
Table 4-42. PSTN Parameters (Duration)
Duration Index Specifies the internal index number for the 1 to 10

corresponding duration type Default: 1
Duration Type Specifies the value received in the 0 to 63

RecognitionTimeIE field of the PSTN protocol Default: 0
message that will result in the activation of
the duration being configured
Duration Signal Specifies the type of signal for which this ON-HOOK Duration can be used for
duration is applicable recognition of the on-hook state.
OFF-HOOK Duration can be used for
recognition of the off-hook state.
HOOK FLASH Duration can be used for
recognition of hook flash events.
Default: ON-HOOK
Duration Duration Specifies the duration time 50 to 5000 msec

(ms) Default: 480
Duration Status Controls the saving of the new duration as ENABLE The configured duration is
part of the current configuration saved as part of the current
configuration, and therefore
becomes available for use.
DISABLE The configured duration is not
saved in the current
cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE

Table 4-43. PSTN Parameters (Rate Type)
Rate Type (Enable Specifies the value received in the Enable 1 to 127
Metering IE) Metering IE field of the PSTN protocol Default: 1
the rate type being configured
Rate Type Pulse Specifies the rate at which the FXS port will 1 to 5000 pulses per hour
per hour generate metering pulses when the rate type Default: 60
being configured is activated
Rate Type Status Controls the saving of the new rate type as ENABLE The configured rate type is
part of the current configuration saved as part of the current
becomes available for use.
DISABLE The configured rate type is
not saved in the current
cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE
Table 4-44. PSTN Parameters (Attenuation Type)
Attenuation Type Specifies the value received in the 0 to 127

(Attenuation IE) AttenuationIE field of the PSTN protocol Default: 0
the attenuation type being configured
Attenuation Value Selects the attenuation value inserted in the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4 and 5 dB
(in decibels) Tx transmit path when the attenuation type Default: 0
being configured is activated.
Positive values indicate gain.
Attenuation Value Selects the attenuation value inserted in the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 5
(in decibels) Rx receive path when the attenuation type being Default: -4
configured is activated.
Positive values indicate gain.
Attenuation Controls the saving of the new attenuation ENABLE The configured attenuation
Status type as part of the current configuration type is saved as part of the
current configuration, and
therefore becomes available
for use.
DISABLE The configured attenuation
type is not saved in the
therefore cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE

Table 4-45. PSTN Parameters (Pulse Duration)
Pulse Duration Type Specifies the value received in the 0 to 31

PulsedSignalIE field of the PSTN protocol Default: 0
the pulse duration (pattern) type being
configured
Pulse Duration Specifies the type of event for which the INITIAL RING First ring of a call.
Pulse Type pulse duration type being configured will be METER PULSE Metering pulses.
activated
REDUCE BATTERY Low battery voltage
during the off-hook state.
Default: INITIAL RING
Pulse Duration Specifies the number of ON/OFF periods pairs 1 to 5

Number of Periods in the pulse duration type being configured Default: 1
Pulse Duration Specifies the duration of an ON period in the 10 to 5000 msec

Period Parameters pulse duration type being configured Default: 500
(ms) On
Pulse Duration Specifies the duration of an OFF period in the 10 to 5000 msec
Period Parameters pulse duration type being configured Default: 500
(ms) Off
Pulse Duration Controls the saving of the new pulse duration ENABLE The configured pulse duration
Status type as part of the current configuration type is saved as part of the
therefore becomes available
for use.
DISABLE The configured pulse duration
type is not saved in the
therefore cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE

Table 4-46. PSTN Parameters (Cadence Ring)
Cadence Ring Type Specify the type of ringing generated to For each cadence ring type, select
& Status indicate the reception of a phone call. between:
Note: The Cadence Ring section enables ENABLE The corresponding cadence
defining up to 10 different ringing types. type can be configured and will be saved
Each ringing type can include up to 5 in the current configuration.
different ring ON/ring OFF intervals. DISABLE The corresponding cadence
type is not used, and cannot be
configured.
Default: Cadence ring type 0 and 1:
ENABLE
Cadence ring type 2 to 9:
DISABLE
Cadence Ring Displays the number of the cadence type One table for each Cadence Type for
Cadence Type which ENABLE has been selected.
Cadence Ring Number of ON/OFF periods to be configured 1 to 5

Number of Periods for the corresponding Cadence Type Default: 5
in the Type
Cadence Ring Specifies the duration of the corresponding 100 to 5000 msec
Cadence Type ON period Default: 1000 or the value taken from
Period On the national PSTN profile
Cadence Ring Specifies the duration of the corresponding 100 to 5000 msec
Cadence Type OFF period Default: 1000 or the value taken from
Period Off the national PSTN profile
Table 4-47. PSTN Parameters (Digit Parameters)
Digit Parameters Specifies the minimum duration of the 10 to 200 msec

On Periods Min on-hook state that is used during decadic Default: 20
dialing for detecting the dialed digit
Digit Parameters Specifies the maximum duration of the 10 to 200 msec

On Periods Max on-hook state that is used during decadic Default: 120
dialing for detecting the dialed digit.
The maximum duration selected here must be
longer than the value selected in the On
Period Min field, but shorter than the value
selected in the Inter Digit Time field

Off Periods Min off-hook state that is used during decadic Default: 10
dialing for detecting the dialed digit


Off Periods Max off-hook state that is used during decadic Default: 110
dialing for detecting the dialed digit.
longer than the value selected in the Off
Period Min field
Digit Parameters Determines the maximum allowed time 50 to 950 msec

Inter Digit Time between digits that if not exceeded indicates Default: 240
that the current digit is part of a sequence of
digits.
shorter than the value selected in the
Register Recall min time (ms) field
Configuring the Serial Data Interface at the Logical Layer

Define the ATM network connection parameters for the data port.
The number of connections and the connection parameters depend on the data
port application mode: AAL1 Stream, Frame Relay or Pseudowire.
AAL1 Stream: this application mode is used to transport the bit stream
received by the data port, transparently, over the ATM network. Therefore, in
this mode only a single connection can be set up for the data port, and any
attempt to add another connection is rejected with a No more VCCs for new
connections message.
Frame Relay: in this application mode, up to 8 different connections can be
set up. Therefore, in this mode, the data port can support up to eight Frame
Relay connections (each with its own DLCI). If the total number of different
connections is exceeded, you must delete an existing connection before a
new one can be added.
The Frame Relay application mode supports two interworking functions:
Service interworking in accordance with FRF.8
Network interworking in accordance with FRF.5.
Pseudowire: this application mode is used to transport TDM/AAL1 data
stream over packet-based networks according to the IETF PWE3 CESoPSN
draft for the leased-line emulation over IP, ATM or xDSL services.
The following sections explain the connection parameters for each data port
application mode. Make sure to review also the Considerations for Selection of
Traffic Contract Parameters section on page 4-11.
To select an application mode:

From the Port Application menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial >
Application), select Port Application and define the serial data port
application mode: AAL1 Stream, Frame Relay or Pseudowire.

Adding Connection in the AAL1 Stream Application Mode
To add a connection in the AAL1 Stream application mode:

1. From the Serial menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial), select
Connection.
2. From the Connection menu, define the AAL1 Stream connection parameters
(see Table 4-48).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer> Serial>Connection
1. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
2. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
3. Rx Byte per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
4. Tx Byte per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
... (N)
>
User port
Figure 4-45. Connection Menu (Data Port AAL1 Stream), Page 1
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer> Serial>Connection
... (P)
1. Connection Type > (Structured (signal transport))

2. Active (On)
>
User port
Figure 4-46. Connection Menu (Data Port AAL1 Stream), Page 2
Table 4-48. Connection Parameters (Data Port AAL1 Stream)

used by the new connection Default: 0

VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to 0 to 255

be used by the new connection. Default: 0
Notes:
connection, therefore you cannot specify
a VPI.VCI pair already used by another
the default values unchanged, or the
selected values are already in use
Rx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
expected in the cells received by the new Default: 47
connection.
Remaining bytes are assumed to be padding
bytes and therefore are discarded
Tx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
inserted in a cell before transmitting it. Default: 47
After the specified number of payload is
collected, the remaining bytes in the cell are
filled with padding and the cell is immediately
transmitted toward the network. This
parameter enables the user to reduce the
delay caused by cell filling in applications that
cannot tolerate long delays
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the new The available selections are described in
Delay (RTD) measurements and generates Default: OFF
alarms upon loopback failures, according to
Notes: Periodic loopbacks can be activated
the user-selectable threshold.
together with continuity checks.
responses, which trigger alarm activation.
LB Fail Indication Controls alarm generation if the number of ON Alarm is generated.
non-received loopback responses exceeds OFF Alarm is not generated.
threshold. The alarm is OAM LOOPBACK Default: OFF
FAILURE START.

Connection Type Selects the connection type. For the 64 kbps rate:
The available selections depend on the data STRUCTURED WITH POINTER Use of the
rate selected via the Serial menu structured service as defined in ATMF
(Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial). AF-VTOA-0078.000.
STRUCTURED WITHOUT POINTER Same as
above, but without using a pointer (the
resulting cell structure is similar to that of the
unstructured service cells).
Default: STRUCTURED WITH POINTER
For other rates:
STRUCTURED Use of structured service as
defined in ATMF AF-VTOA-0078.000.
STRUCTURED (SIGNAL TRANSPORT)
Structured header bits that use proprietary
method to relay information on the current
state of the I-signal (DCD) and C-signal (RTS)
of the remote RADs unit and change the
status on the local control signal accordingly.
Also refer to Serial menu (Configuration >
Physical Layer > Serial) for details on effect
of the control signal transfer modes.
This connection type is enforced as long as
the I-signal is set to Obey Remote Signal
mode.
Note: This mode must be enabled, when
running Remote Remote Data loopback.
UNSTRUCTURED Use of unstructured service
as defined in ATMF document AF-VTOA-
0078.000.
Default: UNSTRUCTURED
Pointer Parity Controls the use of pointer parity when using ON Pointer parity bit generation at the
the STRUCTURED or STRUCTURED WITH transmit side, and checking of parity
POINTER connection type bit for error detection at the receiving
side enabled. Supported only for
STRUCTURED or STRUCTURED WITH
POINTER service.
OFF Pointer parity generation and checking
disabled. Supported only for
STRUCTURED or STRUCTURED WITH
POINTER service.
N/A Not applicable. This is the only option
when selecting UNSTRUCTURED or
STRUCTURED WITHOUT POINTER.
Default: ON for STRUCTURED
N/A for UNSTRUCTURED
Active Selects the initial state of the new ON The new connection is active and can
connection. carry traffic.


database.
Default: ON
Adding Connection in the Frame Relay Application Mode

When creating an ATM connection for the Frame Relay traffic received serial data
port, it is necessary to configure the port parameters (control protocol type, the
use of CLLM) and define the connection properties.
To configure the port parameters:

From the Application menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial >
Application), configure the following:
Protocol (Specifies the Frame Relay link control protocol to be used on
the data port. The protocol must match the protocol used by the
equipment connected to the user port.):
None No protocol
Q.933 network ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, network side
Q.933 user ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, user side
Q.933 both ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, both network and user side
T1.617 network ANSI T1.617, Annex D, network side
T1.617 user ANSI T1.617, Annex D, user side.T1.617 both ANSI
T1.617, Annex D, both network and user side
LMI network LMI specification, network side
LMI user LMI specification, user side
LMI both LMI specification, both network and user side.
CLLM (Controls the use of the CLLM (Consolidated Link Layer
Management) protocol. The selection must match the users equipment
configuration. This option is not displayed if the selected Protocol is one
of the LMI options):
Yes CLLM is used
No CLLM is not used.
To add a connection in the Frame Relay application mode:

Connection.
2. From the Connection menu, define the Frame Relay connection parameters
(see Table 4-49).

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>Serial>Connection

2. DLCI[16 - 991] ... (0)
3. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
4. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
6. FECN (Convert)
... (N)
>
Serial port
Figure 4-47. Connection Menu (Data Port Frame Relay), Page 1
LA-110
...P
4. PCR[79 - 10868] ... (10868)
5. Active (On)
>
Serial port
Figure 4-48. Connection Menu (Data Port Frame Relay), Page 2
Table 4-49. Connection Parameters (Data Port Frame Relay)
Connection Selects connection number 1 to 8

Default: 1
DLCI Specifies the Frame Relay users DLCI for which 16 to 991 (DLCIs 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024
the new connection will be used. are reserved)
Note: Since only one connection may be set up Default: 0
for each DLCI, do not specify a DLCI currently
used by another connection



Notes:
In general, the VPI.VCI pair uniquely
cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used
by another connection, even if that
connection is defined on another LA-110
port. This also applies to a connection using
the SERVICE interworking mode.
However, when the connection uses the

NETWORK interworking mode, it is possible
to define a many-to-one connection by
entering the same VPI.VCI pair for more
than one network connection on the data
port. In this case, the traffic contract
parameters of the new connection are
automatically adopted from those defined
for the first connection using the same
VPI.VCI pair.
The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved. Your
the default values unchanged
Interworking Specifies the Frame Relay interworking SERVICE LA-110 operates in the service
function performed by LA-110 interworking mode, as defined
in FRF.8. In this mode, LA-110
enables Frame Relay
with ATM equipment.
NETWORK LA-110 operates in the
network interworking mode
defined in FRF.5. In this mode,
LA-110 enables Frame Relay
with other Frame Relay
equipment over an ATM
network.
Default: Service

FECN Specifies the method used to convert the EFCI=0 Ignore the FECN bit received
forward explicit congestion notification (FECN) from the Frame Relay
information to the congestion indication (CI) equipment connected to the
bit, or the explicit forward congestion data port, and always set the
indication (EFCI) bit, to be inserted in the ATM EFCI bit to 0.
cells CONVERT In the receive path, the EFCI/CI
bit is derived from the received
FECN bit.
Default: CONVERT
Mode Specifies the protocol handling method TRANSLATION LA-110 converts the
encapsulation header from
the format required by
RFC2427, which replaces
RFC 1490 (Frame Relay) to
the format of RFC2684,
which replaces RFC1483
(ATM).
TRANSPARENT LA-110 transparently
transfers the encapsulation
header.
Default: TRANSPARENT
FR-SSCS-DLCI Specifies the value of the DLCI to be used at 16 to 991 (DLCIs 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024
the far end of the link, to complete the are reserved).
connection. This parameter is available when Default: Same as the users DLCI
the interworking is set to Network.
DE->CLP Specifies the method used to derive the cell CLP=0 The CLP bit is always set
loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent in the ATM to 0.
network cells, from the DE bit of Frame Relay CLP=1 The CLP bit is always set
frames to 1.
Note: The original DE bit is also mapped to the CONVERT The CLP bit is derived
DE-FR-SSCS bit in the Frame Relay service- from the DE bit received
specific convergence sublayer (SSCS) protocol from the Frame Relay
data units (PDUs) sent through the ATM equipment connected to
network. LA-110.
This parameter is available when the Default: CONVERT
interworking is set to Network.
CLP->DE Specifies the method used to derive the CONV-DE-ONLY Only the DE-FR-SSCS bit
discard eligibility (DE) bit sent to the frame received from the
relay equipment connected to LA-110E, using remote end in the
the CLP bit carried by the ATM cells, and the Frame Relay SSCS PDUs
DE-FR-SSCS bit received in Frame Relay SSCS determines the DE bit.
PDUs. CONV-DE & CLP The DE bit is derived
This parameter is available when the from both the CLP and
interworking is set to Network. the DE-FR-SSCS bits.
Default: CONV-DE & CLP

DE<->CLP Specifies the method used to derive the 2 Always set the CLP and DE bits to 0.
discard eligibility (DE) bit for the Frame Relay 3 Always set the CLP and DE bits to 1.
equipment, and the cell loss priority (CLP) bit CONVERT In the receive path, the DE bit
for the ATM network is derived from the CLP bit
received from the ATM network
(if one of the cells carries
CLP = 1, the DE will be set to
1). In the transmit path, the
CLP bit is derived from the DE
bit received from the Frame
Relay equipment
Default: CONVERT
interface applications which do not require
desired cell rate.
data streams.
Default: UBR

interface type:
can carry traffic.
database.
Default: ON
Adding Connection in the Pseudowire Application Mode
To add a connection in the pseudowire application mode:

Connection.
2. From the Connection menu, define the Pseudowire connection parameters
(see Table 4-50).
LA-110
1. Source IP ... (0.0.0.0)

2. Dest IP ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Frames Per Packet[12 - 45] ... (12)
4. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
5. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
6. Cont. Check > (on-two-way)
... (N)
>
Serial port
Figure 4-49. Connection Menu (User Port Pseudowire), Page 1

LA-110
... (P)
1. PCR[79 - 10868] ... (10868)

2. Active (On)
>
Serial port
Figure 4-50. Connection Menu (Data Port Pseudowire), Page 2
Table 4-50. Connection Parameters (Data Port Pseudowire)
Source IP Legal IP address of the source device 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Address Default: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Legal IP address of the destination device 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Default: 0.0.0.0
Frames Per Number of frames per IP packet 12 to 45

Packet Default: 12



new bridge interface applications which do not require
desired cell rate.
data streams.
Default: UBR
interface type:
can carry traffic.
database.
Default: ON
Configuring the LAN Port at the Logical Layer

The LA-110 LAN port, which has a 10/100BaseT interface that supports
autonegotiation, has two application modes:
Ethernet bridge
IP router.
To select a LAN application mode:

1. From the LAN menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN), select Port
Application.

The port application value toggles between Bridge and Router.

2. Select the desired application mode and save the changes.
LA-110 reboots automatically.
Configuring the Ethernet Bridge

The LA-110 bridge supports up to nine ports. One of the ports can be connected
to the LAN side and eight ports to the ATM side. The bridge operates in the
VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware mode and supports static bridging.
The LA-110 bridge configuration includes the following stages:
1. Adding ATM-side interfaces.
2. Binding bridge ports to the ATM-side interfaces or LAN-side interface.
3. Configuring general bridge parameters (VLAN mode, VLAN membership, static
bridging, etc).
Adding ATM-Side (WAN) Interfaces

LA-110 supports up to eight WAN interfaces.
To add a WAN interface:

From the IF Configuration menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF
Configuration), configure the WAN interface parameters (see Table 4-51).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>IF Configuration
1. Interface number [1 - 8] ... (1)

2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
9. PCR[79 - 10868] ... (10868)
10. Active (On)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-51. IF Configuration Menu (Bridge)
Table 4-51. Bridge WAN Interface Parameters
VPI Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to 0 to 31


be used by the new connection Default: 0
VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier 0 to 255

to be used by the new connection Default: 0
Note: In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely
identifies an ATM connection, therefore
you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already
used by another connection, even if the
other connection is on another LA-110
port. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the The available selections are described in
new bridge interface to perform Table 4-5.
continuity checks on the ATM network Default: OFF TWO-WAY
interface
LB Fail See Table 4-30

Threshold
LB Fail See Table 4-30

Indication
Ethernet Pause Select the use of the Ethernet Pause Enable LA-110 sends Pause frames to the LAN
Trigger frames for the data flow control, as per port if the WAN transmit buffer is congested
IEEE 802.3x. Disable LA-110 stops sending Pause frames to
When the pause mode is enabled, periodic the LAN port if the WAN transmit buffer is
pause frames are sent to an Ethernet congested
host to stop transmitting if the LA-110
WAN transmit buffer is congested.
Note: When the Ethernet pause trigger is
enabled, make sure to enable the Pause
mode for the LA-110 LAN interface (see
Configuring the LAN Interface at the
Physical Layer). It is not recommended to
enable the Pause mode only at the WAN
interface, because the frames can be still
dropped at the LAN interface if it is
congested.
Service Specifies the ATM service category to be UBR Unspecified bit rate service, intended
Category used to handle the traffic transferred for non-real-time applications which do
through this interface not require tightly constrained delay
and delay variation, e.g., data
communications applications such as
file transfer or email.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it enables the
user to specify a minimum desired cell
rate.
VBR Variable bit rate service, intended for
applications that require constraints on
the maximum cell transfer delay and


delay variation, such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended for
real-time applications that require
constant bandwidth and tightly
constrained delay and delay variation,
for example, synchronous data streams.
Default: UBR
interface type:
Active Selects the initial state of the new bridge ON The new bridge interface is active and
interface (ATM network connection). can carry traffic.
OFF The new bridge interface cannot carry
traffic, but its configuration parameters
are stored in the LA-110 database.
Default: ON
Binding Bridge Ports

The LA-110 bridge ports can be bound to the WAN and LAN interfaces. For a
basic bridging application it is enough to bind two bridge ports: one to the LAN
interface, another to the WAN interface.
To bind bridge ports to the WAN and LAN interfaces:

From the Bridge Port menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Bridge
Parameters > Bridge Port), perform the following:
1. Select Bridge Port and choose the number of the bridge port that you
intend to bind (19)
2. Select Bind and select an interface (Interface 18 or LAN), to which you
intend to bind the bridge port.
3. Repeat steps 12 for all bridge ports. Make sure that you have enough
interfaces configured on the WAN (ATM) side.

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>Bridge Port
1. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (1)

2. Bind > (Interface 1)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-52. Bridge Port Menu (VLAN-Unaware Mode)
Configuring Bridge Parameters (VLAN-Unaware Mode)

This section explains how to configure the general bridge parameters in the
VLAN-unaware.
To configure the general bridge parameters (VLAN-unaware mode):

From the Bridge Parameters menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Bridge Parameters), configure bridge general parameters (see Table 4-52).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters
Encapsulation (Without CRC)

1. Bridge Mode (Access Only)
2. Aging Time[5 - 10080] ... (20)
3. PPPoE (Disable)
4. Bridge Port >
5. VLAN Mode (UnAware)
6. Static MAC Address >
7. All MAC Addresses []
>
LAN port
Figure 4-53. Bridge Parameters Menu (VLAN-Unaware Mode)
Table 4-52. Bridge Parameters (VLAN-Unaware Mode)
Encapsulation Read-only field. Displays the traffic Without CRC Encapsulation of bridged PDUs
encapsulation type in accordance with RFC without CRC field.
1483.

Bridge Mode Select the mode of Ethernet traffic Access Only The traffic reaching the LAN port
processing. is forwarded through the WAN ports.
Access & Switching The bridge forwards LAN
traffic addressed to WAN destinations that can
be reached only through the WAN ports, and in
addition enables forwarding of traffic among
the WAN ports (regular bridging action).
Default: Access Only
Aging Time Select the aging interval for learned The allowed range is 5 to 10080 minutes.
forwarding information. Default: 20
If the information for a given destination
is not refreshed before the selected
interval expires, that information is
deleted from the bridging table.
PPPoE Enable/disable support of PPP protocol Enable PPPoE supported

over Ethernet. Disable PPPoE not supported.
Default: Disable
Bridge Port Bind bridge port to the WAN or LAN

interface (see Binding Bridge Ports above)
and controls filtering and tag handling
modes in the VLAN-aware mode (see
Configuring Bridge Parameters (VLAN-
Aware Mode) below).
VLAN mode Control the VLAN handling mode Unaware LA-110 bridge does not handle
VLANs
Aware LA-110 bridge handles VLANs.
Default: Unaware
Static MAC Add a static MAC address to the bridging

Address table of the LA-110 LAN port.
See Adding Static MAC Addresses below.
All MAC Displays static MAC addresses table.

Addresses See Adding Static MAC Addresses below.
Configuring Bridge Parameters (VLAN-Aware Mode)

When the LA-110 bridge operates in the VLAN-aware mode, its port can be
configured to the various filtering and tagging modes. In addition, the bridge
ports can be defined as VLAN members.
To configure the bridge ports in the VLAN-aware mode:

1. Make sure that the VLAN mode is set to Aware.
2. From the Bridge Port menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Bridge
Parameters > Bridge Port), perform the following:
a. Select a bridge port you intend to configure (19).

b. Select PVID/Stacking VID (port VID to be added by the current bridge port
to the arriving frames): 14094
c. Select Accept Frame Type to specify the frame types to be accepted by
the user bridge port:
Admit All (bridge port accepts all frames (tagged or untagged).
Untagged frames receive PVID of the bridge port.)
Tagged-Only (bridge port accepts only tagged frames, discarding
untagged)
d. Enable or disable Ingress Filtering, which controls filtering of the incoming
traffic.
Enable (bridge port accepts only frames with tags of the VLANs,
which include this bridge port as a member.)
Disable (bridge port accepts all incoming frames)
e. Define Egress Tag Handling (egress VLAN stacking mode on the bridge
port)
Stacking (bridge port adds PVID to all frames, tagged or untagged)
Stripping (bridge port removes PVID from tagged frames)
None (No stacking or stripping is performed)
f. Define Ingress Tag Handling (ingress VLAN stacking mode on the bridge
port)
Stacking (bridge port adds PVID to all frames, tagged or untagged)
Stripping (bridge port removes PVID from tagged frames)
None (no stacking or stripping is performed)
LA-110
1. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (1)

2. PVID/Stacking VID[1 - 4094] ... (1)
3. Accept frame type (Tagged-Only)
4. Ingress filtering > (Disable)
5. Egress Tag Handling > (None)
6. Ingress Tag Handling > (None)
7. Bind > (NONE)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-54. Bridge Port Menu (VLAN-Aware Mode)
To configure the VLAN membership:

From the VLAN Member menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Bridge
Parameters > VLAN Member), perform the following:
1. Select Index and assign a number (1100) to the current VLAN entity.

2. Select Bridge Port and choose a bridge port to be assigned to VLAN.

3. Select VID and select a VLAN, to which you intend to assign the port.
4. Select VLAN Name to assign a name to the VLAN.
5. Select Egress to define if the VID is transferred transparently or stripped
on egress.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>VLAN Member
1. Index[1 - 100] ... (1)

2. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (1)
3. VID[1 - 4094] ... (1)
4. VLAN Name ... ()
5. Egress (Transparent)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-55. VLAN Member Menu
To display the VLAN table:

When at least one VLAN is defined, you can display the VLAN Table by
selecting View VLAN Member Table in the Bridge Parameters menu.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>View VLAN Member Table
Index Bridge Port VID Vlan Name Egress

1 1 1 VLAN 1 Transparent
Figure 4-56. VLAN Table
Adding Static MAC Addresses

Static MAC address can be added to the bridging table of the LA-110 LAN port.
You may define up to 32 static MAC addresses. If this number is exceeded, you
must delete an existing MAC address before a new one can be added.
In the VLAN-aware mode, you can also assign a MAC address to specific VLAN and
bridge port.
To add a static MAC address:

From the Static MAC Address menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Bridge Parameters > Static MAC Address), select the following:
Number of a new static MAC address

Static MAC address (six pairs of two hexa digits)

Bridge port (bridge port through which the corresponding address is
reached)
VLAN ID (VLAN to which the MAC address belongs).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>Static MAC Address
1. Number of Static MAC Address ... (1)

2. Static MAC Address ... (AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-F1)
3. VID[1 - 4094] ... (1)
4. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (1)
5. VLAN ID[1 - 4094] ... (1)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-57. Static MAC Address Menu
To display the currently defined static MAC addresses:

From the Bridge Parameters menu, select All MAC Addresses.
The static MAC addresses table is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>All MAC Addresses
index Address Type Bridge Port VID

1 AABBCCDDEEF1 Static 1 1
2 AABBCCDDEEF2 Static 1 1
Figure 4-58. Static MAC Addresses Table
Configuring the IP Router

The LA-110 router supports the following interfaces:
LAN interface: one or two interfaces located on the physical LAN port. A LAN
interface is always a numbered interface (that is, it is always assigned an IP
address). The LAN interfaces must be defined in different IP subnets. Each
LAN interface can be independently configured, and therefore can be used
for different applications.
Host interface: the host interface is a numbered interface. A host interface
must always be defined when an unnumbered WAN interface has been
defined. However, a host interface can be defined even when all the WAN
interfaces are numbered.
The host interface is intended for management purposes and for the
exchange of RIP and ping messages through an unnumbered interface.

In addition, the user can select whether to enable Routing IP Protocols (RIP I,
RIP II or both) on each LAN interface separately
WAN interface: up to eight interfaces located on the ATM uplink, which serve
as logical WAN ports for the IP router. Each WAN interface has its own ATM
connection, and therefore its ATM connection parameters can be
independently configured. The user can select whether to enable routing IP
protocols (RIP I, RIP II or both) on each WAN interface separately.
A WAN interface can be either a numbered or unnumbered interface. If one
or more of the WAN interfaces are unnumbered, it is necessary to define a
host interface.
The total number of IP interfaces that can be set up is 11: if the total number is
exceeded, you must delete an existing interface before a new one can be added.
Each router interface is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1
to 11.
Adding a Router Interface
To add a LAN or host interface:

1. From the IF Configuration menu, select Attached IP IF and set it to LAN 1 or
LAN 2.
2. Configure the LAN or host IP interface parameters, see Table 4-53.
LA-110
1. Attached IP IF > (LAN 1)

2. IP Address ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Aging Time [5 - 10080] ... (5)
5. Time out [1 - 10] ... (1)
6. RIP > (None)
7. DHCP Relay (Disable)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-59. Router IF Configuration Menu (LAN Interface)

LA-110
Mask ... (255.255.255.252)
1. Attached IP IF > (HOST)

2. IP Address ... (0.0.0.0)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-60. Router IF Configuration Menu (Host Interface)
Table 4-53. Interface Configuration Parameters for LAN and Host Interfaces
Attached IP IF HOST, LAN

IP Specify the IP address of the new IP Enter the desired IP address, using the
interface dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0.
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask Enter the desired IP subnet mask, using
the dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0 (LAN),
255.255.255.252 (Host)
Aging Time Select the aging interval for learned routing The allowed range is 5 to 10080 minutes.
information. Default: 5 min
If the information for a given destination is
not refreshed before the selected interval
expires, that information is deleted from
the routing table
Timeout Select the timeout interval of the Address The allowed range is 1 to 10 sec.
Resolution Protocol (ARP) Default: 1 sec
RIP Select the routing protocol to be used by NONE No routing protocol is used;
the IP router toward this IP interface only static routing is used. If no
static routes are defined, no
routing is possible toward this
IP interface.
RIP1 Support for RIP1 protocol, in
addition to static routing.
RIP2 Support for RIP2 protocol, in
addition to static routing.
RIP 1&2 Support for both RIP1 and RIP2
protocols, in addition to static
routing.
Default: NONE

DHCP Relay Enables/disables the DHCP relay function ENABLE DHCP relay function enabled. In
for the LAN interface this case, any DHCP requests
received through this interface
are directed to the
user-specified DHCP server,
even if the LA-110 DHCP server
function is enabled.
See below the procedure used
to define a user-specified
DHCP server.
DISABLE DHCP relay function enabled. In
this state, DHCP requests are
directed to the LA-110 DHCP
server (if enabled).
Default: DISABLE
DHCP Server IP Specify IP address of the DHCP server. Enter the desired IP address, using the
Address This parameter is available only if the DHCP dotted-quad format.
relay is enabled. Default: 0.0.0.0.
Max Hop Count Define the maximum number of hops that a 1 to 16.
DHCP request packet sent can traverse 1 means that a packet can reach only the
before being discarded. specified next port.
This parameter is available only if the DHCP Default: 16
relay is enabled.
To add a WAN interface:

1. From the IF Configuration menu, select Attached IP IF and set it to
WAN 18.
2. Configure the WAN IP interface parameters, see Table 4-54.

LA-110
1. Attached IP IF > (WAN 1)

2. IP Address ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
4. RIP > (None)
5. Encapsulation > (RFC 1483)
6. VPI[0 - 31] ... (0)
7. VCI[0 - 255] ... (0)
... (N)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-61. Router IF Configuration Menu (WAN Interface), Page 1
LA-110
...P

3. PCR[79 - 10868] ... (10868)
4. Active (On)
>
LAN port
Figure 4-62. Router IF Configuration Menu (WAN Interface), Page 2
Table 4-54. Interface Configuration Parameters for WAN Interface
Attached IP IF WAN 18
IP Specify the IP address of the IP interface Enter the desired IP address, using the
dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0.
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask Enter the desired IP subnet mask, using
the dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0

RIP See Table 4-53
Encapsulation Select the encapsulation method for the IP RFC-1483 The traffic is encapsulated in
traffic transferred through this interface accordance with RFC 1483.
RFC 1483 Bridge PDU The traffic is
encapsulated in accordance with bridged
RFC 1483 (virtual bridge connection)
PPP VC MUXED The traffic is transferred
using PPP over AAL5 in accordance with
RFC2364, using VC multiplexing.
PPP LLC MUXED The traffic is
transferred using PPP over AAL5 in
accordance with RFC2364, using LLC
multiplexing.
Default: RFC-1483
User Name Define the user name to be used for PPP Enter the prescribed alphanumeric string
traffic. (up to 30 characters). Pay attention to
This field is displayed only when using PPP VC case.
MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED encapsulation Default: Empty string
Password Define the password to be used for PPP traffic. Enter the prescribed alphanumeric string
This field is displayed only when using PPP VC (up to 30 characters). Pay attention to
MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED encapsulation case.
The typed characters are not displayed
(an asterisk is displayed for each typed
character).
Default: Empty string
Confirm Used to confirm the password enter in the Enter again the alphanumeric string of
Password Password field. the password.
This field is displayed only when using PPP VC The typed characters are not displayed
MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED encapsulation (an asterisk is displayed for each typed
character).
Default: Empty string
Link Active Time Specify the maximum time, in seconds, the link 2 to 900 seconds.
with the PPP server is kept alive when no Default: 2
traffic is detected.
This field is displayed only when using PPP VC
MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED encapsulation.
Subnet Mask The subnet negotiation can be enabled only if Enable, Disable
Negotiation WAN interface is unnumbered.

used by the ATM connection used by the new Default: 0
IP interface

used by the ATM connection used by the new Default: 0


IP interface.
Note: In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely
cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by
another connection, even if the other
connection is on another LA-110 port. The
VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the new IP The available selections are described in
interface to perform continuity checks on the Table 4-5.
ATM network interface Default: OFF TWO-WAY
Delay (RTD) measurements and generates Default: OFF
alarms upon loopback failures, according to the
Notes: Periodic loopbacks can be
user-selectable threshold.
activated together with continuity checks.
responses, which trigger alarm activation.
LB Fail Indication Controls alarm generation if the number of ON Alarm is generated.
non-received loopback responses exceeds OFF Alarm is not generated.
threshold. The alarm is OAM LOOPBACK Default: OFF
FAILURE START.
Service category Specifies the ATM service category to be used UBR Unspecified bit rate service,
new bridge interface applications which do not require
tightly constrained delay and
delay variation, e.g., data
communications applications
such as file transfer or e-mail.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it
enables the user to specify a
minimum desired cell rate.
transfer delay and delay
variation, such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service,
intended for real-time
applications that require constant
bandwidth and tightly
constrained delay and delay
variation, for example,
synchronous data streams.
Default: UBR

PCR Specifies the peak cell rate. The allowed range depends on the
network interface type:
The maximum actual value depends on
the network port synchronization rate.
Active Selects the initial state of the new IP interface ON The new IP interface is active and
(ATM network connection). can carry traffic.
OFF The new IP interface cannot carry
parameters are stored in the LA-
110 database.
Default: ON
Configuring DHCP Server

This section describes how to configure LA-110 to operate as a DHCP server.
To enable the DHCP server operation:

From the Router Parameters menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Router Parameters), select DHCP Server.
The parameter value toggles between Enable and Disable.
A new parameter is displayed in the Router Parameters menu DHCP
Pools.
Enabling DHCP server disables the DHCP relay function.
To configure the DHCP pools:

1. From the Router Parameters menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Router Parameters), select DHCP Pools.
The DHCP Pools menu is displayed.
2. From the DHCP Pools menu, configure the DHCP address pool for the LA-110
IP router, when configured to serve as a DHCP server (see Table 4-55).

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>DHCP Pools
1. Pool Number[1 - 10] ... (10)

2. Lowest IP ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Highest IP ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
6. Primary DNS ... (0.0.0.0)
7. Secondary DNS ... (0.0.0.0)
8. Lease Time[0 - 1080] ... (600)
... (N)
>
Figure 4-63. DHCP Pools Menu, Page 1
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>DHCP Pools
... (P)
1. TFTP Server IP ... (0.0.0.0)

2. Configuration File Name ... (file_name)
3. Allocation Table []
>
Figure 4-64. DHCP Pools Menu, Page 2
Table 4-55. DHCP Pools Configuration
Pool Number Specify the DHCP pools number 110
Lowest IP Specify the lowest IP address that can be assigned Enter the desired IP address, in the
to IP hosts connected to the LA-110 LAN port dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Highest IP Specify the highest IP address that can be assigned Enter the desired IP address, in the
to IP hosts connected to the LA-110 LAN port. dotted-quad format.
Make sure the specified range is correct, that is, it is Default: 0.0.0.0
within the same subnet as the lowest IP address
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask address to be used to Enter the desired IP address, in the
identify addresses in the specified range. dotted-quad format.
Make sure the subnet mask is compatible with the Default: 0.0.0.0
specified IP address range, and that it consists of
consecutive 1.

Default Gateway Specify the IP address of the default gateway to be Enter the desired IP address, in the
used to reach IP addresses not within the subnet of dotted-quad format.
the LAN port. Default: 0.0.0.0
Make sure that the gateway IP address has the
same IP net part as the IP addresses in the specified
range
Primary DNS Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Enter the desired IP address, in the
This field is optional dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Enter the desired IP address, in the
This field is optional dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Lease Time Specify the lease time for the IP addresses assigned Up to 1000 minutes.
by the LA-110 DHCP server Default: 600
TFTP Server IP IP address of a TFTP server storing a configuration Enter the desired IP address, in the
file to be requested by device using the LA-110 dotted-quad format.
DHCP services, such as an IP phone. Default: 0.0.0.0
Configuration File Name of a configuration file to be requested by Any alphanumeric value up to

Name device using the LA-110 DHCP services, such as an 50 characters long.
IP phone. Default: file_name
Allocation Table DHCP pool allocation table, see Table 4-56.
To display the DHCP pool utilization table:

From the DHCP Pools menu, select Allocation Table.
The DHCP allocation table is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>DHCP Pools>Allocation Table
IP Address MAC Address Time Left Status

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. 0. 0. 1 11.22.33.30.40.aa 420 in use
3. 0. 0. 2 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 3 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 4 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 5 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 6 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
Figure 4-65. DHCP Allocation Table

Table 4-56. Utilization Parameters for DHCP Address Pool Allocation Table
Parameter Function
IP Address Displays the IP addresses in the selected pool, from the lowest to the highest address
in the pool
MAC Address For each currently assigned IP address, displays the MAC address of the IP host using
that address.
0.0.0.0.0.0 indicates that the corresponding IP address is not assigned
Time Left For each currently assigned IP address, displays the lease time left for the IP host using
that address.
0 indicates that the corresponding IP address is not assigned
Status For each IP address, displays the current address status:

Free can be offered to a new user
Offered already offered to a user, cannot be offered to another
In Use the address previously offered to a user is now in active use by that user
Forbidden address is reserved, and therefore cannot be offered to any user
Configuring the DNS Relay

When DNS relay is enabled, LA-110 forwards any DNS request received from its
host to the DNS server, as if it were an LA-110 request. The reply from the DNS
server is forwarded by LA-110 to the host as if it was answering the request.
To configure the DNS relay:

Router Parameters), select DNS Relay.
Configuring the RADIUS Client Service

The RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) is a client/server
security protocol. Security information is stored in a central location, known as
the RADIUS server. RADIUS clients, such as LA-110, communicate with the RADIUS
server to authenticate users. Although the term RADIUS refers to the network
protocol that the client and server use to communicate, it is often used to refer
to the entire client/server system. LA-110 supports only authentication function
of the RADIUS protocol.
To enable the RADIUS client operation:

Router Parameters), select RADIUS Client.
A new parameter is displayed in the Router Parameters menu RADIUS
Client parameters.

To configure the RADIUS client parameters:

Router Parameters), select RADIUS Client Parameters.
The RADIUS Client Parameters menu is displayed.
2. From the RADIUS Client Parameters menu, define the LA-110 RADIUS client
settings (see Table 4-57).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>RADIUS Client Parameters
1. Server IP ... (0.0.0.0)

2. Shared Secret ... ()
3. Number of retries[1 - 5] ... (3)
4. Timeout (in seconds)[1 - 60] ... (3)
5. Authentication Port[0 - 65535]... (1812)
>
Figure 4-66. RADIUS Client Parameters Menu
Table 4-57. RADIUS Client Parameters
Server IP The IP address of the RADIUS server Enter the desired IP address, in the
dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Shared Secret Enter the shared secret. The shared secret is a Any alphanumeric string up to
password used by RADIUS to authenticate the 16 characters.
client. LA-110 encrypts the User-Password, if
present; using the secret it shares with the RADIUS
server.
Number of retries Defines the number of retries made when sending 15

request to the RADIUS server. Default: 3
Timeout The maximum time LA-110 waits for a single 060

request response from the RADIUS server (in Default: 3
seconds). After this time the request is
retransmitted.
Authentication Selects the UDP port number to be used for the 065535
Port RADIUS authentication application. Make sure to Default: 1812
define the same value in the RADIUS server
Configuring the Static Routing

You can add a static route to the routing table of the LA-110 LAN port. The static
routes can be defined on the LAN and WAN interfaces, no static routing is
available for the host interface.

LA-110 supports up to 32 static routes. If this number is exceeded, you must

delete an existing static route before a new one can be added.
Each static route is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1 to
32: this number is then used in all operations which refer to a specific route.
To add a static route:

Router Parameters), select Static Routing.
The Static Routing menu is displayed.
2. From the Static Routing menu, define the LA-110 static routing parameters
(see Table 4-58).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Static Routing
1. Index[1 - 32] ... (1)

2. Net IP ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Metrica[1 - 15] ... (1)
5. Interface > (LAN 1)
6. Next Hop ... (0.0.0.0)
>
Figure 4-67. Static Routing Menu
Table 4-58. Static Routing Parameters
Index Number of the static route entry 1 to 32
Net IP Specify the destination IP address. Enter the desired IP address, in the
This address must be a valid IP network or host dotted-quad format.
address Default: 0.0.0.0
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask associated with the Enter the desired IP subnet mask, in the
Net IP address(es) dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Metrica Specify the maximum number of hops that an 1 to 15

IP packet sent through the new static route can Assigning a value of 1 means that a
traverse before being discarded packet can reach only the specified next
hop address.
Default: 1
Interface Specify the IP router interface on which the LAN 1, LAN 2, WAN 18
new route is defined Do not select the host interface.
Default: LAN 1

Next Hop Specify the IP address to be used as the Enter the desired IP address, in the
destination for the first hop en route to the dotted-quad format.
specified destination. Default: 0.0.0.0
The next hop address must be within the IP
subnet of the IP address of the selected
interface.
The next hop IP address is usually the address
of an IP router port.
This field is displayed only when the selected
interface is located on the LAN.
Next hop can also be set for a virtual bridge
interface (RFC 1483 bridge PDU).
To display a static routing table:

Router Parameters), select Static Routing Table.
The Static Routing Table is displayed.
2. From the Static Routing Table, select a static route that you intend to display.
The Static Routing Table parameters are identical to those, described in
Table 4-58.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Static Routing table
Index IP Mask Metric Interface NHop

1 4. 4. 4. 0 255.255.255.0 1 WAN1 ------
2 3. 3. 3. 0 255.255.255.0 1 WAN1 ------
Figure 4-68. Static Routing Table
Table 4-59. Static Routing Table Parameters
Parameter Description
Index Number of entry.

IP Displays the destination IP address for the corresponding static entry
Mask Displays the IP subnet mask associated with the destination IP address
Metric Displays the maximum number of hops that may be passed en route to the destination,
before the packets are discarded
Port The IP router port through which the corresponding destination is reached: LAN or WAN
Next Hop When the corresponding route passes through the LAN, displays the IP address used as the
destination for the first hop, en route to the specified destination

To display a routing table:

Router Parameters), select Routing Table.
The Routing Table is displayed.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Routing table
Index Net Address Net Mask Next Hop Age Type Metric
1 177.177.177.001 255.255.255.0 177.177.177.001 3 L 6
2 177.177.177.002 255.255.255.0 - - - - - - - - 1 L 10
Figure 4-69. Routing Table
Table 4-60. Routing Table Parameters
Parameter Function
Net Address Displays the destination IP address for the corresponding entry
Mask Displays the IP subnet mask associated with the Net Address
Next Hop When the corresponding route passes through the LAN, displays the IP address used as
the destination for the first hop, en route to the specified destination
Age Displays the age, in minutes, of the corresponding entry
Type Displays the type of the corresponding entry:

L local device interface
S static routing entry, added via the Static Routing menu
D dynamic entry, learned by means of the routing protocol
Metric Displays the number of hops passed en route to the destination of the corresponding
entry
Defining the Default Gateway

You can define an IP router interface that will serve as the default gateway. You
can select only LAN and WAN interfaces: it is not allowed to select a host
interface as the default gateway of the LA-110 router.
To define the default gateway:

Router Parameters), select Default Gateway.
The Default Gateway menu is displayed.
2. From the Default Gateway menu, define the LA-110 default gateway
parameters (see Table 4-61).

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Default Gateway

2. Active (Disable)
3. Next Hop ... (0.0.0.0)
>
Figure 4-70. Default Gateway Menu
Table 4-61. Default Gateway Parameters
Interface Specify the IP router interface to serve as a LAN 1, LAN 2, WAN 18

default gateway Do not select the host interface.
Default: LAN 1
Active Enables or disables the current default gateway Enable

Disable
Default: Enable
Next Hop Specify the IP address to be used as the Enter the desired IP address, in the
destination for the first hop en route to the dotted-quad format.
specified destination. Default: 0.0.0.0
The next hop address must be within the IP
subnet of the IP address of the selected LAN
interface.
The next hop IP address is usually the address
of an IP router port.
This field is displayed only when the selected
interface is located on the LAN.
Next hop can also be set for a virtual bridge
interface (RFC 1483 bridge PDU).
Defining the NAT

The user can add a network address translation (NAT) definition for a LAN or
WAN port of the IP router (it is not possible to define NAT translations for the
host port).
NAT can be defined only when LA-110 uses no routing protocol.
LA-110 can simultaneously perform translations for up to 60 hosts and up to
300 sessions.
You may define up to 20 NAT definitions. If this number is exceeded, you must
delete an existing NAT before a new one can be added.

To define the NAT

Router Parameters), select NAT.
The NAT menu is displayed.
2. From the NAT menu, define the LA-110 network address translation
parameters (see Table 4-62).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>NAT
1. Index[1 - 20] ... (1)

2. Nat Type > (Dynamic)
4. Real IP ... (0.0.0.0)
5. Real Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
6. Virtual IP ... (0.0.0.0)
7. Virtual Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
>
Figure 4-71. NAT Menu
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>NAT
1. Index[1 - 20] ... (1)

2. Nat Type > (Transparent)
4. Real & Virtual IP ... (0.0.0.0)
5. Real & Virtual Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
>
Figure 4-72. NAT Menu (Transparent NAT)

Table 4-62. NAT Parameters
NAT Type Specify the NAT type DYNAMIC Dynamic (temporary) translation of
virtual IP addresses to real IP addresses, in
accordance with the usage requirements
received from the hosts using virtual IP
addresses. This type is similar to the basic
traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and
RFC3022.
STATIC Permanent translation of a specific
virtual IP address to a specific real IP address.
This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described
in RFC2663.
TRANSPARENT No translation: the real and
virtual IP addresses are identical. This is a form
of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
SINGLE Dynamic allocation of a single IP
address in accordance with usage requirements
received from the virtual IP addresses, using
transport identifiers (port numbers) for
multiplexing. This type is similar to NAPT, a
form of traditional NAT, as described in
RFC2663 and RFC3022.
Default: DYNAMIC
Interface Specify the number of the IP router LAN 1, LAN 2, WAN 18

interface on which the new NAT is Do not select the host interface.
defined.
Default: LAN 1
When the selected interface is defined
on the LAN port:
Real IP addresses are located on the
LAN side
Virtual addresses are located on the
WAN side.
When the selected interface is defined
on the WAN port:
Real IP addresses are located on the
WAN side
Virtual addresses are located on the
LAN side.
Real IP Specify the IP address(es) to which a Enter the desired IP address in the
virtual IP address will be translated. dotted-quad format.
The real IP address may be a single IP Default:
address or a group of addresses defined SINGLE NAT Type: 255.255.255.255
by means of the real IP subnet mask, in Other NAT types: 0.0.0.0
accordance with the NAT type (see
below)

Real Mask Specify the IP subnet mask associated Enter the desired IP subnet mask, in the
with the real IP address(es) dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Virtual IP Specify the virtual IP address(es) to be Enter the desired IP address in the
translated. dotted-quad format.
The virtual IP address may be a single IP Default: 0.0.0.0
address or a group of addresses defined
by means of the virtual IP subnet mask,
in accordance with the NAT type (see
below)
Virtual Mask Specify the IP subnet mask associated Enter the desired IP subnet mask in the
with the virtual IP address(es) dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Dynamic NAT
When using the dynamic NAT type, any virtual IP address can be translated to any
real IP address. Any specific translation remains in force as long as the host using
the virtual IP address is engaged in a session.
Therefore, for the dynamic NAT type, it is necessary to enter two pairs of IP
address and associated subnet: one pair specifies the allowed range of real IP
addresses and the other pair specifies the allowed range of virtual IP addresses.
Static NAT
When using the static NAT, each virtual IP address in the specified virtual range is
translated to a real IP address in the specified real range. Any specific translation
remains in force as long as the host using the virtual IP address is engaged in a
session.
Therefore, for the static NAT type, it is necessary to enter only three parameters:
Real IP address and the associated subnet
Virtual IP address. Since there must be a one-to-one correspondence
between real IP addresses and virtual IP addresses, the virtual subnet mask is
automatically set to the value entered for the real IP subnet, and cannot be
changed.
Single NAT
When using the single NAT, each virtual IP address in the specified virtual range is
translated to the same real IP address (this is a many-to-one translation).
However, the different virtual addresses are assigned different transport
identifiers (port numbers). Any specific translation remains in force as long as the
host using the virtual IP address is engaged in a session.

Therefore, for the single NAT type, it is necessary to enter only three parameters:
Virtual IP address and associated subnet, which defines the range of IP
addresses that may be translated.
Real IP address. Since there is only one real IP address, the real subnet mask
is automatically set to 255.255.255.255 and cannot be changed.
Transparent NAT
When using the transparent NAT, no translation is made: each IP address in the
specified virtual IP address range is always translated to same IP address on the
real side.
Therefore, for the transparent NAT type, it is necessary to enter only two
parameters (see Figure 4-72):
Real and virtual IP address
Real and virtual subnet mask.
Defining the PAT

The user can add a port address translation (PAT) definition. PAT is a static
translation that specifies a unique mapping between a [real IP address; port;
protocol] and a [virtual IP address; port]. Its purpose is to enable access from the
real IP side to a host using a virtual IP address that is included in an existing
single NAT definition. Therefore, the new PAT translation will be accepted only if
a matching single NAT entry exists (matching means that a single NAT entry has
the same real IP and virtual entries).
You may define up to 10 PAT entries. If this number is exceeded, you must delete
an existing PAT before a new one can be added.
Each PAT definition is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1
to 10
To define the NAT

Router Parameters), select PAT.
The PAT menu is displayed.
2. From the PAT menu, define the LA-110 port address translation parameters
(see Table 4-63).

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>PAT
1. Index[1 - 10] ... (1)

2. Real IP ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Virtual IP ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Protocol > (TCP)
5. Port > (User Define)
6. Min Port[0 - 65535] ... (0)
7. Max Port[0 - 65535] ... (0)
>
Figure 4-73. PAT Menu (TCP)
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>PAT
1. Index[1 - 10] ... (1)

2. Real IP ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Virtual IP ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Protocol > (OTHER)
5. Protocol Number[1 - 255] ... (2)
Figure 4-74. PAT Menu (Other Protocol)
Table 4-63. PAT Parameters
Real IP Specify the IP address to which a virtual Enter the desired IP address, in the
IP address will be translated. dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Virtual IP Specify the virtual IP address to be Enter the desired IP address, in the
translated dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Port Select the port, or range of ports, to be The available selections are Telnet (23), Web
accepted for translation (80), FTP (20,21), SNMP (161), TFTP (69), DNS
(53), SMTP (25), POP3 (110) and User Define.
Default: User Define

Protocol Select the protocol needed by the port TCP, UDP, ICMP, Other
selected for translation. Default: Depends on selected port.
For User
Define: TCP
Protocol Number Select protocol number if Other is set 1255 (excluding 1, 6, 17)
for the protocol Default: 2
Min Port User Select the lowest port number in the 0 to 65535
Define user-defined range. Default: 0
Displayed only when the Port is User
Define
Max Port User Select the highest port number in the 0 to 65535
Define user-defined range. Default: 0
Displayed only when the Port is User
Define
Configuring the Firewall

The user can set a firewall on each one of the router interfaces (WAN, LAN). Each
firewall holds its own rules and cache table. When activated, the firewall will block
all traffic coming from the public network into the private unless it is on the
cache.
To configure a firewall:
Router Parameters), select Firewall.
The Firewall menu is displayed.
2. From the Firewall menu, define the general firewall parameters and select
Rules to proceed with the firewall rules configuration (see Table 4-64).
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Firewall
1. IP Interface > (WAN 1)

2. Direction (Inbound)
3. FTP-Option (Enable)
4. Printing (Disable)
5. Name ... ()
6. Rules >
>
Figure 4-75. Firewall Menu

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Firewall Rules
1. Index[1 - 30] ... (1)

2. Source IP-Low ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Source IP-High ... (255.255.255.255)
4. Dest IP-Low ... (0.0.0.0)
5. Dest IP-High ... (255.255.255.255)
6. IP Protocol > (TCP)
7. Source Port-Low[0 - 65535] ... (0)
8. Source Port-High[0 - 65535] ... (65535)
...(N)
Figure 4-76. Firewall Rules Menu, Page 1
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Firewall Rules
...(P) ... (1)

1. Dest Port-Low[0 - 65535] ... (0)
2. Dest Port-High[0 - 65535] ... (65535)
Figure 4-77. Firewall Rules Menu, Page 2
Table 4-64. Firewall Parameters
Index Index of firewall 1 to 9 (read-only)
IP Interface Selects an interface, on which the LAN, WAN 18 (LAN is for LAN1 and LAN2) (only
firewall is created defined interfaces)
Default: LAN
Direction Selects the firewall direction Inbound The firewall blocks frames entering
selected interface. A blocked frame does not
proceed into the LA-110 router.
Outbound The firewall blocks frames
transmitted from the selected interface. Frames
arrive to the firewall after being routed to the
interface.
Default: Inbound

FTP Option Enables or disables port switching Enable Destination ports can be switched as
during a TFTP session per TFRP server request
Disable Parts cannot be switched during a TFTP
session
Default: Enable
Printing Option Enables or disables viewing of the Enable Firewall logs can be viewed
firewall logs via the Firewall Log menu Disable Firewall logs cannot be viewed
(Monitoring > System > Firewall Log)
Default: Enable
Name Define a firewall name Up to 30 characters

Default: Null string
Rule Index 1 to 30
Default: 1
Source IP Low Specifies the low address in the 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

allowed source IP range Default: 0.0.0.0
Source IP High Specifies the high address in the 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

allowed source IP range Default: 0.0.0.0
Destination IP Low Specifies the low address in the 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

allowed destination IP range Default: 0.0.0.0
Destination IP Specifies the high address in the 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

High allowed destination IP range Default: 0.0.0.0
IP Protocol Specify allowed IP protocol TCP, UDP, ICMP, Other
Default: TCP
Protocol Number Number of allowed protocol, if Other 1255 (excluding 1, 6, 17)
is selected for the IP Protocol Default: 255
Source Port Low Specifies low port in the allowed 0 to 65535
source port range, relevant only for Default: 0
TCP and UDP
Source Port High Specifies high port in the allowed 0 to 65535
source port range, relevant only for Default: 65535
TCP and UDP
Destination Port Specifies low port in the allowed 0 to 65535
Low destination port range, relevant only Default: 0
for TCP and UDP
Destination Port Specifies high port in the allowed 0 to 65535
High destination port range, relevant only Default: 65535
for TCP and UDP
Configuring the Policy-Based Routing

Policy-based routing (PBR) enables the user to define its own routing policy,
overriding the routing tables. The PBR can be performed according to the source

and destination IPs, protocol type, frame length etc. This allows different routing
configurations for the different services. Up to 20 PBR rules can be defined.
When configuring the PBR mechanism, the user defines the following parameters:
1. Traffic characteristics to be taken into account by the PBR (packets arriving
from a certain IP address, packets using a certain protocol etc)
2. Actions to be performed if the traffic matches the selected criteria (forward
to a specific interface or discard).
To configure the policy-based routing:

1. From the Router Parameters menu, (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Router Parameters), select Route Map.
The Route Map menu is displayed.
2. From the Route Map menu, select IP interface and choose an IP interface, on
which the PBR is to be defined (LAN, WAN 18).
3. Select Match & Set Pairs to define the PBR rules.
The Match & Set Pairs menu is displayed.
4. From the Match & Set Pairs menu, perform the following:
a. Select Index to define a number to the PBR rule (120)
b. Select Match All and set it to Yes if you want to ignore the PBR rules and
proceed to the forwarding or No if you want to enable the PBR rules.
c. Define Source IP address.
d. Define Source Mask.
e. Define Destination IP address.
f. Define Destination Mask.
g. Select IP Protocol and choose an IP protocol to be used by the routing
rule.
h. Specify Min and Max Frame Length.
i. Select Forwarding Interface. This specifies an existing IP interface to
which the traffic matching criteria set by the PBR rules is to be sent.
j. Select Discard Frame and set it to Yes or No to discard the traffic
matching the criteria set by the PBR rules.

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Route Map>Match & Set Pairs
1. Index[1 - 20] ... (1)
2. Match All (No)
3. Source IP ... (0.0.0.0)
4. Source Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
5. Dest IP ... (0.0.0.0)
6. Dest Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
7. IP Protocol[0 - 255] ... (0)
8. Min Frame Length[0 - 1600] ... (0)
9. Max Frame Length[0 - 1600] ... (0)
10. Forwarding Interface > (NONE)
11. Discard Frame > (No)
Figure 4-78. Match & Set Pairs Menu
Configuring the QoS

In the bridge mode, the LA-110 management software allows the user to classify
the incoming LAN traffic into three traffic classes. The classification is performed
according to 802.1p, IP precedence, ToS or DSCP. Once the traffic classes are
defined, they can be mapped, using the ATM CoS or WFQ mechanism. LA-110
supports up to eight QoS rules.
In order to configure the QoS, the user must perform the following:
1. Select the QoS classification method.
2. Select the mapping mechanism.
3. Map the tag values or priority values (depending on the selected QoS
classification method) to the three traffic classes.
4. Bind each traffic class to one WAN interface (WFQ method) or to three WAN
interfaces (ATM CoS method).
5. When using the WFQ method, assign weights to the traffic classes, specifying
a bandwidth percentage to be used by each class.
Selecting the QoS Classification Method and Mapping Mechanism
To select the QoS classification method and mapping mechanism:

From the General Parameters (Configuration > System > General
Parameters), perform the following:
1. Select QoS Classification and choose the desired QoS classification
method:
None (QoS is disabled)
802.1P (using priority tags, supported by IEEE 802.1p, possible values
17)

IP Precedence (using IP Precedence tags, bits 02 of the ToS byte,

possible values 17)
TOS (using IP ToS tags, bits 36, possible values 115)
DSCP (using DS codepoint tags, bits 05, possible values 063).
2. Select Mapping Mechanism and choose:
ATM CoS (each traffic class is to be sent over a separate WAN
interface)
WFQ (all three traffic classes share the same WAN interface. The
connection bandwidth is distributed according to the weight assigned
to each traffic class.)
Mapping the Traffic Classes

The relevant tag or priority values must be mapped to one of the three traffic
classes (02).
To map the traffic classes:

1. From the QoS menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > QoS),
select QoS and choose an index of QoS rule to be defined.
2. From the QoS menu, select Mapping.
The Mapping menu is displayed. The Mapping menu appearance depends
on the selected QoS classification method (802.1P, IP Precedence, TOS or
DSCP).
3. From the Mapping menu, perform the following:
a. For the 802.1, map each user priority value in the range of 0 to 7 to
traffic class 0, 1 or 2.
b. For IP Precedence, map each IP Precedence tag value in the range of 0 to
7 to traffic class 0, 1 or 2.
c. For TOS, map each ToS tag value in the range of 0 to 15 to traffic class 0,
1 or 2.
d. For DSCP, map each DS codepoint tag n the range of 0 to 63 to traffic
class 0, 1 or 2.
Note
By default all priority and tag values are mapped to traffic class 0.
4. From the Mapping menu, select Tag Value Table to display all current mapping
assignments.

LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>QoS>Mapping
1. User Priority 0 > (Traffic Class 0)

Figure 4-79. Mapping Menu (802.1P)
LA-110
1. Tag Value 0 > (Traffic Class 0)

Figure 4-80. Mapping Menu (IP Precedence)
LA-110
1. Tag Value[0 - 15] ... (0)

2. Traffic > (Traffic Class 0)
3. Tag Value Table []
>
Figure 4-81. Mapping Menu (TOS)

LA-110
1. Tag Value[0 - 63] ... (0)

>
Figure 4-82. Mapping Menu (DSCP)
Binding the Traffic Classes

The traffic classes must be bound to the LA-110 WAN interfaces:
In the WFQ mode, all three traffic classes must be bound to the same WAN
interface
In the ATM CoS mode, each traffic class must be bound to a separate WAN
interface.
To bind the traffic classes:

1. From the QoS menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > QoS), select
Traffic Classes.
The Traffic Classes menu is displayed.
2. From the Traffic Classes menu, perform the following:
a. Select a traffic class that you intend to bind (02).
b. Select Bind and choose a WAN interface, to which the current traffic class
is to be bound.
c. In the WFQ mode, bind the remaining traffic classes to the same
interface.
or
In the ATM CoS mode, bind each traffic class to a different interface.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>QoS>Traffic Classes
1. Traffic Class [0 - 2] ... (0)

2. Bind > (None)
3. Weight[0 - 50] ... (25)
>
Figure 4-83. Traffic Classes Menu (WFQ)

LA-110
1. Traffic Class [0 - 2] ... (0)

2. Bind > (None)
>
Figure 4-84. Traffic Classes Menu (ATM CoS)
Defining the Traffic Class Weight

In the WFQ mode, a bandwidth of the WAN interface is distributed among the
traffic classes by assigning a weight to each of them.
The real WAN bandwidth to be used by a traffic class is calculated according to
the following formulas:
W0
W0 = 100
W0 + W1 + W2
W1
W1 = 100
W0 + W1 + W2
W2
W2 = 100
W0 + W1 + W2
For example, if traffic classes 0 to 2 are assigned weights 1 to 3, respectively, the
WAN bandwidth is distributed as follows:
1
Traffic class 0, weight 1 16.6%, according to 100%
1+ 2 + 3
2
Traffic class 1, weight 2 33.3%, according to 100%
1+ 2 + 3
3
Traffic class 2, weight 3 50%, according to 100%.
1+ 2 + 3
To define the traffic class weight:

1. From the Traffic Classes menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > QoS >
Traffic Classes), select a traffic class (02).
2. Select Weight and assign a weight value to the current traffic class.
3. Repeat step 12 for the remaining traffic classes.
Configuring MPLS Parameters

When LA-110 operates in the multiservice over PSN mode and the
packet-switched network type is MPLS, it is necessary to define ranges for the
ingress/egress MPLS labels, as well as ingress and egress tunnels for PW
connections.

Defining the MPLS Label Range

Labels, which are used for marking ingress and egress MPLS tunnels, are taken
from user-defined pool. LA-110 supports up to two MPLS labels per frame.
To define the label range:

From the Label Range menu (Configuration > Applications > MPLS > Label
Range), configure the following:
Ingress Label min (Minimum tunnel label value for incoming traffic): sliding
window of 1024. For example, 0220-1.
Default: 16
Ingress Label max (Maximum tunnel label value for incoming traffic): sliding
Default: 1024
Egress Label min (Minimum tunnel label value for outgoing traffic): sliding
Default: 16
Egress Label max (Maximum tunnel label value for outgoing traffic): sliding
Default: 1024
LA-110
Configuration>Applications>MPLS>Label Range
1. Static Range - Ingress label(min) ... (16)

2. Static Range - Ingress label(max) ... (1024)
3. Static Range - Egress label(min) ... (16)
4. Static Range - Egress label(max) ... (1024)
>
Figure 4-85. MPLS Label Range Menu
Defining MPLS Tunnels

Traffic transfer over MPLS network is performed via virtual tunnels. The MPLS
tunnels are created in pairs:
Ingress in the PSN to LA-110 direction
Egress in the LA-110 to PSN direction.
Multiple pseudowire connections can be bound to MPLS tunnels.
To define an ingress tunnel:

From the Ingress Tunnel menu (Configuration > Applications > MPLS > Tunnel
LSP > Ingress Tunnel), define ingress tunnel parameters,
see Figure 4-86 and Table 4-65.

LA-110
Configuration>Applications>MPLS>Tunnel LSP>Ingress Tunnel
Initiator > (Manual)
1. Index[1 - 8] ... (1)
2. Name ... (tunnel-in1)
3. Interface > (Bridge Port 2)
4. No. Of Tunnel Labels > (1)
5. Administrative Status > (Up)
6. 1st Label (Outer) ... (16)
>
Figure 4-86. Ingress Tunnel Menu
Table 4-65. Ingress Tunnel Parameters
Index Index of ingress tunnel 1 to 8

Default: 1
Name User-defined name of the current Default: tunnel-inX, where X is the tunnel index
ingress tunnel (up to 32 alphanumeric
characters).
Note: Index number serves as a key
identifier of the tunnel, its name has a
descriptive function only.
Interface Bridge port serving the ingress tunnel None, Bridge Port 18
Default: None
No. Of Tunnel Number of tunnel labels to be used by 02

Labels the ingress tunnel. This number does Default: 1
not include a PW label, which is
configured per each pseudowire
connection separately.
Administrative Operation status of the ingress tunnel Up The ingress tunnel is operational
Status Down The ingress tunnel is not operational
Default: Up
1st Label (Outer) Tunnel label value within specified 0220-1

label range Default: The lowest possible value in the
specified label range
2nd Label Inner tunnel label value within 0220-1

specified label range. This parameter is Default: The lowest possible value in the
available only if the number of tunnel specified label range
labels is 2.

To define an egress tunnel:

From the Egress Tunnel menu (Configuration > Applications > MPLS > Tunnel
LSP > Egress Tunnel), define egress tunnel parameters, see Figure 4-87 and
Table 4-66.
LA-110
Configuration> Applications >MPLS>Tunnel LSP>Egress Tunnel
1. Index[1 - 8] ... (1)
2. Name ... (tunnel-out1)
>
Figure 4-87. Egress Tunnel Menu
Table 4-66. Egress Tunnel Parameters
Index Index of egress tunnel 1 to 8

Default: 1
Name User-defined name of the current Default: tunnel-outX, where X is the tunnel index
egress tunnel (up to 32 alphanumeric
characters).
Note: Index number serves as a key
identifier of the tunnel, its name has a
descriptive function only.
Interface Bridge port serving the egress tunnel None, Bridge Port 18
Default: None
No. Of Tunnel Number of tunnel labels to be used by 02

Labels the egress tunnel. This number does Default: 1
not include a PW label, which is
configured per each pseudowire
connection separately.
Administrative Operation status of the egress tunnel Up The egress tunnel is operational
Status Down The egress tunnel is not operational
Default: Up
1st Label (Outer) Outer tunnel label value within 0220-1

specified label range Default: The lowest possible value in the
specified label range

2nd Label Inner tunnel label value within 0220-1

specified label range. This parameter is Default: The lowest possible value in the
available only if the number of tunnel specified label range
labels is 2.
4.6 Configuring Multiservice over PSN Application

LA-110 units operating in the multiservice over PSN mode communicate with peer
devices via pseudowire (PW) connections that are established over the
packet-switched network. Depending on the user data type (framed/unframed
E1, UNI, Frame Relay etc) different encapsulation techniques are utilized.
Configuring General Parameters

Before adding pseudowire connections it is necessary to define the following
general parameters:
Timeout
PW label range.
Setting the PW Timeout

LA-110 has a built-in timer that defines PW timeout in the range of 1
1000 msec. Each specific PW can be configured to operate with the timeout
function enabled or disabled. When the timeout expires, the PW frame forwarded
to the network, whether the maximum number of cells per frame has been
reached or not. The timeout is relevant for the ATM-based (UNI) traffic only.
To set the PW timeout:

From the General menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi Service over PSN
> General), select Timeout and define its value in the range of 1 to
1000 msec.
Default: 2
LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>General
1. Timeout (ms)[1 - 1000] ... (2)

2. Label Range >
>
Figure 4-88. General Menu
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Configuring Multiservice over PSN Application 4-137

Defining the PW Label Range

PW labels, which serve as a PW network identifiers, are taken from user-defined
pool.
To define the PW label range:

From the Label Range menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi Service over
PSN > General > Label Range), configure the following:
Ingress Label min (Minimum PW label value for incoming traffic): sliding
Default: 0
Ingress Label max (Maximum PW label value for incoming traffic): sliding
Default: 1024
Egress Label min (Minimum PW label value for outgoing traffic): sliding
Default: 0
Egress Label max (Maximum PW label value for outgoing traffic): sliding
Default: 1024
LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>General>Label Range
1. Static Range - Ingress label(min) ... (0)

2. Static Range - Ingress label(max) ... (1024)
3. Static Range - Egress label(min) ... (0)
4. Static Range - Egress label(max) ... (1024)
>
Figure 4-89. PW Label Range Menu
Creating PW Connections
For each pseudowire connection it is necessary to configure its general, PSN and
service parameters. For users convenience, parameters that are mandatory for
PW configuration are given in the Quick Setup menu. Parameters may change
depending on the PSN type (MPLS or UDP/IP), port type (E1/T1 or serial) or
service/PW type. For additional parameters, see Configuring General PW
Parameters, Configuring PSN Parameters and Configuring Service Parameters
below.
To create PWs from the Quick Setup menu:

From the Quick Setup menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi Service over
PSN > Quick Setup), add and configure the PWs, referring to Figure 4-90 and
Table 4-67.
4-138 Configuring Multiservice over PSN Application LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>Quick Setup
1. PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)
2. PW Name ... (PW-1)
3. PW Type > (ATM VP 1 to 1)
4. PSN Type > (MPLS)
5. Peer Address ... (0.0.0.0)
6. In PW Label ... (0)
7. Out PW Label ... (0)
8. Ingress Tunnel Index > (NONE)
9. Egress Tunnel Index > (NONE)
10. EXP Bits[0 - 7] ... (0)
11. VLAN Tag (Enable)
12. VLAN ID[1 - 4095] ... (1)
13. VLAN Priority[0 - 7] ... (0)
14. Max. Cells Concatenation[1 - 29] ... (1)
15. Timeout Mode (Enable)
16. Attachment Circuit > (1)
>
Figure 4-90. Quick PW Setup Menu (E1 UNI, MPLS Mode)
Table 4-67. Quick PW Setup Parameters
PW Number Number of pseudowire connection 1 to 8

Default: 1
PW Name User-defined name of the current egress tunnel (up Default: PW-X, where X is the PW
to 36 alphanumeric characters). index
PW Type Defines encapsulation type used for PW creation. See Table 4-68
Available options depend on the port type (E1/T1 or
serial) and service type (E1/T1 framed, E1 UNI etc).
PSN Type Defines the packet-switched network type. UDP/IP MPLS

PSN type is available for the TDMoIP, SAToP and UDP/IP
CESoPSN PW types
Default: MPLS
Peer Address Defines the IP (v4) address for the peer, which 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
terminates the PW Default: 0.0.0.0

PW Label Mode Defines location of PW label for the UDP/IP PSN type UDP Source Port PW label is
located in the UDP header
MPLS Label PW label is located
in the MPLS header after IP and
UDP headers
In PW Label Defines the incoming (ingress) PW label within 0220-1

specified label range Default: The lowest possible
value in the specified label range
Out PW Label Defines the outgoing (egress) PW label within 0220-1

specified label range Default: The lowest possible
value in the specified label range
Ingress Tunnel Specifies ingress MPLS tunnel used by the PW. Valid 18
Index for MPLS networks only. Default: 1
Egress Tunnel Specifies egress MPLS tunnel used by the PW. Valid 18
Index for MPLS networks only. Default: 1
EXP Bits Defines the EXP bits value to be used for outgoing 07
traffic in both inner and outer labels. Valid for MPLS Default: 0
networks only.
VLAN Tag Controls the use of VLAN tagging Enable VLAN tagging is enabled
Disable VLAN tagging is disabled
Default: Enable
VLAN ID Defines VLAN tag value if VLAN tagging is enabled 04095

Default: 1
VLAN Priority Defines VLAN priority value if VLAN tagging is enabled 07

Default: 0
Max Cells Specifies the maximum number of ATM cells that can 129
Concatenation be concatenated in a single Ethernet frame for the Default: 1
current PW. Valid for the following PW types: ATM VP
1 to 1, ATM VP N to 1.
The following events trigger transmission of a PW
frame:
Maximum number of ATM cells per frame has been
reached
A timeout for the PW has expired.
Timeout Mode Enables or disables PW timeout. See Setting the PW Enable Timeout is enabled for
Timeout above. Valid for the following PW types: ATM the current PW
VP 1 to 1, ATM VP N to 1. Disable Timeout is disabled for
the current PW
TDM Payload Size Defines payload length for TDMoIP-type PWs, 128
(Bytes in Frame) enabling reduction of Ethernet throughput. The values Default: 1
are in multi[les of 48.

Payload Format Displays the TDMoIP protocol version, read-only V2 Version 2

Default: V2
Far End Type Defines the far-end unit mode for TDMoIP-type PWs E1 Far-end unit operates in the
E1 framed mode
Serial/Unframed Far-end unit
operates in the serial or E1
unframed mode
Default: E1
Number of TDM Defines UDP payload length CESoPSN-type PWs 345

Frames in Packets Default: 1
Jitter Buffer Read-only. The depth of the jitter (PDVT) buffer,

compensating for network delay variation or jitter.
Configured via the General Parameters menu (see
Configuring General System Parameters).
Attachment Circuit Specifies a user side circuit (E1 bundle, DLCI etc) to
be attached to the current PW.
Table 4-68. LA-110 PW Types
E1/T1 Serial
UNI Framed Unframed
ATM VP 1 to 1 CESoPSN SAToP TDMoIP

ATM VP N to 1 TDMoIP SAToP
FRoPSN
HDLCoPSN
Configuring General PW Parameters

Via the General Parameters menu you can select the global LA-110 PW
parameters.
To configure general PW parameters:

From the General Parameters menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi
Service over PSN > PW > General Parameters), configure general PW
parameters, referring to Figure 4-91 and Table 4-69.

LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>PW>General Parameters
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
1. PW Type > (CESoPSN)
3. Port > (E1)
4. Provisioning Mode > (Manual)
5. Peer Address ... (0.0.0.0)
6. Control Word Support (Disable)
7. PW Label Mode (UDP Source Port)
8. In PW Label ... (0)
10. PW Status > (Up)
11. Sequence Number Support (Enable)
>
Figure 4-91. PW General Parameters Menu
Table 4-69. PW General Parameters
PW Number See Table 4-67
PW Name See Table 4-67
PW Type See Table 4-67
PSN Type See Table 4-67
Port Specifies port mode E1 E1 mode

Serial Serial mode
Provisioning Mode Read-only field specifying protocol Permanently set to Manual

responsible for establishing this PW for MPLS
networks.
Peer Address See Table 4-67
Control Word Indicates whether control word is sent over Enable Control word usage is enabled
Support the PW or not. Control word is optional for Disable Control word usage is disabled
some PW types. If the control word usage is
Default: Disable
enforced, this value appears as read-only.
PW Label Mode See Table 4-67
In PW Label See Table 4-67
Out PW Label See Table 4-67

PW Status Operation status of the PW Up The PW is operational

Down The PW is not operational
Default: Up
Sequence Number Defines if the processing of the sequence Enable Processing of the sequence
Support number field is done by LA-110. number field is done by LA-110
Disable Processing of the sequence
number field is not done by LA-110
Configuring PSN Parameters

Available PSN parameters depend on the packet-switch network type (MPLS or
UDP/IP) selected via PW General Parameters menu (Figure 4-91).
To configure an MPLS-based network:

1. From the General Parameters menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi
Service over PSN > PW > General Parameters), set the PSN Type to MPLS.
2. From the PSN Parameters menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi Service
over PSN > PW > PSN Parameters), configure MPLS parameters, referring to
Figure 4-92 and Table 4-70.
LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>PW>PSN Parameters
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
PSN Type > (MPLS)
1. Ingress Tunnel Index > (NONE)
2. Egress Tunnel Index > (NONE)
3. EXP Bits[0 - 7] ... (0)
4. TTL[0 - 255] ... (0)
6. VLAN ID[1 - 4095] ... (1)
7. VLAN Priority[0 - 7] ... (0)
>
Figure 4-92. PSN Parameters Menu (MPLS)

Table 4-70. PSN Parameters (MPLS)
Ingress Tunnel Index See Table 4-67
Egress Tunnel Index See Table 4-67
EXP Bits See Table 4-67
TTL Defines time-to-live value for the PW 0255

Default: 0
VLAN Tag See Table 4-67
VLAN ID See Table 4-67
VLAN Priority See Table 4-67
To configure an UDP/IP-based network:

1. From the General Parameters menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi
Service over PSN > PW > General Parameters), set the PSN Type to UDP/IP.
2. From the PSN Parameters menu (Configuration > Applications > Multi Service
over PSN > PW > PSN Parameters), configure UDP/IP parameters, referring to
Figure 4-93 and Table 4-71.
LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>PW>PSN Parameters
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
PSN Type > (UDP/IP)
Protocol Type > (UDP)
1. Source UDP port ... (0)
2. Outgoing Interface > (NONE)
3. TOS[0 - 255] ... (0)
5. VLAN ID[1 - 4095] ... (1)
6. VLAN Priority[0 - 7] ... (0)
>
Figure 4-93. PSN Parameters Menu (UDP/IP)

Table 4-71. PSN Parameters (UDP/IP)
Source UDP port Defines the source UDP port value if the PW Label Default: 0
Mode parameter is set to MPLS Label, see
Table 4-67
Outgoing Interface
TOS Defines the ToS byte value for outgoing traffic 0255
Default: 0
VLAN Tag See Table 4-67
VLAN ID See Table 4-67
VLAN Priority See Table 4-67
Configuring Service Parameters

Available PSN parameters depend on the PW type (see Table 4-68) selected via
PW General Parameters menu (Figure 4-91).
Figure 4-94, Figure 4-95, Figure 4-96 and Figure 4-97 illustrate typical Service
Parameters menus for different pseudowire connection type. All configuration
parameters available in these menus are explained in Table 4-67.
LA-110
Configuration>Applications>Multi Service over PSN>PW>Service Parameters
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
1. Max Cell Concatenation ... (1)
2. Timeout Mode > (Enable)
>
Figure 4-94. Service Parameters Menu (ATM VC/VP 1/N to 1 PW)
LA-110
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
1. Attachment Circuit > (Serial Port)
>
Figure 4-95. Service Parameters Menu (HDLC PW)

LA-110
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
1. TDM Payload Size (Bytes in Frame) ... (1)
2. Far End Type > (E1)
>
Figure 4-96. Service Parameters Menu (TDMoIP PW)
LA-110
PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)

PW Name ... (PW-1)
1. No of TDM Frames in Packets ... (1)
>
Figure 4-97. Service Parameters Menu (CESoPSN PW)
4.7 Additional Tasks

This section describes additional operations available supported by the LA-110
management software, including the following:
Displaying inventory
Transferring software and configuration files
Defining date and time
Resetting the unit.
Displaying LA-110 Inventory

The inventory displays the LA-110 general system information and interfaces
installed in the unit.
To display the LA-110 inventory system parameters:

1. From the Main menu, select Inventory.
The Inventory menu is displayed.
4-146 Additional Tasks LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110
Inventory
1. System Parameters >

2. Physical Configuration []
>
Inventory Info
Figure 4-98. Inventory Menu
2. From the Inventory menu, select System Parameters.

The System Parameters menu is displayed.
LA-110
Inventory>System Parameters
Device (Device: LA-110E, RAD Data Communication, Ltd)

Name (LA-110)
Date (JUN. 09, 2005)
Time (02:25:30)
ATM port interface (SHDSL)
System clock (Derived from the main link)
NTR (NTR enabled)
Board revision (B2.32)
(N)
>
Inventory Info
Figure 4-99. System Inventory, Page 1
LA-110
Inventory>System Parameters
(P)
Loopback (none)
Boot version (2.31.0.0)
Software version (3.14 SHDSL)
Options (F)
>
Figure 4-100. System Inventory, Page 2
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Additional Tasks 4-147

A typical system status information display is shown below. The fields are
described in Table 4-72.
Table 4-72. System Inventory Parameters
Device A concise description of the device type and its manufacturer LA-110
Name The system name
Date The date retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110
Time The time retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110
ATM port interface The physical ATM network interface type: SHDSL or ADSL Annex A
System Clock The source of the system clock.
NTR Status of the NTR clock.
Board revision The LA-110 hardware version
Loopback The state of LA-110 loopbacks.
Boot version The LA-110 boot version
Option Designation of the LA-110 option
Software version Version of the SHDSL, ADSL, IMA or E1 firmware
Interfaces table The interface types installed for each LA-110 port (see Figure 4-101).
To display the physical interface information on LA-110:

1. From the Main menu, select Inventory.
The Inventory menu is displayed.
2. From the Inventory menu, select Physical Configuration.
The physical configuration details are displayed.
LA-110
Inventory>Physical Configuration
Network User LAN Data

Interface SHDSL E1 Ethr X21
>
Figure 4-101. LA-110 Physical Configuration
Setting the Date and Time

Set the date and time for the LA-110 internal real-time clock.
To set the date and time for the LA-110 internal real-time clock
1. From the System menu, select Date and Time.
The Date and Time menu is displayed (see Figure 4-102).

2. From the Date & Time menu, select Date, and enter the current date in the
dd/mm/yyyy format.
3. Select Time, and enter the current time in the hh:mm format.
LA-110
Configuration>System>Date & Time
1. Date ... (08/07/2005)

2. Time ... (00:14)
>
Configures devices Date & Time
Figure 4-102. Date & Time Menu
Transferring Software and Configuration Files

Appendix C details procedures for transferring software and configuration files via
TFTP and HTTP.
Loading the Factory-Default Parameters

Load the default parameter values into the database instead of the user
configuration. During the process, the connections list defined by the user is also
deleted and LA-110 is restarted.
To load the set of factory-default parameter values into the database:

1. From the System menu, select Factory Default.
2. Enter Y for Yes and N for No when a message is displayed stating: In order
to take effect, the device will reboot. Do you wish to continue? (Y/N).
Rebooting LA-110
Resets the LA-110.
To reset LA-110:
2. From the System menu, select Reboot.
3. Enter Y for Yes or N for No when you are prompted to confirm the reboot.
4. Wait until the LA-110 reboots before continuing.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Additional Tasks 4-149


Chapter 5
Configuring LA-110 for
Typical Applications
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides detailed instructions for configuring the most common
LA-110 applications. It includes:
Providing TDM and Frame Relay services over ATM
Transferring synchronous data over ATM
Transferring full E1 over AAL1
Transferring PRI over AAL2 LES
Transferring E1 UNI over SHDSL
Connecting remote LANs over ATM (bridging mode)
Providing connection to an IP network over ATM (routing mode)
Transferring E1 and synchronous data over SHDSL IMA link
Transferring E1 and synchronous data over MPLS network.
Performing Common Tasks

This section provides information on how to perform the following common
tasks:
Defining timing reference
Configuring network interface.
Configuring Timing Reference

For any application, a clock source must be determined before configuring the
LA-110 network and user interfaces.
The LA-110 system timing can be locked to the following clock sources:
Internal clock
Adaptive clock
Derived from the main link
Derived from the user link
Network Timing Reference (NTR).
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Introduction 5-1

Chapter 5 Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications Installation and Operation Manual
To configure the timing reference:

From the Clock menu (Configuration > System > Clock), select the necessary
clock mode:
Internal clock: the timing of the user and network interfaces is locked to
the IADs internal clock oscillator. This option may be used when two IADs
are connected back-to-back (without a DSLAM or ATM switch).
Adaptive clock: the clock is regenerated from the ATM cells arrival rate.
Use this clocking option when the DSLAM does not support NTR, or in
back-to-back applications.
Derived from the main link: the clock can be derived from the uplink.
LA-110 locks the clock and supplies it to its interfaces.
NTR (Network Timing Reference): LA-110 recovers the clock from the
8 kHz NTR clock. This is the recommended clock mode.
Configuring Network Interface

Before different services can be offered (LAN, FR, E1 etc), LA-110 must be
synchronized opposite the DSLAM.
The technologies for connection to a DSLAM are:
SHDSL (regular or 4 2-wire SHDSL IMA)
ADSL
E1.
To configure the network interface:

1. From the SHDSL/ADSL/E1 menu (Configuration > Physical Layer >
SHDSL/ADSL/E1), configure the LA-110 network interface at the physical
layer.
2. For SHDSL interface, select the necessary operating mode:
CO (local LA-110)
CPE (remote LA-110).
LA-110
Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL
Physical Interface (4 Wire)
1. Mode (CO)
2. Power backoff (Enable)
3. Standard (Annex B)
4. Line Probe Enable (Fixed Rate)
5. Asym Psd > (Rate Asym R1 Disable)
6. Min Rate [200 2312] (200)
7. Max Rate [200 2312] (2312)
>
Network port
Figure 5-1. Configuring SHDSL Interface at the Physical Layer
5-2 Introduction LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications
5.2 Providing TDM and Frame Relay Services over

ATM
When accepting traffic with voice and Frame Relay services carried by different
timeslots within one bundled data stream, LA-110 can be configured to connect
the relevant voice and data timeslots to its E1 timeslots, assign them to the
bundles and forward the bundles to the ATM uplink (see Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2. Transferring TDM and Frame Relay Services over ATM
Selecting the System Clock

To select the LA-110 system clock:
Follow the procedure explained in the Performing Common Tasks section
above to set the LA-110 timing mode to NTR.
Configuring the Network Interface

To configure the LA-110 network interface:
above to set the LA-110 operation mode to CPE.
The WAN LED turns on green.
Selecting the Adaptation Layer

To select the adaptation layer:
From the General Parameters menu (Configuration > System > General
Parameters), set the Adaptation Layer to AAL1 and save the changes.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Providing TDM and Frame Relay Services over ATM 5-3
LA-110

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
5. Pseudo Wire Mode > (CESoPSN)
>
Figure 5-3. Selecting Adaptation Layer
Configuring E1 Interface at the Physical Level

From the E1-User menu (Configuration > Physical Layer > E1-User), set the
framing mode to Multi-frame (G.732S) and save the changes.
LA-110 performs automatic reboot.
LA-110
1. Framing > (multi-frame (G.732S))

2. Line Code (HDB3)
6. CRC-4 (On)
>
User port
Figure 5-4. Configuring E1 at the Physical Layer
Configuring Bundle for TDM Service

To configure bundle 1 for TDM service:
1. From the Bundle menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle), select
bundle 1 and assign timeslots 1, 2 and 3 to it via the TS Table (Configuration
> Logical Layer > User > Bundle > Ts Table).
2. Save the changes.
5-4 Providing TDM and Frame Relay Services over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5
LA-110
1. Bundle number[1 - 31] ... (1)

2. Ts table []>
>
User port
Figure 5-5. Selecting Bundle 1
LA-110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1. No
2. Yes
>
Figure 5-6. Assigning Timeslots 1, 2 and 3 to Bundle 1
3. From the updated Bundle menu, define application for bundle 1 (TDM over
ATM).
LA-110
1. Bundle number[1 - 31] ... (1)

2. Ts table []>
3. Application > (TDM over ATM)
>
User port
Figure 5-7. Selecting an Application for Bundle 1
5. From the Connection menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User > TDM over
ATM > Connection) add ATM connection, which will carry TDM traffic to the
DSLAM:
Select Connection Type CES
Select VPI 1
Select VCI 33.
LA-110
Signaling (Off)
1. Connection Type > (CES )

2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (33)
4. Rx Bytes per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
5. Tx Bytes per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
7. LB Operation (Off)
8. Active (On)
9. Pointer parity (On)
10. Signaling (Off)
>
User port
Figure 5-8. Creating an ATM Connection for Bundle 1
Configuring Bundle for Frame Relay Service

To configure bundle 2 for Frame Relay Service:
1. From the Port Application menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial >
Application), set the data port application to Frame Relay. This prepares the
internal processing mechanism to accept the Frame Relay service.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>Serial>Application
1. Port application (Frame Relay)
>
Figure 5-9. Selecting Data Port Application
bundle 2 and assign timeslots 4, 5 and 6 to it via the TS Table (Configuration
> Logical Layer > User > Bundle > Ts Table).
5-6 Providing TDM and Frame Relay Services over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5
LA-110
1. Bundle number[1 - 31] ... (2)

2. Ts table []>
>
User port
LA-110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
N/A N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1. No
2. Yes
>
Figure 5-11. Assigning Timeslots 4, 5 and 6 to Bundle 2
5. From the updated Bundle menu, define application for bundle 2 (Frame
Relay).
LA-110
1. Bundle number[1 - 31] ... (1)

2. Ts table []>
3. Application > (FR)
>
User port
Figure 5-12. Selecting an Application for Bundle 2
7. From the Connection menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User > FR >
Connection) add ATM connection, which will carry Frame Relay traffic to the
DSLAM:
Connection number 1
DLCI 16
VPI 1
VCI 35.
Now LA-110 is ready to transmit TDM and Frame Relay services over ATM.
LA-110

2. DLCI[16 - 991] ... (16)
3. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
4. VCI[0 - 255] ... (35)
6. FECN (Convert)
9. Cont. Check (on-two-way)
... (N)
>
User port
Figure 5-13. Creating an ATM Connection for Bundle 2
5.3 Transferring Synchronous Data (AAL1) over

ATM
LA-110 can be configured to transmit a synchronous data stream transparently at
the rate of N 64 kbps (see Figure 5-14).
Figure 5-14. Transferring Synchronous Data over ATM

5-8 Transferring Synchronous Data (AAL1) over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5


LA-110

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
>
Configuring Data Port at the Physical Level

To configure the data port at the physical level:
1. From the Serial menu (Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial), set the
physical parameters of the LA-110 data port as follows:
Physical Interface V.35
Baud 256 kbps
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring Synchronous Data (AAL1) over ATM 5-9
LA-110
1. Physical interface > (V35)

2. Baud > (256 kbps)
4. Control Signal (C = Ignore , I = On)
>
Serial port
Figure 5-16. Configuring Data Port at Physical Level
Adding the ATM Connection for AAL1 Service

To add the ATM connection for AAL1 service:
1. From the Connection menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial >
Connection), add ATM connection, which will carry serial data over AAL1 to
the DSLAM:
VPI 1
VCI 36.
Now LA-110 is ready to transmit AAL1 stream over ATM.
LA-110
1. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
2. VCI[0 - 255] ... (36)
3. Rx Byte per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
4. Tx Byte per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
7. Connection Type (Structured)
8. Active (On)
>
Serial port
Figure 5-17. Creating an ATM Connection for AAL1 Stream
5.4 Transferring Full E1 over AAL1

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting full E1 equipment
over an ATM network (Figure 5-18).
5-10 Transferring Full E1 over AAL1 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Figure 5-18. Transmitting Full E1 over AAL1



LA-110

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
>
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring Full E1 over AAL1 5-11

Configuring E1 Port at the Physical Level

To configure E1 port at the physical level:
framing mode to Unframed E1 (G.703) and save the changes.
LA-110
1. Framing > (Unframed E1(G.703))

2. Line Code (HDB3)
>
User port
Adding the ATM Connection for Unframed E1 Service

To add the ATM connection for unframed E1 service:
Connection), add ATM connection, which will carry unframed E1 traffic over
AAL1 to the DSLAM:
VPI 1
VCI 40.
Now LA-110 is ready to transmit unframed E1 over AAL1 over ATM.
LA-110
1. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
2. VCI[0 - 255] ... (40)
3. Rx Byte per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
4. Tx Byte per cell[10 - 47] ... (47)
7. Connection Type (Structured (signal transport))
8. Active (On)
>
User port
Figure 5-21. Creating an ATM Connection for Unframed E1 over AAL1
5-12 Transferring Full E1 over AAL1 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

5.5 Transferring PRI over AAL2 LES

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting PRI over AAL2
(Figure 5-22).
Figure 5-22. Transmitting PRI over AAL2


Selecting the Adaptation Layer and Application Identifier

To select the adaptation layer and application identifier:
1. From the General Parameters menu (Configuration > System > General
Parameters), set the Application Identifier to DSS1 & PRI (PRI only, with
ELCP).
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring PRI over AAL2 LES 5-13

LA-110
CPS parameters > (Single CPS, No overlap)

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
7. LES default VPI[0 - 31] (1)
8. LES default VCI[0 - 255] ...(32)
9. Application Identifier (DSS1 & PRI (PRI only, with ELCP))
... (N)
>
Figure 5-23. Selecting Adaptation Layer and Application Modifier
Configuring PRI at the Logical Level

To configure PRI at the logical level:
1. From the User menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > User), configure the
following:
Default VPI 1
Default VCI 32.
LA-110
1. Voice bandwidth[0 - 2312] ... (512)

2. Default VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
3. Default VCI[0 - 255] ... (32)
4. PRI []>
>
User port
Figure 5-24. Configuring PRI at the Logical Level
2. From the User menu, select PRI and assign timeslots 18 to carry the PRI
traffic.
LA-110 automatically allocates required voice bandwidth, add ATM
connection and performs reboot.
5-14 Transferring PRI over AAL2 LES LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110
Connection B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
Allocation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
Connection B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
Allocation No No No No N/A No No No No No No
Connection B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31
Allocation No No No No No No No No No
1. No
2. Yes
>
Figure 5-25. Assigning Timeslots to PRI Service
5.6 Transferring E1 UNI over SHDSL

In this application LA-110 is used in a cellular backhauling application,
transmitting E1 UNI traffic from Node B over SHDSL line.
Figure 5-26. E1 UNI over SHDSL Application


LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring E1 UNI over SHDSL 5-15

Configuring E1 Port for Transparent UNI Application

To configure E1 port transparent UNI application:
1. From the E1-User menu (Configuration > Physical Layer > E1-User), set the
framing mode to E1 UNI (Not Multi-frame) for E1 UNI operation without
multiframe support or to E1 UNI (Multi-frame) for E1 UNI operation with
multiframe support.
Now LA-110 is ready to transparently transmit E1 UNI stream over ATM.
LA-110
1. Framing > (E1 UNI (Not Multi-frame))
2. Line Code (HDB3)
5. Idle Code[0 - ff] ...(7E)
6. CRC-4 (On)
>
User port
5.7 Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Bridging

Mode)
LA-110 can be used for connecting LANs over an ATM network. Figure 5-28
illustrates a typical bridging application, where two remote LANs operate as a
virtual LAN 2. In addition, ToS-based traffic classification and WFQ-based rate
limitation are implemented on the SHDSL link of one of the LA-110 units.
Figure 5-28. Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Bridging Mode)
5-16 Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Bridging Mode) LA-110 Ver. 3.5


Configuring the QoS

To configure the QoS:
Parameters), configure the following:
QoS Classification ToS
Mapping Mechanism WFQ.
LA-110

2. Jitter buffer[1 - 20] ...(10)
8. QoS Classification > (TOS)
9. Mapping Mechanism (WFQ)
>
Figure 5-29. Selecting QoS Classification and Mapping Mechanism
3. Make sure that the LAN interface of LA-110 is in the Bridge mode
(Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Port Application).
4. From the IF Interface (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration),
add ATM connection to the LAN interface 1 by defining its VPI and VCI, (for
example, VPI 1, VCI 40).
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Bridging Mode) 5-17
LA-110

2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (40)
6. Ethernet Pause Trigger (Disable)
8. PCR[79 - 10868] (10868)
9. Active (On)
>
Figure 5-30. Adding ATM Connection for LAN Interface
6. From the QoS menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > QoS), select QoS
1.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>QoS
1. QoS [1 - 8] ... (1)

2. Mapping >
3. Traffic Classes >
>
Figure 5-31. Selecting QoS Rule 1
7. From the Mapping menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > QoS >
Mapping), map ToS tag values to the traffic classes of the QoS 1. This is done
by selecting a tag value (015) and mapping it to a traffic class (02). For
example, in Figure 5-32 ToS tag 1 is mapped to traffic class 0.
Note
Be default all tag values are mapped to traffic class 0.
You can always check the current mapping by selecting Tag Value Table from
the same menu.
LA-110
1. Tag Value[0 - 15] ... (1)

>
Figure 5-32. Mapping ToS Values to Traffic Classes
9. From the Traffic Classes menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > QoS >
Traffic Classes), bind all three traffic classes it to interface 1.
10. From the Traffic Classes menu, the apply a weight traffic limitation to each
traffic class in the following manner:
Traffic class 0 25
Traffic class 1 15
Traffic class 2 10.
25, 15 and 10 represent a weight of the total ATM bandwidth to be used
by respective traffic class.
LA-110
1. Traffic Class [0 - 2] ... (0)

3. Weight[0 - 50] ... (25)
>
Figure 5-33. Binding Traffic Classes to an Interfaces and Assigning their Weights
Configuring the Bridge Parameters

This section explains how to configure bridge parameters in the VLAN-aware
mode.
To configure the bridge ports:

1. From the Bridge Parameters menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Bridge Parameters), select Bridge Port.
2. From the Bridge Port menu, do the following:
1. Select bridge port 1 and bind it to the LAN interface
2. Select bridge port 2 and bind it QoS 1.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Bridging Mode) 5-19

Now bridge port 1 is bound to the LAN interface and bridge port 2 to
the WAN 1 interface via QoS 1.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>Bridge Port>Bind
1. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (1)

2. PVID/Stacking VID[1 - 4094] ... (1)
3. Accept frame type (Admit All)
4. Ingress filtering (Disable)
5. Egress Tag Handling > (None)
6. Ingress Tag Handling > (None)
7. Bind > (LAN)
>
Figure 5-34. Configuring Bridge Port 1
To configure VLANs:
1. From the Bridge Parameters menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Bridge Parameters), set the VLAN mode to Aware.
3. From the Bridge Parameters menu, select VLAN Member.
4. From the VLAN Member menu, configure the bridge port 1 as follows:
1. Set index to 1
4. Set bridge port to 1
5. Set VID to 2.
5. From the VLAN Member menu, configure the bridge port 2 as follows:
1. Set index to 2
6. Set bridge port to 2
7. Set VID to 2.
Now both bridge ports are configured as VLAN 2 members.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Parameters>VLAN Member
1. Index[1 - 100] ... (1)

2. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (1)
3. VID[1 - 4094] ... (2)
>
Figure 5-35. Defining Port 1 as VLAN 2 Member
5.8 Providing Connection to an IP Network over

ATM (Routing Mode)
LA-110 can be used for routing applications (see Figure 5-28). The unit also
serves as a DHCP server and provides firewall protection, allowing VPN traffic.
Figure 5-36. Connecting Remote LANs over ATM (Routing Mode)


LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Providing Connection to an IP Network over ATM (Routing Mode) 5-21
Configuring the IP Interfaces

To configure the IP interfaces:
1. From the LAN menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN), select the Port
Application and set it to the router mode.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN
1. Port Application (Router)

2. IF Configuration >
>
LAN port
Figure 5-37. Setting Application Mode to Router
3. From the LAN menu, select IF Interface.

The IF Configuration menu is displayed.
4. From the IF Configuration menu, define one LAN interface by selecting its IP
address and IP mask.
LAN 1 IP 172.17.15.2
LAN 1 IP mask 255.255.255.0
6. From the IF Configuration menu, define host interface:
Host IP 172.17.15.1
Host IP mask 255.255.255.252
8. From the IF Configuration menu, define one WAN interface:
WAN 1 IP 0.0.0.0
WAN 1 IP mask 0.0.0.0
VPI 1
VCI 41
5-22 Providing Connection to an IP Network over ATM (Routing Mode) LA-110 Ver. 3.5
LA-110

2. IP Address ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Mask ... (0.0.0.0)
4. RIP > (None)
5. Encapsulation (RFC 1483)
6. VPI[0 - 31] ... (1)
7. VCI[0 - 255] ... (41)
... (N)
>
Figure 5-38. Adding WAN1 Interface to Router
Configuring the Default Gateway

The WAN interface has to be configured to serve as a default gateway.
To configure the default gateway:

1. From the Default Gateway menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN >
Router Parameters > Default Gateway), set the WAN 1 interface to be the
default gateway and activate it.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Default Gateway
1. Interface > (WAN 1)

2. Active (Enable)
>
Figure 5-39. Defining WAN1 Interface as a Default Gateway
Configuring the DHCP Server

To configure the DHCP server:
Router Parameters), enable DHCP server.
Additional parameter DHCP Pools appears in the Router Parameters
menu.
2. From the DHCP Pools menu, configure the pool of IP addresses to be

assigned by LA-110 to the IP hosts connected to its LAN port:
Pool Number 1
Lowest IP 172.17.15.20
Highest IP 172.17.15.254
Mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 172.17.15.2.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>DHCP Pool
1. Pool Number[1 - 10] ... (1)

2. Lowest IP ... (172.17.15.20)
3. Highest IP ... (172.17.15.254)
4. Mask ... (255.255.255.0)
5. Default Gateway ... (172.17.15.2)
6. Primary DNS ... (199.18.51.22)
7. Secondary DNS ... (198.142.112.11)
8. Lease Time[0 - 1080] ... (600)
... (N)
>
Figure 5-40. Adding DHCP Pool 1
Configuring the Firewall

This section explains how to set up an inbound firewall on the WAN 1 interface of
LA-110. The firewall blocks all incoming traffic, except for VPN application. In
order to allow the VPN traffic it is necessary to define two firewall rules allowing
GRE protocol and opening TCP port 1723.
To add the firewall:

Router Parameters), select Firewall.
The Firewall menu is displayed.
2. From the Firewall menu, do the following:
1. Select the firewall location WAN 1
2. Select the firewall direction Inbound
3. Give a name to the firewall WAN1
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Firewall
1. IP Interface > (WAN 1)

2. Direction (Inbound)
3. FTP-Option (Enable)
4. Printing (Disable)
5. Name (WAN1)
6. Rules >
>
Figure 5-41. Adding the Firewall
To add the firewall rules:

1. From the Firewall menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Router
Parameters > Firewall), select Rules.
The Rules menu is displayed.
2. From the Rules menu, do the following:
1. Set the index of the first rule 1
2. Leave the source low and high IPs unchanged.
3. Set the destination low and high IPs 172.17.15.21 (VPN server IP
address)
4. Select IP protocol Other
5. Select protocol number 47 (GRE)
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>LAN>Router Parameters>Firewall>Rules
1. Index[1 - 30] ... (1)

2. Source IP-Low ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Source IP-High ... (255.255.255.255)
4. Dest IP-Low ... (172.17.15.21)
5. Dest IP-High ... (172.17.15.21)
6. IP Protocol > (Other)
7. Protocol Number[1 - 255] ... (47)
>
Figure 5-42. Setting the Firewall Rule 1 (GRE)
3. Repeat the procedure for the second rule:

1. Index 2
2. Source IP-Low 0.0.0.0
3. Source IP-High 255.255.255.255
4. Dest IP-Low 172.17.15.21 (VPN server IP address)
5. Dest IP-High 172.17.15.21 (VPN server IP address)
6. IP protocol TCP
7. Source Port-Low 0
8. Source Port-High 65535
9. Dest Port-Low 1723 (TCP port used by VPN)
10. Dest Port-High 1723 (TCP port used by VPN)
LA-110
1. Index[1 - 30] ... (2)

2. Source IP-Low ... (0.0.0.0)
3. Source IP-High ... (255.255.255.255)
4. Dest IP-Low ... (172.17.15.21)
5. Dest IP-High ... (172.17.15.21)
6. IP Protocol > (TCP)
7. Source Port-Low[0 - 65535] ... (0)
8. Source Port-High[0 - 65535] ... (65535)
...N
>
Figure 5-43. Setting the Firewall Rule 2 (TCP), Page 1
LA-110
...P
9. Dest Port-Low[0 - 65535] ... (1723)
10. Dest Port-High[0 - 65535] ... (1723)
...N
>
Figure 5-44. Setting the Firewall Rule 2 (TCP), Page 2
5.9 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over

SHDSL IMA Link
LA-110 equipped with 4 2-wire SHDSL IMA provides network data rates of up to
9216 kbps. In this application LA-110 is used to transfer E1 and synchronous
data stream (X.21) over SHDSL IMA link (see Figure 5-14).
Figure 5-45. Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over SHDSL IMA Link


Note
For devices with 4 2-wire SHDSL IMA interface, the physical layer parameters
are automatically applied to all available SHDSL links.
Configuring IMA Interface

In most cases default settings of the IMA group and IMA link parameters are
sufficient for establishing an operational connection to DSLAM.
Follow these steps to reconfigure IMA SHDSL WAN interface:
1. Define and configure the IMA group
2. Relate SHDSL links to an IMA group.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over SHDSL IMA Link 5-27
To define and configure the IMA group:

Display the IMA Group menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA > IMA
Group), and define the following:
Status Activated
Min number of Tx Links 1
Min number of Rx Links 1
Group ID 1
Blocking Unblocked.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>IMA Group
Group number[1 - 4] ... (1)
1. Status (Activated)
2. Min number of Tx Links[1 - 4] ... (1)
3. Min number of Rx Links[1 - 4] ... (1)
4. Group Id[0 - 255] ... (1)
5. Group symmetry > (Symm. Config & Opertaion)
6. Tx frame length > (128)
7. Max differential delay (ms)[25 -... (25)
8. Blocking (Unblocked)
9. IMA version > (1.1)
10. Common Tx clock source > (Group clock (Automatic))
>
Figure 5-46. Defining and Configuring IMA Group
To configure the IMA links:

Display the IMA link menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA > IMA
Link) and define the following:
IMA Link 1
Group Number 1
Link Direction Both
Link Blocking Unblocked.
5-28 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over SHDSL IMA Link LA-110 Ver. 3.5
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>IMA Link
1. IMA Link[1 - 4] ... (1)

2. Group number > (1)
3. Link direction > (Both)
4. Link blocking (Unblocked)
>
Figure 5-47. Configuring IMA Links
Configuring E1 Port
Refer to the Transferring Full E1 over AAL1 section above for instruction on how
to configure the E1 port at the physical and logical layers.
Configuring Data Port

Refer to the Transferring Synchronous Data (AAL1) over ATM section above for
instruction on how to configure the data port at the physical and logical layers.
5.10 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over

Packet Switched Network
LA-110 can be configured to operate in multiservice over a PSN mode. In this
application LA-110 is used to transfer E1 and synchronous data stream (X.21)
over an MPLS network (see Figure 5-14).
Figure 5-48. Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over a Packet Switched Network
Configuration Procedure Summary

Follow these steps in order to configure LA-110 to a typical multiservice over PSN
application:
1. Select system clock.
2. Configure SHDSL network interface.
3. Define operation mode.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over Packet Switched Network 5-29
4. Configure LA-110 host.

5. Create an E1 bundle by selecting correct framing mode, adding timeslots and
activating connection.
6. Configure the user serial interface by specifying its application, physical
interface, baud rate and connection.
7. Add a bridge port and bind it to a bridge WAN interface.
8. Define ingress and egress MPLS tunnels and connect them to the bridge
interface.
9. Create two pseudowire connections (PWs), bind the E1 bundle and serial port
connection to them.
10. Connect the PWs to the ingress and egress MPLS tunnels.


Selecting the Operation Mode

Parameters), set the following
Operation Mode Multi service over PSN
LA-110
3. Operation Mode > (Multi service over PSN)
>
Figure 5-49. Selecting Operation Mode and PW Transport Layer
5-30 Transferring E1 and Synchronous Data over Packet Switched Network LA-110 Ver. 3.5
Configuring the Host

To configure the host:
From the host menu (Configuration > System > Management > Host),
configure the IP address and mask of the LA-110 host:
IP Address 192.168.10.1
IP Mask 255.255.255.0
LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>Host
1. IP Address ... (192.168.10.1)

2. IP Mask ... (255.255.255.0)
4. Encapsulation >
5. Management Access > (BOTH)
>
Figure 5-50. Configuring LA-110 Host
Configuring E1 Service
The LA-110 E1 interface has to be configured at the physical layer (selecting
framing mode) and at the logical layer (assigning timeslots to a bundle and
activating the connection).
Configuring E1 Interface at the Physical Level

framing mode to Multi-frame (G.732S) and save the changes.
LA-110
1. Framing > (multi-frame (G.732S))

2. Line Code (HDB3)
>
User port
Configuring Bundle for TDM Service
To configure bundle 1 for TDM service:

bundle 1 and assign timeslots 1, 2, 3 and 4 to it via the TS Table
(Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle > Ts Table).
LA-110
1. Bundle number[1 - 31] ... (1)

2. Ts table []>
>
User port
LA-110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1. No
2. Yes
>
Figure 5-53. Assigning Timeslots 1, 2, 3 and 4 to Bundle 1
Configuring Data Port

The following parameters have to be set for the LA-110 serial data interface:
1. Application type (logical layer)
2. Physical interface and baud rate (physical layer)
3. Connection (logical layer).
Selecting the Serial Port Application
To select the serial port application:

1. From the Application menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial >
Application), set the Port Application to FRoPSN.
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer> Serial> Application
1. Port Application > (FRoPSN)

2. Protocol > (None)
>
Figure 5-54. Selecting the Serial Port Application
Configuring Data Serial Port at the Physical Layer
To configure the data port at the physical level:

1. From the Serial menu (Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial), set the
physical parameters of the LA-110 data port as follows:
Physical Interface X.21
Baud 256 kbps
LA-110
1. Physical interface > (X21)

2. Baud > (256 kbps)
4. Control Signal (C = Ignore , I = On)
>
Serial port
Figure 5-55. Configuring Data Port at Physical Level
Configuring the Serial Port Connection
To configure the serial port connection:

Connection), configure the following:
Connection Number 1
DLCI 17
LA-110
1. Connection Number [1 - 8] (1)

2. DLCI [19 - 991] (17)
>
Figure 5-56. Configuring the Serial Port Connection
Configuring Bridge Interfaces

An interface must be added to the LA-110 bridge. The interface has to be bound
to one of the bridge WAN ports in order to create connection to a peer device,
such is DSLAM.
Adding Bridge Interface
To add a bridge interface:

1. From the IF Configuration menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF
Configuration > IF Configuration), do the following:
a. Select Interface Number and assign number 1 to a new bridge interface.
b. Define the interface VPI as 2.
c. Define the interface VCI as 20.
LA-110

2. VPI[0 - 31] ... (2)
3. VCI[0 - 255] ... (20)
4. Cont. Check > (off-two-way)
8. PCR[79 - 10868] (10868)
9. Active (On)
>
Figure 5-57. Adding a Bridge Interface
2. From the Bridge Port menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Bridge
Parameters > Bridge Port), select bridge port 2 and bind it to bridge interface
1.
LA-110
1. Bridge Port[1 - 9] ... (2)

>
Figure 5-58. Binding Bridge Port 2 to Interface 1
Configuring MPLS Parameters

PW-to-bridge-port connections are made via ingress and egress MPLS tunnels.
To define an ingress MPLS tunnel:

From the Ingress Tunnel menu (Configuration > Application > MPLS > Tunnel
LSP > Ingress Tunnel), configure the following:
Index 1
Interface Bridge Port 2
Administrative Status Up
1st Label (Outer) 101
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>MPLS>Tunnel LSP>Ingress Tunnel
1. Index[1 - 8] ... (1)
2. Name ... (tunnel-in1)
>
Figure 5-59. Creating Ingress MPLS Tunnel
To define an egress MPLS tunnel:

From the Egress Tunnel menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > MPLS > Tunnel
LSP > Egress Tunnel), configure the following:
Index 1
Interface Bridge Port 2
Administrative Status Up
1st Label (Outer) 202
LA-110
Configuration>Logical Layer>MPLS>Tunnel LSP>Egress Tunnel
1. Index[1 - 8] ... (1)
2. Name ... (tunnel-out1)
>
Figure 5-60. Creating Egress MPLS Tunnel
Creating Pseudowire Connections

E1 and serial data flows are carried over the PSN via pseudowire (PW)
connections.
To create a pseudowire connection for E1 bundle:

PSN > Quick Setup), configure the following:
PW Number 1
PW Type CESoPSN
PSN Type MPLS
Peer Address 194.168.10.1
In PW Label 10
Out PW Label 11
Attachment Circuit 1.
LA-110
1. PW Number[1 - 8] ... (1)
2. PW Name ... (PW-1)
3. PW Type > (CESoPSN)
5. Peer Address ... (194.168.10.1)
6. In PW Label ... (10)
8. Ingress Tunnel Index > (1)
9. Egress Tunnel Index > (1)
10. EXP Bits[0 - 7] ... (0)
11. Jitter Buffer (MSec)[2 - 20] ... (2)
13. VLAN ID[1 - 4095] ... (1)
14. VLAN Priority[0 - 7] ... (0)
>
D - Delete
Figure 5-61. Creating Pseudowire Connection for E1 Bundle
To create a pseudowire connection for serial data port stream:

PSN >Quick Setup), configure the following:
PW Number 2
PW Type FRoPSN
PSN Type MPLS
Peer Address 194.168.10.1
In PW Label 12
Out PW Label 13
Attachment Circuit Serial Port.
LA-110
1. PW Number[1 - 8] ... (2)
2. PW Name ... (PW-2)
3. PW Type > (FRoPSN)
5. Peer Address ... (194.168.10.1)
6. Next Hop ... (0.0.0.0)
7. In PW Label ... (12)
9. Ingress Tunnel Index > (1)
10. Egress Tunnel Index > (1)
11. EXP Bits[0 - 7] ... (0)
13. VLAN ID[1 - 4095] ... (1)
14. VLAN Priority[0 - 7] ... (0)
15. Attachment Circuit > (Serial Port)
>
D - Delete
Figure 5-62. Creating Pseudowire Connection for Serial Data Port Stream
Chapter 6
Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the LA-110 performance monitoring, diagnostic tools and
provides troubleshooting instructions.
6.1 Monitoring the LA-110 Performance

The LA-110 performance can be monitored at the following layers:
System
Physical
Logical.
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the System Layer

At the system level LA-110 provides the following information:
Displaying and clearing the alarm log
Displaying and clearing the firewall log
Clearing performance monitoring registers.
The system monitoring information is accessed via the System menu.
LA-110
Monitoring>System
1. Alarm Log []
2. Clear Alarm Log
3. Firewall Log
4. Clear Firewall Log
5. Clear PM
>
Figure 6-1. System Monitoring Menu
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Monitoring the LA-110 Performance 6-1

Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Installation and Operation Manual
Displaying the Alarm Log

To display the alarm log:
From the System menu (Monitoring > System), select Alarm Log.
The LA-110 alarm log is displayed. Refer to Appendix B for the complete
list of alarms generated by LA-110.
LA-110
Monitoring>System>Alarm Log
Alarm Log
2000-10-4 03:53:54 No.47 LAN PORT LINK DOWN ON
2000-10-4 03:53:54 No.40 NETWORK ATM LOSS OF CELL DELINEATION FAI ON
2000-10-4 03:53:54 No.24 USER E1 LOCAL SYNC LOSS ON
2000-10-4 03:53:54 No.41 ALARM BUFFER CLEAR
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; @-debug ?-help
Figure 6-2. Alarm Log Screen

The contents of the alarm buffer is displayed as a table with five columns:
Date and time of occurrence
Alarm number
Alarm text string (description)
Alarm status.
Note
The alarm log can be set to a remote server via TFTP from the SW & File Transfer
menu.
Clearing the Alarm Log

To clear the alarm log:
From the System menu, select Clear Alarm Log.
The alarm history buffer information is cleared.
Displaying the Firewall Log

Displays the firewall log. The log summarizes all unauthorized attempts to access
the unit via LAN or WAN interfaces that were prevented by the firewall.
From the System menu, select Firewall Log.
The Firewall Log screen is displayed.
Note
The firewall log reports can be disabled by setting the Printing Option in the
Firewall menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Router Parameters >
Firewall) to Disable.
6-2 Monitoring the LA-110 Performance LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
The following parameters are presented in the firewall log:

Date of the event
Time of the event
Interface, where the access attempt occurred (LAN, WAN 18)
Destination IP IP of the LAN or WAN interface
Source IP IP address from where the access attempt originated
Protocol Protocol identification according to the header of IP frame (ICMP,
UDP etc)
Additional Data Specifies protocol dependent information:
For ICMP (1), the field contains the ICMP Message Type.
For TCP (6) or UDP (17), the field contains the Destination Port and the
Source Port (in the given order).
If the packet is an IP Fragment and the protocol information is not
available the field contains the IP identification field.
In any other case it is empty (0).
The firewall log can be sent to the TFTP server. Alternatively, it can be forwarded
to a management station using the HTTP protocol, when the ConfiguRAD
management session is in progress.
Note The firewall log can be set to a remote server via TFTP from the SW & File
Transfer menu.
Clearing the Firewall Log

Clears the firewall log.
To clear the firewall log:
From the System menu, select Clear Firewall Log.
The firewall log is cleared.
Clearing the Performance Monitoring

Resets all the performance monitoring counters to 0, and thus clearing all the
performance monitoring data stored by LA-110.
Clearing all the performance monitoring statistic data simultaneously ensures that
the collection of new statistics is started simultaneously for all the counters, and
should be used to ensure that all the collected data is consistent.
To clear the performance monitoring data:
From the System menu, select Clear PM.
The performance monitoring counters are reset to 0.

Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the Physical Layer

The LA-110 management software allows you to display the full performance
monitoring statistics and status information for the physical layer of the network,
user, serial and LAN interfaces.
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the

Network Port
Displays the full performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of the
ATM network interface, and status information for the network interface. The
displayed information depends on the network interface: SHDSL (single or IMA),
ADSL or E1.
The performance statistics are continuously collected while the LA-110 operates.
The performance statistics can be cleared (reset to 0) and are also cleared when
the LA-110 is reset or powered up.
To display the general monitoring information for the network interface:
From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer), select Network.
The Network screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Network
Current Date ... (OCT. 04. 2000)
Current Time ... (07:14:51)
Seconds ... (56)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (0)
Framer Sync Status ... (Link A: No Sync Link B: No Sync)
DSP version ... (1)
Op state ... (Link A: IDLE Link B: IDLE)
Globespan Software Version ... (R2.3.1)
Bit rate ... (Link A: 0 Link B: 0)
SNR ... (Link A: 0 Link B: 0)
Loop Attenuation (db) ... (Link A: 0.0 Link B: 0.0)
Transmit Power ... (Link A: 0.0 Link B: 0.0)
1. Current (4W) []
2. Interval (4W) []
>
Figure 6-3. Physical Layer Network Screen (SHDSL Interface)

LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Network
Current Date ... (OCT. 04. 2000)
Seconds ... (56)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (0)
Framer Sync Status ... (Link A: No Sync Link B: No Sync)
DSP version ... (1)
Op state ... (Link A: IDLE)
Bit Rate Downstream ... (1.5 Mbps)
Bit Rate Upstream ... (128 kbps)
Latency Downstream ... (Interleaved)
Latency Upstream ... (Interleaved)
1. Current []
2. Interval []
>
Figure 6-4. Physical Layer Network Screen (ADSL Interface)

Table 6-1. Parameters for SHDSL Network Interface (Physical Layer)
Parameter Function
Framer Sync Status Current synchronization status of the SHDSL framer

Op State Current operational status of the SHDSL link
DSP Version Version of the DSP processing the signals transmitted and received by the SHDSL network
interface
Globespan Software Software version controlling the operation of the SHDSL network interface
Version
Bit Rate Current synchronization rate (useful rate + 8 kbps for the EOC
SNR Current signal/noise margin, in dB
Loop Attenuation Current loop attenuation threshold, in dB
Transmit Power Current transmit power, in dBm

Table 6-2. General Monitoring Parameters for ADSL Network Interface (Physical Layer)
Parameter Function
Op State Current operational status of the ADSL link

Bit Rate Data rate at which the downstream path of the ADSL interface synchronized
Downstream
Bit Rate Upstream Data rate at which the upstream path of the ADSL interface synchronized
Latency Latency mode (interleaved or fast) of the downstream path of the ADSL interface
Downstream
Latency Upstream latency mode (interleaved or fast) of the upstream path of the ADSL interface
To display the current monitoring statistics for the network interface:

From the Network menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Network), select
Current (2/4W).
The Current screen is displayed.
Note The physical layer monitoring statistics of the IMA interface are similar to those
of the 2-wire SHDSL interface. Use the following path to display them: Monitoring
> Physical Layer > IMA > Interface parameters.
The displayed status information and performance statistics parameters are

described in Table 6-4. Each statistic parameter is displayed for three intervals:
Current the statistics collected during the last second.
15 min the statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval.
24 hours the statistics collected during the current 24-hour period.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Network>Current (4W)
CRC A/B Err Sec A/B Severely Err Sec A/B LOSW Sec A/B Unavailable
Sec A/B
Current 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
15min 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
24hours 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
>
Figure 6-5. Physical Layer Network Current (4W) Screen (SHDSL)
Table 6-3. Current Monitoring Parameters for the SHDSL Network Interface (Physical Layer)
Parameter Function
CRC Number of CRC error events

Err Sec Number of errored seconds (an errored second is a second in which one or more CRC
(Cyclic Redundancy Check) error events have been detected

Parameter Function
Severely Err Sec Number of severely errored seconds accumulated for each link (a severely errored second is
a second in which 832 or more CRC error events occurred)
LOSW Err Number of seconds with loss of sync word events accumulated for each link
Unavailable Sec Number of unavailable seconds (an unavailable second is a second in which a failed signal
condition occurred)
To display the interval monitoring statistics for the network interface:

From the Network menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Network), select
Interval.
The Interval screen is displayed.
Each interval line in this section displays data for one of the previous 15-minute
intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the most recent interval
(interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute interval).
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Network>Current
Interleave Fast Errored frames Loss of signal defects
Current 0 0 0 0
15min 0 0 0 0
24hours 0 0 0 0
>
Figure 6-6. Physical Layer Network Current Screen (ADSL)
Table 6-4. Current Monitoring Parameters for the ADSL Network Interface (Physical Layer)
Parameter Function
Interleave Total number of frames handled in the interleaved mode

Fast Total number of frames handled in the fast (non-interleaved) mode
Errored Frames Total number of errored frames
Loss of Signal Total number of loss of receive signal events
Defects
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the User

Port
Performance monitoring statistics parameters can be displayed for the physical
layer of the user port installed in LA-110 (ISDN, FXS, E1 or T1).
The information is continuously collected while the LA-110 operates. The
information can be cleared or is automatically cleared when the LA-110 is reset
or powered up.
When displaying performance monitoring statistics for the user port, you can
display full user port performance monitoring parameters and status information

for an E1 or T1 user port, ISDN and FXS ports. For ISDN and FXS ports, you must
also select the desired user port index, 1 to 4.
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the E1 or T1

Port
To display the general monitoring information for the E1 or T1 user interface:
From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer), select User E1 or
User T1.
The User E1 or User T1 screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>User E1
Current Date ... (JUN. 04. 2005)
Seconds ... (745)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (3)
1. Current []
2. Interval []
>
Figure 6-7. Physical Layer User E1 Screen
Table 6-5. General Monitoring Parameters for E1 or T1 User Interface (Physical Layer)
Current Date Current date
Current Time Current time
Seconds The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds. The
range is 1 to 900 seconds
Intervals The number of intervals (up 96 intervals) for which performance monitoring information
can be displayed
To display the current monitoring statistics for the E1 or T1 user interface:

From the User E1 or User T1 menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > User E1 or
User T1), select Current.

LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>User E1>Current
ES UAS SES BES LOFC CSS
Current 0 1 1 0 0 0
15min 33 339 349 0 0 33
24hours 413 4450 4500 0 1 255
>
Figure 6-8. Physical Layer User E1 or T1 Current Screen
Table 6-6. Current Monitoring Parameters for E1 or T1 User Interface (Physical Layer)
ES Number of errored seconds (ES) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.

An errored second is any second containing one or more CRC error events, or one or more
OOF events, or one or more controlled slip events
UAS Number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.

An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal state exists. A failed signal
state is declared when 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) occur, and is cleared
after 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES
SES Number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
A SES is a second with 320 or more CRC error events, or one or more OOF events.
BES Number of bursty errored seconds (BES) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
A BES is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error events.
LOFC DCount of loss-of-frame events (LOFC) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
CSS Number of controlled slip seconds (CSS) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events.
To display the interval monitoring statistics for the E1 or T1 user interface:

From the User E1 or User T1 menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > User E1 or
User T1), select Interval.
Each interval line in the section following the 24 hours line displays data for one
of the previous 15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with
the most recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent complete
15-minute interval).
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the ISDN Ports

To display the physical layer statistics for the ISDN ports:
1. From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer), select User ISDN.
The User ISDN menu is displayed.

2. From the User ISDN menu, select an ISDN port (14).

3. Select D channel HDLC & SSted statistics.
The D channel HDLC & SSted statistics screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User ISDN>D channel HDLC & SSted statistics
HDLC Tx frames ... (0)
HDLC Rx frames ... (0)
HDLC Rx errors ... (0)
SSted Tx packets ... (0)
SSted Rx packets ... (0)
SSted Rx CRC errors ... (0)
SSted Rx Len errors ... (0)
SSted Rx errors ... (0)
Figure 6-9. D Channel HDLC & SSted Statistics User ISDN Screen
Table 6-7. Statistic Parameters for ISDN User Interface (Physical Layer)
HDLC Tx frames Total number of HDLC frames received by the D channel of the selected port
HDLC Rx frames Total number of HDLC frames transmitted by the D channel of the selected port
HDLC Rx errors Total number of HDLC frames received by the D channel of the selected port in which
errors have been detected
SSted Tx packets Total number of packets transmitted by the SSTED (Service Specific Transmission Error
Detection) sublayer, used to carry the LES embedded operations channel (eoc) serving
the connections of the selected port
SSted Rx packets Total number of packets received by the SSTED (Service Specific Transmission Error
Detection) sublayer, used to carry the LES embedded operations channel (eoc) serving
the connections of the selected port
SSted Rx CRC Total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of CRC errors detected at the
errors SSTED sublayer
SSted Rx Len Total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of length errors detected at the
errors SSTED sublayer
SSted Rx errors Total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of other types of errors detected at
the SSTED sublayer
4. Select AAL2 statistics.

The AAL2 statistics screen is displayed.

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User ISDN>AAL2 statistics
CID Tx Cells Rx Cells

D channel 32 0 0
B1 channel 160 0 0
B2 channel 161 0 0
->>
Figure 6-10. AAL2 Statistics User ISDN Screen
Table 6-8. AAL2 Statistic Parameters for ISDN User Interface
CID D Channel CID assigned to the D channel of the selected port
CID B1 Channel CID assigned to the B1 channel of the selected port
CID B2 Channel CID assigned to the B2 channel of the selected port
Tx Cells Total number of ATM cells transmitted through the connection serving the
corresponding port
Rx Cells Total number of ATM cells received through the connection serving the corresponding
port
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the FXS Ports

To display the physical layer statistics for the FXS ports:
From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer), select User FXS.
The User FXS screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>User FXS
Monitoring Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
Status ON HOOK ON HOOK ON HOOK ON HOOK

ELCP Status BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
Tx Cells 0 0 0 0
Rx Cells 0 0 0 0
>
Figure 6-11. Physical Layer User FXS Screen

Table 6-9. Statistic Parameters for FXS User Interface (Physical Layer)
Status Corresponding port status (on-hook or off-hook)
ELCP Status ELCP status of the corresponding port: Block or Unblock
Tx Cells Displays the total number of ATM cells transmitted through the connection serving the
corresponding port
Rx Cells Displays the total number of ATM cells received through the connection serving the
corresponding port
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the LAN

Port
Display the performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of the LA-110
LAN port. The displayed information does not depend on the application mode of
the LAN port.
The performance statistics are continuously accumulated while the LA-110
operates. The performance statistics can be cleared (reset to 0) and the statistics
are also cleared when the LA-110 is reset or powered up.
To display the general monitoring information for the physical layer of the LAN
port:
From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer), select LAN.
The LAN screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>LAN
Seconds ... (145)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (9)
1. Current []
2. Interval []
>
Figure 6-12. Physical Layer LAN Screen

Table 6-10. General Monitoring Parameters for LAN Interface (Physical Layer)

can be displayed
To display the current monitoring statistics for the LAN interface:

From the LAN menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > LAN), select Current.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>LAN>Current
Tx Total Frames Rx Total Frames Tx discarded Frames
Current 0 0 0
15min 0 0 0
24hours 0 0 0
Rx discarded Frames
Current 0
15min 0
24hours 0
>
Figure 6-13. Physical Layer LAN Current Screen
Table 6-11. Current Monitoring Parameters LAN Interface (Physical Layer)
Tx Total Frames Total number of transmitted frames
Rx Total Frames Total number of received frames
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of frames discarded during processing by the receive path
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of frames discarded during processing by the transmit path

To display the interval monitoring statistics for the LAN interface:

From the LAN menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > LAN), select Interval.
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the Data

Port
Display performance monitoring statistics for the LA-110 data port.
The information displayed on the screen depends on the data port application
mode: Frame Relay or AAL1 stream.
The performance statistics are continuously accumulated while the LA-110
operates. They can be cleared (reset to 0) and the statistics are also cleared
when the LA-110 is reset or powered up.
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the Data Port

in the AAL1 Mode
To display the general monitoring information for the physical layer of the data
port in the AAL1 mode:
From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Data AAL1),
select Data AAL1.
The Data AAL1 screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Data AAL1
Seconds ... (145)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (9)
1. Current []
2. Interval []
3. Signal Status >
>
Figure 6-14. Physical Layer Data AAL1 Screen

Table 6-12. General Monitoring Parameters for the Data Interface in the AAL1 Mode (Physical
Layer)
can be displayed
To display the current monitoring statistics for the data AAL1 interface:
From the Data AAL1 menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Data AAL1), select
Current.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Data AAL1>Current
Tx Total K bytes Rx Total K byte
Current 0 0
15min 0 0
24hours 0 0
>
Figure 6-15. Physical Layer Data AAL1 Current Screen
Table 6-13. Current Monitoring Parameters for the Data Interface in the AAL1 Mode (Physical
Layer)
Tx Total K bytes The total amount of payload transmitted by the data port, expressed in kilobytes
Rx Total K bytes The total amount of payload received by the data port, expressed in kilobytes.

To display the interval monitoring statistics for the data AAL1 interface:
Interval.
To display the state of the control signal and data loopback:
Signal Status.
The Signal Status screen is displayed.
I-Circuit state of the RTS signal received from the ATM network and sent
to the local DTE.
I-Circuit state of the DCD signal received from the local DTE and sent to
the ATM network.
Loop data loopback state.
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the Data Port

in the Frame Relay Mode
To display the general monitoring information for the physical layer of the data
port in the Frame Relay mode:
From the Physical Layer menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer), select Data FR.
The Data FR screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Data FR
Seconds ... (145)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (9)
1. Current []
2. Interval []
>
Figure 6-16. Physical Layer Data FR Screen
Table 6-14. General Monitoring Parameters for the Data Interface in the Frame Relay Mode
(Physical Layer)


can be displayed
To display the current monitoring statistics for the data FR interface:

From the Data FR menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Data FR), select
Current.
LA-110
Monitoring>Physical Layer>Data FR>Current
Tx Total Frames Rx Total Frames Tx Congestion Frames

current 0 0 0
15min 0 0 0
24hours 0 0 0
Rx Congestion Frames Rx Discarded Frames

current 0 0
15min 0 0
24hours 0 0
>
Figure 6-17. Physical Layer Data FR Current Screen
Table 6-15. Current Monitoring Parameters for the Data Interface in the Frame Relay Mode
(Physical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames transmitted through the data port
Rx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the data port
Tx Congestion Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames intended for transmission through the data
port, but discarded before transmission because of congestion
Rx Congestion Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the data port, but
discarded because of congestion

Parameter Function
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the data port, but
discarded during processing for any reason (including congestion)
To display the interval monitoring statistics for the data FR interface:

From the Data FR menu (Monitoring > Physical Layer > Data FR), select
Interval.
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the Logical Layer

monitoring statistics and status information for the logical layer of the
connections on the following interfaces:
ATM (network connection, IMA, OAM statistics, dedicated management VCC)
User (E1, T1, FXS, ISDN)
Serial data (AAL1, Frame Relay)
LAN.
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for ATM

Network Connection
To display the general monitoring information for ATM network connection:
From the ATM menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM), select Network.
The Network screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>Network
Seconds ... (145)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (9)
Free Bandwidth ... (10526 cell/sec)
1. Current []
2. Interval []
>
Figure 6-18. Logical Layer ATM Network Screen

Table 6-16. General Monitoring Parameters for the ATM Network Interface (Logical Layer)
can be displayed
Free Free bandwidth currently available on the ATM interface

Bandwidth
To display the current monitoring statistics for the ATM network interface (logical
layer):
From the Network menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > Network), select
Current.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>Network>Current
Tx Total Cells Rx Total Cells Rx CLPI=1 Cells

1second 0 0 0
15min 0 0 0
24hours 0 0 0
Rx Discarded Cells Rx HEC Cells

1second 0 0
15min 0 0
24hours 0 0
>
Figure 6-19. Logical Layer ATM Network Current Monitoring Screen

Table 6-17. Current Monitoring Parameters for the ATM Network Interface (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been transmitted
Rx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been received
Rx CLPI=1 Cells Total number of cells received with cell-loss priority indicator set to 1 (cells may be
discarded during congestion)
Rx Discarded Cells Total number of received cells that have discarded from any reason
Rx HEC Cells Total number of received cells with headers containing errors, as detected using with
Header Error Control field
To display the interval monitoring statistics for the ATM network interface (logical
layer):
From the Network menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > Network), select
Interval.
Displaying the IMA Status

When LA-110 is equipped with the IMA network interface it is possible to display
status information for separate SHDSL links and for an IMA group as a whole.
To display an IMA SHDSL link status:
1. From the IMA menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA), select Link
Status.
The Link Status menu is displayed.
2. From the Link Status menu, select an SHDSL link in the IMA group, which
status you intend to display.
The Link 1, Link 2, Link 3 or Link 4 menu is displayed. Table 6-18
describes the IMA link status parameters.

Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>Link Status>Link 1
Near end Tx state > (LSM Unusuable No Reason)

Near end Rx state > (LSM Unusuable Faild)
Far end Tx state > (LSM Not In Group)
Far end Rx state > (LSM Not In Group)
Near end FM state > (Failure)
Far end FM state > (No Failure)
LIF defect > (Active)
RDI defect > (Not Active)
>
Figure 6-20. Logical Layer IMA Link Status Screen
Table 6-18. Logical Layer IMA Link Status Parameters
Near end Tx state The current state of the near-end (NE) Transmit Link State Machine (LSM), which can
be one of the following: LSM NOT IN GROUP, LSM UNUSABLE NO REASON, LSM
UNUSABLE FAULT, LSM UNUSABLE MISCONN, LSM UNUSABLE BLOCKED, LSM
UNUSABLE FAILED, LSM USABLE, LSM_ ACTIVE
Near end Rx state The current state of the near-end (NE) Receive Link State Machine (LSM), which can
Far end Tx state The current state of the far-end (FE) Transmit Link State Machine (LSM), which can
Far end Rx state The current state of the far-end (FE) Receive Link State Machine (LSM), which can be
one of the following: LSM NOT IN GROUP, LSM UNUSABLE NO REASON, LSM
Near end FM state The highest priority failure state of the near-end receive link, which can be one of
the following: NO FAILURE, FAILURE, LIF FAILURE, LODS FAILURE, MISCONNECTED,
BLOCKED, FAULT, FE TX LINK UNUSABLE, FE RX LINK UNUSABLE
Far end FM state The highest priority failure state of the far-end receive link, which can be one of the
following: NO FAILURE, FAILURE, LIF FAILURE, LODS FAILURE, MISCONNECTED,
BLOCKED, FAULT, FE TX LINK UNUSABLE, FE RX LINK UNUSABLE
LIF defect The state of the LIF (Loss of IMA Frame)
RDI defect The state of the RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

To display an IMA group status:

From the IMA menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > IMA), select Group
Status.
Group Status menu is displayed. Table 6-19 describes the IMA group
status parameters.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>Group Status
Near End State > (Start-Up)

Far End State > (Start-Up)
Near End FM State > (Start-Up)
Far End FM State > (Start-Up)
Near End TX Clock Mode > (CTC)
Far End TX Clock Mode > (CTC)
Group TX ID[0 - 255] ... (1)
Group RX ID[0 - 255] ... (1)
Frame Len TX > (128)
Frame Len RX > (128)
TX Configured Links[0 - 4] ... (4)
TX Actual Links[0 - 4] ... (0)
RX Configured Links[0 - 4] ... (4)
RX Actual Links[0 - 4] ... (0)
... (N)
>
Figure 6-21. Logical Layer IMA Group Status Screen (Page 1)

Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>IMA>Group Status
... (P)
GTSM State > (Down)
GTSM Failure State > (FE START UP)
Far End Status Unavailable > (Far End Start-Up)
>
Figure 6-22. Logical Layer IMA Group Status Screen (Page 2)
Table 6-19. Logical Layer IMA Group Status Parameters
Near End State The current state of the near-end (NE) group state machine, which can be one of
the following: NOT CFG, START UP, START UP ACK, CFG ABORT BAD M, CFG ABORT
BAD SYM, CFG ABORT BAD VERSN, CFG ABORT OTHER, INSUFF LINKS, BLOCKED,
OPERATIONAL

Far End State The current state of the far-end (FE) group state machine, which can be one of the
following: NOT CFG, START UP, START UP ACK, CFG ABORT BAD M, CFG ABORT BAD
SYM, CFG ABORT BAD VERSN, CFG ABORT OTHER, INSUFF LINKS, BLOCKED,
OPERATIONAL
Near End FM State The highest priority failure state of the near-end group, which can be one of the
following: NO FAILURE, START UP, INVALID M, FAILED ASYMM, INSUFF LINKS,
BLOCKED, FAILED OTHER, INVALID VERSN
Far End FM State The highest priority failure state of the far-end group, which can be one of the
following: NO FAILURE, START UP, INVALID M, FAILED ASYMM, INSUFF LINKS,
BLOCKED, FAILED OTHER, INVALID VERSN
Near End TX Clock Transmit clock mode of the near-end group, which can be one of the following: ITC
Mode (Independent Transmit Clock) or CTC (Common Transmit Clock)
Far End TX Clock Transmit clock mode of the far-end group, which can be one of the following: ITC
Mode (Independent Transmit Clock) or CTC (Common Transmit Clock)
Group TX ID Identification number of the transmit group
Group RX ID Identification number of the receive group
Frame Len TX The IMA frame length to be used by the IMA group in the transmit direction, which
can be one of the following: 32, 64, 128, 256
Frame Len RX The IMA frame length to be used by the IMA group in the receive direction, which
can be one of the following: 32, 64, 128, 256
TX Configured Links The number of links that are configured to transmit in this IMA group
TX Actual Links The number of links that are configured to transmit and are currently active in this
IMA group.
RX Configured Links The number of links that are configured to receive in this IMA group
RX Actual Links The number of links that are configured to receive and are currently active in this
IMA group.
GTSM State The current state of the near-end (NE) Group Traffic State Machine, which can be
Down or Up
GTSM Failure State The reason that the GTSM is in the DOWN state, which can be one of the following:
GTSM OK, FE START UP, NE ABORTED, FE ABORTED, NE INSUFFICIENT LINKS, FE
INSUFFICIENT LINKS, NE BLOCKED, FE BLOCKED
Far End Status Far-end group/link states and failure status is not available due to near-end failures
Unavailable of all links in the group
Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics

The LA-110 management software allows you to display the OAM performance
monitoring statistics for selected connections on the LA-110 interfaces.

Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the E1 or

T1 User Interface
In order to display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for the E1 or T1
user interface it is necessary to select a connection on the interface first.
To select a connection on the E1 or T1 user interface:
From the TDM over ATM or FR interface (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM >
OAM > User E1 > TDM over ATM or FR), select Connection Index and choose
the desired user port connection.
To display general information on the OAM performance monitoring statistics for
the E1 or T1 user interface:
From the User E1 or User T1 menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM
> User E1) select TDM over ATM or FR.
The General Information screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>OAM>User E1>TDM over ATM>
Seconds ... (145)
Intervals[1 - 96] ... (9)
Connection details ... (Port 1, VPI.VCI. 1.31.)
1. Connection index > (1)
2. User E1 table []
>
Figure 6-23. Logical Layer OAM User Port Screen
Table 6-20. General Monitoring Parameters for the OAM User Interface

Seconds The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in
seconds. The range is 1 to 900 seconds
Intervals The number of intervals (up 96 intervals) for which performance monitoring
information can be displayed
Connection Details Details of the selected user port connection
To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for the E1/T1 user port:
From the TDM over ATM or FR interface (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM >
OAM > User E1/T1 > TDM over ATM or FR), select User E1/T1 Table.
The User E1/T1 Table screen is displayed.

Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>OAM>User E1>TDM over ATM> User E1 Table

1 second From start
Tx Total AIS Cells 0 0
Rx Total AIS Cells 0 0
Loss of Continuity(sec) 0 0
Total Successful Loopbacks 0 0
Total Failed Loopbacks 0 0
Tx Total RDI Cells 0 0
Rx Total RDI Cells 0 0
Tx Total Loopback Requests 0 0
Rx Total Loopback Requests 0 0
Tx Total Loopback Responses 0 0
Rx Total Loopback Responses 0 0
Min LB delay 0 0
Max LB delay 0 0
Avg. LB Delay 0 0
>
Figure 6-24. OAM Performance Statistics User Port Screen

Note
The Min LB delay, Max LB delay and Avg. LB Delay counters are displayed only if a
periodic loopback is active.
Table 6-21. OAM Performance Statistics Parameters for User Port
Parameter Function
Tx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells transmitted through this port connection
Rx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells received through this port connection
Loss of Continuity Total loss of ATM connection continuity seconds for this port connection
Total Successful Total number of OAM cells looped back in response to a loopback command
Loopbacks transmitted through this port connection
Total Failed Total number of OAM cells which were not be looped back after a loopback command
Loopbacks transmitted through this port connection
Tx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells transmitted through this port connection
Rx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells received through this port connection
Tx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted through this port connection
Requests
Rx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback requests received through this port connection
Requests
Tx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback responses transmitted through this port connection
Responses

Parameter Function
Rx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback responses received through this port connection
Responses
Min LB Delay (msec) Minimum Round-Trip Delay (RTD) registered for a periodic loopback
Max LB Delay (msec) Maximum RTD registered for a periodic loopback
Avg. LB Delay (msec) Average RTD registered for a periodic loopback
Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the ISDN

Interface
The OAM performance monitoring statistics information is available from the User
ISDN menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > User ISDN).
The OAM statistics information for the ISDN port connections is similar to the one
for the user E1/T1 port connections (see Displaying the OAM Performance
Monitoring Statistics for the E1 or T1 User Interface above.
Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the FXS

Interface
The OAM performance monitoring statistics information is available from the User
FXS menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > User FXS).
The OAM statistics information for the FXS port connections is similar to the one
Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the LAN

Interface
The OAM performance monitoring statistics information is available from the LAN
menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > LAN).
The OAM statistics information for the LAN port connections is similar to the one
Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the Serial

Data Interface
The OAM performance monitoring statistics information is available from the Data
AAL1 or Data FR menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > Data AAL1 or
Data FR).
The OAM statistics information for the serial data port connections is similar to
the one for the user E1/T1 port connections (see Displaying the OAM
Performance Monitoring Statistics for the E1 or T1 User Interface above.

Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the

Dedicated VCC Channel
The OAM performance monitoring statistics information is available from the
Dedicated Management menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM >
Dedicated Management).
The OAM statistics information for the dedicated management VCC is similar to
the one for the user E1/T1 port connections (see Displaying the OAM
Performance Monitoring Statistics for the E1 or T1 User Interface above.
Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring Statistics for the ATM

Network Interface
The LA-110 management software allows you to display the total number of OAM
cells transmitted and received on the ATM network interface.
To display the current OAM performance monitoring statistics for the ATM
network interface:
From the Total menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > Total),
select Current.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>OAM>Total>Current
Tx Total OAM Cells Rx Total OAM Cells

1second 0 0
15min 0 0
24hours 0 0
>
Figure 6-25. OAM Performance Statistics ATM Network Port Screen
Table 6-22. Current OAM Performance Statistics Parameters for ATM Network Port
Parameter Function
Tx Total OAM cells The total number of OAM cells that have been transmitted by the ATM network port
Rx Total OAM cells The total number of OAM cells that have been received by the ATM network port

To display the interval monitoring statistics for the ATM network interface (logical
layer):
From the Total menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > Total),
select Interval.
Displaying OAM Statistics for Periodic Loopbacks

In addition to the OAM statistics collected on the LA-110 ports, it is possible to
display periodic loopback statistics for every active connection on LA-110
interfaces. LA-110 starts collecting statistic data for periodic loopbacks once
connection is added. Statistics are collected for the current, last 15-minute, last
24-hour (as a whole or for any of 96 15-minute intervals) and last 7-day
intervals.
The OAM statistics information for the periodic loopbacks is similar to the one for
the user E1/T1 port connections (see Displaying the OAM Performance Monitoring
Statistics for the E1 or T1 User Interface above). Figure 6-26 illustrates a sample
OAM statistics screen for periodic loopbacks on a LAN interface connection.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>OAM>LAN>Loopback Status
Min LB Delay (usec) Max LB delay (usec) Avg. LB Delay (usec)
current 5000 5000 5000
15min 5000 5000 5000
| 24 hours 5000 5000 5000
|
V
interval11 5000 5000 5000
interval12 5000 5000 5000
interval13 5000 5000 5000
interval14 5000 5000 5000
interval15 5000 5000 5000
interval16 5000 5000 5000
interval17 5000 5000 5000
interval18 5000 5000 5000
>
Figure 6-26. OAM Performance Statistics for Periodic Loopback on a LAN Connection Screen

Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the

Dedicated Management VCC
To display the general monitoring information for the dedicated management
VCC:
From the ATM menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM), select Dedicated
management VCC.
The Dedicated management VCC screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>Dedicated management VCC
Seconds ... (145)
Interface ... (VPI.VCI - 0.127)
Status ... (Current status : OFF)
1. Current []
>
Figure 6-27. Performance Statistics the Dedicated Management VCC Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-23. General Monitoring Parameters for the Dedicated Management VCC (Logical Layer)
Seconds The elapsed time (in seconds) since the connection activation.
Interface Details of the dedicated management VCC connection
Status Current status of the dedicated management VCC: ON or OFF
To display the current monitoring statistics for the dedicated management VCC
(logical layer):
From the Dedicated Management VCC menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer >
ATM > Dedicated Management VCC), select Current.
described in Table 6-24. Each statistic parameter is displayed for two intervals:
1 second the statistics collected during the last second.
From start the statistics collected since the management VCC activation.

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>ATM>Dedicated management VCC>Current
Tx Total Frame Rx Total Frame Tx discarded Frames

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
Rx discarded Frames CRC Error Frames Tx Total Cells

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
Rx Total Cells Rx Discarded Cells

1 second 0 0
From start 0 0
>
Figure 6-28. Logical Layer Dedicated Management VCC Current Monitoring Screen
Table 6-24. Current Monitoring Parameters for the Dedicated Management VCC (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of frames transmitted through the corresponding WAN interface
Rx Total Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of frames intended for transmission through the corresponding WAN
interface, but discarded before transmission for any reason (including congestion
and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface, but
discarded during processing for any reason (including errors and buffer overflows)
CRC Error Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface in
which transmission errors were detected using the CRC information
Tx Total Cells Total number of AAL5 cells transmitted through the ATM connection serving the
corresponding WAN interface
Rx Total Cells Total number of AAL5 cells received through the corresponding WAN interface
Rx Discarded Cells Total number of AAL5 cells received through the ATM connection serving the
corresponding WAN interface, but discarded during processing for any reason
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the User

Interface Connection
To display the general monitoring information for the user interface connection:
From the User E1 or User T1 menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer >), select User
E1 or User T1.
The User E1 or User T1 screen is displayed.

Monitoring>Logical Layer>User E1
Seconds ... (145)
Connection details ... (Conn 1, port 1, VPI.VCI 1.2)
1. Connection index > (1)

2. User E1 table []
>
Figure 6-29. General Information for the User Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-25. General Monitoring Parameters for the User Interface Connection (Logical Layer)

Seconds The elapsed time (in seconds) since the connection activation, in seconds.
Connection details Details of the current user interface connection
To display the current monitoring statistics for the user interface connection
(logical layer):
From the User E1 or User T1 menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > User E1 or
User T1), select E1-Unframed Statistics.
or
From the User E1 or User T1 menu, select TDM over ATM or FR, depending on
the connection type created on the user interface and select User E1 table
(TDM over ATM) or AAL5 (FR).
The relevant monitoring screen is displayed.
Each statistic parameter is displayed for two intervals:
From start the statistics collected since the connection activation.

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User E1>E1-Unframed statistics
Tx Total Cells Rx Total Cells Tx Total Seq Errors

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
Rx Total SNP Errors

1 second 0
From start 0
>
Figure 6-30. Logical Layer User Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (Unframed E1)
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User E1>TDM over ATM>User E1 table
Tx Total Cells Rx Total Cells Rx Total Seq Errors

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
Rx Total resync Rx Total SNP Errors Ptr Parity Error

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
>
Figure 6-31. Logical Layer User Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (Framed E1 or T1)
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User E1>FR>Connection>AAL5 Statistics
Tx Total Cells Rx Total Cells Rx Total Seq Errors

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
Rx Total resync Rx Total SNP Errors Ptr Parity Error

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
>
Figure 6-32. Logical Layer User Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (Frame Relay,
AAL5)

Table 6-26. Current Monitoring Parameters for the TDM User Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been transmitted for the corresponding connection
Rx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been received for the corresponding connection
Rx Total Seq Errors Total number of sequence numbering errors that have detected in the cells received for
the corresponding connection
Rx Total Resync Total number of resynchronization events that occurred for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total SNP Errors Total number of SNP errors that have detected for the cells received for the
corresponding connection
Ptr Parity Error Total number of pointer errors detected in the cells received for the corresponding
connection
Table 6-27. Current Monitoring Parameters for the Frame Relay User Interface Connection (Logical
Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames transmitted through the corresponding data port
connection
Rx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the corresponding data port
connection
Tx Discarded Total number of Frame Relay frames intended for transmission through the
Frames corresponding data port connection, but discarded before transmission for any reason
(including congestion and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the corresponding data port
Frames connection, but discarded during processing for any reason (including errors and buffer
overflows)
CRC Error Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface in which
transmission errors were detected using the CRC information
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the ISDN

To display the general monitoring information for the ISDN interface connection:
From the Logical Layer menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer), select User ISDN.
The User ISDN menu is displayed.

Monitoring>Logical Layer>User ISDN>General information

Connection details ... (Port 1 on USER, VPI.VCI 1.32)
D channel cid [0 - 255] ... (0)
1. Port Index in the Interface[1 - 4] (1)

2. D channel HDLC & SSted statistics []
3. AAL2 statistics []
>
Figure 6-33. General Information for the ISDN Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-28. General Monitoring Parameters for the ISDN Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Connection details Details of the current ISDN interface connection
D Channel CID Displays the CID assigned to the D channel of the selected port
To display the current D-channel statistics for the ISDN interface connection:
1. From the User ISDN menu, select Port Index in the Interface and choose an
ISDN port (14).
2. From the User ISDN menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > User ISDN), select D
channel HDLC & SSted statistics.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User ISDN>D channel HDLC & SSted statistics
HDLC Tx frames ... (0)

HDLC Rx frames ... (0)
HDLC Rx errors ... (0)
SSted Tx packets ... (0)
SSted Rx packets ... (0)
SSted Rx CRC errors ... (0)
SSted Rx Len errors ... (0)
SSted Rx errors ... (0)
Figure 6-34. Logical Layer ISDN Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (D-Channel)

Table 6-29. D-Channel Monitoring Parameters for the ISDN Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Section Parameter Description
Frames Displays the total number of HDLC frames received by the D channel of
HDLC (D-Ch) the selected port
Errors Displays the total number of HDLC frames received by the D channel of
the selected port in which errors have been detected
Packet Displays the total number of packets handled by the SSTED (Service
Specific Transmission Error Detection) sublayer, used to carry the LES
embedded operations channel (eoc) serving the connections of the
selected port
Ssted
Statistics CRC-Error Displays the total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of CRC
errors detected at the SSTED sublayer
LenErrors Displays the total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of
length errors detected at the SSTED sublayer
Errors Displays the total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of other
types of errors detected at the SSTED sublayer
To display the current AAL2 statistics for the ISDN interface connection (logical
layer):
1. From the User ISDN menu, select Port Index in the Interface and choose an
ISDN port (14).
2. From the User ISDN menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > User ISDN), select.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User ISDN> AAL2 statistics
CID Tx Cells Rx Cells Rx errors

D channel 0 0 0 0
B1 channel 0 0 0 0
B2 channel 0 0 0 0
Figure 6-35. Logical Layer ISDN Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (AAL2)
Table 6-30. AAL2 Monitoring Parameters for the ISDN Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
D-Ch Tx Cells Total number of AAL2 cells transmitted by the specified channel of the
B1-Ch Tx Cells selected port
B2-Ch Tx Cells
D-Ch Tx Errors Total number of AAL2 cells transmitted by the specified channel of the
B1-Ch Tx Errors selected port in which errors occurred
AAL2 B2-Ch Tx Errors


Statistics D-Ch Rx Cells Total number of AAL2 cells received through the specified channel of
B1-Ch Rx Cells the selected port
B2-Ch x Cells
D-Ch Rx Errors Total number of AAL2 cells with errors received through the specified
B1-Ch Rx Errors channel of the selected port
B2-Ch Rx Errors
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the FXS

To display the general monitoring information for the FXS interface connection:
From the Logical Layer menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer), select User FXS.
The User FXS screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User Fxs
Seconds ... (145)
Connection details ... (Port 1 on USER, VPI.VCI.CID 1.32.0)
1. Port Index in the Interface[1 - 4] (1)

2. CBR Statistics []
3. AAL statistics []
>
Figure 6-36. General Information for the FXS Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-31. General Monitoring Parameters for the FXS Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Connection details Details of the current data interface connection
To display the current CBR statistics for the FXS interface connection:
1. From the User FXS menu, select Port Index in the Interface and choose an FXS
port (14).
2. From the User FXS menu, select CBR Statistics.
The CBR Statistics screen is displayed.

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User Fxs>CBR Statistics
( 1 second From start)

Tx Total Cells ( 0 0 )
Rx Total Cells ( 0 0 )
Rx Total Seq Errors ( 0 0 )
Rx Total Resync ( 0 0 )
SNP Errors ( 0 0 )
Error ( 0 0 )
Figure 6-37. Logical Layer FXS Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (CBR)
Table 6-32. CBR Monitoring Parameters for the FXS Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Cells Total number of AAL2 cells that have been transmitted for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total Cells Total number of AAL2 cells that have been received for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total Seq Errors Total number of sequence numbering errors that have detected in the cells received
for the corresponding connection
Rx Total Resync Total number of resynchronization events that occurred for the corresponding
connection
Ptr Parity Error Total number of pointer errors detected in the cells received for the corresponding
connection
To display the current AAL statistics for the FXS interface connection:
1. From the User FXS menu, select Port Index in the Interface and choose an FXS
port (14).
2. From the User FXS menu, select AAL Statistics.
The AAL Statistics screen is displayed.

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>User Fxs>AAL Statistics
1 second From start

------------------------
In packets: 0 0
Out packets: 0 0
Parity errors: 0 0
Sequence number errors: 0 0
OSF errors: 0 0
HEC errors: 0 0
UUI errors: 0 0
CID errors: 0 0
Incoming call attempts: 0 0

Outgoing call attempts: 0 0
Figure 6-38. Logical Layer FXS Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (AAL)
Table 6-33. AAL Monitoring Parameters for the FXS Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Out Packets Total number of CPCS PDUs (protocol data units) that have been transmitted for the
In Packets Total number of CPCS PDUs that have been received for the corresponding
connection
Parity Error Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which
parity errors have been detected
Sequence Number Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which
Error sequence number errors have been detected
OSF Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which an
incorrect OSF (offset field) value, that is, the OSF is 48 or greater, has been
detected
HEC Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which
transmission errors have been detected by means of the HEC (header error control)
field
UUI Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which the
UUI (user-user indication) field contains a reserved value
CID Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which the
CID (channel identifier) field contains an unexpected value (either a reserved value,
or a value exceeding the maximum allowed number)

Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the Data

To display the general monitoring information for the data interface connection:
From the Data AAL1 or Data FR menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer), select
Data AAL1 or Data FR.
The Data AAL1 or Data FR screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>Data Fr
Seconds ... (145)
Connection details ... (Conn 1, port 1, VPI.VCI 1.2)
Connection status ... (AAL5 : OFF, FR DLCI : OFF)
1. Index on the interface (1)

2. AAL5 Statistics []
3. FR Statistics []
>
Figure 6-39. General Information for the Data FR Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-34. General Monitoring Parameters for the Data FR Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Connection details Details of the current data interface connection
Connection status Current status of AAL5 and Frame Relay DLCI of the connection
(FR only)
To display the current monitoring statistics for the data interface connection in
the Frame Relay mode (logical layer):
1. From the Data FR menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > Data FR), select Index
in the Interface and choose an active Frame Relay connection.
2. Select AAL5 Statistics or FR Statistics.
The relevant monitoring screen is displayed.


LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>Data Fr>AAL5 Statistics

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0

1 second 0 0
From start 0 0
>
Figure 6-40. Logical Layer User Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (Frame Relay AAL5)
Table 6-35. Current Monitoring Parameters for the Frame Relay AAL5 Data Interface Connection
(Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames transmitted through the corresponding data
port connection
connection
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames intended for transmission through the
corresponding data port connection, but discarded before transmission for any
reason (including congestion and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the corresponding data port
connection, but discarded during processing for any reason (including errors and
buffer overflows)
CRC Error Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface in which
transmission errors were detected using the CRC information

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>Data Fr>FR Statistics
Tx Total Rx Total Tx Discarded Rx Discarded
Frames Frames Frames Frames
---------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0
Tx FECN Rx FECN Tx BECN Rx BECN Tx DE Rx DE

Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames
------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
Current Status : OFF
>
Figure 6-41. Logical Layer User Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (Frame Relay)
Table 6-36. Current Monitoring Parameters for the Frame Relay Data Interface Connection (Logical
Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames transmitted through the corresponding data
port connection
connection
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames intended for transmission through the
corresponding data port connection, but discarded before transmission for any
reason (including congestion and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the corresponding data port
connection, but discarded during processing for any reason (including errors and
buffer overflows)
Tx FECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with FECN bit set transmitted through the
corresponding data port connection
Rx FECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with FECN bit set received through the
Tx BECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with BECN bit set transmitted through the
Rx BECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with BECN bit set received through the
Tx DE Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with DE bit set transmitted through the
Rx DE Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with DE bit set received through the

Parameter Function
Current Status Displays the current status of the Frame Relay connection using the corresponding
data port connection
To display the current monitoring statistics for the data interface connection in
the AAL1 mode (logical layer):
From the Data AAL1 menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > Data AAL1), select
Data (AAL1 Stream) Table.
The Data (AAL1 Stream) Table screen is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>Data AAL1>Data (AAL1 Stream) Table
Tx Total Cells Rx Total Cells Tx Total Seq Errors

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0
Rx Total SNP Errors

1 second 0
From start 0>
Figure 6-42. Logical Layer Data Interface Connection Current Monitoring Screen (AAL1)
Table 6-37. Current Monitoring Parameters for the AAL1 Data Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been transmitted for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been received for the corresponding connection
Tx Total Seq Errors Total number of sequence numbering errors that have detected in the cells received
for the corresponding connection
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the LAN

The performance monitoring statistics can be collected for the bridge and router
connections created on the LA-110 LAN port.

Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the Bridge

To display the general monitoring information for the bridge connection:
From the LAN menu, select Bridge Interface.
The Bridge Interface screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Interface
Seconds ... (145)
Interface on port ... (Interface 1 on port: VPI.VCI - 8.35)
1. Index [1-8] ... (1)
>
Figure 6-43. General Information for the Bridge Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-38. General Monitoring Parameters for the Bridge Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Interface on port Details of the current bridge interface connection
Status Current status of the bridge connection
To display the current monitoring statistics for the bridge interface connection
(logical layer):
1. From the Bridge Interface menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN > Bridge
Interface), select an attached WAN interface.
2. From the Bridge Interface menu, select Interface Table.
The current performance monitoring screen is displayed.

LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>LAN>Bridge Interface>Interface Table

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0

1 second 0 0
From start 0 0
>
Figure 6-44. Performance Monitoring for the Bridge Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Displaying the Performance Monitoring Statistics for the IP Router

To display performance monitoring statistics for the IP router:
From the LAN menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN), select IP.
The IP menu is displayed.
LA-110
Monitoring>Logical Layer>LAN>IP
Total Rx Frames (0)

Rx Errored header frames (0)
Rx Errored addr frames (0)
Out frames with no routing (0)
Forwarded frames (0)
Rx discarded frames (0)
Output discarded frames (0)
>
Figure 6-45. Monitoring Parameters for the Router (Logical Layer)

Table 6-39. Monitoring Parameters for the Router (Logical Layer)
Total Rx Frames Total number of IP packets received by the IP router
Rx Errored Header Frames Total number of IP packets with errors in their header received by the IP
router
Rx Errored Addr Frames Total number of IP packets with IP address errors received by the IP router
Out Frames with no Routing Total number of IP packets without routing information sent by the IP router
Forwarded Frames Total number of IP packets forwarded by the IP router
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of IP valid packets discarded by the IP router receive path
Output Discarded Frames Total number of IP valid packets discarded by the IP router transmit path
To display the general monitoring information for the IP connection:

From the LAN menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN), select IP Interface.
The IP Interface screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>LAN>IP Interface
Seconds ... (145)
Interface on port ... (Interface 1 on port: VPI.VCI - 8.35)

2. Interface table []
>
Figure 6-46. General Information for the IP Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-40. General Monitoring Parameters for the Bridge Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Interface on port Details of the current IP interface connection
Status Current status of the IP connection

To display the current performance monitoring parameters for the IP interface:

1. From the IP Interface menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN), select an
attached IP WAN interface.
2. From the IP Interface menu (Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN), select
Interface Table.
The current performance monitoring screen is displayed.
Monitoring>Logical Layer>LAN>IP Interface>Interface table
1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0

1 second 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0

1 second 0 0
From start 0 0
>
Figure 6-47. Performance Monitoring for the IP Interface Connection Screen (Logical Layer)
Table 6-41. Current Monitoring Parameters for the IP Interface Connection (Logical Layer)
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of frames transmitted through the corresponding WAN interface
Rx Total Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of frames intended for transmission through the corresponding
WAN interface, but discarded before transmission for any reason (including
congestion and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface, but
discarded during processing for any reason (including errors and buffer
overflows)
CRC Error Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface in
which transmission errors were detected using the CRC information

Parameter Function
Current Status Displays the current status of the ATM connection serving the corresponding
WAN interface
Monitoring the LA-110 Performance at the Application Layer

monitoring statistics for the following types of pseudowire connections:
ATM-based (ATM VC 1 to 1, ATM VP 1 to 1, ATM VC N to 1, ATM VP N to 1,
HDLCoPSN, FRoPSN)
TDM-based (CESoPSN, SAToP, TDMoIP).
Monitoring the PW Performance

To display the current monitoring statistics for the ATM-based PWs:
1. From the Multiservice over PSN menu (Monitoring > Applications >
Multiservice over PSN), select PW Number, and enter the desired ATM or TDM
PW number (18).
2. Select Current to display current statistics.
described in Table 6-42 and Table 6-43. Each statistic parameter is displayed for
three intervals:

LA-110
Monitoring > Applications > Multiservice over PSN >Current
1 Sec 24 Hours
RX Frames
RX Octets
RX Frames Dropped
TX Frames
TX Octets
TX Frames Dropped
Missing Frames
Reordered Frames
Misordered Frames
Cells Transmitted
Cells Received
Cells Dropped
Unknown Cells
>
Figure 6-48. ATM-Based PW Current Monitoring Screen
Table 6-42. Current Monitoring Parameters for the ATM-Based PWs
Parameter Function
RX Frames Number of packets received by the PW from the PSN

RX Octets Number of bytes received by the PW
RX Frames Dropped Number of packets dropped after they were received by the PW from the
PSN
TX Frames Number of packets sent by the PW
TX Octets Number of bytes sent by the PW
TX Frames Dropped Number of packets dropped after they were sent by the PW
Missing Frames Number of frames that were missed (according to the PW sequence number
field)
Reordered Frames Number of cells rejected by this VC because of policing
Misordered Frames Number of frames that were misordered (according to the PW sequence
number)
Cells Transmitted Number of cells transmitted to ATM network by the VC
Cells Received Number of cells received by the VC
Cells Dropped Number of cells dropped by the VC
Unknown Cells Number of unknown cells recevied by the VC

Table 6-43. Current Monitoring Parameters for the TDM-Based PWs
Parameter Function
RX Frames See Table 6-42

RX Octets See Table 6-42
RX Frames Dropped See Table 6-42
TX Frames See Table 6-42
TX Octets See Table 6-42
TX Frames Dropped See Table 6-42
Missing Frames Number of frames that were missed (according to the control word
sequence number gaps)
Out of Sequence Number successfully reordered packets that were previously detected as
Reordered Frames out-of-sequence (according to control word sequence number)
Misordered Frames Number of packets detected as out-of-order (according to the control word
sequence numbers) and could not be reordered or fit into the jitter buffer
Malformed Frames Number of packets with unexpected size or bad header stack
Jitter Buffer Number of times a packet had to be sent out of the jitter buffer and the buffer was
Underrun empty
Errored Seconds (ES) Number of errored seconds
Severely Errored Number of severely errored seconds
Seconds (SES)
Unavailable Seconds Number of unavailable seconds
(UAS)
TDM Failure Counts Number of of TDM failure events. A failure event begins when the LOPS
(FC-TDM) failure is declared, and ends when the failure is cleared.
To display the interval monitoring statistics for the PWs:

1. From the Multiservice over PSN menu (Monitoring > Applications >
Multiservice over PSN), select Interval.
2. From the Interval screen, select Interval, and choose for one of the previous
15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the most
recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute
interval).

6.2 Diagnostic Tests

LA-110 supports the following diagnostic tests:
Local and remote physical loopbacks activated on the network, user and data
interfaces
OAM loopbacks activated on the ATM connections
Ping utility.
Running Physical Loopbacks

LA-110 supports several types of loopbacks. All the available loopback functions
are described in the following paragraphs, including loopbacks supported only by
interfaces available only upon order. Therefore, ignore loopbacks related to
interfaces not available on your LA-110.
At any time, only one loopback can be activated. Therefore, when a new loopback
is activated, any previous user-controlled loopback is automatically deactivated.
To run a loopback:
From the Diagnostic menu, select Loop and choose the loopback you intend
to run.
To stop a loopback:
From the Diagnostic menu, select Loop and choose None.
LA-110 deactivates all active loopbacks.
Remote Network Loopback

The remote network loopback returns the cells received through the uplink
toward the network.
This loopback should be activated only when the uplink is synchronized.
Figure 6-49 shows the signal paths for a typical remote network loopback.
This test performs a complete check of the WAN link through the ATM network,
including the transmission plant connecting the two LA-110 units, and the
network interface and ATM processor of the local LA-110.
6-50 Diagnostic Tests LA-110 Ver. 3.5

User LA-110
Interface
Network
Interface
User Protocol ATM Network
Interface Conversion Processor Port
User
Interface
Figure 6-49. Remote Network Loopback
Local Data Loopback

The local data port loopback returns the user data port transmit data via the
receive path of the port, to the users equipment connected to the port. During
the loopback, the local LA-110 sends an All 1s pattern (payload) to the remote
end of the link.
While the loopback is activated, the equipment connected to the corresponding
data port of LA-110 provides the test signal, and must receive its own
transmission.
Figure 6-50 shows signal paths for a typical local data port loopback.
User LA-110
Interface
Network
Interface
DATA DATA Protocol ATM Network
Port Port Conversion Processor Port
User
Interface
Figure 6-50. Local Data Loopback

Note that the user's equipment connected to the local data port must be able to
operate properly when receiving its own signal, otherwise it will enter an alarm
state when the loopback is activated. If the equipment can operate normally
during the loopback, it must operate normally.
This test performs a complete check of the connections to the user's equipment,
and of the data port interface.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Diagnostic Tests 6-51

Remote Data Loopback

The remote data port loopback returns the received data port signal toward the
network.
The loopback is performed within the data port interface, by connecting the data
port receive signal to the input of its transmit path. The equipment connected to
the remote end of the link provides the test signal, and must receive its own
transmission. Figure 6-51 shows a typical remote data port loopback.
Note that the user's equipment must be able to operate properly when receiving
its own signal, otherwise it will enter an alarm state when the loopback is
activated. If the equipment can operate normally during the loopback, it must
operate normally.
The equipment connected to the local LA-110 starts receiving All 1s pattern
(unframed) stream.
This test performs a complete check of the data link through the ATM network,
including the cables connecting the remote equipment to the LA-110, the
transmission plant connecting the LA-110 unit, and the LA-110 unit itself.
LA-110
User
Interface
Network
Interface
DATA DATA Protocol ATM Network
Port Port Conversion Processor Port
User
Interface
Figure 6-51. Remote Data Loopback
Remote User Loopback

The remote user loopback returns the received E1 signal toward the network. The
loopback is performed within the E1 port interface.
Note The loopback cannot be used when the LA-110 uses the voice compression mode
(an ordering option).
While the loopback is activated, the equipment connected to the E1 port of the
remote LA-110 provides the test signal and must receive its own transmission.
The equipment connected to the local LA-110 starts receiving All 1s pattern
(AIS).
Figure 6-52 shows the signal paths for a typical remote user loopback. This test
fully checks the data link through the ATM network, including the cables

connecting the remote equipment to the LA-110, the transmission plant

connecting the LA-110 unit, and the LA-110 unit itself.
User LA-110
Interface
Network
User Interface
Interface Protocol ATM Network
Conversion Processor Port
E1
Port
E1 Port
Interface
Figure 6-52. Remote User Loopback
Local User Loopback

The local user loopback returns the E1 user port transmit signal, after
regeneration, via the receive path. While the loopback is activated, the equipment
connected to the E1 user port of LA-110, provides the test signal and must
receive its own transmission.
Note
The loopback cannot be used when the LA-110 uses the voice compression mode
(an ordering option).
During the loopback, the local LA-110 sends All 1s pattern (payload) to the
remote end of the link.
Figure 6-53 shows the signal paths for a local user loopback. This test performs a
complete check of the connections to the local user's equipment.
User LA-110
Interface
Network
User Interface
Interface Protocol ATM Network
Conversion Processor Port
E1
Port
E1 Port
Interface
Figure 6-53. Local User Loopback

Remote Remote Data Loopback

When the remote remote data port loopback is activated in the local
LA-110, the unit sends a proprietary loopback activation code in the AAL1
header. This code initiates the remote data loopback in the remote RADs unit,
returning the received data port signal toward the network. In order to enable
sending of the loopback activation code, you must set the Connection Type to of
the AAL1 stream to STRUCTURED (SIGNAL TRANSPORT) in the Connection menu
(Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial > Connection).
The loopback is performed within the data port interface of the remote RADs
unit, by connecting the data port receive signal to the input of its transmit path.
The equipment connected to the local end of the link provides the test signal,
and must receive its own transmission.
The equipment connected to the data interface on the remote LA-110 starts
receiving an All 1s pattern (unframed) stream during the test.
Figure 6-54 shows a typical remote remote data loopback.
Note that the user's equipment must be able to operate properly when receiving
its own signal, otherwise it will enter an alarm state when the loopback is
activated. If the equipment can operate normally during the loopback, it must
operate normally.
This test performs a complete check of the data link through the ATM network,
including the cables connecting the local equipment to LA-110, the transmission
plant connecting the remote RADs unit, and the remote unit itself.
Remote Unit
User
Interface
Network
Interface
Network ATM Protocol DATA
Port Processor Conversion Port
User
Interface
Figure 6-54. Remote Data Loopback

Running OAM Loopbacks

OAM loopbacks can be run on the ATM connections of the user, data, LAN
interfaces and management VCC.
To run an OAM loopback:
From the Loopback menu (Diagnostic > Loopback), perform the following:
1. Select Port and choose an LA-110 interface, on which you intend to run
the loopback.
2. Select Index and define the index of the connection, which you intend to
test.
3. Select Send Loopback to activate the OAM loopback.
Running an IMA Loopback

The IMA test provides an additional check to verify connectivity of a link within
the IMA Group. A test pattern is sent over a link whose connectivity to the rest of
the group must be verified. The test pattern is looped over all the other links in
the group at the far-end. Figure 6-55 shows an example where a test pattern
originates at IMA ID=0 to verify the connectivity of the link ID=2 with the other
links already in the group.
Tx Link ID= 0
Rx Link ID= 0
Link ID= 1
IMA ID= 0 IMA ID= 1

Link ID= 1
Tx Link ID= 2
Link ID= 2
Indic ates links where the Test Pattern originally transmitted from IMA= 0 over Link ID= 2 are carried over
Indic ates active links over which the pattern is not transmitted
Figure 6-55. Active Links

To activate an IMA test:
1. From the Diagnostics menu, select IMA Test.
The IMA Test menu is displayed (Figure 6-56).
2. From the IMA Test menu, perform the following:
1. Select Tx Test Pattern Mode, and choose if you intend to define the
transmit test pattern manually or use a random one.
4. Select Manual Tx Test Pattern and define transmit test pattern for the
manual test mode: 0FE.
5. Select Link Number and choose a link to be tested (14).

6. Select Test Procedure and set it to Start to initiate the loopback or Stop to
finish it.
7. Select Results to display the IMA test results.
LA-110
Diagnostic>IMA Test
1. Tx Test Pattern Mode (Manual)

2. Manual Tx Test Pattern (0)
3. Link Number (Link 1)
4. Test Procedure (Start)
5. Results >
>
Figure 6-56. IMA Test Menu
Running a Ping Test

You can ping remote IP host to check the LA-110 IP connectivity. The ping test is
available only when the LA-110 port is configured to the router mode.
To run a ping test:
From the Ping menu (Diagnostic > Ping), perform the following:
1. Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the host that you intend to
ping.
2. Select Number of Echo Request to Send and define the total number of
pings to be sent.
3. Select Timeout and specify the maximum time, in seconds, allocated to
sending the specified number of pings.
4. Select Send Ping to initiate the ping test.
LA-110
Diagnostic>Ping
3. IP Address ... (0.0.0.0)

4. Number of echo request to send[1 - 99999] ... (1)
5. Timeout[1 - 5] ... (1)
6. Send Ping
>
Figure 6-57. Ping Menu

6.3 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LA-110 Indications

In case a problem occurs, check the displayed alarm messages and refer to
Appendix B for their interpretation.
If the problem cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed in
Appendix B, refer to Table 6-44. Identify the trouble symptoms and perform the
actions listed under Corrective Measures in the order given, until the problem is
corrected.
Table 6-44. Troubleshooting Chart
No. Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures
1 LA-110 does not turn on 1. No power Check that the DC power cable is properly
connected to the LA-110 POWER connector.
Check that both ends of the AC power cable
are properly connected.
2. No AC power Check that AC power is available.
3. Defective DC power Replace the DC power supply unit.

supply unit
4. Defective LA-110 If the problem persists, contact the RAD
Technical Support Department.
2 The WAN indicator of the 1. External problem Check proper connections of the uplink cable to
local LA-110 lights in red the LA-110 uplink connector.
Activate the remote network loopback at the
local LA-110. If the remote equipment
connected to the LA-110 uplink port does not
receive its own signal, check its operation and
replace if necessary.

3 The LAN indicator of the 1. Problem on LAN or Check for proper connection of the cable to the
local LA-110 is off its connections LAN port.
Check that at least one node is active on the
LAN, and that the hub or Ethernet switch to
which the LA-110 LAN port is connected is
powered.

Technical Support Department
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Troubleshooting 6-57

4 The equipment attached to 1. Configuration Check that the LAN indicator of the local
the LAN port of the local problems LA-110 is on, or at least flashes from time to
LA-110 cannot time. If not, refer to Item 3 above.
communicate with other Check the LAN port configuration, and the
equipment on the WAN other LA-110 parameters that affect processing
of LAN traffic.
2. External problem If other ports of the LA-110 operate normally,

check the external equipment (for example,
default gateway and other routers) that
process the traffic coming from the local LA-
110 LAN port.

5 The equipment connected 1. Configuration Check the data port configuration, and the
to the local LA-110 DATA problems other LA-110 parameters.
port cannot communicate
2. External problem Activate the local loopback on the local data
with the remote end
port. Check that the user's equipment receives
its own signal while the loopback is connected.
If it does, the problem is external.

6 The local LA-110 reports a 1. External problem Activate the remote user loopback. Check that
REMOTE SYNC LOSS alarm the alarm state changes to OFF. If it does, the
on the local E1 user port problem is external.
2. Problem with E1 Activate the local user loopback. Check that the
equipment E1 equipment connected to the local LA-110
connected to the operates normally. If not, troubleshoot its
local LA-110 connections to the LA-110 and check its
operation.

7 The local LA-110 reports a 1. External problem Activate the local user loopback. Check that the
LOCAL SYNC LOSS for the E1 equipment connected to the local LA-110
E1 user port operates normally. If not, troubleshoot its
connections to the LA-110 and check its
operation.

8 A subscribers phone 1. Configuration Check the FXS user port configuration, and the
connected to a local LA-110 problems other LA-110 parameters.
6-58 Troubleshooting LA-110 Ver. 3.5


port cannot communicate 2. External problem Activate the remote network loopback at the
with the remote end remote LA-110. A strong sidetone should be
heard in the local phone earpiece. If not, check
the connections of the phone to the local
LA-110 and its operation and replace if
necessary.

Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by ISDN Ports

When using an LA-110 equipped with ISDN ports, use the following procedure to
identify the cause of voice communication problems:
1. Check for good synchronization via the General Information menu (Monitoring
> Physical Layer > Network > General Information).
3. Check that all the D channels received CID numbers from the voice gateway
(Monitoring > Logical Layer > User).
4. Check that when the ISDN phone is off-hook, RX and TX traffic is at 180 cells
per second (Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > Network).
5. Check that while the ISDN phone is off-hook, the corresponding port of the
V5 switch connected to the voice gateway that serves the corresponding
ISDN port is in the Activate state.
6. Check that the number of HDLC frames increases each time you take the
ISDN phone off-hook (Monitoring > Logical Layer > User).
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by FXS Ports

When using an LA-110 equipped with FXS ports, use the following procedure to
identify the cause of voice communication problems.
1. Perform steps 1, 2, 4 described above for an LA-110 equipped with ISDN
ports.
2. Check that the port state is changed when you take the phone off-hook
(Configuration > Physical Layer > FXS).
Troubleshooting Data and E1/T1 Ports

1. Check clock settings (Configuration > System > Clock).
2. Check clocks settings in all the users equipment served by the LA-110 link
(for example, PBX, routers).
3. Check that the configured bandwidth is sufficient (Monitoring > Physical Layer
> Network > General Information), the bandwidth is displayed in the Bit Rate
field.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Troubleshooting 6-59

4. Check that all the parameters defined via the E1-User or T1-User menu
(Configuration > Physical Layer > E1-User/T1-User) are compatible with the
users equipment served by the LA-110.
5. For problems with transmission by data ports, use the Serial menu
(Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial) to change the Invert Clock setting to
ENABLE (if problem is not corrected, return the previous setting).
6. Check for negligible errors on the uplink (Monitoring > Physical Layer >
Network > General Information).
7. Try to increase the jitter buffer size to at least than 20 ms (Configuration >
System > General Parameters) and then reset LA-110).
Troubleshooting LAN Services

Use the following procedures to monitor the reception and transmission of
frames to and from the LA-110 LAN port, and to locate the problem either to the
LA-110 or to external equipment (for example, routers or bridges):
1. Analyze cells transmitted at the ATM level (Monitoring > Physical Layer >
Network).
2. Analyze frames at the users side of the LAN port (Monitoring > Physical Layer
> LAN).
3. Analyze LAN frames transmitted at the ATM level (Monitoring > Logical Layer
> LAN).
4. Analyze IP frame transmission performance (Monitoring > Logical Layer >
LAN). In particular, check the discarded frames.
6.4 Frequently Asked Questions

Q: What is the minimum cell rate supported by LA-110?
A: The minimal cell rate that can be supported by LA-110 is the maximum cell rate
(after synchronization) divided by 139 and rounded up.
For example:
If the DSL line is synchronized at 2312 kbps (5452 cells/sec), the minimal
supported connection rate is 2312/139=16634 bps (rounded up) (40
cells/sec).
If the DSL line is synchronized at 4608 kbps (10866 cells/sec), the minimal
supported connection rate is 4608/139=33152 bps (rounded up) (79
cells/sec).
Note
The cell rate displayed in any 2-wire DSL line contains an 8 kbps overhead over
the actual data rate. When the device displays synchronization at 2320 kbps, the
actual data rate over which cells can be transmitted is 2320-8=2312 kbps. When
using 4W this applies to every 2W separately. If the 4W is synchronized in
2*2312, the actual data rate is 2 * (2312-8) = 2* 2304 = 4608
6-60 Frequently Asked Questions LA-110 Ver. 3.5

The above description specifies our ability to support minimum cell rate.
However, this raises several issues. For example, if the line has been
synchronized on 2-wire, then the minimum is 40 cell/sec. Later the device may
synchronize on 4-wire and then the minimum must change to 79 cells/sec.
Q: How do I calculate the LA-110 packetization delay per ATM cell for CES
applications?
A: Calculating the LA-110 packetization delay per ATM cell:
Delay per cell = 47 / (8000 N), where:
47 Number bytes per cell in AAL1
8000 Number of bytes in one timeslot
N number of timeslots.
For example:
Delay for 64 kbps = 47/(8000 1) = 0.005875 = 5.875 msec
Delay for 384 kbps = 47/(8000 6) = 0.000979 = 979 sec
To the results, add an additional 4 msec delay for the LA-110 processing time.
Q: Can a standard ISDN bus with S interface be terminated on the LA-110 BRI
port?
A: The LA-110 BRI interface is used only as a physical extension of a standard
ISDN bus with an S interface over an ATM network. It does not terminate
the S interface, and it does not deal with messages. Two extension
applications are possible using the LA-110 with ISDN ports:
ISDN S interface to voice gateway.
ISDN S interface to another ISDN S interface (using LA-110 units on each
side).
You may connect any type of device (phones, computer fax modem) to the
ISDN bus and the LA-110 110 will provide the physical medium to support
transmission over an ATM network.
Q: How does LA-110 handle VLAN priority?

A: In bridging and routing mode, LA-110 supports transparent transmission of
VLAN frames up to 1522 bytes.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Frequently Asked Questions 6-61

6.5 Technical Support

Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local distributor from
whom it was purchased.
For further information, please contact the RAD distributor nearest you or one of
RAD's offices worldwide. This information can be found at www.rad.com (offices
About RAD > Worldwide Offices; distributors Where to Buy > End Users).
6-62 Technical Support LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Appendix A
Pinouts
This appendix provides the information needed to connect to the various LA-110
interfaces.
The information presented in this appendix includes connector types, connector
pin functions and where applicable the recommended wiring for relevant
adapter cables.
A.1 CONTROL Connector
D-Type Connector
The CONTROL connector of the LA-110 units with the data and E1 ports is a 9-pin
D-type female connector with a serial RS-232 DCE interface, intended for
connection to a supervision terminal. Connector pin functions are listed in
Table A-1.
Table A-1. DB-9 CONTROL Connector Pin Functions
Pin Function
2 Tx
3 Rx
5 GND
RJ-45 Connector
The CONTROL connector of the LA-110 with the FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports is an
RJ-45 8-pin female connector with a serial RS-232 DCE interface, intended for
connection to a supervision terminal. Connector pin functions are listed in
Table A-2.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 CONTROL Connector A-1

Appendix A Pinouts Installation and Operation Manual
To connect a supervision terminal having a 9-pin connector to the CONTROL

connector, use CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT cable that is supplied by RAD. Figure A-1
shows the wiring diagram of this cable.
To connect a supervision terminal having a 25-pin connector to the CONTROL
connector, use a standard 9-pin/25-pin adapter.
Table A-2. RJ-45 CONTROL Connector Pin Functions
Pin Function
1 Not connected
2 Not connected
3 Not connected
4 Signal Ground (SIG)
5 Receive Data (RXD) output to terminal
6 Transmit Data (TXD) input from terminal
7 Clear to Send (CTS) output to terminal
8 Request to Send (RTS) input from terminal
RJ-45
Connector 9-Pin D-Type Female
Connector
TXD 6 3
RXD 5 2
RTS 8 7
CTS 7 8
N.C 1 6
N.C 2 1
N.C 3 4
GND 4 5
LA-110 Side Terminal Side
Figure A-1. Wiring of CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT Cable
A-2 CONTROL Connector LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Pinouts
A.2 LA-110 Network Interfaces
2-Wire SHDSL and ADSL Network Interfaces

The 2-wire SHDSL and ADSL network interfaces of LA-110 use RJ-45 connectors
wired in accordance with Table A-3.
Table A-3. 2-Wire SHDSL and ADSL Network (Uplink) Interface Connector, Pin
Functions
Pin Function
1, 2, 3 Not Connected
4 Ring
5 Tip
6, 7, 8 Not Connected
2/4-Wire SHDSL Network Interface

The 2/4-wire SHDSL network interface of the LA-110 uses RJ-45 connectors wired
in accordance with Table A-4:
For 2-wire connect Line A
For 4-wire connect both Line A and Line B.
Table A-4. 2/4-Wire SHDSL Network (Uplink) Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
4 Ring Line A
Line A {
5 Tip Line A
3 Ring Line B
Line B {
6 Tip Line B
Note
When the unit is configured to CPE mode via the SHDSL menu
(Configuration>Physical Layer>SHDSL), the unit automatically detects whether
2 wires or 4 wires are connected to the uplink connector; no configuration is
needed for this parameter.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 LA-110 Network Interfaces A-3

A.3 LAN Interface Connector

The LAN port has a 10/100BaseTX Ethernet station interface terminated in an
RJ-45 connector. Connector pin functions are listed in Table A-5.
Table A-5. LAN Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Designation Function
1 TxD+ Transmit Data input, + wire
2 TxD Transmit Data input, - wire
3 RxD+ Receive Data output, + wire
4, 5 Not connected
6 RxD Receive Data output, - wire
7, 8 Not connected
A.4 Data Port Connectors

The V.35 data port has a 34-pin female connector and the X.21 has a 15-pin
D-type female connector. Table A-6 details the connector pinouts.
Table A-6. Data Port Connector Pinouts
V.35 X.21
Signal
Circuit Description
Function Pin Circuit Pin
(Function)
Protective A Frame 101 1 ---- Chassis Ground. It may be isolated

Ground (Shield) from Signal Ground.
Signal B Signal 102 8 ---- Common signal and DC power supply

Ground GND (GND) ground.
Transmitted P TD(A) 103 2 T(A) Serial digital data from DTE. In sync
Data S TD(B) 103 9 T(B) applications, the data translations
(Transmit) must occur on the rising edge of the
transmit clock.
Received R RD(A) 104 4 R(A) Serial output from the modem receiver.
Data T RD(B) 104 11 R(B) In sync applications, the data
(Receive) translations occur on the rising edge of
the clock.
Request to C RTS 105 3 C(A) A positive level to LA-110 when data

Send 10 C(B) transmission is desired.
(Control)
A-4 Data Port Connectors LA-110 Ver. 3.5

V.35 X.21
Signal
Circuit Description
Function Pin Circuit Pin
(Function)
Clear to D CTS 106 A positive level from LA-110 with

Send delay, after receipt of Request to Send,
and when
LA-110 is ready to transmit.
Data Set E DSR 107 A positive level from LA-110 when

Ready power is on, and LA-110 is (a) not in
DIGITAL LOOP mode, or (b) has not
received a REMOTE LOOPBACK signal
from the remote unit.
Data H DTR 108 Not used

Terminal
Ready
Carrier F DCD 109 5 I(A) A positive level from LA-110, except

Detect 12 I(B) when a loss of the received signal is
(Indication) detected or when Data Set Ready is
negative.
External U SCTE(A) 113 7 (A) A serial data rate clock input from the
Transmit W SCTE(B) 113 14 (B) data source. Positive clock translations
Clock must correspond to data
transmissions.
Transmit Y SCT(A) 114 6 S(A) A transmit data rate clock for use by an
Clock a SCT(B) 114 13 S(B) external data source. Positive clock
(Signal Timing) translations correspond to data
translations.
Receive V SCR(A) 115 A receive data rate clock output used

Clock X SCR(B) 115 by an external data sink. Positive clock
translations correspond to data
translations.
Local L and j A control signal input, which, when on,

Analog sets LA-110 into Local Analog
Loop Loopback (V.54 Loop 3).
Remote N and h A control signal input which, when on,

Digital Loop commands LA-110 to send a remote
Loopback command (V.54 Loop 2) to
the remote LA-110.
Test n and k A Control Signal output from LA-110;

Indicator positive during any test mode.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Data Port Connectors A-5

A.5 ISDN S Interface Connectors
ISDN S Port Connector Pin Functions

The ISDN S interfaces are terminated in RJ-45 connectors. Connector pin
functions are listed in Table A-7.
Table A-7. ISDN S Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
1, 2 Not connected
3 Transmit Data output, + wire
4 Receive Data input, - wire
5 Receive Data input, + wire
6 Transmit Data output, - wire
7, 8 Not connected
Adapter Cable for ISDN TE Interfaces

The interface connector of an ISDN NT port is wired to enable direct connection
to users equipment.
For ISDN TE ports, the users equipment must be connected through a cross-over
cable wired in accordance with Figure A-2.
Pin 1
Not Connected 1 1
Not Connected 2 2
Transmit Wire + 3 3
Receive Wire + 4 4
Receive Wire - 5 5
Transmit Wire - 6 6
Not Connected 7 7
Not Connected 8 8
Module User's Equipment

Side Side
Figure A-2. Cable for Connection of Users Equipment to ISDN TE Interfaces
A-6 ISDN S Interface Connectors LA-110 Ver. 3.5

A.6 FXS Interface Connectors

The FXS interfaces are terminated in RJ-11 connectors. Connector pin functions
are listed in Table A-8.
Table A-8. FXS Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
1, 2 Not connected
3 2-wire voice input/output ring
4 2-wire voice input/output tip
5, 6 Not connected
A.7 E1 Interface Connector

The E1 interface of LA-110 terminate in 8-pin RJ-45 connectors, wired in
accordance with Table A-11.
Table A-9. E1 Port Connector Pinout

Pin Function
1 Transmit data (ring)

2 Transmit data (tip)
3, 6 FGND
4 Receive data (ring)
5 Receive data (tip)
7 Input signal (TTL level), unbalanced
interface identification
8 GND
When LA-110 is ordered with unbalanced E1 interface, it is necessary to convert

the RJ-45 connector to the standard pair of BNC female connectors used by
unbalanced E1 interfaces. For that purpose, RAD offers a 150-mm long adapter
cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 (see Figure A-3).
Receive
(Green)
BNC
Female
RJ-45 Transmit
(Red)
Figure A-3. CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 Cable
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 E1 Interface Connector A-7

Table A-10. CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 Cable, Wiring Diagram
RJ-45 BNC
Connector Pin Connector
1, 4, 7, 8, shield 2 (NGND) Red

2 1 (Center)
1, 4, 7, 8, shield 2 (NGND) Green
5 1 (Center)
A.8 T1 Interface Connector

The T1 interface of LA-110 terminate in 8-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in
accordance with Table A-11.
Table A-11. T1 Port Connector Pinout

Pin Designation Function
1 TD (R) Transmit data (ring)

2 TD (T) Transmit data (tip)
3, 6 FGND
4 RD (R) Receive data (ring)
5 RD (T) Receive data (tip)
7, 8 Not connected
A.9 Power Supply Connector

LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces receive power from the
external power supply. Figure A-4 identifies the LA-110 power connector pins.
The pin assignment is listed in Table A-12.
4 5 6
1 2 3
Figure A-4. Power Supply Cable Connector
Table A-12. Power Supply Cable Connector, Pin Assignment
Pin Function
1 -48V output
2 +3.3V output
3, 4 Ground
5 +5V output
6 Power Good indication output
A-8 Power Supply Connector LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Appendix B
Alarm Messages
Table B-1 lists the alarm messages generated by LA-110 in ascending order of
their code numbers and explains their interpretation. The alarm messages are
listed in ascending order of their codes.
Table B-1. LA-110 Alarm Messages

Code Alarm Syntax Description Corrective Actions
1 CONFIG DATABASE The database currently stored in the Reload the default configuration and
CHECKSUM ERROR non-volatile memory of the LA-110 is then configure the LA-110 again (for
corrupted example, select Factory Default from
the System menu to reload the
default configuration)
2, 3 Reserved for future use N/A N/A
4 ALARM BUFFER More than 200 alarm messages have Informative message no action
OVERFLOW been written in the alarm buffer required.
since the last clear command. The It is recommended to read the
new alarms are overwriting the alarms, and then clear the buffer.
oldest alarms (the first alarms
written in the buffer)
5 Reserved for future use N/A N/A
6 USER E1 LINK SIGNAL Signal loss of the user E1 or T1 Check the equipment serving the
LOSS interface. This alarm is relevant only LA-110 user E1 or T1 link, and its
USER T1 LINK SIGNAL for unframed user E1 or T1 interface. connections.
LOSS
8 USER E1 LOCAL Local loss of multiframe alignment of Check the equipment serving the
MULTIFRAME ALARM the user E1 interface LA-110 user E1 link, and its
connections.
If problem recurs, contact RAD
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 B-1

Appendix B Alarm Messages Installation and Operation Manual
10 USER E1 REMOTE The remote unit connected to the Informative message no action
MULTIFRAME ALARM user E1 or T1 interface reports loss required.
USER T1 REMOTE of multiframe alignment If condition persists, check the link
MULTIFRAME ALARM to the remote equipment connected
to the user E1 or T1 interface of
LA-110, and the equipment itself.
If problem persists, contact RAD
12 USER E1 LINK FRAME A frame slip occurred at the user E1 Informative message no action
SLIP or T1 interface required.
USER T1 LINK FRAME This usually indicates timing If condition persists, check the
SLIP problems (incorrect selection of configuration of clock sources on the
timing reference) on the user E1 or equipment serving the link to the
T1 link user E1 or T1 interface of LA-110,
and the equipment itself.
14 USER E1 BPV ERROR A bipolar violation error has been Informative message no action
detected at the user E1 or T1 required.
USER T1 BPV ERROR
interface
If condition persists, check the
equipment serving the link to the
remote equipment connected to the
user E1 or T1 interface of LA-110,
16 USER E1 EXCESSIVE BPV Excessive number of bipolar violation This may indicate defective
errors detected by the user E1 or T1 connections, defective
USER T1 EXCESSIVE BPV
interface communication link or hardware
problems.
Check the equipment serving the

LA-110 user E1 or T1 link, and its
connections.

B-2 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarm Messages
18 USER E1 CRC-4 ERROR A frame with CRC-4 error has been No action required.
detected at the user E1 interface
If condition persists, check the link
to the remote equipment connected
to the E1 interface of the LA-110,
20 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The error rate detected at the user This may indicate defective
ERROR RATIO E1 or T1 interface on the frame connections, defective
synchronization bits is high, as communication link or hardware
USER T1 EXCESSIVE
defined by ITU-T Rec. G.732 problems.
ERROR RATIO
connections.

22 USER E1 REMOTE SYNC The remote unit connected to user Informative message no action
LOSS the user E1 or T1 interface reports required.
loss of frame alignment
USER T1 YELLOW If condition persists, check the link
ALARM to the remote equipment connected
to the user E1 or T1 interface of the
LA-110, and the equipment itself.
24 USER E1 LOCAL SYNC Local loss of frame alignment failure This may indicate defective
LOSS of the user E1 or T1 interface connections, defective
communication link or hardware
USER T1 RED ALARM
problems.

connections.

26 USER E1 AIS SYNC LOSS Local loss of frame alignment caused AIS indicates a problem at the
by the reception of AIS by the user equipment connected to the remote
USER T1 AIS RED ALARM
E1 or T1 interface end of the user E1 or T1 link.
Informative message no local

action required.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 B-3

28 USER E1 AIS AIS being received by the user E1 or AIS indicates a problem at the
T1 interface equipment connected to the remote
USER T1 AIS
end of the user E1 or T1 link.
Informative message no local

action required.
29 to Reserved for future use N/A N/A

38
39 ATM TX BANDWIDTH The total data rate of the Reduce the number of connections
EXCEEDS MAXIMUM connections already defined on the defined on the LA-110.
ALLOWED uplink exceeds the maximum
configured bandwidth
40 ATM LOSS OF CELL ATM layer detects an out-of-cell Make sure that the remote
DELINEATION FAILURE delineation (OCD) state on the uplink equipment connected to the uplink is
operating properly.
41 ALARM BUFFER CLEAR Alarm buffer has been cleared Informative message no action
required.
44 FRAME-RELAY DATA The serial user data port, configured Check correct configuration of the
PORT LINK DOWN for Frame Relay operation, cannot local and far end equipment. In
establish a link to the far end particular, check that both are
configured to use the same Frame
Relay management protocol.
Check for proper operation of the

local LA-110 and the remote Frame
Relay equipment.
46 RESET OCCURRED This message appears after LA-110 Informative message no action
has been reset, either by an explicit required.
command or as a result of automatic
If automatic resetting often recurs,
resetting.
inform Technical Support.
47 LAN PORT LINK DOWN The LAN port cannot establish Check proper connection of the
connection to a LAN LA-110 LAN port to an active LAN
(cables, hub power when applicable,
at least one active station on the
LAN, etc.). Replace cable if in doubt.
Check that the LAN port

configuration parameters are
compatible with those of the LAN
(auto-negotiation, rate and mode,
etc.) and correct as necessary.
B-4 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

48 DATA OAM LOOPBACK LA-110 initiated an OAM loopback. Informative message no local
action required.
The alarm is followed by the relevant
VP/VC number.
50 LAN LOOPBACK LA-110 initiated an OAM loopback. Informative message no action

required.
VP/VC number. Deactivate loopback when no longer
needed.
51 NETWORK REMOTE A remote loopback has been Informative message no action

LOOP activated on the local uplink required.
interface
Deactivate loopback when no longer
needed.
53 USER SIDE REMOTE A remote loopback has been Informative message no action
LOOP activated on the local user port required.

needed.
54 USER SIDE LOCAL LOOP A local loopback has been activated Informative message no action
on the user port required.

needed.
57 DATA LOCAL LOOP A local loopback has been activated Informative message no action
on the local data port required.

needed.
58 DATA REMOTE LOOP A remote loopback has been Informative message no action
activated on the local data port required.

needed.
59 to Reserved for future use N/A N/A

62
63 SHDSL EOC LOOPBACK A remote loopback has been Informative message no action
TOWARDS NETWORK activated on the embedded required.
operations channel of the SHDSL link
needed.
64 PARAMETER CHANGES After a software upgrade, some of Check and reconfigure as necessary
IN DB DUE TO UPGRADE the parameters are assigned new the LA-110
PROCESS values
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 B-5

66 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of frame slips detected Check the configuration of clock
FRAME SLIP at the user E1 or T1 interface during sources on the equipment serving
the last minute exceeds 10. the link to the user E1 or T1
USER T1 EXCESSIVE
interface of LA-110, and the
FRAME SLIP This usually indicates timing
equipment itself.
problems (incorrect selection of
timing reference) on the user E1 or If problem persists, contact RAD
T1 link Technical Support Department.
68 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The error rate detected on the CRC-4 This may indicate defective
CRC-4 ERROR bits (user E1 interface) or CRC-6 bits connections, defective
(user T1 interface) is high communication link or hardware
USER T1 EXCESSIVE
problems.
CRC-4 ERROR
LA-110 user E1 or T1 interface, and
its connections.

70 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of local loss of Check the equipment serving the
LOCAL MULTIFRAME multiframe alignment events LA-110 user E1 or T1 link, and its
ALARM detected at the user E1 or T1 connections.
interface during the last minute
USER T1 EXCESSIVE If problem persists, contact RAD
exceeds 10
LOCAL MULTIFRAME Technical Support Department.
ALARM
72 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of loss of multiframe Check the link to the remote
REMOTE MULTIFRAME alignment events reported by the equipment connected to the user E1
ALARM remote unit connected to the user or T1 interface of the LA-110, and
E1 or T1 interface during the last the equipment itself.
USER T1 EXCESSIVE
minute exceeds 10
REMOTE MULTIFRAME If problem persists, contact RAD
ALARM Technical Support Department.
74 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of remote loss of Check the link to the remote
REMOTE SYNC LOSS synchronization alarms reported by equipment connected to the user E1
the user E1 or T1 interface during or T1 interface of LA-110, and the
USER T1 EXCESSIVE
the last minute exceeds 10 equipment itself
REMOTE SYNC LOSS
B-6 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

76 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of loss of local This may indicate defective
LOCAL SYNC LOSS synchronization alarms reported by connections, defective
the user E1 or T1 interface during communication link or hardware
USER T1 EXCESSIVE
the last minute exceeds 10 problems.
LOCAL SYNC LOSS
connections.

77 DEVICE SYNCHRONIZED The main link synchronized at a rate Check configuration parameters of
ON LESS THAN lower than expected. main link at both equipment units
CONFIGURED connected in a link.
BANDWIDTH
Check whether it is possible to
resynchronize on a higher bandwidth
by disconnecting the link and
allowing to restart the link setup
process.
If not, change the configuration

parameters to take into account the
available bandwidth
78 JITTER BUFFER An underrun event occurred in the Informative message no action

UNDERRUN TX TO E1 jitter buffer serving the required.
transmit-to-user direction of the
If alarm recurs, check the uplink
user E1 interface
configuration and transmission
performance.
79 JITTER BUFFER An underrun event occurred in the Informative message no action

UNDERRUN TX TO DATA jitter buffer serving the required.
If alarm recurs, check the uplink
user data interface
configuration and transmission
performance.
80 JITTER BUFFER OVERRUN An overrun event occurred in the Informative message no action
TX TO E1 jitter buffer serving the required.
If alarm recurs, check the E1 link to
user E1 interface
the user equipment and its
transmission performance.
81 JITTER BUFFER OVERRUN An overrun event occurred in the Informative message no action
TX TO DATA jitter buffer serving the required.
If alarm recurs, check the data link to
user data interface
the user equipment and its
transmission performance.
82 NO BUFFER TO The maximum number of buffers Check configuration and correct as

NETWORK available in the LA-110 has already necessary
been allocated
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 B-7

88 RX OAM VC-AIS CELLS LA-110 started receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
START of the VC-AIS type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
89 RX OAM VC-AIS CELLS LA-110 stopped receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
STOP of the VC-AIS type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
90 RX OAM VC-RDI CELLS LA-110 started receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
START of the VC-RDI type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
91 RX OAM VC-RDI CELLS LA-110 stopped receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
STOP of the VC-RDI type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
92 VC CONT LOSS START Continuity loss is detected. LA-110 May indicate a problem at the
stopped receiving user or OAM cells equipment connected to the remote
from the uplink. This alarm appears end of the uplink.
only when the continuity check is
Informative message no action
initiated.
required
VP/VC number.
93 VC CONT LOSS STOP Continuity is restored. LA-110 Informative message no action

started receiving user or OAM cells required
from the uplink. This alarm appears
initiated.

VP/VC number.
94 USER OAM LOOPBACK LA-110 initiated an OAM loopback. Informative message no action
required
VP/VC number.
95 SHDSL INTERFACE SW A mismatch between software driver Upgrade LA-110 software

VERSION INCOMPATIBLE and LA-110 hardware was detected
WITH HW
B-8 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

96 OAM LOOPBACK FAIL A number of non-received periodic Disable alarm generation if you
START loopback responses over specified do not want to receive this alarm.
connection exceeded threshold.
Check the problematic
connection.
97 OAM LOOPBACK FAIL A response was received from the Informative message no action
STOP periodic loopback over specified required
connection.
100 VP CONT LOSS START Continuity loss is detected. LA-110 May indicate a problem at the
stopped receiving user or OAM cells equipment connected to the remote
from the uplink. This alarm appears end of the uplink.
Informative message no action
initiated.
required
VP/VC number.
101 VP CONT LOSS STOP Continuity is restored. LA-110 Informative message no action
started receiving user or OAM cells required
from the uplink. This alarm appears
initiated.

VP/VC number.
102 RX OAM VP-AIS CELLS LA-110 started receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
START of the VP-AIS type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
103 RX OAM VP-AIS CELLS LA-110 stopped receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
STOP of the VP-AIS type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
104 RX OAM VP-RDI CELLS LA-110 started receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
START of the VP-RDI type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
105 RX OAM VP-RDI CELLS LA-110 stopped receiving OAM cells Informative message no action
STOP of the VP-RDI type from the ATM required
network.

VP/VC number.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 B-9

106 VP OAM LOOPBACK FAIL A number of non-received periodic Disable alarm generation if you
START loopback responses over specified VP do not want to receive this alarm.
exceeded threshold.
Check the problematic VP.
107 VP OAM LOOPBACK FAIL A response was received from the Informative message no action
STOP periodic loopback over specified VP. required
B-10 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Appendix C
Transferring Software and
Configuration Files
This appendix presents procedures for using the TFTP or HTTP to perform the
following activities:
Download (install) software
Upload and/or download LA-110 configuration files.
Network administrators can use these procedures to distribute new software
releases and verified configuration files to all the managed LA-110 units in the
network from a central location.
To further expedite the configuration process, it is also possible to upload the

configuration data stored by LA-110 to a TFTP server as a standard disk file, and
then distribute this file to other units which use similar configuration. The same
procedure can be used to backup the configuration data of the managed units on
the management station or Telnet host: this enables the support personnel to
rapidly restore service in case of maintenance or replacement of users LA-110.
In addition, this appendix explains how to download new software releases via
Boot Manager.
C.1 Preparations for Using TFTP

The following conditions must be fulfilled before TFTP can be used:
1. The required suite of protocols (which includes as minimum the TCP/IP stack
and the TFTP server and client software) must be installed on the other
computer (the computer used to download files and/or accept uploaded
files).
2. The TFTP protocol runs over IP, therefore it is necessary to ensure IP

connectivity between LA-110 and the other computer. For example, LA-110
and the other computer must be attached to the same LAN.
Note
IP connectivity can be checked using standard tools such as ping.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Preparations for Using TFTP C-1

Appendix C Transferring Software and Configuration Files Installation and Operation Manual
3. LA-110 must be operated in the router mode, and must be assigned an IP

address and the associated subnet mask. These parameters are configured
via the LAN menu (Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN), see Chapter 4 for
detailed instructions.
4. You must obtain the IP address of the other computer.
5. If you intend to initiate TFTP transfer using a supervisory terminal connected to

the LA-110 CONTROL connector, make sure the LA-110 supervisory port is
properly configured. This is performed via the Control Port menu (Configuration
> System > Control Port), see Chapter 4 for detailed instructions.
Alternatively, you may use a Telnet host that can communicate with LA-110
through its LAN port.
C.2 Transferring Files via TFTP
Before starting:
1. Obtain the list of distribution files to be downloaded, and check that the
required distribution files are stored on the TFTP server.
2. Make sure that the TFTP server can communicate with the LA-110, for
example, by sending pings to the IP address assigned to the LA-110.
Downloading Software Files
Downloading Software Files (Terminal)
1. From the SW & File Transfer menu, select the following:
Command Download SW
Server IP (IP address of the TFTP server): 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Retry Timeout (intervals between connection retries in seconds): 160
Number of Retries (number of retry attempts): 15
File Name (name of the software release file).
2. Click Execute Command to start the software file transfer.
The software file transfer begins.
Note
If downloading failed, repeat the whole procedure.
Downloading Software Files (ConfiguRAD)
Path: Main > S/W and File Transfer > File Transfer via TFTP.
C-2 Transferring Files via TFTP LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Transferring Software and Configuration Files
1. Follow the path above to display the File Transfer via TFTP menu
(see Figure C-1).
2. From the File Transfer via TFTP menu, select the following:
Command Download SW
File Name (name of the software release file).
3. Click Execute Command to start the software file transfer.
The software file transfer begins. The download progress is displayed in

the Trace pane at the bottom of the ConfiguRAD screen.
Figure C-1. File Transfer via TFTP Menu, Software Download
Downgrading LA-110 Software
LA-110 allows rolling back to the previous software releases. When downgrading
the LA-110 software, you must reset its database via Boot Manager.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring Files via TFTP C-3

To downgrade the LA-110 software:
1. Download the necessary software file via TFTP as explained above (via
terminal or ConfiguRAD).
2. Connect an ASCII terminal to the CONTROL port of LA-110.
3. Configure the terminal application as explained in Chapter 3.
4. Reset LA-110 by powering it off and on.
5. Press <Enter> several times immediately after powering on LA-110.
The Boot Manager menu is displayed (see Figure C-2).

RAD LA110 Boot Version 3.01 (Jan 23 2005)
RAD Boot Manager Version 4.83 (Jan 23 2005)
0 - Exit Boot-Manager
1 - Show partitions information
2 - Set the Active Application
3 - Erase a partition
4 - Download an Application by XMODEM
5 - Select an Application to run temporarily
6 - Erase all partitions
7 - Show basic hardware information
8 - System Configuration.
9 - Download an Application by TFTP
a - Reset Data-base
Press the ESC key to go back to the Main Menu.
Select:
Figure C-2. Boot Manager Menu
6. From the Boot Manager menu, select Reset database.
LA-110 displays confirmation message.
7. Confirm database reset by typing y.
The database is reset, and LA-110 starts operating with default values.
Transferring Configuration Files
Downloading Configuration Files (Terminal)
The downloading of configuration files is similar to the downloading of software

file.

To download a configuration file to LA-110:
1. From the SW & File Transfer menu, select the following:
Command Download configuration
File Name (name of the configuration file).
2. Click Execute Command to start the configuration file transfer.
The configuration file transfer begins. The download progress is displayed

in the Trace pane at the bottom of the ConfiguRAD screen.
Downloading Configuration Files (ConfiguRAD)
Path: Main > S/W and File Transfer > File Transfer via TFTP.
1. Follow the path above to display the File Transfer via TFTP menu
(see Figure C-3).
2. From the File Transfer via TFTP menu, select the following:
Command Download configuration
File Name (name of the configuration file).
3. Click Execute Command to start the configuration file transfer.
The configuration file transfer begins.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring Files via TFTP C-5

Figure C-3. File Transfer via TFTP Menu, Configuration File Download

Uploading a Configuration Files
The uploading of configuration files is similar to the downloading of configuration

files described above, except for the following:
1. Select Upload configuration in Step 2 (both terminal and ConfiguRAD

procedures).
2. The file name entered by you determines the name of the file on the target
computer.
C.3 Transferring Files via HTTP
Software and configuration files can also be transferred using HTTP, when a
ConfiguRAD session is in progress.
Path: Main > S/W & File Transfer > File Transfer via HTTP > File Transfer via HTTP
> Download using HTTP.
Downloading Software File via HTTP
1. Follow the path above to display the Download using HTTP menu
(see Figure C-4).
2. From the Download Using HTTP menu, select Download SW from the
Command drop-down box.
3. Select a software file to download to LA-110 by clicking Browse and

navigating to the file location.
4. Click Submit to start downloading.
LA-110 starts downloading and displays the following message: The file
transferring procedure might take few minutes, at the end, the device will
reboot.
When download is completed, LA-110 displays the following message: File

successfully stored in the device.
LA-110 performs reboot.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Transferring Files via HTTP C-7

Figure C-4. Download Using HTTP Menu, Software File Download
Transferring Configuration Files
Configuration files can be downloaded to LA-110 or uploaded from it to the

management station.
To download configuration file:
1. From the Download Using HTTP menu, select Download Configuration from
the Command drop-down box.
2. Select configuration file to download to LA-110 by clicking Browse and

navigating to the file location.
3. Click Submit to start downloading.
To upload configuration file:
1. From the File Transfer menu, select Upload.
2. Click Submit to start uploading.
C-8 Transferring Files via HTTP LA-110 Ver. 3.5

3. Save configuration file to the management station.
Figure C-5. Upload Using HTTP Menu, Upload Configuration
C.4 Working with Boot Manager
LA-110 boots up automatically. After powering up, no user intervention is

required, except when the user wants to access the file system to update the
LA-110 software.
The Boot Manager allows the user to perform basic file transfer operations.
These operations are all optional.
To access the Boot Manager menu:
Press <Enter> several times immediately after powering up the LA-110.
The Boot Manager menu is displayed (see Figure C-6).
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Working with Boot Manager C-9

RAD LA110 Boot Version 2.33 (July 21 2004)

RAD Boot Manager Version 4.81 (July 21 2004)
7 - Perform Reset to the board
a - Reset Data-base
Select:
Figure C-6. Boot Manager Menu
From the Boot Manager menu, you can:
List all files stored in the flash memory

Exchange the operating and backup files
Delete the operating file; the backup file becomes the operating file
Download a new operating file (via XMODEM or TFTP); the previous operating
file is saved as the backup file
Delete all software and configuration files
Display the basic hardware information (RAM, ROM size etc)
Reset the LA-110 database (see Appendix D).
If you choose to exchange or delete a file, you are prompted for confirmation.
Downloading Application Files via XMODEM
Downloading application files using the XMODEM protocol is performed from the
Boot Manager menu.
To download application file via XMODEM:
1. Configure your ASCII terminal or terminal emulation utility running on your PC

to the 115.2 kbps data rate.
2. Access the Boot Manager menu.
The Boot Manager menu appears (see Figure C-6).
3. From the Boot Manager menu, select Show partitions information to identify
an available partition (status Free).
C-10 Working with Boot Manager LA-110 Ver. 3.5

4. If no free partitions are available, select Erase a Partition to erase a specific

partition or select Erase all Partitions to erase all partitions.
5. From the Boot Manager menu, select Download an Application by XMODEM.
6. Select the partition, to which you intend to download the application

software by typing its number, 0 or 1.
LA-110 responds with the following string:

Please start the XMODEM download.
7. Send the software release file to LA-110 using the XMODEM utility of your
terminal application.
Once the download has been completed, LA-110 displays the following
message: Finished XMODEM download and performs automatic reset.
Downloading Application Files via TFTP
You can download application software to LA-110 via Boot Manager using TFTP.
To download application file via TFTP:
1. Connect LA-110 to 10 Mbps LAN via the LAN port of the unit.
2. Access the Boot Manager.
3. From the Boot Manager menu, select System Configuration.
4. Configure the IP parameters of LA-110 (IP address, IP mask and default

gateway). These parameters are valid only for the TFTP file transfer via the
Boot Manager.
5. Reset LA-110 by powering the unit down and powering it up.
6. Access the Boot Manager.
7. From the Boot Manager menu, select Download an Application by TFTP.
8. Enter the target file name, IP address of the TFTP server, and a number of
partition, to which you intend to download the application software (0 or 1).
LA-110 starts TFTP download. The unit performs automatic reset, when
the application software download has been completed.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Working with Boot Manager C-11

C-12 Working with Boot Manager LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Appendix D
Database Initialization
D.1 Introduction
This appendix provides instructions for initializing the LA-110 database (that is,
reload the factory-default parameter values) during the reboot process.
This operation can usually be performed by selecting Factory Default in the

System menu (Configuration > System) from a supervisory terminal or Telnet
host. However, if the default password has been changed but the configured
password is not known, it is not possible to establish management
communication using a supervisory terminal or Telnet host. Therefore, first it is
necessary to force the reloading of the factory-default parameters by means of a
supervisory terminal directly connected to LA-110, before management
communication can be established.
Caution
To avoid unrecoverable changes to the LA-110 software, carefully follow the
instructions given below.
D.2 Database Initialization Procedure
Preparations
To prepare for initializing the database:
1. Connect the serial RS-232 communication port of a supervision terminal (any

PC running a terminal emulation program, for example, the HyperTerminal
utility available with most Microsoft Inc. Windows releases) to the LA-110
CONTROL connector.
2. Configure the communication parameters of the selected serial port for

asynchronous communication at 115.2 kbps, no parity, one start bit, eight
data bits and one stop bit.
3. If LA-110 is operating, disconnect the power.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Database Initialization Procedure D-1

Appendix D Database Initialization Installation and Operation Manual
Initialization Procedure
To initialize the LA-110 database:
1. Start the terminal emulation program in accordance with the configuration

parameters described above.
2. When ready, connect the power to the LA-110, and immediately start
pressing the <Enter> key many times in sequence until you see the boot
manager screen. A typical screen is shown below (the exact version and date
displayed by your LA-110 may be different).
RAD LA110 Boot Version 3.01 (Jan 23 2005)

RAD Boot Manager Version 4.83 (Jan 23 2005)
a - Reset Data-base
Select:
Note
If you miss the timing, LA-110 performs a regular reboot process, which starts
with BB0 Booting and ends with a Running message.
3. Select Reset Data-base. At the Are you sure (Y/N)? prompt, type Y.
The normal reboot sequence appears:
Loading ...
Decompressing to RAM.
Processing archive: FLASH

Extracting SHDSL-RO.BIN
........................................................
................................................... CRC OK
Running ...
D-2 Database Initialization Procedure LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Database Initialization
4. Press the <Enter> key several times to obtain the Login menu prompt.
5. Use the superuser user name and 1234 password to continue the
management session.
LA-110 now uses the factory-default parameters. You can perform the
desired configuration activities.
Database Initialization Procedure D-3

Appendix D Database Initialization Installation and Operation Manual
D-4 Database Initialization Procedure LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Appendix E
Operating Environment
This appendix describes the operating environment of LA-110, to provide the
background information required for understanding the LA-110 configuration
parameters and its performance monitoring capabilities.
The information presented in this appendix covers the following issues:
E1 environment Section E.1
T1 environment Section E.2
Digital subscriber line (DSL) transmission methods Section E.3
ATM environment Section E.4.
IP environment Section E.5.
Frame relay support over ATM Section E.6.
Ethernet support over ATM Section E.7.
Circuit emulation over ATM Section E.8.
SNMP environment Section E.9.
E.1 E1 Environment
E1 Line Signal
The E1 line signal is coded using the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) coding rules.
The HDB3 coding format is an improvement of the alternate mark inversion (AMI)
code.
In the AMI format, ones are alternately transmitted as positive and negative
pulses, whereas zeros are transmitted as a zero voltage level. The AMI format
cannot transmit long strings of zeros, because such strings do not carry timing
information.
The HDB3 coding rules restrict the maximum length of a zero string to 3 pulse
intervals. Longer strings are encoded at the transmit end to introduce non-zero
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 E1 Environment E-1

Appendix E Operating Environment Installation and Operation Manual
pulses. To allow the receiving end to detect these artificially-introduced pulses

and to enable their removal to restore the original data string, the encoding
introduces intentional bipolar violations in the data sequence.
The receiving end detects these violations and when they appear to be part of an
encoded zero suppression string it removes them.
Bipolar violations which are not part of the HDB3 zero-suppression string are
assumed to be caused by line errors, and are counted separately to obtain
information on the link transmission quality when the CRC-4 function is not used.
E1 Signal Structure
The E1 line operates at a nominal rate of 2.048 Mbps. The data transferred over
the E1 line is organized in frames. The E1 frame format is shown in Figure E-1.
Time Slot 0 Time Slot 16 Time Slots 1-15, 17-31
a. Even Frames (0,2,4-14) a. Frame 0

8 Bits per
Time Slot 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 X Y X X
FAS MAS
Channel Data
b. Odd Frames (1,3,5-15) b. Frames 1-15
I 1 A N N N N N A B C D A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS
32 Time Slots/Frame 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR
16 Frames/Multiframe 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Notes
I International Bit ABCD ABCD Signaling Bits
N National Bits (Sa4 through Sa8) X Extra Bit
A Alarm Indication Signal (Loss of Frame Alignment - Red Alarm) Y Loss of Multiframe Alignment
FAS Frame Alignment Signal, occupies alternate MAS Multiframe Alignment Signal
(but not necessarily even) frames
Figure E-1. E1 Frame Format
Each E1 frame includes 256 bits. The 256 bits are arranged in 32 timeslots of
eight bits each that carry the data payload. The frame repetition rate is 8,000 per
second, and therefore the data rate supported by each timeslot is 64 kbps. The
number of timeslots available for user data is maximum 31, because timeslot 0 is
always reserved.
E-2 E1 Environment LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Operating Environment
Timeslot 0
Timeslot 0 is used for two main purposes:
Delineation of frame boundaries. For this purpose, in every second frame

timeslot 0 carries a fixed pattern, called frame alignment signal (FAS). Frames
carrying the FAS are defined as even frames, as they are assigned the
numbers 0, 2, 4, etc. when larger structures (multiframes) are used.
The receiving equipment searches for this fixed pattern in the data stream
using a special algorithm, a process called frame synchronization. Once this
process is successfully completed, the equipment can identify each bit in the
received frames.
Transmission of housekeeping information. In every frame without FAS (odd

frames), timeslot 0 carries housekeeping information. This information
includes:
Bit 1 - this bit is called the international (I) bit. Its main use is for error
detection using the optional CRC-4 function.
Bit 2 is always set to 1, a fact used by the frame alignment algorithm.
Bit 3 is used as a remote alarm indication (RAI), to notify the equipment

at the other end that the local equipment lost frame alignment, or does
not receive an input signal.
The other bits, identified as Sa4 through Sa8, are designated national
bits, and are actually available to the users, provided agreement is
reached as to their use.
Multiframes
To increase the information carrying capacity without wasting bandwidth, the

frames are organized in larger structures, called multiframes. Two types of
multiframes are generally used:
256N, which consists of 2 frames (one odd frame and one even frame). The
256N multiframe is generally used when timeslot 16 is to carry users
payload. In this mode, the maximum number of timeslots available for
payload is 31 (maximum payload data rate of 1984 kbps). For systems which
use the common-channel signaling (CCS) method, the CCS information is
often transmitted in timeslot 16.
256S, which consists of 16 frames. The 256S multiframe is generally used

when timeslot 16 serves for the transmission of end-to-end signaling using
channel-associated signaling (CAS). CAS is typically used on links that transfer
voice channels. In this mode, the maximum number of timeslots available for
payload is 30 (maximum data rate of 1920 kbps).

Payload Encoding
Data Payload
Each payload timeslot in an E1 frame is transparent, that is, it does not modify
the users data in any way. Therefore, each timeslot can carry data at a rate of
64 kbps.
To carry data at higher rates, a service called fractional E1 can be used to

distribute the original data stream among several specified timeslots (such a
group of timeslots is called a bundle). At the other end of the link, the data is
collected from the specified timeslots and the original data stream is restored.
This enables transparent transfer of data at rates which are multiples of 64 kbps.
Analog Payload
Analog signals, for example, voice, are digitized, to convert them to data streams
that can be transferred over the link. The standardized approach is to digitize
each analog channel using pulse code modulation (PCM) at a sampling rate of 8
kHz, with each sample represented by an 8-bit word. This yields a data rate of 64
kbps, which means that each voice channel can be carried in one timeslot.
To achieve the best possible voice quality over the widest practical range of
analog signal amplitudes while using only 8 bits per sample, the signal is
compressed at the transmitting end and expanded at the receiving end, to
restore its original amplitude (this is called companding). The non-linear
companding law standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.713 for use in E1 frames is called
A-law.
The voice quality obtained using 64 kbps PCM encoding is quite good; it can even
support data transmission using voiceband modems (including fax) at relatively
high data rates.
To decrease the required rate needed to transport an analog channel, another

encoding method, adaptive differentially-encoded PCM (ADPCM) has been
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.726. ADPCM compresses the data rate needed to
carry one channel to only 32 kbps, thereby doubling the number of channels that
can be carried at a given payload rate at the expense of a small degradation in
quality.
E1 Line Statistics Using CRC-4 Error Detection
The CRC-4 function specified in ITU-T Rec. G.704 allows evaluating the quality of
transmission over E1 links.
When the CRC-4 option is enabled, frames are arbitrarily grouped in groups of 16
(these groups are called CRC-4 multiframes, and do not bear any relationship to
the 16-frame multiframe structures used with the 256S multiframe explained
above). A CRC-4 multiframe always starts with a frame that carries the frame
E-4 E1 Environment LA-110 Ver. 3.5

alignment signal. The CRC-4 multiframe structure is identified by a six-bit CRC-4

multiframe alignment signal, which is multiplexed into bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each
odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multiframe, up to frame 11 of
the multiframe. Each CRC-4 multiframe is divided into two submultiframes of 8
frames (2048 bits) each. The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a
four-bit checksum on each 2048-bit block (submultiframe). The four checksum
bits calculated on a given submultiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of
timeslot 0 of each even-numbered frame of the next submultiframe.
At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each submultiframe and
then compared against the original checksum (sent by the transmitting end in the
next submultiframe). The results are reported by two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of
timeslot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4 multiframe, respectively. Errors are
counted and used to prepare statistic data on transmission performance.
E1 Line Alarm Conditions
Excessive bit error rate. The bit error rate is measured on the frame
alignment signal. The alarm threshold is an error rate higher than 10-3 that
persists for 4 to 5 seconds. The alarm condition is canceled when the error
rate decreases below 10-4 for 4 to 5 consecutive seconds.
Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). This condition is

declared when too many errors are detected in the frame alignment signal
(FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the last 5 frames. Loss of
frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are detected in two
consecutive frames. The loss of frame alignment is reported by means of the
A bit
(see Figure E-1).
Note
For ATM equipment, the A bit is also used to indicate loss of ATM cell delineation.
Loss of multiframe alignment (applicable only when 256S multiframes are

used). This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the
multiframe alignment signal (MAS), as for loss of frame alignment. The loss of
multiframe alignment is reported by means of the Y bit (see figure C-1).
Alarm indication signal (AIS). The AIS signal is an unframed all-ones signal,
and is used to maintain line signal synchronization in case of loss of input
signal, e.g., because an alarm condition occurred in the equipment that
supplies the line signal. Note that the equipment receiving an AIS signal loses
frame synchronization.

E.2 T1 Environnent
T1 Signal Structure
The T1 line operates at a nominal rate of 1.544 Mbps. The data transferred over
the T1 line is organized in frames. Each T1 frame includes 193 bits.
T1 frame structure is shown in Figure E-2.
8 Other Frames Bit B Conveys

Byte Organization 8 Bits/Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A Frame 6 Signaling
(D4 Frame - See NOTE) B Frame 12 Information
Frame 24 Channels/Frame Ft CH CH CH CH
Organization Frame = 193 Bits or
1 2 13 24
Fs
Multiframe
Organization FR FR FR FR FR
1 2 7 11 12
Multiframe
SF (D4) 12 Frames
ESF: 24 Frames
NOTE:
In addition, ESF has a C-bit in frame 18 and a D-bit in frame 24
Figure E-2. T1 Frame Structure
The 193 bits consist of 24 timeslots of eight bits each that carry the data
payload. An additional timeslot, including one bit (the F bit) carries framing and
supervision information. As a result, the data rate supported by each payload
timeslot is 64 kbps. The data rate of the framing slot is 8 kbps.
To enhance link/system supervision capabilities, the frames are organized in

larger patterns, called super-frames. Two types of super-frames are used:
SF (also called D4) consists of 12 T1 frames.
Extended SF (ESF), consists of 24 T1 frames.
The SF format provides limited supervision capabilities such as end-to-end

reporting of local loss-of-signal (yellow alarm).
E-6 T1 Environnent LA-110 Ver. 3.5

The ESF format provides much improved supervision capabilities, and allows
better utilization of the 8 kbps framing timeslots. The major advantage of the ESF
format is that it supports on-line link performance monitoring (by means of a
2 kbps Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) channel), and in addition provides a 4 kbps
end-to-end supervision and control data link.
The implementation of the multiframing format is based on the use of various

F-bit sequences. The F-bit is used to carry three types of information:
Framing Pattern Sequence (FPS) defines frame and multiframe boundaries.
Facility Data Link (FDL) allows transfer of supervisory data, e.g., alarms, error
performance, test loop commands, etc., to be passed through the T1 link.
Note
RAD equipment with SNMP agents can use the FDL to carry inband management
traffic. The management data rate is then 2 kbps.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) allows the measurement of bit error rate and
enhances the reliability of the framing algorithm.
The F-bit pattern thus defines the structure of frames and multiframes. In the D4
(SF) frame format, the F-bit of consecutive frames is alternately interpreted as an
Ft bit (terminal framing bit) or Fs bit (frame signaling bit).
Ft pattern: alternating 0's and 1s defines the frame boundaries.
Fs pattern: fixed 001110 pattern, defines the multiframe boundaries, so that

one frame may be distinguished from another. In particular, the Fs pattern is
needed so that frames 6 and 12 may be identified for the recovery of
signaling bits.
In the ESF frame format, the multiframe structure is extended to 24 frames, but
the frame and channel structure are the same as in the D4 (SF) format.
Transfer of Signaling Information
The T1 frame does not include a dedicated timeslot for the transfer of channel
signaling, because all the timeslots (1 through 24) of the T1 frame are available
to the user. The timeslots may be used as transparent data carriers for fractional
T1 data, or for audio (voice) transmission.
When end-to-end transfer of signaling is necessary, e.g., to support voice

channels, two techniques can be used:
The channel-associated signaling (CAS) technique called robbed-bit

signaling. The robbed bit is the least significant bit (bit 8) of the channel
byte transmitted in each timeslot, and is actually robbed only once in every
six frames. When robbed-bit signaling is used, the signaling information
overwrites the least significant bit of the channel once in every six frames.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 T1 Environnent E-7

The technique called common channel signaling (CCS). In this case, the
signaling information is transmitted in a dedicated timeslot (usually timeslot
16), thereby leaving only 23 timeslots for payload. The advantage of the CCS
mode is that the channel bits are transparently transferred.
Note
To minimize the impact of the robbed bit signaling method, RAD equipment
supports additional, proprietary signaling transfer methods. These are described
in the Installation and Operation Manual of the modules, which support these
proprietary methods.
Thus, when signaling must be transferred for data channels, it is necessary to

implement the system using CCS (this requires reserving timeslot 16 for the
transfer of the CCS data).
T1 Line Signal
The basic T1 line signal is coded using the alternate mark inversion (AMI) rules. In
the AMI format, ones are alternately transmitted as positive and negative
pulses, whereas zeros are transmitted as a zero voltage level. The AMI format
cannot transmit long strings of zeros, because such strings do not carry timing
information. Therefore, the AMI signal source must generate a signal with
guaranteed minimum ones density.
The minimum average ones density is 1:8, therefore when a T1 signal is

transmitted over an AMI line each frame timeslot must include at least one 1"
bit. In certain applications, this would effectively reduce the data rate available to
the user to only 56 kbps per timeslot, and would preclude the provision of clear
channel capability (CCC). To circumvent this problem, modified line codes, which
perform zero suppression by substituting special codes for long strings of
zeros, are used.
A widely used zero suppression method is B8ZS. The B8ZS zero suppression
method provides clear channel capability, and the ones density requirement no
longer restricts user data characteristics. This means that each T1 frame timeslot
can support the full 64 kbps.
T1 Alarm Conditions
The basic alarm conditions are the red alarm and the yellow alarm.
Red Alarm. A red alarm is generated when the local unit has lost frame
synchronization for more than 2.5 consecutive seconds. Loss of frame
synchronization may be caused by Fs or Ft errors, by the reception of an AIS
signal, or by the loss of input signal.
In accordance with AT&T TR-62411, a system automatically recovers

synchronization when there has been a period of 10 to 20 consecutive
seconds free of the loss of sync condition. Since in many system applications
E-8 T1 Environnent LA-110 Ver. 3.5

this is an overly conservative specification, the FCD-T1M system offers faster

frame synchronization algorithms, which allow the user to select a fast
mode. In the fast mode, the time necessary to declare synchronization is
reduced to approximately one second free of the loss of sync condition.
Yellow Alarm. A yellow alarm is sent from the remote unit to inform the local
unit that a red alarm exists at the remote end.
Alarm indication signal (AIS). The AIS signal is an unframed all-ones signal,
and is used to maintain line signal synchronization when an alarm condition
occurs in the equipment that supplies the line signal.
E.3 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Transmission

Methods
Overview
Many DSL technologies have been developed in the recent years. Their purpose it
to enable using the wide installed base of copper (twisted pair) cables laid by the
telephone companies to provide the ubiquitous phone service (plain old
telephone service POTS) for high-speed digital transmission.
The main DSL methods supported by LA-110 include:
Single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) technology, supports

symmetrical transmission rates of up to 2.312 Mbps. SHDSL has been
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2.
Asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL), supports up to 8 Mbps in the

downlink direction and up to 1 Mbps in the uplink direction. The line code
used by ADSL interfaces is the Discrete Multitone (DMT) code. ADSL has been
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.992.1.
The various DSL interfaces are used to provide the uplink to the ATM network,
and cover ranges up to a few km over typical unloaded twisted pairs.
SHDSL Transmission Methods
SHDSL Transmission System Versions
SHDSL standards describe two types of transmission systems:
2-wire (2W) SHDSL system uses a single unloaded twisted pair.
4-wire (4W) SHDSL system uses two unloaded twisted pairs, and distributes
the payload among the two pairs using the same modulation methods as the
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Transmission Methods E-9
2W system. The 4W system has longer range, because it operates at lower

line rates.
This section presents only the 2W system, however the information is also
applicable to 4W systems.
SHDSL Transmission Subsystem Structure

The basic SHDSL transmission subsystem includes two units interconnected by a
single pair of wires, usually a regular unloaded twisted pair. The pair is used for
duplex transmission.
Two different types of SHDSL units are defined by ITU-T Rec. G.991.2:
SHDSL central unit (STU-C), usually located at the network side, at the central
office (CO), which controls the operation of the whole subsystem, supervises
the link setup process and provides the timing reference.
SHDSL remote unit (STU-R), which terminates the line at the users side, on
the customers premises (CPE).
SHDSL Modulation Method
SHDSL uses multi-level pulse-amplitude modulation (PAM) together with trellis

coding. Using advanced digital signal processing (DSP) techniques enables
symmetric data transmission at rates in the range of 192 to 2304 kbps
(corresponding to lines rates of 200 to 2312 kbps).
The modulation method is spectrally compatible with other transmission

technologies deployed in the access network, including other DSL technologies.
The LA-110 SHDSL subsystem can be configured to ensure compatibility with

regional standards, as specified in Annex A (North America) and Annex B (Europe)
of ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 (this includes both operational differences and
performance requirements).
SHDSL Signal Structure
The SHDSL line signal is organized in frames. The line signal structure enables the
transmission of both payload and overhead data. The main types of overhead
data are:
Synchronization word, for frame alignment.
Error detection and correction data also used for performance monitoring
data.
Embedded operations channel (eoc) - enables supervision and management

of the whole SHDSL transmission subsystem (STU-C and STU-R), and initiation
of diagnostic loopbacks and tests.
E-10 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Transmission Methods LA-110 Ver. 3.5
The transmit SHDSL data stream is generated by a framer, which also

demultiplexes the received data stream. The framer used in the LA-110 can be
configured to generate two types of data streams: n64 kbps data stream or
serial ATM data stream:
When operating two LA-110 units in a link, either framing method can be
used
When operating an LA-110 unit in a link with other equipment, select the
framing mode matching the mode used by the other unit.
SHDSL Line Transmission Process
The SHDSL line transmission process includes two stages: start-up and data
transmission.
To enable link establishment under various conditions, the SHDSL subsystem

operates in a master-slave mode, where the STU-C unit serves as the master, and
the STU-R unit is the slave.
The STU-C unit performs the following functions:
Controls the link start-up procedure.
Provides the timing reference for SHDSL transmission.
Manages the communication on the eoc channel.
The start-up process is automatically initiated by the STU-C upon power-up, and
uses advanced digital signal processing techniques together with a special link
activation process. It includes the following sequence of operations:
Data rate negotiation, which attempts to set up the link at the highest rate
possible (the maximum allowed rate is selected by the user, as part of the
link configuration parameters). This process has three main steps:
Analysis of line transmission characteristics (line probing) whenever a link

must be setup between two SHDSL modems.
Exchange of transmission parameters (handshaking) between the two

modems.
Transmission of special signals that enable training of echo cancellers and

equalizers, and the synchronization of SHDSL receivers to transmitters in
both directions of transmission.
Automatic detection and compensation of tip/ring polarity reversal on the

line.
After start-up, the SHDSL links support transmission of payload, as well as an

eoc. Data transmission is automatically started after start-up is successfully
completed.
The total overhead carried by an SHDSL signal is always 8 kbps. For example:
When the payload data rate is 192 kbps (3 64 kbps), the line rate is
200 kbps
When the payload data rate is 2304 kbps (36 64 kbps), the line rate is
2312 kbps.
SHDSL Transmission Parameters
The user must specify the following set of SHDSL transmission parameters:
Maximum link rate: this is the rate at which the SHDSL modems will attempt
to set up the link. A lower rate increases the maximum range, therefore when
the link cannot be set up at the requested rate, the SHDSL modems
automatically negotiate to select the highest possible rate.
Transmission mode. ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 specifies three sets of regional signal
characteristics for SHDSL modems, however only two of the sets are currently
offered for the LA-110:
The set of characteristics specified in Annex A is required for compatibility

in North American networks
The set of characteristics specified in Annex B is required for compatibility

in European networks.
Power backoff. When the estimated power loss on the link between the two
SHDSL modems is low, it may be desirable to use less than the maximum
allowed signal power. You can enable this option, called power backoff, to
reduce the interference caused by your signal to other equipment using pairs
in the same cable without degrading the link transmission quality.
ADSL Transmission Methods
ADSL Modulation Method
The characteristics of the ADSL signals are defined in the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1
standard. The ADSL line code is the Discrete Multitone (DMT) code.
The DMT line code is designed to provide a good match for the twisted-wire pair
channel. One of the main characteristics of the twisted-wire pair channel is the
extreme variation in its transmission function versus frequency within the range
of interest. For example, for operation over POTS infrastructure, the range is
from 25 kHz, which is the lowest frequency that can be used without significant
interference from the phone signals carried by the line, up to approx. 1.1 MHz.
To overcome this variation, discrete Fourier transform (DFT) techniques are used
to decompose the modulated signal into many mutually orthogonal signals,
located at a spacing of 4.3125 kHz (in accordance with the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1
standard, the downstream signal is decomposed into 256 discrete subcarriers,

and the upstream signal into 32 subcarriers).
Each subcarrier carries a certain fraction of the payload. The subcarrier

modulation method is a special form of quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM).
Due to the relatively high bandwidth efficiency of QAM, each subcarrier
essentially uses its own frequency band. Since this band is relatively narrow, it is
possible to process each subcarrier independently of the other subcarriers, so as
to compensate in a nearly optimal way for attenuation, group delay, and
intersymbol interference (ISI).
Figure E-3 shows a typical allocation of DMT subcarriers, which is suitable for
ADSL transmission systems operating over a POTS infrastructure. The
recommended operating parameters over POTS infrastructure are defined in
Annex A of the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard.
As seen in Figure E-3, the frequency ranges of the downstream and upstream
channels overlap partially. This capability is obtained by using echo cancellers.
Another approach for duplex transmission over one pair is frequency division
multiplexing (FDM). The FDM method is used when it is necessary to separate
(i.e., prevent the overlapping of) the frequency ranges used to transmit and
receive. For example, the frequency range required for ISDN signal transmission is
up to 95 kHz.
To support this frequency range, it is necessary to configure the ADSL

transmission subsystem for operation in the FDM mode. Figure E-4 shows a
typical range of subcarriers for each direction for operation over ISDN
infrastructure. The reduced number of subcarriers decreases the maximum range
by approximately 10%, relative to the range over POTS infrastructure. The
recommended operating parameters using FDM over ISDN infrastructure are
defined in Annex B of the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard.
POTS Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
6 7 255
4.3125 kHz ( 1104 kHz (

256
0.3 kHz 3.4 kHz 25.875 kHz 1099.6875 kHz
A. Downstream Subcarriers
POTS Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
7 8 9 34
0.3 kHz 3.4 kHz 30.1875 kHz 146.625 kHz
B. Upstream Subcarriers
Figure E-3. Typical Allocation of DMT Subcarriers (POTS Infrastructure)
ISDN Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
74 75 255
0.3 kHz 95 kHz 319.125 kHz 1099.6875 kHz
A. Downstream Subcarriers
ISDN Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
37 57
0.3 kHz 95 kHz 159.5625 kHz 245.8125 kHz
B. Upstream Subcarriers
Figure E-4. Typical Allocation of DMT Subcarriers (ISDN Infrastructure)
ADSL Payload Channels
The ADSL signal is formatted in frames and superframes, which include various
types of overhead and payload transport channels. The frame structures depend
on the type of payload, and therefore this section covers the characteristics
relevant to the transport of ATM signals.
The ADSL transmission subsystem supports the transmission of the following

main types of payload channels:
Downstream channel, designated AS0: simplex high-speed channel, used to

transmit data from the ATU-C to the ATU-R. ADSL systems support all the
downstream data rates specified in the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard, as well
as other data rates which are multiples of 32 kbps. The maximum
downstream data rate for ATM signals is 6.144 Mbps.
Upstream channel, designated LS0: simplex high-speed channel, used to

transmit data from the ATU-R to the ATU-C. ADSL systems support all the
downstream data rates specified in the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard, as well
as other data rates which are multiples of 32 kbps. The maximum upstream
data rate for ATM signals is 640 kbps.
The data rates of the payload channels are usually not synchronized to the ADSL
line data rate. This is achieved by inserting padding bits and idle ATM cells in the
data stream, but in this case it is necessary to use a synchronization mechanism
that restores the original data rate at the other end of the link.
An alternative approach is to lock the payload channels rates to the ADSL line
rate: in this case, the channel rates are determined by the line rate, minus a fixed
rate of overhead data.
ADSL Subsystem Overhead
The ADSL subsystem overhead includes the following main types of data, used
for synchronization and ADSL link management:
Synchronization word
ADSL overhead channel (aoc), which enables the ATU-C and ATU-R units to
exchange status data.
For example, during the ADSL link start-up process the aoc is used to send
the system configuration parameters, evaluate the transmission capabilities
of the interconnecting line, select the optimum data rate (necessary when
using the rate-adaptive mode), and perform the handshaking required to
start service.
Other aoc functions include:
Transmission of performance statistics from the ATU-R to the ATU-C.
Activation of test loopbacks, and bit error rate (BER) measurement.
Checking of ATU-R software version, and automatic updating by

downloading the ATU-C software to the ATU-R when versions differ.
Handshaking with the remote unit.
Embedded operations channel, eoc, used for communication between the

ATU-C and ATU-R. The eoc is used for in-service and out-of-service
maintenance, and for the retrieval of ATU-R status information and ADSL
performance monitoring parameters.
The communication through the eoc is always initiated by the ATU-C. The
ATU-C serves as the master of the eoc link, and sends commands to the
ATU-R. The ATU-R serves as slave on the eoc link, and it only responds to the
commands. The only exception is for the "dying gasp" message: this message
is sent by the ATU-R when an imminent power failure is detected and is
inserted in the upstream link as soon as appropriate bytes are available,
irrespective of the commands sent by the ATU-C.
CRC check bytes for error detection.
Fixed indicator bits for OAM.
FEC redundancy bytes for error correction.
ADSL Framing Modes
The channels and overhead described above are inserted in frame structures
defined by ITU-T Rec. G.992.1. Two types of framing are used on the ADSL link:
full overhead and reduced overhead. Furthermore, two versions of full overhead
and two versions of reduced overhead are defined.
The four resulting framing modes, referred to as framing modes 0, 1, 2 and 3,

are defined in Table E-1.
An ATU-C configured for ATM transport must support the framing structures 0
and 1; support of reduced overhead framing structures 2 and 3 is optional.
Table E-1. ADSL Framing Modes
Framing Structure Description
0 Full overhead framing with asynchronous bit-to-modem timing. This requires the
synchronization control mechanism to be enabled.
1 Full overhead framing with synchronous bit-to-modem timing. In this case, the
synchronization control mechanism is disabled.
2 Reduced overhead framing with separate fast and sync byte in the fast and
interleaved latency buffer respectively (requires 64 kbp framing overhead)
3 Reduced overhead framing with merged fast and sync byte, using either the fast or
the interleaved latency buffer (requires only 32 kbps framing overhead)
The ATU-C indicates during link initialization the highest framing structure number
it supports. If the ATU-R indicates a lower framing structure number during
initialization, the ATU-C selects the framing structure number indicated by the
ATU-R.
ADSL Coding Methods
To ensure reliable transmission, ADSL transmission include several functions:
Modulation/demodulation, using DFT.
Evaluation of the transmission function of the channel

Distribution of payload among the various subcarriers. This algorithm
analyzes the signal-to-noise (SNR) for each subcarrier, and assigns the
optimal amount of payload information to be carried by each subcarrier. As a
result, each subcarrier carries 2 to 15 bits per symbol, resulting in a payload
of up to 60 kbps per subcarrier. Since the error events for each subcarrier are
essentially independent, this method achieves a coding gain near the
maximum theoretical gain.
Error detection and correction algorithm. The algorithm applies forward error
correction coding to overcome random errors and impulse noise error events,
that are common to the residential twisted-wire pairs. The coding methods
include concatenated trellis and Reed-Solomon block coding, and interleaving:
The ADSL systems use a variable rate Reed-Solomon code. The code
provides a redundancy in the range of 2 to 24 bytes at block lengths of
up to 255 symbols (bytes). The amount of redundancy can be configured
by means of the configuration files. This gives the operator the flexibility
to adjust the error protection to the typical requirements of the
installation, to provide the customers extra protection where loop
conditions call for.
The trellis code, specified in the ANSI DS1.413-1995 standard, is used as

the inner code in the concatenated coding scheme of ADSL systems, with
the Reed-Solomon code serving as the outer code. The trellis code
operates on the data spread on the various subcarriers, and thus does
not add extra latency. The trellis code improves the noise margin
measured for stationary added noise (such as white noise and typical
NEXT and FEXT noise) without requiring additional bandwidth.
Protection against impulse noise is obtained by using interleaving.

Interleaving can be independently enabled/disabled by the user for each
channel and transmission direction. The interleaving parameters require a
trade-off between protection and latency.
Adaptation to a Changing Environment

Due to the advanced coding techniques described above, ADSL systems can
transport the required payload in very noisy environments.
To evaluate its operating environment, the system measures the noise

environment during start-up and selects accordingly optimized operational
parameters. Moreover, the system uses a special adaptation algorithm to select
automatically the highest rate that can be supported by the line; for this purpose,
the user can specify a minimum acceptable data rate and the adaptation
algorithm uses this value in case the line quality is not sufficient to support the
nominal data rate of the intended application.
To ensure continued protection during normal operation, the system continues to

monitor on-line the noise environment, and to adapt itself to slow changes in the
environment. This function, called bit swapping, is automatically performed by
exchanging messages through the aoc channel. For example, the addition or
deletion of a narrow band noise will immediately be detected and the ADSL
systems will use the handshaking protocols defined in the standard to make the
arrangements required to optimally protect the data at all times. These changes
are performed without disrupting the service and without any resynchronization
and training procedures.
When operating in the rate-adaptive mode, the rate adaptation algorithm will not
only perform bit swapping, but at start-up will also select automatically the
highest data rate that can be supported while maintaining a user-specified noise
margin.
Network Timing Reference (NTR)

Some services, for example, Voice and Telephony over ATM (VToA), require that a
reference clock be available for the higher layers of the protocol stack, that is,
above the physical layer. This reference click is used to guarantee end-to-end
synchronization of transmit and receive sides.
To support the distribution of a timing reference over the network, the ADSL
system may transport to the ATU-R an 8 kHz timing marker, designated NTR,
which supplied to the ATU-C.
The enables the ATU-C to provide timing information, which then becomes
available to the equipment connected to the ATU-R. This reference timing has an
accuracy corresponding to the accuracy of the clock provided to the ATU-C. The
maximum frequency variation of the NTR is 32 ppm.
E.4 ATM Environment
Characteristics of ATM Service

ATM is a public high-performance cell-switched service. Its main characteristic is
the use of very short packets, called cells, and intelligent switching nodes
("ATM switches"). The handling and routing of these cells, based on information
carried in each cell header, is very simple and efficient, therefore high-speed
transmission can be achieved.
Moreover, the use of short cells minimizes delay variation problems inherent in
other packet transmission technologies, e.g., Frame Relay, etc., and simplifies cell
handling.
ATM networks provide customers with individual access over various facilities, i.e.,
each individual subscriber has a dedicated physical access path, however the
E-18 ATM Environment LA-110 Ver. 3.5

switching and transmission facilities are shared by the subscribers, in a way

similar to the sharing of LAN and WAN resources.
ATM Network Structure

ATM service is usually provided by ASPs (ATM Service Providers) as well as data
carrier service providers, and in general consists of several ATM switches
interconnected by high-speed point-to-point transmission links.
Each transmission link interconnects two ATM switches. Time-division multiplexing

on each transmission link is obtained by distributing the traffic generated by the
subscribers over virtual paths (VPs). In accordance with the UNI specification,
each link can have up to 256 VPs. Each VP is further subdivided into virtual
channels (VCs). Each VP can support up to 65536 VCs.
The subscriber is connected by means of an access link to one of the network

switches, and defines its communication requirements, e.g., average data rate,
quality of service, etc., at subscription time. The connection point between the
ATM network and the subscribers equipment is designated the User-Network
Interface (UNI).
ATM Cell Structure
Figure E-5 shows the structure of the ATM cell. Each cell has a 5-byte header that
carries the control data, and a 48-byte information field, for a total of 53 bytes.
The header includes the following information fields:
General flow control (GFC). The four GFC bits are always set to 0 when
transmitted through the UNI, but can be used for local flow control purposes.
Virtual path identifier (VPI). The VPI includes eight bits. When not all the bits
are in use, the VPI is inserted in the least significant bit positions.
Virtual circuit identifier (VCI). The VCI includes sixteen bits. When not all the
bits are in use, the VCI is inserted in the least significant bit positions.
Note
An ATM circuit is defined by a unique VPI.VCI pair (VCIs can be reused on a
different VPs).
Payload type (PT). The payload type, encoded by means of three bits, is used
to discriminate between cells carrying users payload, and the various types
of cells used for ATM operations and maintenance (OAM). The OAM cells can
be used for transfer of ATM signaling information, in-service testing (e.g.,
loopbacks) and performance monitoring, as well as to fill in idle intervals
between cells carrying users payload.
Cell loss priority (CLP) indicator. This bit is used to indicate the priority set by
the user for this cell: 0 for high cell priority, and 1 for low priority.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 ATM Environment E-19

Header error control (HEC). This field is designed for correction of single-bit,
and detection of multiple-bit address errors.
GFC (4 bits) VPI (4 bits)
VPI (4 bits) VCI (4 bits)
Header VCI (8 bits)
VCI (4 bits) PT (3 bits) CLP
HEC
Cell Payload (Byte 1)
Payload .
Figure E-5. ATM Cell Structure
ATM Network Operation

Basically, ATM is a connection-oriented technology. ATM cells are transported
over the network by setting up virtual channel connections (VCCs) between the
UNIs of two subscribers wishing to communicate.
Note that the VCI in the ATM cell header is assigned per link, and therefore it may
change across the network within the same VCC. Similarly, a VP groups VCs
carried between two ATM entities, and therefore the VPI may also change along a
given VCC.
Each ATM switch handles the VCs associated with a given VP as a block: such VCs
are globally switched, without unbundling or processing the individual VCs in any
way, and without changing their VCI numbers. This method ensures that the cell
sequence of each VC is always preserved.
ATM network capacity design is based on traffic statistics, because the traffic
handled by the ATM switches and the interconnecting links consists of large
numbers of cells, generated by many independent sources. Statistically, the
traffic generated by any specific set of users (e.g., users in a branch office) has a
relatively constant rate, but its instantaneous rate varies rapidly.
FIFO buffers are used to temporarily store traffic peaks, and release data at a
controlled rate. Therefore, the delay incurred by a cell in its passage through the
network changes, because it depends on several factors:

Link transmission delays. These delays decrease when the link data rates
increase.
Processing delays within the network and users equipment. These delays are
relatively constant.
Time spent by cells waiting in buffers. These delays vary with the traffic load.
Due to the bursty nature of the traffic, at times the instantaneous traffic offered
by the network users may exceed the available ATM network resources (these
resources include link bandwidth, buffer capacities, and the processing power of
elements used to route the traffic).
Congestion occurs when the instantaneous traffic offered by the users exceeds
the available network resources. When congestion occurs, some of the cells are
lost (either because they are intentionally discarded within the ATM network, or
because they are not accepted by the network).
Users must therefore agree with the network operators, at subscription time, on
the amount of traffic that the network must transfer reliably. In principle, this
traffic contract specifies the maximum traffic load that the network will accept
from that particular user; as long as the user does not generate traffic in excess
of the agreed-upon amount, the ATM network guarantees proper transfer.
Since the traffic generated by each user affects the service to other users, any
ATM network, and each element connected to an ATM network (including the LA-
110) must be able to perform traffic policing, to ensure that the traffic accepted
from each user does not exceed the amount specified in its traffic contract (any
excess traffic will be discarded).
Thus, the ATM network can be designed to offer to users a committed

information rate, and may be able to support, when resources are available,
higher peak rates.
Priorities in Traffic Handling
To enable a user to optimally utilize the ATM transmission capabilities subscribed

for, it is necessary to allow each user to specify the relative importance (priority)
of the traffic generated by its applications.
Two different types of priority can be implemented:
Priority with respect to intentional discarding of cells in case of congestion.

This priority is indicated by means of the CLP bit appearing in each cell
header: lower-priority cells (cells with CLP = 1) are discarded preferentially in
case of network congestion.
Note
The CLP bit in the cell header indicates the loss priority, therefore traffic which is
more important to the user must be assigned low cell loss priority (CLP = 0).

Note that if after discarding all the low priority cells, the offered traffic still
exceeds the available network resources, the network will also discard priority
cells (cells with CLP = 0), starting with the priority cells arriving from users
that exceed their subscribed traffic rates.
Priority with respect to the emission of cells toward the network. This priority
is an internal priority mechanism whose purpose is to prevent the delaying of
traffic with higher priority (as determined by users preferences), when the
equipment is already engaged in the transmission of lower-priority traffic.
This is particularly important in equipment with multiple ports, e.g., LA-110.
ATM Network Service Categories
As explained above, ATM network performance depends on traffic load versus

network resources, therefore it is not constant. Users nevertheless need a
predictable quality of service (QoS).
The required QoS depends on the application using the ATM connection, and
therefore it must be clearly defined (this is done at subscription time, by means
of the traffic contract, which is the collection of traffic parameters agreed upon
between the user and the ATM network operator). For example:
An ATM connection used for video or voice transmission generates traffic at a

constant rate, and requires that the transmission delay through the network
be also relatively constant (to a certain degree, buffers can be used to
smooth out variations). On the other hand, the occasional loss of a few cells
could be tolerable, because of the subjective interpretation of video and
audio information.
An ATM connection used for file transmission, LAN interconnection, or data

communications, is not very sensitive to delay: such connections can tolerate
any delay up to the delay that causes time-out of higher-level protocols, but
is very sensitive to the loss of cells (any cell lost, or received with errors,
requires retransmission of the whole message).
For standardization, the ATM Forum standards specify several types of service
categories:
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended for real-time applications

that require a constant bandwidth, and tightly constrained delay
and delay variation. The required bandwidth must be available
as long as the connection is active.
A typical application for CBR service is circuit emulation.
VBR Variable bit rate service, intended for applications that require
constraints on the maximum delay and delay variation, e.g.,
video, voice, etc. Two types of VBR service are defined:
RT-VBR real-time VBR, which requires tight control on

delay and delay variation.

NRT-VBR non-real-time VBR, with more relaxed

requirements).
UBR Unspecified bit rate service, intended for non-real-time

applications which do not require tightly constrained delay and
delay variation, e.g., data communications applications such as
file transfer, e-mail, etc.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it enables the user to specify a

minimum desired cell rate.
ABR Available bit rate service. This service is similar to UBR, except
that it is capable of adaptation to changes in ATM transfer
capabilities without inducing excessive cell loss.
ATM Network Transmission Parameters
To enable consistent definition of transmission requirements, a standard set of

traffic parameters has been defined in the ATM Forum traffic handling
specifications. The traffic parameters include:
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) Maximum rate of cells accepted from the user.
Generally, cells received at rates exceeding the PCR are
discarded.
PCR values generally specify the maximum rate for all
the cells (CLP=0+1), however sometimes separate PCR
values may be specified for cells with CLP=0 (high
priority) and CLP=0+1 (all cells).
Maximum Cell Maximum time allowed for the transfer of a cell to its
Transfer Delay destination. Cells spending a longer time in transit are
(maxCTD) considered useless to the users application.
Peak-to-Peak Cell The maximum tolerable variation in the cell transit time
Delay Variation through the network.
(CDV)
Sustainable Cell Rate The long-term average cell rate provided by the user.
(SCR)
Maximum Burst Size The maximum number of cells allowed in a single burst.
(MBS) Longer bursts may be discarded.
Cell Loss Ratio (CLR) The maximum ratio of cells that may get lost in the
network when the offered users traffic conforms to
the traffic contract.
Minimum Desired The minimum desired rate of cells for the UBR+ mode.
Cell RAte (MDCR)

A traffic contract includes the parameters listed above (or at least the mandatory
parameters, e.g., PCR). The UNI function is to enforce the traffic contract on the
traffic arriving from the user, to ensure that it does not exceed the agreed-upon
limits (any non-conforming traffic is selectively discarded in accordance with the
principles listed above, to ensure that users exceeding their limits do not degrade
the service to conforming users).
ATM Protocol Stack
The ATM transmission method uses very short cells, whereas most applications
use much longer service data units (SDUs): for example, Ethernet frames have
lengths up to approximately 1500 bytes, Frame Relay frames can be more than
9000 bytes long, etc.
Therefore, it is necessary to define a set of procedures (stack of protocols) that

will enable inserting and removing application data from ATM cells, and convert
the address information to enable routing to the desired destination.
Figure E-6 shows the general structure of the ATM protocol stack.
Service Data Units (SDU)
Service-Specific Convergence Sublayer

(SSCS)
Common-Part Convergence Sublayer

(CPCS)
ATM Adaptation
Layer (AAL)
Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR)
ATM Layer
UNI Physical Layer
ATM Cells
Figure E-6. ATM Protocol Stack
The general structure of the ATM protocol stack is as follows:
The top layer is the service-specific convergence sublayer (SSCS), which

converts the service data units received from the users application to the
CPCS format. The SSCS depends on the users application type.
The insertion of payload data into the 48-byte information field of an ATM
cell is accomplished by the third layer, the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL). The
function of the AAL is to map the protocol data units (PDUs) of higher layers
into the ATM layer. AAL functions are specified in ITU-T Rec. I.363.

Using an AAL gives ATM the flexibility to carry entirely different types of
service within the same transmission format, because the AAL is not an ATM
network process, but instead is performed by the network terminating
equipment, e.g., the LA-110.
Thus, after data is processed by an AAL type that can appropriately handle
the users application characteristics, the only task an ATM network must
perform is to route cells from point to point, in accordance with the
information in the cell headers.
The AAL layer consists of two sublayers:
The top sublayer is the Common Part Convergence Sublayer (CPCS), which
provides the service access point (SAP) to the ATM service.
The second sublayer is the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) sublayer,

which splits the CPCS PDUs into 48-byte units, that are then passed to
the ATM layer for insertion in ATM cells.
The next layer, located atop the UNI physical layer, is the ATM layer.
The lowest layer in the ATM protocol stack is the UNI physical layer. For the
LA-110, this is the layer responsible for the transfer of ATM cells by the
uplink port. For example, for an uplink port with E1 interface, the functions of
the physical layer are:
Generation of the E1 frame and multiframe structure, and the

corresponding F-bit patterns.
Insertion of ATM cells in the E1 frame timeslots. Only 30 timeslots are

used (timeslots 0 and 16 are not used for ATM cell transmission). ATM
cells are byte-aligned to the timeslot boundaries (each payload byte of an
ATM cell is inserted in one timeslot).
Transmission and reception of E1 signal.
AAL Types Supported by LA-110
Several AAL types have been standardized, to provide optimal support for various
types of payload data.
The LA-110 supports the following AAL types:
AAL1, which is intended for constant bit rate (CBR) applications. In CBR
applications, e.g., circuit emulation service (CES) for E1 signal transport, etc.,
it is necessary to emulate the transmission characteristics of regular data
transmission circuits, and in particular fixed delay and preservation of timing
accuracy.
For example, the data transferred through an E1 user port is handled by

AAL1. Analog voice, which is supported by I/O modules with FXS ports, can
also be transmitted over AAL1.

AAL2, which is intended for variable bit rate (VBR) applications that require
maintaining the timing relationship between the source and the destination,
but the bit rate may vary. For example, digitized voice can be supported by
AAL2, using the Loop Emulation Service (LES). In particular, AAL2 must be
used to support Emulated Loop Control Protocol (ELCP).
AAL5, which is intended for connectionless and connection-oriented variable

bit rate (VBR) services. AAL5 is primarily designed to meet the communication
requirements of LANs and other similar applications. The data transferred
through the synchronous data port of the LA-110 is handled by AAL5.
Operations and Maintenance
The ATM standards specify the methods to be used for operations and
maintenance (OAM) in ATM networks. The OAM functions to be made available in
ATM networks include:
Performance monitoring enables monitoring the normal operation of

equipment and links, and detection of defects and failures.
Detection of defects and failures made by identification of abnormal

performance.
System protection enables correction of defect and failure effects by

selection of alternate facilities.
Collection of failure and performance information enables management

stations to obtain information on system state.
Support for fault localization enables use of internal or external test

functions to detect faults whose location is not obvious from the failure and
performance information normally generated by the system.
OAM Flows
The applicable standards, e.g., ITU-T Rec. I.610, define five OAM flows. An OAM
flow is a bidirectional exchange of OAM information (generally performed by
means of a special type of cells, called OAM cells) between peer entities. The five
OAM flows are designated F1 through F5, where the flows F1, F2, and F3 cover
the physical layer, and the flows F4 and F5 cover the ATM layer.
The physical layer OAM flows, used to detect physical layer failures and enable
the management system to monitor transmission performance, are as follows:
F1 Lowest-level OAM flow, covers a portion (called regenerator section)

of an ATM system located between two entities directly connected by
a physical link.
F2 Covers a digital section of an ATM system. A digital section is located

between two end points, interconnected by one or more physical

links.
F3 Covers a transmission path in an ATM system. The transmission path

is delineated by end points that can assemble/disassemble cells, and
process the information carried in the cells, e.g., can detect cell
boundaries, analyze headers, and perform OAM functions. A
transmission path consists of one or more digital sections.
The ATM layer OAM flows, used to monitor the operation and performance of the
ATM layer, are as follows:
F4 VP-level OAM flow, covers a VP connection. A VP connection is

terminated at end points that can terminate virtual path connections.
The virtual path connection consists of one or more transmission
paths.
F5 Highest-level OAM flow, at the VC connection level. A VC connection is

terminated at end points that can terminate virtual channel
connections. The virtual channel consists of one or more virtual path
connections.
The F5 flow is used for end-to-end fault management, for

maintenance, and for performance management over a virtual channel
connection.
The LA-110 supports the F1, F2, F3, and F5 OAM flows in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. I.610.
Main Types of OAM Cells
The OAM cells are special cells that are transmitted in idle intervals, during which
no payload waits to be transmitted (usually, forced insertion is used if no idle
interval is available within a group of 65535 cells). The cell type and function is
identified by one byte, sent immediately after the 5-byte ATM cell header; the
remaining bytes may carry additional information to support the cell function.
Fault management uses the following types of OAM cells:
CC Cells CC (continuity check) cells are periodically transmitted

downstream (nominally once per second) by a VC end point
when no user cells are received for three consecutive seconds,
and stops after one valid user cell is received.
AIS Cells AIS (alarm indication signal) cells are periodically transmitted
downstream (nominally once per second) by a VC end point
which detects a VC failure (unavailability). The transmission of
AIS cells at the VC level starts when neither user cells, nor
continuity check cells are received for three consecutive
seconds, and stops after one valid user or continuity check cell
is received.
The AIS cell may include information on the type and location of

the failure.
FERF Cells FERF (far-end report failure) cells are periodically transmitted
upstream (nominally once per second) by a VC end point which
started transmitting AIS cells, or detected a VC failure
(unavailability).
The FERF cell may include information on the type and location
of the failure.
Note
When an LA-110 port is configured for Frame Relay operation, the corresponding
Frame Relay OAM functions (link integrity verification, and the AIS and RDI
(remote defect indication) conditions) are mapped from the Frame Relay side to
the ATM side in accordance with the applicable Frame Relay Forum documents:
Document FRF.5 for ports configured for the network interworking mode.
Document FRF.8 for ports configured for the service interworking mode.
The payload field of performance monitoring cells carry data which enables error
detection. The main fields are as follows:
PM cell sequence number (0 to 256), followed by the total number of user

cells sent since the last performance monitoring cell has been transmitted (0
to 65535 cells).
Block error detection code, carries a checksum that enables detection of

errors in the payload fields of the users cells preceding the performance
monitoring cell.
Maintenance cells carry commands:
PM activate/deactivate command: starts/stops the transmission and

evaluation of performance monitoring cells.
Continuity check activate/deactivate command. The command instructs the

receiving equipment whether to transmit and/or receive (evaluate) CC cells.
Loopback activate/deactivate command (this function can also be controlled

by commands from the LA-110 supervision terminal, Telnet host, or
management station). The loopback controlled by this command is performed
at the ATM layer on OAM cells, and is used to instruct its destination (one or
both of the VCC end points, or any other equipment that can evaluate OAM
cells) to return OAM cells toward the command source (the equipment that
sent the loopback command).
The LA-110 executes loopback activate/deactivate command, but cannot

initiate these commands.
LA-110 supports the OAM cells, and can provide ATM layer performance
monitoring data.
E-28 IP Environment LA-110 Ver. 3.5

E.5 IP Environment
This section describes the IP environment.
The information presented in this section refers to Version 4 of the IP protocol

(IP4), currently the most widely used protocol version. IP4 is the only protocol
version supported by LA-110 units and RADview stations.
Introduction to IP
IP means Internet Protocol. The term IP protocol is often used to indicate a

standardized set of rules and procedures that enable data exchange through a
packet-switched network.
Accordingly, the term Internet indicates the set of networks that use the IP
protocol and are interconnected in a way that, at least in principle, permits any
entity on one network to communicate with any entity on another network.
Note
The term suite of IP protocols is also often used, in recognition of the fact that
the operation of the Internet is actually defined by many related protocols.
IP Networks, IP Hosts and IP Ports
Any entity that can communicate using the IP protocol is called an IP host.
The connection point between an IP host and an IP network is called IP port.
An IP network forms when a number of IP ports can communicate directly (peer

to peer) using the IP protocol, without any intermediaries.
An IP host can have any number of IP ports. Moreover, the ports may be located
on different IP networks.
IP Addresses
To enable IP communication between two IP hosts, it is necessary to find a route

between their IP ports. For this purpose, each IP port is assigned an IP address.
An IP address is a number selected in accordance with the IP protocol. The only

purpose of an IP address is to permit unambiguous identification of an IP port.
Therefore, each IP port must be assigned a distinct and unique IP address.
The IP protocol does not require the IP port to be related in an unambiguous way
to a physical (communication) port. This has two main implications:
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 IP Environment E-29

Since the IP port is actually a connection to an IP network, any number of IP

ports can share a given physical port.
An IP port may be reached through several physical ports.
Note
By convention, the scope of IP addresses has been extended in two ways:
To permit identification of IP networks
To permit simultaneous addressing of all the ports connected to a IP network
(this operation is called broadcasting).
IP Packet Structure
The information exchanged through IP networks is organized in packets. The

structure of an IP packet, as specified by IP protocol Version 4, is as follows (the
numbers are byte numbers):
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31
IP IP IP Type of Service Total IP Packet Length

Version Header (IP TOS) (total number of octets in header +
(4) Length payload)
Fragment Identification Flags Fragment Offset

(16 bits) (3 bits) (13 bits)
(These fields are used for IP packet fragmentation)
Time to Live Number of IP Header Checksum

(Range: 0 to 255; Upper-Layer
when 0, packet is Protocol Carried in
discarded) Payload
(IGMP = 2)
(UDP = 17)
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
Options (when used) Padding (as required)
Payload (maximum bytes: 65535 header length)

.
.
.

IP Address Structure
An IP address is a 32-bit number, represented as four 8-bit bytes. Each byte

represents a decimal number in the range of 0 through 255.
The address is written in decimal format, with the bytes separated by decimal
points, e.g., 164.90.70.47. This format is called dotted quad notation.
An IP address is logically divided into two main portions:
Network portion
Host portion.
Network Portion
In general, the network portion is assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers

Authority (IANA), and its main purpose is to identify a specific IP network. For
exceptions, see the Global vs. Private IP Addresses section below.
There are five IP address classes: A, B, C, D, and E. However, only the A, B and C
classes are used for IP addressing. Consult your network manager with respect to
the class of IP addresses used on your network.
The network portion of an IP address can be one, two, or three bytes long, in
accordance with the IP address class. This arrangement is illustrated below:
IP Address
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Class A Network Host Portion

Portion
Class B Network Portion Host Portion
Class C Network Host Portion

Portion

The class of each IP address can be determined from its leftmost byte, in
accordance with the following chart:
Address Class First Byte Address Range
Class A 0 through 127 0.H.H.H through 127.H.H.H

Class B 128 through 191 128.N.H.H through 191.N.H.H
Class C 192 through 223 192.N.N.H through 223.N.N.H
where:
N - indicates bytes that are part of the network portion

H - indicates bytes that are part of the host portion.
Host Portion
In general, the host portion is used to identify an individual host connected to an

IP network. For exceptions, see Subnetting section below.
After obtaining an IP network address, the using organization is free to assign

host identifiers in accordance with its specific needs.
Note
The following host identifiers have special meanings, and must not be assigned
to an actual host:
The all-zeros host identifier is interpreted as a network identifier.
The all-ones host identifier is interpreted as a broadcast address. Therefore,
a message with an all-ones host identifier is accepted by all the hosts in the
network.
Global vs. Private IP Addresses
Given the current number of users already having access to the Internet, and the
rapid increase in this number, the 32-bit IP space address available in Version 4 of
the IP protocol is rather limited.
On the other hand, an IP address must permit unambiguous identification of any

host in the Internet.
That is the reason the allocation of IP addresses to networks is globally controlled

by a universally-accepted IP registry organization (IANA).

Although any address used on the Internet must be unique, there are many IP
networks, called private networks, which are not connected to the Internet. A
private network is also created when the access of hosts to the Internet is
controlled by protocols and procedures that do not permit an outsider to find
and use directly the actual address of the hosts connected to that network. A
typical example of a private network is the internal IP network of an enterprise
(such networks are often called intranets).
In recognition of this fact, IANA permits using two types of addresses:
Global addresses, i.e., addresses that and are unique in the whole Internet
Private addresses, i.e., addresses allocated for internal use only and
therefore cannot be used on the Internet.
Although no restrictions need to be imposed on private addresses except for

conforming to the structure specified in the Network Portion section above,
the following address spaces have been specifically put aside by IANA for use
as private addresses:
The Class A addresses in the range of 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 (this

group of addresses is formally referred to as 10/8). This address space is
actually one Class A network number.
The Class B addresses in the range of 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 (this

group of addresses is formally referred to as 172.16/12). This address
space defines 16 contiguous Class B network numbers.
The Class C addresses in the range of 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

(this group of addresses is formally referred to as 192.168/16). This
address space defines 256 contiguous Class C network numbers.
Note
Three techniques, all supported by the LA-110, are available to improve the
utilization of scarce global address space:
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Network Address Translation (NAT) and Network Address/Port Translation
(NAPT).
Port Address Translation (PAT).
See the Dynamic Allocation of IP Addresses section below.
Subnetting
Given the scarcity of IP network addresses, for organizations operating several

relatively small, physically separated, IP networks, e.g., several departmental
networks, it is advantageous to enable several physical networks to share a
common IP network address. Small in this context means that the number of IP
ports connected to each of these networks is small relative to the host address
space for the corresponding IP address class.

The approach taken to enable the sharing of an IP network address by two or

more networks is called subnetting, which means use of subnets. The subnetting
is relevant only within the using organization, and therefore can be freely
selected to meet its specific needs.
To enable subnetting, the meaning of the bits in the host portion of the IP
address is further sub-divided into two portions:
Subnet number. For example, subnet numbers can be used to identify

departmental subnets. The subnet number follows the network identifier.
Host number - the last bits of the IP address.
This subdivision is illustrated below:
Net Number Subnet Number Host Number
For example, when the subnet includes 16 IP hosts, only the last four bits need
to be reserved for the host number. For an organization which obtained one
global Class C network address, this means that four bits are available to identify
subnets. Therefore, this organization can implement 16 IP subnets, each
comprising up to 16 hosts (except for two subnets that are limited to 15 hosts).
Subnet Masks
Subnet masks are used to indicate the division of the IP address bits between the
net and subnet portion and the host portion.
The mask is a 32-bit word that includes ones in the positions used for net and
subnet identification, followed by zeros up to the end of the IP address.
For example, the default subnet mask for any Class C address (i.e., all the eight
bits in the host address space are used for hosts in the same net) is
255.255.255.000.
However, if the same address is used in a subnet comprising up to 16 hosts and

for which the host numbers range is 00 to 15, the subnet mask changes as
follows:
IP Address 192 70 55 13
(Dotted-Quad)
IP Address (Binary) 1011 1111 0100 0110 0011 0111 0000 0111
Subnet Mask 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000
(Binary)
Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240

(Dotted-Quad)
In most applications, the binary subnet mask is built as a contiguous string of

ones, followed by a number of zeros (the number of zeros is selected as
needed, to complete the number of subnet mask bits to 32). Therefore, when

this conventional approach is used, the subnet mask can also be specified simply
by stating the number of ones in the mask. For example, the subnet mask
shown above is specified by stating that it comprises 28 bits.
Dynamic Allocation of IP Addresses
To improve the utilization of the IP address space, several protocols have been
developed. When operating as a router, LA-110 supports the following protocols:
Use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), used to provide

configuration parameters to IP hosts, including assignment of an IP address
and subnet mask.
Network Address Translation (NAT) and Network Address/Port Translation

((NAT/NAPT), enables converting a large number of private IP addresses to a
smaller number of global IP addresses.
Use of Port Address Translation (PAT). PAT complements the NAT by allowing
outside access to certain users on the network using private addresses.
DHCP Services
Two types of services DHCP can be provided by the LA-110 IP router:
DHCP relay services: in this mode, the IP router relays DHCP requests to a
predefined DHCP server. The user can specify the maximum number of hops
that a DHCP request can traverse before being discarded.
DHCP server services: in this mode, the IP router itself serves as the DHCP
server, which provides in response to DHCP requests an IP address, an IP
subnet mask, a default gateway, and the IP addresses of two DNS servers
(primary and secondary). The user can define up to 10 different DHCP
address pools. For each pool, the user specifies the IP address range, the
default gateway, the primary and secondary DNS servers, and the lease time.
NAT/NAPT Services
The LA-110 IP router can also provide network address translation (NAT) and
network address/port translations (NAPT). The translations can apply to either
the LAN or the WAN port:
When the address translation is defined on a LAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the LAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
WAN side.
When the address translation is defined on a WAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the WAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
LAN side.

Four types of translations can be defined:
Dynamic (temporary) translation of a group of virtual IP addresses to a

smaller group of real IP addresses, in accordance with the usage
requirements received from the hosts using virtual IP addresses. This type is
similar to the basic traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
Static (permanent) translation of a specific virtual IP address to a specific real

IP address. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
Transparent translation (no translation at all): the real and virtual IP

addresses are identical. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in
RFC2663.
Dynamic utilization of a single IP address in accordance with usage

requirements received from the virtual IP addresses, using transport
identifiers (port numbers) for multiplexing. In this case, This type is similar to
NAPT, a form of traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
All the translations, except for the transparent translation, hide the virtual
addresses from the outside world (outside is determined by the type of
interface, as explained above).
PAT Services
PAT is a static translation that specifies a unique mapping between a
[real IP address; port; protocol] and a [virtual IP address; port]. Its purpose is to
enable access from the real IP side to a host using a virtual IP address that is
included in an existing dynamic NAPT definition.
Therefore, a PAT translation can be defined only if a matching dynamic NAPT

translation exists (matching means that a SINGLE PAT entry has the same real IP
and virtual entries).
IP Routing Principles
IP Communication between Hosts within the Same Network

The exchange of information between IP hosts is made in packets using the
structure specified by the IP protocol. As explained in the IP Packet Structure
section above, IP frames carry, within their header, the IP addresses of the
destination and source hosts.
In accordance with the IP protocol, an IP host checks the addresses of all the
received frames, and accepts only frames carrying its own IP address as the
destination. The source address is then used to enable the destination to
respond to the source.
An IP host will also respond to broadcasts (frames whose destination host

identifier is all-ones).

Note IP hosts support additional protocols within the IP suite, e.g., protocols used for
connectivity checking, maintenance, etc. Therefore, IP hosts will accept additional
types of messages, which are beyond the scope of this description.
When checking the destination address of an IP frame, an IP host starts by

checking the network identifier. If the network identifier is different, the host will
immediately reject the frame. Therefore, IP hosts can communicate only if they
have the same network identifier.
For example, this means that when a users IP host is connected directly, through
a LAN, to the LA-110 LAN port, the network identifier part of the IP address
assigned to the LA-110 LAN port must be identical to the network identifier of
the users IP host.
IP Communication between Hosts Located on Different

Networks
When the destination host is on a different IP network, before IP communication
can be established it is necessary to find a route between the local IP network to
the destination network.
When the user knows the route within the IP network that connects the two
hosts (that is, all the intermediate hosts through which the IP packets exchanged
between the two hosts must pass), it is possible to specify this route directly.
This method is called static routing, and its main advantage is security.
However, in most cases it is not possible to specify a static route. Therefore,

special procedures are needed to find a suitable route. These procedures are
called routing, and the function that implements them is called IP router, or just
router.
The most common type of routing protocol in use is called Routing Information
Protocol (RIP), and the current version is referred to as RIP2. RIP1 is also still
used, and is supported by LA-110.
The router can be a software program running on any IP host, but most often it is
implemented on dedicated hardware, e.g., a special purpose PC.
Any router has at least two ports: a local LAN port and a WAN port. Accordingly, a
router keeps two basic types of tables:
Local LAN table. This table includes the IP addresses of the hosts connected
to the LAN port of the router. These addresses are learned from the source
addresses of the IP frames appearing on the local LAN. The LAN table is
dynamically updated: this means that new hosts are added as they appear on
the LAN, and hosts which are inactive for a specified (long) interval are
removed.
In addition to the dynamic entries in the table, many routers permit the user
to define static addresses in the LAN table. These static addresses are not
removed from the table even if they are inactive for long periods.

Routing table. This table includes information on the IP routes to other

routers. Routers periodically exchange special messages that enable to build
the routing information appearing in this table. The table is dynamically
updated by these exchanges, therefore new routes are added whereas old, or
disconnected, routes are removed.
In addition to the dynamic entries in the routing table, most routers permit
the user to define static entries to the desired destinations in the routing
table. These entries are permanent, and in addition they have priority over
dynamic (learned) entries: this means that the user-entered route will always
be used (provided it is active), even if a dynamic route is also available.
A router receiving an IP frame with a destination address not located on the local
LAN must find a route through the WAN or Internet to the destination. In general,
this involves asking the other routers whether the destination is on their local
LAN.
After the appropriate remote router is found, the process ends. At this stage, the
local router can send the IP frame to the next router on the route to the
destination; the next router then sends the frame to the third router on the path
to the destination, and so on. When the remote router gets the frame, it places it
on the local LAN, where the addressed host can read it. Responses from the host
automatically follow the same route through the Internet, but in reverse.
Default Gateways
The general IP routing process described above has two shortcomings:
It requires significant time to complete, because it involves a rather lengthy

exchange of information
The destination cannot influence the selection of a route, which is

automatically performed.
To partially overcome these shortcomings, the IP protocol permits the destination

host to specify one of the following routing options:
The IP address (and the subnet mask) of the router to be used as a default to
establish IP communication. The router selected for this purpose is called
default gateway.
The next hop address: this is the address to which any packets not addressed
to hosts in the same net (or subnet) will be sent. This is usually the address
of a specific IP router, which is known to be able to provide the route to
the desired destinations.
For example, a default gateway must always be specified when the RADview
station is not on the same IP network with the managed LA-110 unit. This is
often the case when the LA-110 unit is managed inband.

Tools for Checking IP Connectivity
The IP protocol is referred to as an unreliable connectionless packet delivery

protocol, because each packet transmitted by an IP host travels on its own
through the network until it eventually reaches its destination. To ensure reliable
delivery, higher layer protocols are used, for example, the widely-used TCP
protocol.
However, using higher layer protocols cannot provide an answer to the need to
check that it is indeed possible to reach the desired IP destination address,
because configuration errors or a network fault, for example, temporary
congestion or failure of critical communication links, may still prevent the
establishment of an IP connection. Therefore, it is often necessary to check for IP
connectivity.
The IP protocol suite includes a special protocol, the Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP), that enables IP hosts connected to the Internet to report a wide
range of errors and provide information about the conditions that caused the
errors. Support for this protocol is mandatory on every IP host.
ICMP includes a dedicated connectivity test procedure, implemented by means of

two types of ICMP messages: echo request and echo reply. This procedure is
often referred to as pinging: the host wanting to check IP connectivity to a
destination sends one or more ping (echo request) messages, and the
destination returns an echo reply message for each request. By comparing the
number of pings sent to the number received and the time needed for each reply
to reach the ping source, the source host can obtain useful information regarding
the transmission conditions.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Frame Relay Support over ATM E-39

E.6 Frame Relay Support over ATM
The serial data port of the LA-110 can be configured to support Frame Relay
equipment. To transfer Frame Relay traffic over the ATM network, LA-110 can be
configured either to encapsulate the Frame Relay PDUs (frames) in the ATM
protocol, or to translate them to the ATM protocol.
Frame Relay PDU Structure
Figure E-7 shows the structure of the Frame Relay frames (formally, the frames
are called protocol data units PDUs).
Frame Start Flag
Frame Header DLCI (6 bits) C/R EA (0)
DLCI (4 bits) FECN BECN DE EA (1)
Information Byte 1 Payload Data
. .
. .
. .
Information Byte N Payload Data
Frame Trailer FCS (Byte 1)
FCS (Byte 2)
Frame End Flag
Figure E-7. Frame Relay PDU (Frame) Structure
Each Frame Relay PDU starts and ends with an one-byte flag, and in addition
includes:
Two-byte header that carries the routing control data.
Information field, which carries payload data of variable length.
Two-byte trailer.
The frame fields have the following functions:
Flag. The flag is used to separate between consecutive frames. Only one flag
is needed to separate consecutive frames, therefore the ending flag of a
frame can also serve as the opening flag of the next frame.
Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The standard DLCI consists of 10 bits,
therefore the allowed range of DLCIs is 0 through 1023. Some values in this
range are reserved. The reserved DLCIs are as follows:
E-40 Frame Relay Support over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5

DLCI Function
0 Used for local in-channel signaling
1 through 15 Reserved for network use
16 to 991 Available for users traffic routing
992 to 1023 Reserved for network use
The function of the DLCI is to serve as a routing label for frames.
Command/Response (C/R) bit. The C/R bit is transparently transferred, and is

available for users protocols.
Extended Address (EA) bit. The EA bit is used to indicate the use of extended
addressing. In general, only 10-bit DLCIs are used, and therefore the EA bit is
set to 0 in the first header byte, and to 1 in the second header byte.
Forward Explicit Congestion Notification (FECN) bit. The FECN bit is normally
set to 0. When congestion occurs, that is, when the network does not have
sufficient resources to handle the users traffic at the current rate, the FECN
bit can be set by the network to 1, to notify downstream equipment (that is,
other equipment that receive the frame) that congestion avoidance
procedures should be performed.
This bit is intended for use by protocols which enable the destination to
control the traffic generated by the source: in response to the reception of
frames with the FECN indicator set, the destination is expected to signal the
source that it must reduce the rate at which it sends data.
Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) bit. The BECN bit is normally
set to 0. When congestion occurs, the BECN bit can be set by the network to
1, to notify upstream equipment (that is, the equipment that transmits the
frames) that congestion avoidance procedures should be performed.
This bit is intended for use by protocols where the traffic is controlled by the
source: in response to the reception of frames with the BECN indicator set,
the source is expected to reduce the rate at which it sends data.
Delete Eligibility (DE) indication. This bit is used to indicate the priority set by
the user for this frame. This bit is set to 1 for frames that have lower priority
and may be discarded in case of congestion, or when the network rejects
users data because the user exceeds its subscribed data rate.
Information field. The information field carries the users data.
Frame check sequence (FCS). The FCS field consists of two bytes, calculated
in accordance with the CRC16 polynomial specified by ITU-T Rec. Q.921. The
LA-110 also supports the CRC32 polynomial.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Frame Relay Support over ATM E-41

Note The CRC16 polynomial is effective at detecting errors in frames up to 4096 bytes
long. For longer frames, it is necessary to select the CRC32 polynomial. If some
equipment on the transmission path does not support the CRC32 polynomial, the
user must select higher-level protocols that can provide the error detection
function.
Handling of Frame Relay Traffic
When using the Frame Relay interface mode, the ATM protocol stack includes an
additional sublayer, located atop the AAL5 CPCS, as shown in Figure E-8.
Frame Relay PDU
FR-SSCS
AAL5 CPCS
AAL5
Segmentation and Reassembly
ATM Layer
UNI
UNI
Physical Layer
Figure E-8. ATM Protocol Stack with FR-SSCS
This sublayer, called Frame Relay Service Specific Convergence Sublayer

(FR-SSCS), performs the functions required to transport the Frame Relay PDU
through the ATM network. In particular, it is necessary to perform the following
functions:
Convert the Frame Relay DLCI to the desired ATM VPI.VCI pair. The LA-110
user can specify, for each DLCI, the desired VPI.VCI pair.
In general, each DLCI is routed through a unique VPI.VCI pair (ATM

connection), however for connections defined on Frame Relay ports
configured for the network interworking mode the LA-110 provides the
option to route several DLCIs through the same ATM connection.
Convert between the bits used to control congestion, in accordance with the
documents applicable to the Frame Relay port interworking mode (Frame
Relay Forum document FRF.5 for ports configured for the network
interworking mode, and document FRF.8 for ports configured for the service
interworking mode):
E-42 Frame Relay Support over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Conversion between the congestion indications supported by the ATM

network to the FECN and BECN bits of the Frame Relay protocol.
Conversion between the DE bit received from the Frame Relay DTE and
the CLP bit in the corresponding ATM cells. In this respect, the user can
configure the LA-110 either to perform conversion of equivalent
indications, or to set the bits to a predetermined value.
Convert OAM information between the Frame Relay side and the ATM side in
accordance with the documents applicable to the Frame Relay port
interworking mode (FRF.5 and FRF.8).
The LA-110 enables the user to select additional conversion services to be

performed, in accordance with the selected interworking method:
For network interworking, the user can specify the DLCI to be used at the far
end of the link, to complete the end-to-end connection.
For service interworking, the user can select the handling of the upper layer
user protocols:
Multiprotocol translation - the LA-110 converts the encapsulation header

from the format required by RFC 1490 (Frame Relay) to the format of RFC
1483 (ATM).
This mode is used for transferring internetworking (routed or bridged)

protocols, e.g., in LAN-to-LAN applications.
Transparent - The LA-110 transparently transfers the encapsulation

header.
This mode is used when the users protocols do not conform with the
protocols supported in the translation mode, but are compatible with the
users equipment at the two ends of the connection. A typical application
for this mode is packetized voice.
E.7 Ethernet Support over ATM
Introduction to Ethernet Transmission
One of the most successful LAN technologies is referred to by the generic term
Ethernet. The Ethernet technology is suitable for a wide range of physical media:
coaxial cable, twisted pairs and optical fibers. The current standards for Ethernet
transmission cover rates from 10 Mbps to 10 Gbps. In many office LANs, Ethernet
runs at 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps; network interface cards (NICs) for PCs usually
support both of these rates.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Ethernet Support over ATM E-43

The basic standard covering Ethernet LANs is IEEE Standard 802.3, which is very
similar to the original Ethernet V2.0 specification (ISO/IEC also have a similar
standard). In addition to the aspects covered by IEEE 802.3 standards, there is a
wide range of LAN standards (the IEEE 802 family) that cover other aspects of
LAN transmission, for example, bridging, with particular emphasis on Ethernet
LANs.
Ethernet standards (in their broadest interpretation) cover the physical and data
link control layers (layers 1 and 2 in the OSI model; IP is a layer 3 protocol). The
data link control layer is split into two sublayers:
Media access control (MAC)
Logical link control (LLC).
Ethernet LAN Topologies
Ethernet LANs use a multidrop topology. The LANs can be implemented in two
main topologies:
Bus topology, which consists of a single coaxial cable that runs between the
users stations. This topology supports only half-duplex communication
Star (hub-based) topology, which is the main topology used today.
Figure E-9 shows the general structure of a LAN using the star topology.
10/100BaseT Ethernet Hub

S D
TX Pair
RX Pair
Figure E-9. Star (Hub-Based) Ethernet LAN Topology
In the star topology, all the nodes on the LAN are connected to a common unit,
which serves as the hub of the LAN. The hub can be implemented in two ways:
Simple Ethernet hub, which detects the transmitting node and transparently
distributes its signal to all the other nodes. A hub supports only half-duplex
communication (the same as in a bus topology).
Ethernet switch: the switch includes more sophisticated circuits that enable
both half-duplex and full-duplex operation and prevent collisions.
E-44 Ethernet Support over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5

The LAN cables are usually made of two twisted pairs (one transmit pair and one
receive pair). The standard connector type is RJ-45, and its pin assignment has
also been standardized. However, because of the need to use separate transmit
and receive pairs, two types of port pin assignments have developed: station
ports and hub ports (the difference is interchanging of the transmit and receive
pins in the connector). This permits to interconnect connectors of different types
by a cable wired pin-to-pin (straight cable). To interconnect ports of same type, a
crossed cable (a cable wired to interconnect the transmit pair at one end to the
receive pair at the other end) is necessary.
Interfaces operating on twisted pairs are designated in accordance with data

rate: 10Base-T (10 Mbps) or 100Base-TX (100 Mbps, where X is the number of
pairs). Interfaces that support both rates are identified as 10/100BaseT.
Ethernet Communication Protocol
Ethernet is used as a generic term for a LAN transmission technology that uses
Carrier Sense and Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) to enable
the transmission of short bursts of data (called frames) between two or more
stations (nodes). The simplest way to visualize the transmission technology is to
use the bus analogy. Therefore, all the users have permanent access to the full
bandwidth of the transmission medium but can only use it for short times, by
transmitting short data bursts. Each data burst has a fixed structure, called a
frame. The frame structure is explained below. The connection point of each user
to the transmission media is called a node. For identification purposes, each LAN
node is assigned a unique number, called address.
Media Access Method
Media access is performed by means of the carrier sense, multiple access

protocol (CSMA) with collision detection (CD), defined by IEEE Standard 802.3.
The protocol defines three basic steps:
A node that wants to transmit checks that the LAN is free. If another node is
already transmitting, the node waits until the LAN is free.
When the LAN is free, the node starts transmission and sends its frame. Each
node has equal access rights, therefore the first node that starts transmitting
is the one that seizes the LAN.
When two nodes start transmitting at the same instant, a collision occurs. In
this case, the transmitting nodes will continue to transmit for some time, in
order to ensure that all transmitting nodes detected the collision (this is
called jamming). After the jamming period, all transmitting nodes stop the
transmission and wait for a random period of time before trying again. The
delay times are a function of collision numbers and random time delay,
therefore there is a good chance that an additional collision between these
nodes will be avoided, and the nodes will be able to transmit their messages.
The basic procedure described above has been developed for half-duplex
communication, because it declares a collision whenever data is received during a

local transmission. However, when using twisted pairs, separate pairs are used
for the transmit and receive directions. Therefore, each node is capable of
simultaneously transmitting and receiving (full-duplex operation), thereby
doubling the effective data rate on the LAN.
Modern Ethernet interfaces, designated 10/100BaseT, are also capable of

operation at the two basic rates, 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps. Therefore, the rate and
operating mode (half-duplex or full-duplex) are user-configurable options.
When connecting equipment from different vendors to a common LAN, four

operating modes are possible. These modes are listed below in ascending order
of capabilities:
Half duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
Full duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
Half duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
Full duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
To ensure interoperability (which practically means to select the highest transport

capability supported by all the equipment connected to the LAN), two approaches
can be used: manual configuration of each equipment interface, or automatic
negotiation (autonegotiation) in accordance with IEEE 802.3.
The autonegotiation procedure enables automatic selection of the operating

mode on a LAN, and also enables equipment connecting to an operating LAN to
automatically adopt the LAN operating mode (if it is capable of supporting that
mode).
When autonegotiation is enabled on all the nodes attached (or trying to attach)
to a LAN, the process is always successful. However, even if the nodes on an
operating LAN are manually configured for operation in a fixed mode, a
late-comer node with autonegotiation capability can still resolve the LAN
operating rate can be resolved, thereby enabling it to adopt the LAN rate. Under
these conditions, an autonegotiating node cannot detect the operating mode
(half or full duplex), and therefore they will default to half-duplex. Therefore, as a
practical configuration rule, do not enable the full-duplex mode without enabling
autonegotiation, except when all the nodes have been manually configured for
the desired operating mode (which may of course be full duplex).
Basic Ethernet Frame Structure
The frame transmitted by each node contains routing, management and error
correction information. For Ethernet LANs, the characteristics of frames are
defined by IEEE Standard 802.3.
Basic frame lengths can vary from 72 to 1526 bytes and have the typical
structure shown in Figure E-10.

Preamble. Each frame starts with a preamble of seven bytes. The preamble is
used as a synchronizing sequence for the interface circuits, and helps bit
decoding.
Start-Frame Delimiter (SFD) field consists of one byte. The SFD field
indicates where the useful information starts.
Medium-Access (MAC) Destination Address (DA) field consists of six bytes.

The MAC DA field carries the address of the destination node.
Medium-Access (MAC) Source Address (SA) field consists of six bytes. The
MAC SA field carries the address of the source node.
Note
In writing, MAC addresses are represented as 6 pairs of hexadecimal digits,
separated by dashes, for example, 08-10-39-03-2F-C3.
Length/Type field consists of two bytes that indicate the number of bytes
contained in the logical link control (LLC) data field. In most Ethernet protocol
versions, this field contains a constant indicating the protocol type (in this
case, this field is designated EtherType).
MAC Client Data field. The MAC client data field can contain 0 to 1500 bytes
of user-supplied data.
Padding field. The optional padding field contains dummy data, that is used
to increase the length of short frames to at least 64 bytes.
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) field contains four check bytes generated by a
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code. The FCS field is used to detect errors in
the data carried in the frame.
72 to 1526 Bytes
Frame
Preamble SFD MAC Destination MAC Source Length/Type MAC Client Data
Padding Check
Address Address
Bytes Sequence
(7 Bytes) (1 Byte) (6 Bytes) (6 Bytes) (2 Bytes) (0 to 1500 Bytes)
(4 Bytes)
Start Frame
Delimiter
Figure E-10. Basic Ethernet Frame Structure
Bridging
Communication between Nodes on Same LAN
Unlike IP addresses, a MAC address is unique and identifies a single physical port.
Therefore, two Ethernet nodes attached to the same LAN exchange frame directly,
by specifying the desired MAC destination address, together with the source MAC

address. The node that identifies its MAC address in the destination field can send
a response by copying the source address of the frame to the destination address
field.
Communication between Nodes on Different LANs
To enable nodes on different LANs to communicate, it is necessary to transfer

frames between the two LANs. The device used for this purpose is called MAC
bridge, or just bridge. Two types of bridges are used:
Local bridges, which have Ethernet ports attached to the two LANs. The
bridge control mechanism learns the nodes attached to each LAN by reading
the source MAC addresses of the frames generated by the nodes. When the
destination address of a frame is not on the LAN from which it was received,
the bridge transfers it to the other LAN.
Remote bridges, which are used in pairs. A basic remote bridge has one LAN
port and one WAN port. The WAN port communicates through a link with the
WAN port of the remote bridge connected to the desired remote LAN. In this
case, the traffic addressed to destinations not located on the local LAN is
transferred through the WAN link to the remote bridge.
Using Virtual Bridged LANs
VLAN can be used to provide separation between traffic from different sources
sharing the same physical transmission facilities, and provide information on the
relative priority the user assigns to each frame. The characteristics and use of
virtual LANs (VLANs) and of the MAC bridges capable of handling tagged frames
are defined in IEEE Standard 802.1Q.
VLANs are made possible by a slight modification to the Ethernet frame structure
shown in Figure E-10. The structure of an Ethernet frame with VLAN support is
shown in Figure E-11 (for simplicity, the figure does not include the preamble and
SFD fields).
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31
Destination MAC Address (DA)
Destination MAC Address (DA) Source MAC Address (SA)
Source MAC Address (SA)
Tag Protocol Identifier (8100) PRI 0 VLAN ID
EtherType (IP = 0800) Ethernet Payload (42 to 1500 Bytes)
Ethernet Payload
.
.
.
CRC
Figure E-11. Structure of Ethernet Frame with VLAN Support

Ethernet frames with VLAN support include a tag header immediately after the
source MAC address (therefore, such frames are also referred to as tagged
frames).
The tag header comprises 4 bytes:
Two bytes for the tag protocol identifier. For Ethernet-encoded tags in
accordance with IEEE 802.1Q. These bytes carry the equivalent of 8100.
Priority (PRI) specified by the user (3 bits: 7 is the highest priority and 0 is
the lowest priority).
One bit for the canonical format indicator (always 0 as shown in Figure E-11).
VLAN ID (12 bits), used to indicate the VLAN to which the frame belongs.
Transporting IP Traffic over Ethernet
Encapsulation in Ethernet Frames
IP traffic is carried in the LLC data field of the Ethernet frame (see Figure E-10).
This is called encapsulation. The EtherType value for the IP protocol is 0800.
Whenever possible, the whole IP packet (including the header) is inserted in one
Ethernet frame. However, IP packets can be much longer than the LLC data field
of Ethernet frames: in this case, it is necessary to fragment the IP packets in
accordance with the desired size of data field, and transfer each fragment in a
separate frame. The receiving IP host then reassembles the original packet from
its fragments.
Note
TDMoIP packets are never fragmented. This is not necessary anyway, because a
TDMoIP packet is relatively short.
ARP Protocol
When sending IP packets over Ethernet, it is necessary to determine the MAC

address of the destination, to insert it in the Ethernet destination MAC address
of the packet. Actually, this is necessary for any physical transmission technology
that is not limited to point-to-point topologies.

This is performed by means of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol), part of the
IP suite of protocols. ARP is used to generate a look-up table that translates IP
addresses to MAC addresses for any transmission technology. The translation is
done only for outgoing IP packets, because this is when the IP header and the
Ethernet header are created.
The ARP table contains one row for each IP host: each row has two columns, one
listing the IP address and the other listing the corresponding MAC (Ethernet)
address. When translating an IP address to an Ethernet address, the table is
searched for the row corresponding to the destination IP address, and the
corresponding Ethernet address is then found in the same row.
Whenever a packet must be sent to a new IP destination, that is, a destination

whose MAC address is not known, the IP host sends an ARP request packet,
listing its own IP address and MAC address, the destination IP address, but no
destination MAC address. When the packet reaches the destination address
(using the IP routing process), the destination returns an ARP response packet, in
which its own MAC address field is filled. The packet eventually returns to the
sender, thereby providing the missing information.
The structure of ARP packets is shown in Figure E-12.
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31
Hardware Address Type Protocol Address Type

(Ethernet = 1) (IP = 2048)
Length of Hardware Length of Protocol Operation:

(MAC) Address Field Address Field ARP Request =1
(Ethernet = 6 Bytes) (IP = 4 Bytes) ARP Response =2
Source MAC Address (Bytes 0 through 3)
Source MAC Address (Bytes 4, 5) Source IP Address (Bytes 0, 1)
Source IP Address (Bytes 2, 3) Destination MAC Address (Bytes 0, 1)
Destination MAC Address (Bytes 2 through 5)
Destination IP Address (Bytes 0 through 3)
Figure E-12. Structure of ARP Packets
AAL5 CPCS PDU Fields
An LA-110 unit with LAN (Ethernet) port supports transfer of Ethernet traffic
over the ATM network using the AAL5 layer, in accordance with RFC 1483
(multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM). The Ethernet frames are transferred
using LLC-SNAP encapsulation. All the Ethernet traffic is transferred over a single
connection, irrespective of the MAC addresses of the frames.
Figure E-13 shows the structure of the AAL5 CPCS PDU payload field used to carry
Ethernet frames using the LLC-SNAP encapsulation method.

AAL5 CPCS-PDU (with LLC-SNAP Field) Payload
DSAP SSAP Control OUI PID Destination Remainder of LAN

Padding
(AA) (AA) (03) 00-80-C2 MAC Address MAC Frame FCS
(00 as
required)
(1B) (1B) (1B) (3B) (2B) (6B) (4B)
LLC SNAP
Header Header
Only when CRC
use is enabled
Figure E-13. Structure of Payload Field of AAL5 CPCS PDU Frame
The payload field includes the original LLC and SNAP headers. The PID field in the
SNAP header can assume two values:
0001 (hexa) to indicate the bridged IEEE 802.3 protocol, with end-to-end
transmission of the FCS field of the Ethernet frame.
0007 (hexa) to indicate the bridged IEEE 802.3 protocol, without end-to-end
transmission of the FCS field.
The LA-110 supports both FCS transmission options, the selection being made by
the user.
After the SNAP header, the AAL5 CPCS PDU includes optional padding bytes (0
through 47, as required to ensure that the length of the payload field is an
integer multiple of 48 bytes (the ATM cell payload length), the destination MAC
address and then the other parts of the MAC frame (see figure C-10). When the
PID is 0001, the AAL5 CPCS PDU also includes the 4 bytes of the LAN frame FCS
field.
E.8 Circuit Emulation over ATM
The circuit emulation service (CES) enables the transmission of constant bit rate
(CBR) data over the ATM network, in accordance with the ATM Forum Circuit
Emulation Service Interoperability Specification. CES uses AAL1.
LA-110 supports circuit emulation service through the fractional E1 user port,
using AAL1 in accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.363. In addition, analog voice traffic
(received through FXS interfaces) can also be supported when AAL1 is used.
LA-110 supports only the structured data transfer (SDT) service mode.
Figure E-14 illustrates the structure of the ATM protocol stack used for CBR
transmission using AAL1.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Circuit Emulation over ATM E-51

CBR Data Stream
Service Interface
AAL1 CS
AAL1 SAR
ATM Layer
UNI
UNI
Physical Layer
Figure E-14. ATM Protocol Stack for CBR Transmission
Protocol Stack
A general description of the ATM protocol stack structure is given in the
Characteristics of ATM Service section above. The protocol stack for the CBR
service includes the following layers:
Service Interface. The service interface is the user port, and its main function
is the processing of the E1 data stream received from users equipment.
The next layer is the AAL1 convergence sublayer, followed by the AAL1 SAR
sublayer.
The lower layers (ATM layer and UNI physical layer).
The following sections explain the processes, which are specific to the AAL1
protocol stack.
Processing of E1 Data Stream
The processing of the incoming E1 data stream includes:
Physical layer processing:
Regeneration of incoming signal and recovery of the associated timing.
Transmission of E1 signal to the line.
Detection of physical layer defects and failures, support for test

loopbacks, and collection of physical layer performance statistics.
Port timing. The service interface also handles the port timing.
In particular, the service interface generates the transmit-to-user timing. This

timing is locked to the timing recovered from the receive signal at the remote
end of the CBR link, otherwise bit integrity will be lost. This function is also
supported by the CS sublayer.
E-52 Circuit Emulation over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Synchronization to the frame and super-frame structure, in accordance with

the selected E1 framing mode.
Retrieval of payload data from the specified timeslots. For each connection
defined on the user port, the LA-110 enables the user to select the timeslots
whose data is to be transmitted to the remote end through the ATM
connection.
When the connection to the ATM network is also made through an E1 link, it
is not possible to transmit the whole payload, because some of the main link
bandwidth is reserved for ATM overhead: the maximum number of timeslots
that can be transmitted is 25 for E1 uplinks, and 18 f uplinks.
Signaling information processing. The user can select between two modes:
Basic (non-CAS) service: in this mode, no special processing of signaling

information is performed. Signaling information may be transmitted in a
separate timeslot (for example, using CCS - common channel signaling).
CAS mode: in this mode, the service interface processes the timeslot 16
or "robbed-bit" signaling information associated with the connection
timeslots, and transfers it using AAL1 services.
The user payload data, and optionally the associated signaling data, is transferred
to the AAL1 convergence sublayer.
Processing at the AAL1 SAR Sublayer

In the transmit direction, the AAL1 SAR sublayer receives data from the AAL1
convergence sublayer in CS PDUs (CS protocol data units) containing 47 bytes,
and generates 48-byte SAR PDUs which are transferred to the ATM layer. The
reverse is performed in the receive direction.
The user bytes are aligned with the ATM cell bytes.
The SAR PDU is formed by adding a SAR header of one byte to the 47 bytes of a
CS PDU. The SAR header contains the following information:
Sequence number (SN) field (four bits). The sequence number is in the range
of 0 to 7, and it enables keeping track of the cell order at the receiving end.
This enables the detection of lost, or misinserted cells.
In addition, one bit indicates whether a CS sublayer is present (for structured

data transfer, the use of the CS sublayer is mandatory).
Sequence number protection (SNP) field (four bits). The SNP field includes
three bits that carry a checksum generated by a third-order CRC code
(CRC-3), followed by an even parity bit. The parity bit improves the error
detection capabilities. Since some equipment does not support the parity bit,
the user can disable its use.
The SNP field enables the correction of single errors in the SAR header, and
the detection of two errors.

Processing at the AAL1 Convergence Sublayer

The AAL1 functionality is defined in ITU-T Rec. I.363.1. The function of the CS
sublayer is to enable the transmission of fixed-size data blocks (where each block
consists of an integer number of bytes), in the payload fields of ATM cells, while
detecting missing or misinserted cells, and providing source clock recovery.
The start of each block is indicated by a special type of pointer, the AAL1
structure pointer. The AAL1 structure pointer consists of one byte and is inserted
in the first byte of the payload field in each even cell (0, 2, 4, 6) in the eight-cell
sequence defined by means of the SN field. It indicates the offset, in bytes,
between the end of the pointer field, and the beginning of the next structured
block in the 93-byte payload part.
The AAL1 convergence sublayer inserts the data from the service interface in
CS-PDUs (CS protocol data units) containing 47 bytes. Therefore, the payload
field of cells carrying the AAL1 structure pointer may include a maximum of
46 payload bytes.
CS PDU structure depends on the service type: basic (non-CAS) or CAS service.
Basic Service CS PDU
For the basic service, the CS PDU includes only payload data. The data block is
formed by collecting N bytes (one from each timeslot to be carried by the
connection) from each frame. N is the data rate multiplier, N 64 kbps, in the
range of 1 through 26 for E1 uplinks and 1 through 18 uplinks.
Figure E-15 shows a typical data block for N = 3.

..
.
.
AAL1 Structure Pointer First Time Slot in Current Frame
Second Time Slot in Current Frame
Third Time Slot in Current Frame
..
.
.
Figure E-15. Basic Service - Data Block Structure
Note that the time required to collect enough timeslots to fill a cell depends on
the number of timeslots being carried. At the minimum data rate supported by
the user port (128 kbps), corresponding to two timeslots per block, the time
required to fill a cell is approx. 3 msec. To enable the user to reduce this inherent
delay, the LA-110 enables specifying the number of payload bytes per cell: the
remaining cell bytes are then filled with padding bytes.
E-54 Circuit Emulation over ATM LA-110 Ver. 3.5

CAS CS PDU
For the CAS service, the CS PDU includes a payload data part and a signaling
substructure, used to carry the signaling information associated with the
connection timeslots.
The payload part of the data block has the length of one multiframe (that is,
16 E1 frames).
The signaling substructure contains the signaling bits associated with the
payload timeslots for the current multiframe. With 256S framing, the
signaling substructure contains four signaling bits (A, B, C, D) for each
payload timeslot.
Padding bits (0s) are used to fill fields which do not carry signaling payload.
Figure E-16 shows a typical data block for N = 3 when 256S framing is used.
First Transported Timeslot of Frame

Second Transported Timeslot of Frame
AALI Pointer
Third Transported Timeslot of Frame
First Frame of Multiframe
Second Frame of Multiframe

.
.
.
. .
. .
.
. ..
Last Frame of Multiframe
Signaling Bits for
First Transported
Timeslot ABCDABCD
Signaling Substructure
ABCD
Signaling Bits for Padding Signaling Bits for

Third Transported Second Transported
Timeslot Timeslot
Figure E-16. CAS Service - Data Block Structure
Dynamic Bandwidth Utilization (DB-CES)
The principles governing the building of the data block structures described above
for the CAS service can be extended to support additional signaling capabilities.
One of the most important applications is dynamic bandwidth utilization over CES
(DB-CES).
To enable dynamic bandwidth utilization in an ATM network, it is necessary to

detect which timeslots of a given TDM trunk are active and which are inactive.

When an inactive state is detected in a specific timeslot, the timeslot is dropped

from the next ATM structure and the bandwidth it was using may be reutilized for
other services. This method may be applied utilizing any method of timeslot
activity detection, e.g., CAS, CCS.
This approach preserves the CES transmission characteristics while enabling

efficient utilization of the available ATM link bandwidth.
E.9 SNMP Environment
The SNMP management functions of the LA-110 are provided by an internal

SNMP agent.
SNMP management communication uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), a

connectionless-mode transport protocol, part of the suite of protocols of the
Internet Protocol (IP).
Note
Telnet management uses the TCP protocol over IP for management
communication. After a Telnet session is started, the management interface is
similar to that used for the supervision terminal.
SNMP Principles
The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command/response polling

protocol: all the management traffic is initiated by the SNMP-based network
management station (except for trap messages), which addresses the managed
entities in its management domain. Only the addressed managed entity answers
the polling of the management station.
The managed entities include a function called an SNMP agent, which is

responsible for interpretation and handling of the management station requests
to the managed entity, and the generation of properly-formatted responses to
the management station.
SNMP Operations
The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations:
getRequest Command for retrieving specific management

information from the managed entity. The
managed entity responds with a getResponse
message.
getNextRequest Command for retrieving sequentially specific
management information from the managed
entity. The managed entity responds with a
getResponse message.
E-56 SNMP Environment LA-110 Ver. 3.5

setRequest Command for manipulating specific management

information within the managed entity. The
managed entity responds with a setResponse
message.
trap Management message carrying unsolicited
information on extraordinary events (e.g., alarms)
reported by the managed entity.
Management Information Base
The management information base (MIB) includes a collection of managed

objects. A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed, such
as a performance statistics value.
The MIB includes the definitions of relevant managed objects. Various MIBs can be
defined for various management purposes, types of equipment, etc.
An objects definition includes the range of values and the access rights:
Read-only Object value can be read, but cannot be set.

Read-write Object value can be read or set.
Write-only Object value can be set, but cannot be read.
Not accessible Object value cannot be read, nor set.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 SNMP Environment E-57

MIB Structure
The MIB has an inverted tree-like structure, with each definition of a managed
object forming one leaf, located at the end of a branch of that tree. Each leaf in
the MIB is reached by a unique path, therefore by numbering the branching points,
starting with the top, each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of numbers.
The formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is provided in
a special standardized format, called Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1).
Since the general collection of MIBs can also be organized in a similar structure,
under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board (IAB), any parameter
included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined.
To provide the flexibility necessary in a global structure, MIBs are classified in

various classes (branches), one of them being the experimental branch, and
another the group of private (enterprise-specific) branch. Under the private
enterprise-specific branch of MIBs, each enterprise (manufacturer) can be
assigned a number, which is its enterprise number. The assigned number
designates the top of an enterprise-specific sub-tree of non-standard MIBs.
Within this context, RAD has been assigned the enterprise number 164.
Therefore, enterprise MIBs published by RAD can be found under
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.
MIBs of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for
Comment (RFC) document. In addition, MIBs are also often assigned informal
names that reflect their primary purpose. Enterprise-specific MIBs are published
and distributed by their originator, which is responsible for their contents.
Enterprise-specific MIBs supported by RAD equipment, including the LA-110, are

available in ASN.1 format from the RAD Technical Support Department.
Management Domains Under SNMP

SNMP enables, in principle, each management station that knows the MIBs
supported by a device to perform all the management operations available on
that device. However, this is not desirable in practical situations, so it is
necessary to provide a means to delimit management domains.
SNMP Communities
To enable the delimitation of management domains, SNMP uses communities.
Each community is identified by a name, which is a case-sensitive alphanumeric
string defined by the user (the LA-110 SNMP agents support community names
of up to 8 characters).
Any SNMP entity (this term includes both managed entities and management
stations) can be assigned by its user community names.

Access Restriction Using SNMP Communities

In general, SNMP agents support two types of access rights:
Read-only: the SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest and
getNextRequest commands from management stations which have the same
read-only community name.
Read-write: the SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands
received from a management station with the same write community name.
For each SNMP entity it is possible to define a list of the communities which are
authorized to communicate with it, and the access rights associated with each
community (this is the SNMP community name table of the entity).
For example, the SNMP community name table of the SNMP agent of the LA-110
can include three community names.
In accordance with the SNMP protocol, the SNMP community of the originating
entity is sent in each message.
When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity, first it checks the
originators community: if the community name of the message originator differs
from the community name specified for that type of message in the agent, the
message it discarded (SNMP agents of managed entities report this event by
means of an authentication failure trap).
LA-110 Communities
The LA-110 SNMP agent can recognize the following community types:
Read SNMP community that has read-only authorization, i.e., the

SNMP agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest
commands from management stations using that community.
Write SNMP community that has read-write authorization, i.e., the
SNMP agent will also accept setRequest commands from
management stations using that community.
Trap SNMP community which the SNMP agent will send within trap
messages.
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 SNMP Environment E-59


Index
service category, 4-11

8 ATMoPSN, 1-7
802.1p, 4-20, 4-28, 4-129, 4-131
B
A Baud rate, 3-3
AAL1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-25, 1-33, E-25 Block diagram, 1-21
E1, 4-60 Boot
FXS, 4-74 Boot Manager, C-9, D-2
general parameters, 4-19 downloading software via TFTP, C-11
serial, 4-86 downloading software via XMODEM, C-10
AAL2, 1-2, 1-5, 1-10, 1-16, 1-25, E-26 Bridge, 1-11, 1-27
E1, 4-66 adding static MAC address, 4-103
FXS, 4-77 binding ports, 4-99
general parameters, 4-21 selecting mode, 4-101
ISDN, 4-72 VLAN membership, 4-103
AAL5, 1-2, 1-25, E-26 VLAN table, 4-103
ABR, E-23 VLAN-aware, 1-27, 4-101
ADSL, 1-1, 1-24, 2-4 VLAN-unaware, 1-28, 4-100
coding methods, E-17 WAN interface, 4-97
connector pinout, A-3 Bundle
modulation method, E-12 creating, 4-58
operating environment, E-12
physical layer, 4-32 C
physical layer monitoring, 6-6
Cables
Alarms, 1-46
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-4, 2-6, 2-8, A-7
clearing log, 6-2
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT, 2-6, 2-9, A-2
displaying log, 6-2
CAS
list of, B-1
signaling, 4-24
masking, 4-5
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-4, 2-6
Applications
AAL1 stream, 1-13 CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-4
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-8
fractional E1, 1-14
Frame Relay over ATM, 1-15 CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, A-7
IP router, 1-12 CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT, 2-6, 2-9, A-2
LAN services, 1-11 CBR, 4-10, E-22
leased line services over ATM, 1-12 CDV, 1-26, E-23
typical, 1-10 CES, 4-61, 4-62, E-51
VoDSL over LES, 1-16 CESoPSN, 1-7
ATM CID
adaptation layers, 1-2, 1-25, E-24 FXS, 4-79
ISDN, 4-73, 4-74
cell structure, E-19
CLIM, 4-89
circuit emulation, E-51
Clock
CoS, 1-32, 4-130
E1, 4-30
defining address for management connection, 4-
modes, 1-40
6
NTR, 4-30
jitter buffer, 1-26
selecting, 4-29
logical layer, 4-50
CLR, E-23
monitoring (logical layer), 6-19
Communities, 4-2
network structure, E-19
ConfiguRAD, 1-42, 3-3, 3-6
OAM, 1-26
choosing options, 3-9
downloading configuration, C-5
physical layer, 4-32
downloading software, C-2
service categories, 4-10, E-22
logging out, 3-10
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 I-1

Index Installation and Operation Manual
system requirements, 1-42, 3-6 clock, 4-30

uploading configuration, C-7 connecting cable, 2-8
Continuity check, 4-10 connector pinout, A-7
Control port connector types, 2-4
configuring, 4-14 CRC-4, E-4
connecting cable, 2-9 frame format, E-2
pinout, A-1, A-2 Frame Relay, 4-67
CoS, 1-32, 4-21, 4-28, 4-130, 4-132 line signal, E-1
CRC-4, 1-5, 1-37, 1-45, 1-48, E-2, E-4 monitoring (logical layer), 6-31
bit 1, E-3 monitoring (physical layer), 6-8
configuring (network E1), 4-41 multiframe, E-3
configuring user E1, 4-43 network, 1-24, 2-4
CTD, 1-26, E-23 operating environment, E-1
payload encoding, E-4
D physical layer (network), 4-39
physical layer (user), 4-41
Data port
TDM over ATM (AAL1), 4-60
adding AAL1 connection, 4-86
TDM over ATM (AAL2), 4-66
adding connection, 4-85
timeslot 0, E-3
adding Frame Relay connection, 4-89
troubleshooting, 6-59
adding pseudowire connection, 4-94
UNI, 1-39, 4-42
connecting cable, 2-9
Egress
connector pinout, A-4
MPLS label, 4-134
connector types, 2-4
PW label, 4-138
tunnel, 4-136
monitoring (physical layer), 6-14
Enclosure
3D, 1-19
Database
front panel, 3-1
initializing, 4-149, D-1
rear panel, 1-20, 2-6
DB-CES, 4-61, 4-64, E-55
ESD, 2-2, 2-9
Default gateway, 4-118, E-38
Defaults
restoring, 4-149 F
DHCP, 1-30, 4-111 FAQs, 6-60
allocation table, 4-113 FECN, 4-92
relay, E-35 Firewall, 1-3, 1-29, 4-125
server, E-35 clearing log, 6-3
Diagnostics, 1-9 displaying log, 6-2
alarms, B-1 rules, 4-125
IMA loopback, 6-55 Frame Relay, 1-33
loopbacks, 1-46, 6-50 adding connection over E1/T1, 4-67
OAM loopbacks, 6-55 adding data connection, 4-89
ping, 6-56, E-39 configuring physical layer parameters, 4-46
DLCI interworking modes, 1-34
configuring, 4-69, 4-90 PDU structure, E-40
number of, 1-33 FRoPSN, 1-7
types of, E-40 FXS, 1-35, 2-3
DNS AAL statistics, 6-37
relay, 4-114 adding connection (AAL1), 4-74
DNS relay, 1-3, 1-29 adding connection (AAL2), 4-77
Downloading configuration CBR statistics, 6-36
via HTTP, C-8 configuring signaling, 4-79
via TFTP, C-4 connector pinout, A-7
Downloading software logical layer, 4-74
via HTTP, C-7 monitoring (logical layer), 6-36
via TFTP, C-2 monitoring (physical layer), 6-11
via XMODEM, C-10 physical layer, 4-45
DSCP, 4-20, 4-28, 4-130, 4-132 PSTN parameters, 4-79
DSP, 1-40 signaling, 1-35
troubleshooting, 6-59
E
E1, 1-36, 2-4 H
adding connection (AAL1), 4-60 HDLCoPSN, 1-7
adding connection (AAL2), 4-66 Host, 4-13
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-4, 2-8 HTTP
I-2 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Index
downloading configuration, C-8 alarms, 6-2

downloading software, C-7 firewall, 6-2
uploading configuration, C-8 Loopbacks, 1-46
IMA, 6-55
I local data, 6-51
local user, 6-53
ILMI address, 4-12
OAM, 6-55
IMA, 1-25
remote data, 6-52
configuration, 4-57
remote network, 6-50
diagnostics, 6-55
remote remote data, 6-54
loopback, 6-55
remote user, 6-52
Ingress
MPLS label, 4-134 M
PW label, 4-138 MAC address
tunnel, 4-134 adding, 4-103
IP precedence, 4-20, 4-28, 4-130, 4-131 Management, 1-7, 1-42
ISDN, 1-35, 2-3 adding NMS, 4-3
adapter cable, A-6 authentication, 1-43
adding connection (AAL2), 4-72 communities, 4-2
CID, 4-73 ConfiguRAD, 3-3
connecting cable, 2-9 configuration alternatives, 3-3
connector pinout, A-6 configuration sequence, 4-1
connector type, 2-5 configuring device information, 4-2
logical layer, 4-72 connection, 2-10
monitoring (logical layer), 6-33 dedicated VCC, 4-7
monitoring (physical layer), 6-9 defining ATM address, 4-6
physical layer, 4-45 host, 4-13
troubleshooting, 6-59 ILMI address, 4-12
plug & play, 1-8, 3-10
J RADIUS, 1-43
Web, 1-42, 3-6
Jitter buffer, 1-26
MBS, E-23
configuring, 4-19, 4-27
MDCR, E-23
MDIX, 1-2, 1-26
L Menus
Label ADSL (Physical Layer), 4-33
MPLS, 4-134 ATM (Logical Layer), 4-51
PW, 4-138 ATM (Physical Layer), 4-32
LAN ATM Address, 4-7
bridge, 1-2, 1-27, 4-97, 4-103 Bridge Parameters (VLAN-Unaware), 4-100
connecting cable, 2-9 Bridge Port (VLAN-Aware), 4-102
connector pinout, A-4 Bridge Port (VLAN-Unaware), 4-100
connector type, 2-5 Change Password, 4-17
deleting static MAC address, 4-103 Clock, 4-29
DHCP, 1-30 Community, 4-3
DNS relay, 1-3, 1-29 Control Port, 4-15
firewall, 1-3, 4-125 Date & Time, 4-149
IP router, 1-3 Default Gateway, 4-119
logical layer, 4-96 Device Information, 4-2
MDIX, 1-2 DHCP Allocation Table, 4-113
monitoring (logical layer), 6-42 DHCP Pools, 4-112
monitoring (physical layer), 6-12 Egress Tunnel, 4-136
NAT, 1-31, 4-119 Encapsulation, 4-14
PAT, 1-31, 4-123 Firewall, 4-125
physical layer, 4-49 Firewall Rules, 4-126
QoS, 1-32 Frame Relay (User Connection), 4-68
router, 1-28 FXS (AAL1 CES Logical Layer), 4-75
troubleshooting, 6-60 FXS (AAL2 Logical Layer), 4-78
VLAN handling, 1-3, 1-27 FXS (Physical Layer), 4-46
LEDs General, 4-137
LAN, 3-2 General Parameters (AAL2), 4-21
WAN, 3-2 General Parameters (Multiservice over ATM
LMI, 4-89 AAL1), 4-19
Log
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 I-3

General Parameters (Multiservice over PSN), 4- alarms, 6-1

27 ATM (logical layer), 6-19
General Traps Mask, 4-5 clearing counters, 6-3
Host, 4-13 data port (logical layer), 6-39
Host IF Configuration (Router), 4-106 data port (physical layer), 6-14
ILMI Address, 4-13 E1 (logical layer), 6-31
Ingress Tunnel, 4-135 E1 (physical layer), 6-8
Inventory, 4-147 FXS (logical layer), 6-36
Inventory (Physical Configuration), 4-148 FXS (physical layer), 6-11
Inventory (System Parameters), 4-147 IMA, 6-6
ISDN (Logical Layer), 4-73 ISDN (logical layer), 6-33
ISDN (Physical Layer), 4-45 ISDN (physical layer), 6-9
LAN (Physical Layer), 4-49 LAN (logical layer), 6-42
LAN IF Configuration (Bridge), 4-97 LAN (physical layer), 6-12
LAN IF Configuration (Router), 4-105 OAM, 6-23
Main, 4-1 SHDSL, 6-6
Management VCC, 4-8 system, 6-1
Manager List, 4-4 T1 (logical layer), 6-31
map of, 3-13 T1 (physical layer), 6-8
Mapping (802.1p), 4-131 MPLS, 4-143
Mapping (DSCP), 4-132 egress tunnel, 4-136
Mapping (IP Precedence), 4-131 ingress tunnel, 4-134
Mapping (TOS), 4-131 label range, 4-134
Match & Set Pairs, 4-129 Multiframe, E-3
MPLS Label Range, 4-134
NAT, 4-120 N
NAT (Transparent), 4-120
NAT, 1-31, 4-119, E-35
Network E1 (Physical Layer), 4-40
dynamic, 4-122
PAT (Other Protocol), 4-124
single, 4-122
PAT (TCP), 4-124
static, 4-122
Physical Layer, 4-31
transparent, 4-123
PSN Parameters (MPLS), 4-143
types of, 4-121
PSN Parameters (UDP/IP), 4-144
NMS
PSTN, 4-80
adding, 4-3
PW General Parameters, 4-142
NTR, 4-30
PW Label Range, 4-138
PW Quick Setup, 4-139
RADIUS Client Parameters, 4-115 O
Routing Table, 4-118 OAM, E-26
Serial (AAL1 Logical Layer), 4-86 cell types, E-27
Serial (Frame Relay Logical Layer), 4-90 loopbacks, 6-55
Serial (Physical Layer), 4-47 monitoring, 6-23
Serial (Pseudowire Logical Layer), 4-94 selecting type, 4-20, 4-22, 4-27
Service Parameters (ATM VC/VP 1/N to 1 PW), 4-
145 P
Service Parameters (CESoPSN PW), 4-146
Service Parameters (HDLC PW), 4-145 Password, 3-4, 4-16
Service Parameters (TDMoIP PW), 4-146 PAT, 1-31, 4-123, E-36
SHDSL (Physical Layer), 4-36 PBR, 4-128
Static MAC Address, 4-104 PCR, E-23
Static MAC Addresses Table, 4-104 Ping, 6-56, E-39
Static Routing, 4-116 Plug & play, 1-8, 1-44, 3-10, 4-7
Static Routing Table, 4-117 Ports
TDM over ATM (CES User Connection), 4-62 ADSL, 1-1, 1-24, 2-4
Timeslot Table, 4-59 analog voice, 1-4, 1-35
Traffic Classes (ATM CoS), 4-133 available combinations, 1-6
Traffic Classes (WFQ), 4-132 data, 1-4, 1-32, 1-33, 2-4
User Bundle (Logical Layer), 4-59 E1, 1-36, 2-4, A-7
User E1 (Physical Layer), 4-41 IMA, 1-25
User T1 (Physical Layer), 4-43 ISDN, 1-4, 1-35, 2-5
VLAN Member, 4-103 LAN, 1-2, 1-26, 2-5
WAN IF Configuration (Router), 4-108 network E1, 1-24
MIB, E-57 SHDSL, 1-1, 1-22, 2-4
Monitoring T1, 1-39, 2-4, A-8
ADSL, 6-6 WAN, 1-1, 1-22
I-4 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Installation and Operation Manual Index
Power WAN interface, 4-107

connecting cable, 2-10
connector pinout, A-8 S
external power supply, 2-3, 2-11
SAToP, 1-7
internal power supply, 2-3, 2-10
SCR, E-23
Pseudowire, 1-34
Shaping
adding data connection, 4-94
configuring, 4-51
ATMoPSN, 1-7
hardware, 4-52
CESoPSN, 1-7
software, 4-52
FRoPSN, 1-7
SHDSL, 1-1, 1-22, 2-4
general description, 1-6
HDLCoPSN, 1-7
modulation method, E-10
SAToP, 1-7
TDMoIP, 1-7
PSTN, 4-79
attenuation type, 4-82
typical ranges, 1-24
cadence ring, 4-84
Signaling
digit parameters, 4-84
CAS, 4-24
duration, 4-81
FXS, 1-35, 4-79
general parameters, 4-80
SNMP
pulse duration, 4-83
communities, 4-2, E-58
rate type, 4-82
MIB, E-57
PW
ATMoPSN, 1-7
Statistics, 1-9, 1-45
CESoPSN, 1-7
ATM layer, 1-45
FRoPSN, 1-7
clearing, 6-3
general description, 1-6
data, 1-45
general parameters, 4-141
E1, 1-45
HDLCoPSN, 1-7
Ethernet, 1-45
label range, 4-138
T1, 1-45
PSN parameters (MPLS), 4-143
Superuser, 1-43, 3-4, 4-16
PSN parameters (UDP/IP), 4-144
System
quick setup, 4-139
restoring defaults, 4-149
SAToP, 1-7
service parameters, 4-145
TDMoIP, 1-7 T
timeout, 4-137 T1, 1-6, 1-39, 2-4
types of, 4-141 alarm conditions, E-9
Q Frame Relay, 4-67
line signaling, E-8
QoS, 1-32, 4-20, 4-28
classification method, 4-129
monitoring (physical layer), 6-8
configuring, 4-129
mapping mechanism, 4-21, 4-28, 4-129
signaling transfer, E-7
R TDM over ATM connection, 4-61
RADIUS, 1-43, 4-114 TDMoIP, 1-7
Reboot, 4-149 Technical support, 6-62
RM-33, 1-19 Telnet, 3-3
RM-33-2, 2-3, 2-6 Terminal
Router, 1-11, 1-28 baud rates, 3-3
default gateway, 4-118 choosing options, 3-5
DHCP, 4-111 configuring, 4-14
DNS relay, 4-114 downloading software, C-2, C-4
firewall, 4-125 ending session, 3-6
host interface, 4-105 uploading configuration, C-7
LAN interface, 4-105 TFTP
NAT, 4-119 downloading software, C-2, C-4
PAT, 4-123 preliminary configuration, C-1
policy-based routing, 4-128 Timeout
QoS, 4-129 PW, 4-137
RADIUS, 4-114 Timeslots
routing principles, E-36 assigning, 4-59
static routing, 4-115 timeslot 0, E-3
LA-110 Ver. 3.5 I-5

Timing via TFTP, C-7

modes, 1-40 User, 1-43, 3-4, 4-16
selecting, 4-29 User name, 3-4
system, 1-41
ToS, 4-20, 4-28, 4-130, 4-131 V
Troubleshooting, 6-57
VBR, 4-10, E-22
E1, 6-59
VLAN
FXS, 6-59
general information, E-48
ISDN, 6-59
membership, 4-103
LAN, 6-60
table, 4-103
Tunnel
egress, 4-136
ingress, 4-134 W
WFQ, 1-32, 4-21, 4-28, 4-130
U traffic class weights, 4-133
UBR, 4-10, E-23
UBR+, 4-10, E-23 X
UDP/IP, 4-144 XMODEM, C-10
Uploading configuration
via HTTP, C-8
I-6 LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Supplement
AC/DC Adapter
(AD) Plug
for DC Power Supply Connection
Note Ignore this supplement if the unit is AC-powered.
Certain units are equipped with a wide-range

AC/DC power supply. These units are equipped
with a standard AC-type 3-prong power input
connector located on the unit rear panel. This
power input connector can be used for both AC
and DC voltage inputs.
For DC operation, a compatible straight or
90-degree AC/DC Adapter (AD) plug for attaching Figure 1. Straight AD Plug
to your DC power supply cable is supplied with
your RAD product (see Figure 1 and Figure 2).
Connect the wires of your DC power supply cable
to the AD plug, according to the voltage polarity
and assembly instructions provided on page 2.
Figure 2. 90-Degree AD Plug
Caution
Prepare all connections to the AD plug before inserting it into the units power
connector.
Publication No. SUP-930-07/08 The Access Company

AC/DC Adapter (AD) Plug
To prepare the AD plug and connect it

to the DC power supply cable:
1. Loosen the cover screw on the bottom
of the AD plug to open it (see
Figure 3).
2. Run your DC power supply cable
through the removable cable guard
and through the open cable clamp.
3. Place each DC wire lead into the
appropriate AD plug wire terminal
according to the voltage polarity
mapping shown. Afterwards, tighten
the terminal screws closely.
4. Fit the cable guard in its slot and then
close the clamp over the cable.
Tighten the clamp screws to secure
the cable.
5. Reassemble the two halves of the AD
Figure 3. AD Plug Details
plug and tighten the cover screw.
6. Connect the assembled power supply
cable to the unit.
Note: You have to flip over the
non-90-degree AD plug type by
180 degrees to insert it into the unit.
After inserting it, verify that the blue
(negative) wire is connected to the
POWER and the brown (positive) wire is
connected to the RETURN.
Reversing the wire voltage polarity will not cause damage to the unit, but the
internal protection fuse will not function.
Warning Always connect a ground wire to the AD plugs chassis (frame) ground
terminal. Connecting the unit without a protective ground, or interrupting the
grounding (for example, by using an extension power cord without a
grounding conductor) can damage the unit or the equipment connected to it!
The AD adapter is not intended for field wiring.
2
Supplement
Drilling Template for Wall Installation
Front Panel
1 1
176 mm (6.92 in)
3 3
2 2
101.6 mm (4 in)
This panel is drawn to scale.
To drill the holes for a wall installation, tear this page out
of the manual or print it on letter-size paper (8.5"x11.0") and
hold it against the wall.
LEDs facing up - drill at 1.
LEDs facing down - drill at 2.
LEDs facing left - drill at 3.
377-901-02/06
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: +972-3-6458181, Fax +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250
E-mail: erika_y@rad.com, Web site: http://www.rad.com
Customer Response Form

RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation.
Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your
comments.
Thank you for your assistance!
Manual Name: LA-110 Ver. 3.5
Publication Number: 144-200-07/11
Please grade the manual according to the following factors:
Excellent Good Fair Poor Very Poor
Installation instructions
Operating instructions
Manual organization
Illustrations
The manual as a whole
What did you like about the manual?

Error Report
Type of error(s) or Incompatibility with product
problem(s): Difficulty in understanding text
Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)
Difficulty in finding needed information
Missing information
Illogical flow of information
Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)
Appearance
Other
Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing,
unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary.
Please add any comments or suggestions you may have.
You are: Distributor

End user
VAR
Other
Who is your distributor?
Your name and company:
Job title:
Address:
Direct telephone number and extension:
Fax number:
E-mail:
Publication No. 144-200-07/11
Order this publication by Catalog No. 803388
International Headquarters
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel. 972-3-6458181
Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail market@rad.com
North America Headquarters

900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel. 201-5291100
Toll free 1-800-4447234
Fax 201-5295777
E-mail market@rad.com
www.rad.com The Access Company

Product Manual LA110

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Product Manual LA110

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OPERATION MANUAL

The Access Company

International Headquarters North America Headquarters

24 Raoul Wallenberg Street 900 Corporate Drive

19992011 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 144-200-07/11

General Safety Practices

Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables

Ports Safety Status

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Canadian Emission Requirements

Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

Achtung Das vorliegende Gert fllt unter die Funkstrgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohngebieten

Afin de faciliter la rutilisation, le recyclage ainsi que d'autres formes de

Instructions gnrales de scurit

Mise la terre de protection : la cosse ou la borne marque devrait tre connecte

Manipuler des produits sous tension

Rgles gnrales de scurit

Assurez-vous que l'installation lectrique est conforme la rglementation locale.

Product Name: LA-110

Conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):

EMC EN 55022:2006 + Information technology equipment Radio disturbance

Tel Aviv, 14 June 2011

European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH

Address A coded representation of the origin or destination of data.

Analog A continuous wave or signal (such as human voice).

Balanced A transmission line in which voltages on the two conductors are

Bus A transmission path or channel. A bus is typically an electrical

Carrier A continuous signal at a fixed frequency that is capable of being

Channel A path for electrical transmission between two or more points.

Data Information represented in digital form, including voice, text,

Digital The binary (1 or 0) output of a computer or terminal. In data

E3 The European standard for high speed digital transmission,

Flow Control A congestion control mechanism that results in an ATM system

Interface A shared boundary, defined by common physical interconnection

Multiplexer At one end of a communications link, a device that combines

Network (1) An interconnected group of nodes. (2) A series of points,

Port The physical interface to a computer or multiplexer, for connection

Single Mode Describing an optical wave-guide or fiber that is designed to

T1 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mbps used in

Chapter 2. Installation and Setup

LA-110 Ver. 3.5 i

Management Connections ....................................................................................... 2-5

ii LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Configuring the Synchronous Data Port at the Physical Layer................................. 4-46

Chapter 5. Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications

LA-110 Ver. 3.5 iii

Configuring the Network Interface ........................................................................ 5-17

Chapter 6. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

iv LA-110 Ver. 3.5

Appendix D. Database Initialization

LA-110 Ver. 3.5 v

vi LA-110 Ver. 3.5

LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Overview 1-1

ATM Network Interface

1-2 Overview LA-110 Ver. 3.5

handle priority-tagged frames). Depending on the LA-110 position in the

LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Overview 1-3

Optional Data Port

Optional User Port

1-4 Overview LA-110 Ver. 3.5

connection to digital PBXs and other TDM equipment (multiplexers, digital

LA-110 Ver. 3.5 Overview 1-5

LAN port Supported Supported Supported Supported

Pseudowire (PW) Functionality